1 


OME  T  iCS 


LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  Of 
CALIFORNIA 

SAN  DIEGO 


* 

I 


ALPHABETS,    TABLES 

AND 

DIAGBAMS. 


i.  P. 


ALPHABETS. 


Stops 


THE  ENGLISH  ALPHA-BET. 

THE  CONSONANTS. 

wh 
w 

f 

V 


Liquids  - 


P 
b 

t 

d 

k 

g—  as  in  get,  egg 

m 

n 

ng     ,,  singer,  sink 

1 

r 


th —  as  in  £7nstle, 
dh       ,,      f/iii  , 

,,      seal,  hiss 
zeal,  his 


s 
z 
sh 
zh 

y 
h 


azure,  pleasure 


(      ch  =  t.  sh.  as  in  cftest.  fetch 
Composite    [       j=d)2hi    B     ^  ^ 

ni',  11',  1',  are  used  for  syllabic  in,  n,  I,  as  in  sizm',  ritn\ 
l)otV  (schism,  written,  bottle). 

n-g,  •*¥-&,  t-h,  d-h,  s-h,  z-h.  are  used  for  the  sounds  in  er?- 
yage,  bloiv~hole,  out-liouse,  blood-hound,  mishap  and  hogshead. 

Names  of  the  Consonants. 
They  are  called  pa,  ba,  ta,  da,  ka,  ga,  ma,  na,  nga,  la, 

ra,  and  so  on,  as  in  pa-rental,  Ita-zaar,  ta-boo,  Da-rius,  ca-lam- 
ity,  (ja-zcttc,  ma-ture,  na-tivity,  si-nge.(r\  la-mcnt,  ra-vinc 

C,  a  and  X. 

These  symbols  are  not  used  in  this  scheme,  except  c  in  tho 
combination  ch.  In  ordinary  spelling  c  is  used  for  k  or  s,  as  in 
cat,  cell ;  q  is  used  for  k,  as  in  quick  ;  and  x  is  used  for  km 
or  gz,  and  n.i  for  ksli,  as  in  box,  exist,  noxious. 


The  Vowels. 


111 


THE  VOWELS. 


Long. 

aa —  as  in  baa      •  « 

oe  „  boen  (burn) 

e  ,,  feri  (fairy) 

ey  „  feyt  (fate; 

iy  „  fiyt  (feet) 

6  „  Pol  (Paul) 

ow  „  powl  (pole) 

uw  ,,  puwl  (pool) 


Short. 

a  — 

as  in  atend(attend) 

03 

„     poeti  (putty) 

-w  ( 

3S 

„     poet  (pat) 

2  \ 

e 

„     pet 

to  ( 

i 

„     pit 

•r&      f 

0 

*  „     pot 

"      §      " 

o' 

,,     pilo'  (pillow1! 

PQ  2  ( 

u 

„     put 

ai —  as  in  taim  (time) 
au  ,,  laud  (loud) 
oi  ,,  noiz  (noise) 
yu  „  tyun  (tune) 


Diphthongs. 

ea —  as  in  bear 

ia          ,,     biar  (bier) 


oa         ,,     boar 

ua         ,,     buar  (boor) 

i'a  and  u'a  are  used  when  the  short  vowels  i  and  u  are  fol- 
lowed   by   a,   making  two  syllables,  as   in  pritVar,  influ'ans 

(prettier,  influence).     Of.  follower,  written  folo'ar. 

Names  of  the  Short  Vowels. 

They  are  called  a,  cet,  set,  et,  it,  ot,  short  o,  ut,  as  in  the 

key-words  attend,  putty,  pat,  pet,  pit,  pot,  pilloic,  put. 

Script  Forms. 

The  script  forms  of  x  and  «e  can  be  written  without  lifting 
the  pen,  thus  : — 


Accent. 

Accented  or  stressed  syllables  may  generally  be  known  by 
rule  ;  but  when  it  is  necessary  to  indicate  them  they  are  marked 
thus: — intend,  invest ;  or,  if  this  is  impracticable,  a  turned 
point  is  placed  before  the  accented  vowels,  thus : — inf'frmal, 
imp-otant. 


IV 


Alphabets. 


THE  FRENCH  ALPHABET. 


THE  CONSONANTS. 


Stops 


Liquids  J      n— as  in  regne  (reii) 


n§ 

'm— 

-  as  in  prism  e 

^ 

«i 

„     peuple 

i3 

V 

,,     autre 

'     u 

,,     buis 

\v 

,,      moi  (mwa) 

-2 

f 

1 

V 

p 

z 

o 
O 

ch 

„     chat  =  Eng.  sh 

j 

„     je  =  Eng.  zh 

k    y 

„      bien  (by£n) 

THE  VOWELS. 


Cral.  Nasal. 

a —  as  in  pate       a.i 

a        ,,      patte 

e        ,,      je 

e        ,,      pres       en 

e        ,,      ete 

i        ,,      fini 

an — as  in  pan 

<n         ,,     pnj,  bicn 


Oral.  Nasal. 

o —  as  in  homme   on 

6        ,,      drole 

ou      .,      tout 

eu      ,,      peur       cun 

eu      ,,      peu 

u        „      pu 

on — as  in  pcwt 
cun      ,,      un,  jcun 


All  the  vowels  may  be  long  or  short,  except  c  and  e,  which 
are  always  short. 

Long  vowels  are  written  thus  : — a : ,  i : . 


The  German  Alphabet. 


THE  GERMAN  ALPHABET. 


THE  CONSONANTS. 


P 

/     \v  —  as  in 

zidei 

b 

f 

t 

V 

Stops  (      d 

GO 

s 

k 

"£ 

z 

g 

2  t 

sh 

'  —  the  glottal  stop 

.5  ' 

zh 

m 

0 

c 

ic/i 

Q 

V 

n 

j       » 

Eng.  7/et 

4 
Liquids 

ng 
1 

ch        „ 

q      „ 

ac/z 
Wa^en 

r 

** 

r2  —  guttural  r 

THE  VOWELS. 


Long. 

ah  —  as  in  lahm 

Short. 

a  —  as  in  Lamm 

( 

ah 

„      mtihen 

e 

5? 

Gabe 

Front  j 

eh 
ill 

,,      geh 
,,      ihn 

Front  ( 

a 
i 

» 

J) 

Manner 
Sinn 

Back-  r 

oh 

,,      Sohn 

Back-    ( 

0 

J) 

Sonne 

round   (. 

uh 

,,      Kuh 

round    ( 

IT 

)) 

dumm 

Front-  C 

oh 

„      Sohne 

Front-  f 

O 

)) 

konnen 

round   (. 

iih 

,,      kiihn 

round    (. 

ii 

)) 

diinn 

Diphthongs. 
ai,  au,  eu,  as  in  Ei,  Naus,  lieu. 


VI 


bO 


O 
O 


o 

EC 


"3 


Vll 


CD 


& 


W) 


I 

fc 

o 
O 

o 


(£H 


PH 


6- 


Vlll 


PM 


PH 


•a® 
J  -2 

02     «3 


bO 


73 


o 
o 


w 


IX 


hD 


PH 


W 
o 

CO 


pa 

I 
O 


M 

-life  5 


I    1 

m  K 


PH 


CQ 


spinbyj 


H 
H 
o 

43 

=1 

'S< 

<D 

PH 

b 

3 

"ce 

M 

PH 

a 

o 

P4 

o 

Fti 

| 

fl 

B 
.p 

1 

Q 

O 

P4 

<D 

HH 

a 

pq 

a 

a 

g 

D 

^ 

O 

JJ 

O 

3       -^ 

o 

J^ 

Q 

1         Wv                 O 

PH 

P-l 

'  PH        P-< 

.  ,  -                r^            V.  ,  -s                 V.  Y  -•• 

<?            S             «                      a 

XI 


g 

CO 


1 

to 

H 

Q 

'3 

-t-> 

1 

a 

p 

"5 

C3 

g 

s 

0 

PH 

rt 

3 

p! 

o 

CD 

PH 

PH 

CD 

q 

H 

PH 

1 

Q 

O 

PH. 

CD 

i 

§ 

eS 

p. 

K 

CD 

'p. 

o 

W 

"3 

8 
o 

e3 

PH 

Q 

D 

o 

-n 

CD 

CD 

a 

•^ 

O     : 

g 

0 

O 

MOO                            d 

£            %          2               1 

?          ia                o 

Xll 


w 

o 

CO 


d 

1 

*T 

d 

H 

1 

d. 

CO 

•a 

So 

i 

M 

Q 

p 

o 
H 

d 

d 

d 

<B 

d 

•—  ' 

f3 

^  <~] 

d 

'•~^ 

•^ 

o 

:O 

& 

CO 

a 

£ 

^ 

Q 

to 

(3 

O 

M 

. 

S 

a 

ci 

a" 

c3 

pq 

Q 

O 

rt 

^ 

a 

a 

d 

<s 
d 
d 

M 

--3 

o 

CO 

0 

CO 

rS  O 


§ 

PL, 
O 


Xlll 


.g 

s 

p\ 

OB 

ft 

PR 

CD 

^ 

(D 

-(J 

1 

-t-= 

03 

Q 

*H 

PH 

*n 

§4 

t.-, 

PH 

S 

PH 

s 

*3 

s 

Q 

I 

5! 

d 

PR" 

o 

d 

§ 

d 

a 

CO 

a 

:O 

3 

PH 

^3 

PH 

M 

PH 

PR" 

d 

PR 

6 

PR 

-1-3 

g 

5 

| 

PH 

3 

BOUND. 

2 

^ 

g 
e 

PH 

I 

PR 

M 

(D 

^p 

rS 

*Pn 

CJ 

IM 

fa 

o 
« 

d 

*j 

a 

_ 

Q 

55 

PR 

• 

15 

£2 

<D 

S 

o 
C 
S 

a 
a 

^_ 

0 

o 
CO 

o  ; 

^ 

O 

PH 

'o 

d 

PR  ! 

£ 

0 

PH 

O 


- 

a 

o 


XIV 


Diagram*. 


I. 

a  Nose,  b  Hard  Palate,  c  Soft  Palate,  d  Mouth,  e  Tongue.  /Pharynx.  3  Hyoid 
Bone.  7i  Epiglottis,  i  Glottis,  fc  Vocal  Chord.  I  Thyroid  Cartilage,  in  Larynx, 
n  n  Cricoid  Cartilage,  o  Windpipe,  p  Gullet. 


Diagrams. 


xv 


II. 


III. 


Laryng  >seopic  view    of    the    Female  Laryngoscopic  view  of  the  Male  Glottis 

Glottis  in   the    delivery  of  a  Headnote        in  the  delivery  of  a  Low  Note, 
(ordinary  appearance) . 


IT. 


F.fQ) 


R(u)jy 

F.(eu),e'y 


Tongue 


V. 

Diagram  illustrating  the  formation  of  the  Ten  Principal  Vowels.    Rounded  Vowels 
are  enclosed  in  brackets. 


AN 

INTRODUCTION   TO   PHONETICS 

(ENGLISH,  FRENCH  AND  GERMAN) 

WITH 

•Rea&ing  Xessons  anfc  Bjercises 


LAURAj  SOAMES 

WITH  A  PREFACE  BY  DOROTHEA  BEALE 


Eontion 

SWAN    SONNENSCHEIN    &    CO. 
NEW  YOKK  :  MACMILLAN  &  CO. 

1891 


BUTLER  &  TANNF.E, 

THE  SBLWOOD  PBINTIMG  WORKS, 

FROMB,  AND  LONDON. 


PREFACE. 


Miss  So  AMES'S  book  will,  I  believe,  supply  a  want  much, 
felt  by  teachers  of  English  and  foreign  languages. 
There  are  learned  works  on  comparative  phonology,  but 
I  know  of  none  which  are  sufficiently  clear  and  simple 
to  put  into  the  hands  of  the  average  learner. 

The  main  purpose  of  the  book  is  to  give  shortly  and 
clearly  an  idea  of  the  mode  of  formation  of  the  articulate 
sounds  of  the  three  modern  languages  most  studied  in  our 
schools.  "When  the  teaching  is  systematized,  we  may 
hope  both  that  English  will  be  pronounced  with  a  purer 
accent,  and  that  a  good  pronunciation  of  foreign  tongues 
will  be  acquired  in  a  comparatively  short  time. 

The  task  has  almost  necessarily  involved  an  expose  of 
the  extraordinary  anomalies  of  English  spelling.  As  an 
educator,  I  am  earnestly  desirous  for  reform,  and  I  trust 
that  this  book  may  shorten  the  time  of  waiting.  Our 
spelling  is  one  of  the  greatest  hindrances  to  the  intelli- 
gent study  of  phonology,  without  which  that  of  philology 
is  almost  impossible  to  the  young,  since  the  same  sounds 
are  ever  masquerading  in  a  new  dress. 

The  phonetic  alphabet  made  use  of  is  so  simple  that  any 
one  can  read  it  after  half  an  hour's  study,  and  the  author 
has  judiciously  chosen  well-known  pieces  to  help  the  inex- 
perienced in  acquiring  facility. 

DOROTHEA  BEALE. 

Jan.,  1891.  Principal  of  the  Cheltenham  Ladies'  College. 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 


PART  I. 

INTRODUCTION  TO  ENGLISH,  FEENCH,  AND  GERMAN 
PHONETICS. 

PAGE 

Alphabets ii 

Tables vi 

Diagrams    . xiv 

Preface  by  Miss  Beale xix 

INTRODUCTION 1 

I.  The  Vocal  Organs  Described 8 

I!.  English  Sounds  Illustrated 11 

Consonants 11 

Long  Vowels 15 

Short  Vowels 19 

Diphthongs 22 

The  Letter  R 23 

III.  English  Analysis 30 

CONSONANTS.  Introductory 30 

Stops 31 

Liquids 33 

Continuants 35 

Composite  Consonants 38 

Syllabic  Consonants 39 

VOWELS.  Introductory 39 

Five  Principal  Vowels,  aa,  ey,  iy,  ow,  uw  .  .  .  .41 
Remaining  Long  Vowels,  e,  6,  oe  .  .  .  .  .44 

SHOET  VOWELS.  Introductory 45 

Short  Front  Vowels,  a,  e,  i 46 

Short  Back-round  Vowels,  o,  u,  ce. 46 

Long  and  Short  Vowels  compared 47 

Narrow  and  Wide  Vowels 48 

UNACCENTED  VOWELS.  Introductory 49 

The  Obscure  Vowel  a 50 

Unaccented  i  and  i' 51 

Short  o' 52 

e'  and  u' 53 

DIPHTHONGS,  ai,  au,  oi,  yu 53 


xxii  Contents. 

PAGE 

IV.  English  Synthesis 55 

E  combined  with  Vowels .55 

Doubled  Sounds 62 

Consonants  Combined 63 

Inflections 63 

Accent 66 

Quantity 70 

Syllable  Division 72 

Intonation           .........  74 

VARIABLE  WORDS.     Usages  of  different  speakers        .         .         .76 

Weak  Words 78 

Unaccented  Syllables 80 

A  Syllable  More  or  Less 82 

Spelling  of  Variable  Words 84 

V.  Loan  Words  used  in  English 86 

Special  Symbols  Eequired 86 

The  Most  Necessary  Foreign  Sounds          .         .         .         .87 
List  of  Loan  Words 88 

VI.  Hints  for  Teachers 101 

Method  Eecommended        .......  101 

Common  Mistakes Ill 

Key  to  the  Spelling  Lessons 115 

Key  to  the  Exercises 117 

VII.  French  Analysis 120 

CONSONANTS 120 

Stops 121 

Liquids 121 

Continuants  .........  124 

VOWELS      ...........  126 

Open  Vowels  in  pate,  patte  ......  126 

Front  Vowels  in  pres,  ete,fini 127 

Back-round  Vowels  in  homme,  drole,  tout  ....  128 

Front-round  Vowels  in  peur,  pen,  pu 129 

Nasal  Vowels  in  pan,  pin,  pont,  un 130 

Unaccented  Vowels  in  le,  maison,  comment  .  .  .  131 

VIII.  French  Synthesis 133 

Accent 133 

Quantity 135 

Intonation 137 

Syllables 137 

Liaison       ....'...         ...  138 

Elision 139 

How  Stops  are  Combined 140 

Variations  of  Words  ending  in  Voiceless  M,  L,  or  R  .         .  140 


XXlll 


Contents. 

IX.  German  Analysis 143 

STANDARD  GERMAN 143 

THE  CONSONANTS.     Consonants  Illustrated        ....  144 

Six  new  Consonants 145 

Familiar  Consonants 147 

THE  VOWELS.     Vowels  Illustrated 149 

Long  and  Short  Vowels 150 

Open  Vowels  in  Lahm,  Lamm    ......  151 

Front  Vowels  in  miihen,  Manner,  geh,  ihn,  Sinn  .  .  151 
Back-round  Vowels  in  Sohn,  Sonne,  Kuh,  dumm  .  .  152 
Front-round  Vowels  in  Sohne,  Wnnen,  kilhn,  diinn  .  .  153 

Unaccented  Vowels  in  "  Gabe,"  etc 153 

Dipththongs  in  Ei,  Hans,  Hen 154 

Nasal  Vowels      .  154 

X.  German  Synthesis 156 

Vowels  followed  by  R 156 

Quantity 157 

Accent 158 

Intonation 159 

Syllables 160 

XI.  Symbolization  of  German  Sounds 161 

The  Consonants 161 

The  Vowels  .  164 


PART  II. 
PEOSE  BEADING  BOOK. 

Introductory.     Spelling  Lessons 5 

I.     The  Fox  and  the  Goat         ....     sEsop's  Fables  8 

II.     The  Miser „           „  8 

III.  The  Cock  and  the  Jewel      ....„„  9 

IV.  The  Crab  and  her  Mother  ....„„  9 
V.     The  Miller,  his  Son,  and  their  Ass                        „          „  9 

VI.     The  Country  Maid  and  her  Milk-Can.        .          ,.          „  10 

VII.     The  Frogs  Asking  for  a  King     .        .         .          „          ,,  11 

VIII.     The  Country  Mouse  and  the  Town  Mouse          .,          „  12 

IX.    The  Ass's  Shadow „           .,  13 

X.     The  Monkey  and  the  Dolphin    ...„.,  14 

XI.     The  Wind  and  the  Sun.       .....,„  14 

XII.     The  Fox  without  a  Tail      ....„„  15 

XIII.  Ealeigh's  Two  Plants .  15 

XIV.  A  Boy's  Adventures  among  the  Sea-Caves    Hiujli  Miller  17 


XXIV 


Contents. 


XV.  The  Discontented  Pendulum 

XVI.  The  Little  Drummer-Boy  . 

XVII.  The  Jowf  in  Arabia     . 

XVIII.  The  Society  of  Books  . 


Jane  Taylor 

Palgrave 
Ruskin 


POETEY  BEADING  BOOK. 


The  Street  of  By-and-By 

The  Jackdaw  of  Eheims 

The  Child  with  the  Bird 

The  Destruction  of  Senni 

The  Mariners  of  England 

Answer  to  a  Child's  Question 

The  Pine- Apple  and  the  Bee 

The  Retired  Cat  . 

The  Contest  betwee 

John  Gilpin 

At  Sea  . 

William  Tell 

Monkeys'  Manners 

Song  of  the  Street  Monkey 

The  Dormouse 

The  Grasshopper  a 

Ode  to  the  Cuckoo 

The  Miller  of  Dee 

One  by  One  . 

Lochinvar    . 

After  Blenheim   . 

Some  Murmur 

EXERCISES. 

Exercises  in  Writing  English  Phonetically     . 

APPENDICES. 
Specimens  of  French. 

L'Anthropophage        

Les  Deux  Palmiers 

La  Maison  qui  Marche 

Specimens  of  German. 

1  Lines  from"  Wilhelm  Tell" 

Song  by  Uhland 

Extract  from  Gothe's  "  Leiden  des  jungen  Werthers"     . 

Specimen  of  English,  showing  variable  words. 
The  Iceberg 


I'AGH 

23 

25 
28 
29 


By     Abdy 

30 

ms     Barham 

31 

ird  at  the  Bush         .         .     Banyan 

35 

nnacherib         .        .         .     Byron 

36 

and    .....     Campbell 

37 

Question      ....     Coleridge 

38 

he  Bee       ....     Cowper 

39 

11 

39 

;he  Nose  and  the  Eyes      .          „ 

43 

11 

44 

Cunningham 

51 

.    Gurney 

52 

Hood 

56 

•nkey                                            „ 

56 

.     Howitt 

57 

the  Cricket      .         .         .     Keats 

58 

59 

Mackay 

60 

.    Proctor 

61 

Scott 

62 

.     Southey 

63 

Trench 

65 

67 


76 

77 
77 


79 

80 

80 

82 


INTRODUCTION  TO  PHONETICS. 

THE  object  and  plan  of  this  book  are  indicated  in  it3  title  and 
table  of  contents,  but  they  need  to  be  explained  somewhat  more 
fully. 

It  is  not  written  for  the  purpose  of  bringing  about  a  reform 
in  the  spelling  of  the  English  language,  although,  in  the  opinion 
of  all  philologists,  and  of  many  of  the  most  thoughtful  teachers, 
this  is  greatly  to  be  desired.  A  study  of  the  sounds  of  English 
will,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  prepare  the  way  for  that  reform,  which 
still  seems  to  be  in  the  far  distance;  but  in  the  meantime 
English  people  need  to  know  the  sounds  of  their  mother  tongue 
for  three  reasons :  (1)  that  they  may  speak  it  correctly  ;  (2) 
that  they  may  learn  successfully  the  pronunciation  of  other 
languages,  to  which  a  knowledge  of  their  own  is  the  best  intro- 
duction ;  and  (3)  that  those  who  wish  to  study  philology  may 
have  a  key  to  that  science.  And  the  sounds  of  our  language 
cannot  be  studied  or  explained  without  some  system  of  phonetic 
spelling. 

Importance  of  the  Subject.  In  the  present  day  the 
importance  of  good  English  elocution  is  beginning  to  be  duly 
recognised,  and  it  is  felt  that  modern  languages  ought  to  be 
more  widely  and  efficiently  taught  than  they  have  been  hitherto. 
Philologists  also  tell  us  very  plainly  that  an  acquaintance  with 
the  written  symbols  of  a  language  is  not  an  adequate  knowledge 
of  the  language  itself,  of  which  these  symbols  are  but  a  more 
or  less  imperfect  representation. 

A  better  System  needed.  But  we  are  not  making  much 
progress  in  this  direction.  Even  amongst  well-educated  people, 
a  clear  and  beautiful  pronunciation  of  the  English  language, 
without  slovenliness  or  affectation,  is  exceedingly  rare,  and  it 
is  still  more  unusual  to  hear  Englishmen  speak  French  or 
•German  clearly  and  intelligibly,  whilst  lecturers  on  etymology 

I.P.  l  B 


2  Introduction  to  Phonetics. 

find  the  students'  ignorance  of  the  sounds  of  language  a  serious 
barrier  to  their  progress.  Nor  is  this  to  be  wondered  at.  For 
whilst  we  aim  at  teaching  all  other  sxibjects  on  some  well- 
planned  method,  the  sounds  of  language  are  left  to  be  picked 
up  anyhow,  by  mere  imitation  and  sheer  force  of  memory,  so 
that,  setting  aside  students  of  short-hand,  it  is  probable  that 
not  one  person  in  a  thousand  could  enumerate  the  principal 
sounds  of  our  language,  or  of  any  other,  or  has  any  clear  con- 
ception of  the  principles  on  which  they  should  be  classified. 

And  any  teacher  wishing  to  prepare  himself  to  instruct  a 
class  in  the  first  elements  of  phonetics  is  met  by  this  serious 
difficulty,  that  there  is  no  easy  manual  of  phonetics  to  be  had, 
in  which  the  sounds  of  English,  French,  and  German  are 
simply  explained.  So  this  work  is  an  attempt  to  supply  the 
deficiency. 

Prominence  given  to  £iiglish  Phonetics.  The 
greater  part  of  the  book  is  devoted  to  English  sounds;  (1) 
because  we  ought  to  proceed  from  the  known  to  the  unknown, 
and  any  confusion  in  our  minds  concerning  English  sounds 
will  lead  us  to  mix  them  up  unawares  with  the  sounds  of 
other  languages ;  (2)  because  when  the  principles  of  phonetics 
have  once  been  taught  and  illustrated  in  our  own  language,  this 
need  not  be  repeated ;  and  (3)  because  the  sounds  of  English 
are  more  difficult  than  those  of  French  and  German. 

A  new  Alphabet  necessary.  The  alphabets  used  in  this 
book  need  a  few  words  of  explanation,  as  the  need  for  a  new 
alphabet  is  not  obvious  at  first  sight.  The  prevailing  notion  seems 
to  be  that  nothing  is  easier  than  to  spell  phonetically  with  oar 
present  alphabet.  But  in  point  of  fact  the  Roman  alphabet, 
originally  planned  for  a  language  with  a  simpler  sound  system, 
has  not  nearly  symbols  enough  for  the  very  numerous  sounds  of 
our  language.  For  instance,  we  have  no  symbols  by  which  we 
can  distinguish  u  in  but  and  in  put^  th  in  this  and  in  thistle,  or 
s  in  lesser  and  leisure.  So  the  deficiency  must  be  remedied 
and  the  alphabet  sxipplemented,  either  (1)  by  new  letters,  or 
(2)  by  using  diacritic  signs,  or  (3)  by  combining  the  old  letters 
to  form  digraphs,  as  we  are  accustomed  to  do,  for  example, 
when  we  use  th,  sh,  ng,  ee,  oo,  to  represent  simple  sounds. 


Introduction  to  Phonetics.  3 

Characteristics  of  Alphabets  used  here.  The  objects 
aimed  at  in  planning,  the  alphabets  used,  in  this  book  are,  to 
make  the  phonetic  writing  easy  to  read, .to  write  and  to  print,  by 
keeping  as  close  to  the  received  usage  as  possible.  So  no  new 
or  turned  letters  are  used,  and  very  few  diacritic  signs.  The 
alphabet  is  supplemented  chiefly  by  means  of  digraphs. 

There  would  have  been  some  obvious  advantages  in  using 
the  international  alphabet  of  the  Maltre  Phondtique,  which 
can  be  adapted  to  any  language,  and  where  there  is  a  single 
symbol  for  each  sound.  But  this  would  necessitate  the  intro- 
duction of  a  good  many  new  characters,  as  well  as  many  depart- 
ures from  the  usage  of  each  particular  nation,  making  the 
system  much  more  difficult  to  read,  to  write  and  to  print. 
The  question  is  so  often  asked,  by  persons  to  whom  the  subject 
is  new,  "  Could  I  read  your  phonetic  writing,  at  first  sight  ?  " 
that  it  is  well  to  reduce  this  initial  difficulty  as  much  as 
possible ;  and  the  labour  of  teaching  children  to  write  new 
characters,  and  the  trouble  of  getting  them  printed,  are  con- 
siderations of  some  importance. 

The  English  alphabet  used  here  is  based  upon  Mr.  Sweet's 
Broad  Romic  and  the  late  Mr,  W.  R.  Evans's  Union.  The 
French  and  German  alphabets  are  original. 

The  Subject  carefully  graduated.  Great  pains  have 
been  taken  to  graduate  the  subject,  so  as  to  make  it  intelligible 
to  beginners.  For  instance,  the  consonants  are  treated  before 
the  vowels,  as  being  easier  to  distinguish  from  one  another,  and 
to  classify,  according  to  the  manner  in  which  they  are  formed. 
Some  experience  in  teaching  young  children  has  been  very 
valuable  as  showing  in  what  order  it  is  expedient  to  deal  with 
the  various  parts  of  the  subject,  and  special  instructions  for 
teachers  will  be  found  in  Chap.  VI. 

Selection  of  Passages  for  reading.  The  passages  for 
reading  have  been  selected  with  a  view  to  the  requirements  of 
children  of  ten  years  of  age  and  upwards.  It  would  be  by  far  the 
best  plan  to  teach  children  the  sounds  of  the  English  language 
systematically  from  the  very  beginning,  and  to  let  them  learn 
phonetic  spelling  before  they  attempt  to  spell  in  any  other  way. 
They  would  then  articulate  much  better,  and  the  irregularities 


4  Introduction  to  Phonetics. 

of  our  ordinary  spelling  would  be  more  accurately  observed  and 
more  easily  remembered,  when  the  pupils  had  some  fixed 
standard  with  which  they  could  compare  them.  But  teachers 
in  elementary  schools  are  not  free  to  begin  with  phonetic  spell- 
ing, and  in  secondary  schools,  where  the  need  for  phonetics  will 
be  more  easily  recognised,  on  account  of  the  necessity  for  teach- 
ing French  and  German,  and  where  there  is  more  liberty  of 
action,  most  of  the  children  have  learnt  to  read  and  begun  to 
spell  before  admission.  It  will  therefore  be  necessary,  as  a 
rule,  to  postpone  the  teaching  of  phonetics  until  they  are  at 
least  ten  years  of  age,  so  that  they  may  have  a  fair  knowledge  of 
the  ordinary  spelling  before  they  attempt  any  fresh  system.  And 
meantime  the  teacher,  who  has  himself  acquired  a  knowledge 
of  phonetics,  will  have  his  perceptions  of  sound  so  sharpened 
that  he  will  be  able  to  do  much,  without  any  systematic  lessons 
in  phonetics,  to  correct  defects  of  pronunciation  and  to  train  his 
pupils  to  pronounce  English  clearly  and  well. 

Oral  Teaching  necessary.  It  is  not  pretended  that  the 
use  of  this,  or  of  any  other  book  on  phonetics,  can  supersede  oral 
teaching,  but  it  is  hoped  that  this  popular  exposition  of  the 
sounds  of  English,  French  and  German  may  enable  teachers  to 
acquire  for  themselves  the  first  principles  of  phonetics,  and 
make  their  oral  teaching  systematic  and  effectual. 

In  conclusion,  I  may  say  that  this  work  has  not  been  under- 
taken without  careful  preparation.  It  is  now  more  than  thirty 
years  since  I  first  began  to  study  the  sounds  of  English,  French 
and  German,  so  that  the  book  is  the  result  of  personal  observa- 
tion as  well  as  of  reading,  and  I  hope  it  will  prove  reliable. 
The  soundness  of  the  French  and  German  sections  is,  I  think, 
sufficiently  guaranteed  by  M.  Paul  Passy  and  Prof.  W.  Vietor, 
for  this  part  of  the  book  is  based  upon  their  writings,  and  has 
been  thoroughly  revised  by  them.  They  assure  me  also  that 
I  have  succeeded  in  acquiring  a  good  pronunciation  of  French 
and  German. 

As  regards  the  sounds  of  English,  I  have  not  found  myself 
able  to  follow  any  one  phonetician  in  particular,  nor  to  use  the 
vowel  system  of  Mr.  Bell,  which  is  adopted,  with  some  inodifi- 


Books  Recommended.  5 

cations,  by  Messrs.  Ellis  and  Sweet.  But  in  this  I  am 'not 
singular,  for  the  Bell  system  is  not  generally  accepted  by  foreign 
phoneticians.  I  have  however  learnt  much  from  the  writings 
of  Dr.  Sweet,  and  especially  from  his  Elementarbuch. 

The  writers  from  whom  I  have  derived  most  assistance  in 
preparing  this  volume  are  Sweet,  Victor,  Passy,  Murray  (in  the 
New  English  Dictionary),  Ellis,  and  the  late  Mr.  W.  R.  Evans. 
I  have  also  profited  from  the  works  of  Beyer,  Trautmann,  Tech- 
mer,  Jespersen,  and  others,  and  have  learnt  something  from 
the  dictionaries  of  Walker  and  Stormonth,  though  the  phonetic 
systems  of  these  dictionaries  are  very  imperfect,  especially  as 
regards  unaccented  vowels. 

I  am  also  indebted  to  the  kindness  of  many  fellow-workers 
for  help  and  criticisms  of  various  kinds;  to  the  late  Frau  Flohr, 
for  first  giving  me  an  interest  in  phonetics,  by  her  excellent 
lessons  in  German  pronunciation ;  to  the  late  Mr.  W.  R.  Evans, 
Dr.  Sweet,  and  Prof.  Skeat  for  various  useful  criticisms ;  and 
most  of  all  to  Prof.  Vietor,  M.  Passy,  Dr.  Ellis,  and  Prof.  A. 
Schroer,  for  oral  instruction  and  for  reading  and  revising  my 
book. 

I  have  also  to  thank  Prof.  Vietor,  Dr.  Techmer,  and  Sir 
Morell  Mackenzie,  for  permission  to  use  diagrams ;  and  Mr. 
Murray  for  allowing  me  to  borrow  twelve  of  James's  ^Esop's 
Fables. 

It  may  be  useful  to  append  here  a  list  of  some  of  the  most 
necessary  books  on  phonetics,  originally  prepared  for  the  Con- 
ference of  the  Teachers'  Guild,  in  April,  1890. 


LIST   OF  BOOKS  RECOMMENDED  TO   STUDENTS. 

ENGLISH,  FRENCH  AND  GERMAN. 

(1)  Le  Maitre  Phonttique.  Organe  cle  1'Association  Phone- 
tique  des  Professeurs  cle  Langues  Vivantes.  (G,  Rue 
Labordere,  Neuilly  s.  Seine.)  Monthly :  price  per 
ann.,  3  fr. ;  per  single  number,  25  centimes.  For 
members  of  the  Association,  2  fr.  per  ann. 


G  Introduction  to  Phonetics. 

(2)  Primer  of  Phonetics.      Henry  Sweet  (Clarendon  Press, 

1890).    3s.  Gd. 

(3)  Elements  dcr  Phonetik  und   Orthoepie  des  Deutschen, 

Englischen  und  Franzosischen,  mit  Riicksicht  auf  die 
Bediirfnisse  der  Lehrpraxis,  von  Wilhelm  Vietor. 
Zweite  verbesserte  Auflage.  (Gebr.  Henninger,  Heil- 
'bronn,  1887.)  Marks  4.80 ;  Half-bound,  m.  5.60. 

(4)  Phonetische  Studien.      Zeitschrift  fiir  wissenschaftliche 

und  praktische  Phonetik,  mit  besonderer  Riicksicht 
auf  die  Reform  des  Sprachunterrichts,  herausgegeben 
von  Wilhelm  Victor.  (N.  G.  Elwert,  Marburg  in  Hes- 
sen.)  Three  numbers  appear  in  the  year;  each  number 
3  to  4  marks.  Vol.  I.,  9s.  6d. ;  II,  lls. ;  III.,  12s.  Gd. 

ENGLISH. 

(1)  Elemcntarbuch  des  GesprocJiencnEnylisch.   Henry  Sweet. 

2nd  ed.     (Clarendon  Press,  1880.)     2*.  Gd. 

(2)  Primer   of  Spoken   English.      Henry  Siccat  (Clarendon 

Press,  1890).     3s.  Gd. 

FRENCH. 

(1)  Les  Sons  du  Fran^ais.      Leur  Formation,  leur   Combi- 

naison,  leur  Representation,  par  Paid  Pass?/.  2° 
edition,  revue,  corrigee  et  augmentee.  (Firmin-Didot, 
Paris,  1889.)  1  fr.  50  c. 

(2)  Le   Francais   Parle".      Morceaux   choisis   a   Fusage   des 

etrangers,  avec  la  Prononciation  Figuree,  par  Paul 
Passy,  Professeur  de  Langues  Vivantes,  ancien  Pre- 
sident de  1'Association  Phonetique.  2°  edition.  (Hen- 
ninger freres,  Heilbronn,  1889.)  Marks  1.80. 

(3)  Phrases  de  tons  les  jours.     Felix  Franke.      2°  edition. 

(Henninger  freres,  Heilbronn,  1888.)     Marks  0.80. 

(4)  Eryanzungshcft.      Franke.     2°  ed.      (Heuninger,  Heil- 

bronn, 1888.) 

(5)  Fransk  Laiscbog.     Jesperscn  (Copenhagen). 

(<j)  Franzosisclie  Phonetik.      Fiir  Lehrer  und  Studierende, 
von  Franz  Beyer.     (Otto  Schulze,  Cothen,  1888.) 


Books  Recommended. 


GERMAN. 


German  Pronunciation :  Practice  and  Theory.  The  "  best 
German" — German  sounds,  and  how  they  are  repre- 
sented in  spelling — The  letters  of  the  alphabet,  and 
their  phonetic  values — German  accent — Specimens. 
By  Wilhelm  Victor,  Ph.D.,  M.A.  (Marburg),  Professor 
of  English  Philology,  Marburg  University ;  late  Lec- 
turer on  Teutonic  Languages,  University  College, 
Liverpool.  2nd  ed.  (Henninger  Brothers,  Heilbronn, 
1890.)  Marks  1.50;  cloth,  m.  2. 


The  most  necessary  for  beginners  of  the  books  above  men- 
tioned are  Sweet's  Primer  of  Spoken  English,  Passy's  Sons  du 
Francais,  Vietor's  German  Pronunciation,  and  the  Matt-re 
Phonctique. 

Professor  Vietor's  Elemente  der  Phonctik  will  also  be  found 
extremely  useful  as  giving  a  comparative  view  of  English, 
French  and  German  sounds,  and  Phonetische  Studien  is  essen- 
tial to  those  who  wish  to  keep  abreast  of  the  rapidly  advancing 
science  of  Phonetics. 


I. 

THE   VOCAL   ORGANS  DESCRIBED. 

IT  is  impossible  to  explain  and  classify  the  sounds  of  any  lan- 
guage without  first  describing  the  apparatus  by  which  human 
speech  is  formed.  The  organs  of  speech  are  the  lungs,  with  the 
bronchial  tubes,  the  windpipe,  the  upper  portion  of  which  is 
called  the  larynx,  the  pharynx,  or  passage  immediately  above 
the  windpipe  and  gullet,  the  mouth  and  the  nose. 

A  general  view  of  the  organs  of  speech,  excepting  the  lungs 
and  the  bronchial  tubes,  is  given  in  diagram  I.,  whilst  II.  and 

III.  give  views  of  the  larynx  as  seen  in  the  laryngoscope,  and 

IV.  shows  the  glottis,  or  slit  in  the  larynx  through  which  the 
breath  passes,   opened  more  or  less  widely  according   to  the 
manner  in  which  it  is  used. 

The  Lungs.  The  function  of  the  lungs  in  speech  is  simply 
to  act  as  bellows,  and  to  propel  the  air  through  the  windpipe  to 
the  larynx,  where  the  voice  is  formed.  The  notion  that  some 
voice  sounds  are  formed  in  the  chest,  whilst  others  proceed  from 
the  head,  and  so  on,  is  very  widely  prevalent,  but  it  is  a 
delusion  to  suppose  that  the  voice  can  be  formed  anywhere 
except  in  the  larynx. 

The  Larynx  is  the  upper  part  of  the  windpipe.  It  may  be 
seen  in  men  to  form  the  projection  in  the  throat  familiarly  called 
Adam's  apple.  In  the  larynx  are  two  horizontal  membranes 
called  the  vocal  chords,  which  appear  in  diagrams  II.  and  III. 
as  two  parallel  white  bands  in  the  centre  of  the  larynx.  They 
are  connected  by  membranes  called  ventricular  bands  with  the 
walls  of  the  larynx,  so  that  the  air  from  the  lungs  is  obliged  to 
pass  between  them.  The  opening  between  the  vocal  chords  is 
called  the  glottis. 

The  Glottis.  The  vocal  chords  are  attached  at  the  back  to 
two  movable  cartilages,  called  the  arytjenoid  cartilages,  fig. 

8 


The  Vocal  Organs  Described,  9 

IV.  cc.,  and  the  diagram  shows  how  the  glottis  may  be  opened 
to  leave  a  passage  for  the  breath,  or  entirely  closed  so  as  to 
stop  it,  or  how  the  cartilages  at  the  back  may  be  open  and  the 
vocal  chords  closed,  or  the  reverse.  When  the  stream  of  breath, 
passing  through  the  larynx,  causes  the  vocal  chords,  or  lips  of 
the  glottis,  to  vibrate,  it  produces  the  sound  we  call  voice. 

Fig.  IV.  1  represents  the  glottis  opened  as  wide  as  possible, 
both  back  and  front,  as  it  would  be  for  blowing  out  a  candle. 
IV.  2  shows  it  in  the  position  for  sounding  the  letter  II,  when 
the  opening  is  reduced,  but  the  vocal  chords  are  not  made  to 
vibrate.  They  are  only  brought  sufficiently  near  to  one  another 
to  cause  a  slight  friction  of  the  breath  against  their  edges.  In 
IV.  3  we  see  an  opening  in  the  cartilaginous  glottis  alone,  xised 
for  whispering.  IV.  4  and  5,  which  should  be  compared  with 
II.  and  III.,  show  the  glottis  as  it  is  during  the  emission  of  the 
voice,  when  the  vocal  chords  are  vibrating.  It  will  be  observed 
that,  for  the  upper  register  (IV.  4),  only  a  small  portion  of  the 
vocal  chords  can  vibrate,  as  they  are  partially  closed,  whilst  the 
cartilaginous  glottis  is  completely  shut ;  and  in  this  register  the 
glottis  is  alternately  open  and  shut,  so  that  the  air  passes' 
between  the  chords  in  a  series  of  puffs.  But  for  the  lower 
register  (IV.  5)  the  chords  vibrate  in  their  whole  length,  and 
the  cartilaginous  glottis  is  slightly  opened.  IV.  6  represents 
the  glottis  completely  shut,  so  that  the  breath  is  quite  stopped. 
In  coughing,  or  clearing  the  throat,  it  is  closed  in  this  manner, 
and  then  suddenly  opened  with  an  explosion ;  and  the  same 
action,  used  in  speaking,  is  called  the  glottal  stop. 

The  Superglottal  Passages,  through  which  the  breath 
passes  when  it  has  left  the  larynx,  form  a  resonance  chamber, 
modifying  the  quality  of  the  voice.  Sounds  can  be  formed  by 
the  breath  in  these  passages,  without  any  vibration  of  the  vocal 
chords,  as,  for  instance,  s  and  sh,  used  in  hissing  and  hushing, 
but  not  the  sound  we  call  voice. 

The  breath  passes  first  into  the  pharynx,  which  is  separated 
from  the  larynx  by  a  movable  lid  called  the  epiglottis.  This 
lid  is  closed  in  the  act  of  swallowing,  to  prevent  the  food  from 
passing  into  the  windpipe  and  choking  us.  And  from  the 
pharynx  it  passes  out  throiigh  the  mouth  or  the  nose. 


10  Introduction  to  Phonetics. 

The  passage  through  the  nose  can  be  opened  or  closed  by  the 
movements  of  the  soft  palate  (I.  c).  For  although  the  front  half 
of  the  palate  is  hard,  the  back  part,  to  which  is  attached  the 
little  tongue  called  the  uvula,  is  soft  and  movable.  By  lower- 
ing the  soft  palate  we  allow  the  air  to  pass  behind  it  and 
escape  by  the  nose,  as  it  commonly  does  when  we  are  at  rest ; 
but  in  speaking  and  singing  the  soft  palate  is  raised,  and  the 
nose  passage  shut,  so  that  the  breath  all  passes  through  the 
mouth,  except  when  we  pronounce  those  vowels  and  consonants 
which  are  called  nasal. 

It  is  by  the  movements  of  the  lips,  tongue  and  soft  palate, 
that  the  various  vowels  and  consonants  are  formed,  as  we  shall 
see  when  considering  them  in  detail. 

The  vocal  organs  have  been  compared  to  various  kinds  of 
instruments,  but  Dr.  Morell  Mackenzie  says,  "  The  larynx  is 
a  musical  instrument  unique  in  construction,  which  cannot, 
strictly  speaking,  be  classed  with  any  other  sound-producing 
apparatus.  It  bears  a  close  resemblance,  however,  to  the  so- 
called  reed  instruments,  though  differing  from  them  in  several 
important  points.  Reeds  are  of  diiferent  kinds,  but  the 
essential  feature  in  all  is  that  they  break  up  a  continuous 
current  of  air  .into  a  series  of  jets  or  puffs.  The  vocal  reeds 
are  elastic  membranes  which  must  be  stretched  between  the 
fixed  points  of  attachment  before  they  can  be  made  to  vibrate. 
This  is  effected  by  the  action  of  the  various  muscles  acting  on 
the  chords,  and  the  degree  of  tension  can  be  altered  and  the 
vibrating  element  lengthened  or  shortened  at  will,  so  that  one 
chard  serves  the  purpose  of  many  reeds  of  different  sizes,  a 
triumph  of  economy  of  material  combined  with  perfection  of 
mechanism  to  which  there  is  nothing  comparable  in  any  musical 
instrument  made  with  hands." 


II. 

ENGLISH  SOUNDS  ILLUSTRATED. 

THE  very  first  step  in  the  study  of  phonetics  should  be  to 
learn  to  distinguish  the  sounds  of  the  mother  tongue ;  and  as 
many  of  these  are  obscured  by  our  ordinary  spelling,  it  seems 
necessary  to  illustrate  them  very  fully,  as  is  done  in  the  follow- 
ing examples. 

It  will  be  found  that  some  soiinds  have  been  more  fully  illus- 
trated than  others.  This  is  done  to  meet  the  requirements  of 
teachers,  who  may  be  glad  to  find  a  large  number  of  examples 
of  the  rarer  and  more  difficult  sounds,  to  serve  as  examples  in 
class  teaching. 

Amongst  the  examples  are  some  rare  and  very  irregular 
words,  which  may  perhaps  seem  superfluous.  These  are  not 
meant  for  children ;  but  just  because  they  are  so  -seldom  heard, 
it  may  be  convenient  to  show  how  they  ought  to  be  pronounced. 
Some  of  these  rare  words  are  taken  from  a  list  drawn  up  by  Dr. 
Ellis,  and  now  out  of  print. 

THE  CONSONANTS  ILLUSTRATED. 

The  symbols  used  to  represent  the  consonants  in  ordinary 
spelling  are  as  follows  : — 

P.  Symbols  : — p,  pp,  ph,  pe,  ppe,  gli ;  as  in 

pen  Claph&m  steppe 

h&ppy  Grimthorpe  hiccough 

B.  Symbols : — to,  foto,  pfo,  foe  ;  as  in 

bed.  ebb  cup&oard  Morecam&e 

T.  Symbols: — t,  tt,  ed,  th,  tw,  fot,  ot,  pt,  ch.t,  phtli,  z,  te, 

tte  ;  as  in 

ten                thyme  indict  ^/i£/dsic  (tizik) 

better           two  receipt  mezzotint  (metso'tint) 

stopped        debt  yacht  caste             gazette 


12  English  Sounds  Illustrated. 

D.  Symbols  :  —  d,  dd,  ed,  de,  Id,  dh,  ddh,  bd  ;  as  in 

den  begged  would  Budd/iist 

add  horde  Wyndftam  bdellium 

K.  Symbols  :  —  k,  e,  q,  ck,  eh,  ee,  eq,  qu,  quc,  Ik,  gli,  se, 
x,  tch,  ke,  Ike,  quh,  ceh  ;  as  in 

frill  ^uell  acquaint  hotujr/i  Bur/ce 

call  bacfc  li^wor  viscount  Folkestone 

havoc  ac/<e  bar^zte  except  Ur^w/mrt 

sceptic  account  waZfc  h&tcJiel  Bacchanal 

«.  Symbols  :—  g,  gg,  gli,  gue,  ckg,  gge  ;  as  in 

ghost,       le&giie       blacA'^/uard       Bainbri^e 


M.  Symbols  :  —  m,  mni,  gm,  1m,  mb,  mn,  inp,  me,  mine, 
dim,  ii,  nte,  Imonde  ;  as  in 

???an  lamb  hol??ze  BaJiff 

ham?ner     \\ymn  programme     Pontefract  (Poamfrit) 

7?i      Ha?n^;den     drac/tm  Cho/-?nondcley  (Choemli) 


]\T.  Symbols:—  n,  nn,  en,  on,  gn,  hn,  kn,  mn,  pn,  sn,  In, 
«ln,  iid,    nil,  ii\v,  mp,  ne,  nne,  giie,  dding  ;  as  in 

net  gn&w  j^meumatics  riba?id  borne 

di?iner        John  puisne  ipecacuan/ia  An?ie 

opening      know  Lincoln  gu?iu-ale  coigne 

pardo?iing  ??i?iemonics    Wednesday  com^ter  studdm^-sail 

.  Symbols  :  —  ng,  n,  nd,  iigue,  ngh,  nz  ;  as  in 

tiling  handkerchief  Birmin^am 

thi?ik  tongue  Mensies 

Additional  examples  of  ng  written  n  before  g,  k,  e,  q, 

eh,  and  x  ;  I.e.  before  the  sounds  g  and  k  :  — 
finger  hungry  monkey  banquet 

anger  si?;k  a?zcle  anclioi 

a?igry  tha?ik  u?zclo  a?ixious 

hu?iger  donkey  conquer  ly?ix 


The  Consonants. 


13 


Jj.  Symbols  :  —  1,  11,  si,  gl,  Id,  Iw,  le,  He,  sle,  In,  al,  uall  ; 

as  in 

Zet  sera^Zio  carZe  kiZ?i 

weZZ  GuiZcZford      ,          gazeZZe  MagdaZen 

isZand  WooZzdch  aisZe  victzmZZer 

R.  Symbols:—  r,  rr,  rh,  wr,  rw,  rwh,  re,  rre,  rrh,  rps; 

as  in 

7*ed  ?'Z?etoric         Xorzcich          Steere 

merry         lorite  Tynchiti         parterre 

"WH.  Symbol  :  —  wli  ;  as  in 


myrrh 
corjjs 


tt7iistle  ichy 

\V.  Symbols  :  —  w,  u,  o,  nothing  at  all  ;  as  in 

tfear  sqitare  choir  one 

F.  Symbols  :  —  f,  ff,  ph,  gli,  If,  ft,  pph,  u,  fe,  ffe  ;  as  in 

fill  physic          haZ/  sa^/tire  Skai/e 

sti^         rough  often          liezttenant        Shorncli^b 

V.  Symbols  :  —  v,  ve,  Ive,  f,  ph,  Iv,  sv,  zv  ;  as  in 

vest  haZfe  ne/j/iew        Grost-enor 

twelre         of  BeZroir        rendezvous 

TH.  Symbols  :  —  th,  t,  li,  tth,  gh,  phth  ;  as  in 

thin     Southampton     eight/i     MaW/<ew     Kei^r/iley 

DM.  Symbols  :  —  th,  the  ;  as  in 

this  socthe 

TH  and  DM  compared  :  — 


Initial. 

Final. 

Medial. 

th 

dh 

ill 

dh 

th 

dh 

thiel 

the 

pith 

with 

ether 

either 

thing 

this 

•path 

paths 

Arthur 

iather 

thatch 

that 

truth 

truths 

nothing 

mother 

thin 

they 

oath 

oaths 

author 

northern 

thick 

then 

mouth 

mouths 

earthy 

\vorthy 

thorn 

than 

breaf/i 

breaf/ie 

pithy 

wither 

three 

thus 

sheath 

sheave 

earthen 

further 

through 

there 

sooth 

soothe 

ethics 

weather 

throw 

fTzough 

loath 

loathe 

method 

ieather 

14  English  Sounds  Illustrated. 

S.  Symbols: — s,  ss,  se,  e,  ee,  sc,  see,  sch,  sw,  st,  sth,  ps,  z, 
str,  <>*v  ssc.  I  AS.  ces,  rene,  rces,  sh  :  as  in 

seal           scene             listen            mispress  (Mrs.)  Gloucester 

hiss           coalesce         isMmus         boafsicain  Cire?icester 

pulse         sc/iism           jjsalm            crevasse  Worcester 

cell            s?ford            quarts           bri£zska  Mas/iam. 
dance 

Z.  Symbols  :— z,  zz,  ze,  s,  ss,  se,  es,  c,  sc,  cz,  sh,  si,  is,  x, 
ds,  sw  ;  as  in 

seal  scissors  discern  venison 

puzzle  cleanse  czar  beaua? 

f \\rze  Wednesday  dishonour  Windsor 

his  sacrificing  busmess  Ives^fick 

SH.  Symbols: — sh,  s,  ch,  ss,  c,  t,  shi,  si,  ssi,  ci,  ce,  sei,  ti, 
seh,  ehe,  clisi,  psh,  sslie  ;  as  in 

s7*e  assure         fas/u'on       social  motion          fuchsia 

sugar       officiate      Asia  ocean  schedule       jjs/iaw 

c/iaise      vitiate         mission      conscious       moustache    Assheton 

Z1I.  Symbols : — z,  s,  zi,  si.  ssi,  ti,  g,  ge  ;  as  in 

azure  glazier  abscission  routing 

pleasure        division  transition  rouge 

Additional  examples : — 

seizure         treasure         brasier  derision  confusion 

leisure         osier  vision  occasion  delusion 

measure       hosier  decision  intrusion  usual 

Y.  S}Tmbols  : — y,  i,  e,  j,  1 ;  as  in 

?/et         onion         hideous         hallelujah         cotilZon 
Also  g  in  the  combination  gn,  pronounced  ny ;  as  in 
vi</?zette  (vinyet) 

II.  Symbols  : — h,  wh,  gh,  Iquh  ;  as  in 

he  icho  Calla^/ian  Colqtihoun 

CH.  Symbols  : — eh,  teh,  ehe,  t,  ti,  te,  e,  jori  ;  as  in 

chest         ditch         luncheon         question          violoncello 
rich  niche        nature  righteous         Marjoribanks 


The  Long  Vowels. 


15 


J.  Symbols:— j,  g,  ge,  gi,  dj,  dg,  dge,  di,  cli,  gh;  as  in 

Jest          hinge       dungeon        adjourn        hedge      GreenwicZi 
gentle      barge       collegian      judgment     soldier    Bellin^/tam 

SYLLABIC  CONSONANTS. 

m'.  Symbol : — m  ;  as  in 

baptis?n         criticism         rhythm         chasm         spas?n 
n'.  Symbols: — en,  on,  in,  ain.  enn  ;  as  in 

seven       strengthening     button        priso?ier  cousin 

written    lengthening         bacon         reasoning  Britain 

open         heathenish  person       seasonable  halfpenny 

1'.  Symbols  : — le,  el,  al,  ul,  ael,  wale,  ual,  ell,  tie ;  as  in 

bottZe         troubled         vesseZ  sepwZchre      victuals 

appZe          settZed  musical        MichaeZ         leveZZing 

riddZe         flanneZ  difficwZt       gumraZe        brisiZe 

THE  LONG  VOWELS  ILLUSTRATED. 
aa. 


|3ymbols  for  aa  :  —  a 

,  au,  ah, 

aa,  ai,  a-e,  ar,  ear.  uar,  er,  aar,  arre. 

Bp« 

aft 

rather 

task 

repast 

branch 

papa 

waft 

ass 

cask 

chant 

blanch 

mamma 

shaft 

pass 

flask 

grant 

command 

palm 

raft 

brass 

rascal 

plant 

demand 

balm 

f  draft 

grass 

past 

slant 

lawgh 

calm 

[  draught 

class 

mast 

dance 

aunt 

psalm 

craft 

glass 

j  cast 

lance 

dawnt 

alms 

graft 

gasp 

(  caste 

chance 

ja?mt 

almond 

after 

rasp 

fast 

prance 

lawnch 

sample 

rafter 

hasp 

vast 

trance 

ah 

example 

salve 

grasp 

last 

answer 

hurrah 

calf 

halve 

clasp 

blast 

advance 

baa 

half 

path 

ask 

master 

askance 

kraal 

chaff 

bath 

bask 

pastor 

f  stanch 

planter 

staff 

lath 

mask 

aghast 

(  stawnch 

are 

quaff 

father 

English  Sounds  Illustrated. 


Observe  that  in  the  following  examples  r  is  silent.     The  sym- 
bol most  commonly  used  to  represent  aa  is  ar. 

hard  parse  barb  marsh  gward 


card 
cart 
part 


parse 
farm 
darn 
harp 


pa?*k 
large 
ma?-ch 


marl 

starve 

heart 


cle?'k 

bazaars 

marred 


aa  in  unaccented  syllables. 

transgress  transform  sarcastic 

transcend  artizan  narcotic 

transcribe  artillery  contrast 

translate  partake  placard 

oe. 

Symbols  for  oe : — ur,  er,  ir,  or,  our,  ear,  yr,  urre,  erre,  irre,  eur, 
olo,  rid. 

Observe  that  in  all  these  examples  r  is  silent. 

turn.  firm  jowrney  purred  stirred 

hurt  dirt  earth  concurred.  amatewrs 

herd  wo?'d  learn  prefer?-ed  coZonel 

serve  work  myrtle  erred  Bri'dlington 

oe  in  unaccented  syllables. 

perverse  perturb  adverse 

pervert  fertility  pervert 

e. 

Symbols  for  e  : — a,  ai,  ea,  aa,  ae,  ao,  e-e. 


Mary 

paring 

scaring 

da/ry 

wearer 

wary 

baring 

barbarian 

fairy 

wearing 

vary 

daring 

vegetarian 

airing 

tearing 

chary 

caring 

grammarian 

pairing 

Aaron 

parent 

sparing 

gregarious 

fairest 

aerie 

rarest 

staring 

airy  • 

bearer 

aorist 

e  unaccented. 
whereon  therein 


The  Long  Vowelx. 


17 


ey. 


vy. 

Symbols  for  ey : — a-e,  a,  ai,  ay,  ah,  ei,  ey,  ea,  eh, 
aig,  aigh,  eig,  eigh,  aye,  eye,  eighe,  ait,  alf. 

f  C^tC  ~r\rt  An  +Ti/^?/  /»namynTr/Tfn/> 

gate 


ao    an    a-e 


they  champayne     played 

obey  campai'yn        obeyed 

great  straight          surveyed 

break  feiyn  weighed 

eh  weigh  neighed 

gaol  eight  trait 

gauge  aye  (ever)       halfpenny 

ey  unaccented. 

chaotic  namesake      cognate      railway  survey  (sbst.) 

earthquake      wholesale      detail         essay  billeidoux 


gale 

dale 

baker 

lady 

bass 

chaotic 


pam 

ram 

pay 

ray 

da/<lia 

vein 

veil 


Symbols  for  iy  : — ee,  ea,  e-e,  e,  ei,  ie,  i,  i-e,  se,  oe,  eo,  ey,  eye,  ui, 

uay,  e'e,  eh,  eig,  eigh,  egh,  aiu,  eau,  e-y,  is. 
feel             cedar         chagrm  key  seignory 

feet  fever         machine         keyed  Lei'y/i 

heat  ceiling       fati'gue  mosqiiito       Ley/* 

heave         niece         formula;          quay  Cams  College 

scene          relief        diarrhoea        e'en  Beazichamp 

theme         invalid      people  vehicle  Wemyss 


eternal 

equality 

precede 


chagrm  key 

machine  keyed 

fatigue  mosqiti'i 

formula;  quay 

diarrhea  e'en 

people  vehicle 

iy  unaccented. 

create  reality 

react  legality 

reunion  siesta 

6. 


concrete 

sortie 

debris 


Symbols  for  6  : — aw,  au,  a,  o,  ou,  augh,  awe,  ough,  oa,  oo,  ah, 
at,  ag,  augha,  or,  ore,  oar,  our,  ar,  arre,  oor,  aor,  oare, 
oure,  core,  eor. 


hazt'k 

walk 

toss 

trough 

broad 

fa?cn 

stalk 

frost 

aught 

flooring 

sawca 

la 

cost 

caught 

maulstick 

paitse, 

broth 

off 

awe 

bafman 

fall 

cloth 

soft 

thaired 

Maydalen  Coll. 

ball 

loss 

cowgh 

OK  glit 

\auglian. 

I.P. 

c 

18 


English  Sounds  Illustrated. 


Observe  that  in  the  following  examples  r  is  silent.    The  com- 
monest symbol  for  6  is  or. 

lord        fort          board      course      floors  poured 

cord       gored       hoard      warn        extraordinary   floored 
port       stored       court      warred     soared 


authority 

already 

portentous 


6  unaccented. 
portray  downfall 

foretell  import 

foresee  export 


George 

* 

landau 

exhortation 

importation 


ow. 


Symbols  for  ow : — o-e,  o,  oa,  ow,  ou,  owe,  oe,  oo,  ew,  ewe,  ough, 
oh,  eau,  eo,  au,  os,  aut,  ock. 


bone 

road 

owe 

SCIU 

yeoman 

vote 

bo?d 

rowed 

sciccd 

ha?fteur 

most 

growth 

woe 

though 

apropos 

folk 

so«l 

foe 

oh 

hautboy 

goat 

moiild 

brooch 

'beau, 

Coc&burn 

coincidence 


ow  unaccented. 

poetic  impost 


inmost 


Symbols  for  uw  : — oo,  u,  u-e,  ou,  ue,  ew,  ewe,  o,  o-e,  ui, 
ough,  oe,  ooe,  out,  oux,  eugh,  ougha. 

root 

cool 

truth 

prwdent 

rule 

plums 


brwtality 

For  the  combination  yuw,   abbreviated  and  written  y«,  see 
p.  23. 


woznid       streiccd 

frtw't 

surtout 

group 
true 
blue 
loreio 

"breiccd 
do 
tomb 
move 

"bruise 
rhettmatism 

through 

shoe 

billetdoMO? 
"Bmccleugh 

"Brougham 

creto 

approve 

wooed 

uw  unaccented. 

7 

prifdential 

judicial 

Ger  trade 

The  tiho)'t  Vowels. 


19 


THE  SHORT  VOWELS  ILLUSTRATED. 


a  is  always  unaccented. 

Symbols  for  a : — a,  ah,  e,  eh,  o,  o-e,  u,  ou,  ough,  gh,  ia,  aa,  oi, 
ro,  au,  oa,  ar,  er,  re,  or,  ur,  our,  yr,  uor,  uer,  ure,  are, 
ere,  oure,  yre,  uere,  oar,  oir,  uhar. 


.aloud 

portable 

tendency 

Europe 

•aside 

miracle 

expediency 

asylum 

mature 

mentally 

Nineveh 

vellwm 

balloon 

verbally 

waggon 

syrup 

moral 

legacy 

cannon 

stirrup 

mental 

litany 

wisdom 

enormous 

organ 

ascendancy 

phantom 

glorious 

grammarian 

villa 

idol 

jealowsy 

-canvas 

Bella 

carrot 

thorough 

carat 

ylmerica 

bullock 

Edinburgh 

.servant 

Saraft 

develop 

parliament 

distant 

verandah 

testimony 

Isaac 

guidance 

barren 

harmony 

torto/se 

balance 

moment 

geology 

iron 

ballast 

payment 

argosy 

^lt(gusta 

breakfast 

violence 

welcome 

meerschaum 

ornament 

experience 

Gladstone 

waistcoat 

•Observe  that  in  the  following  examples  >•  is  silent. 


sluggard 

understand 

martyrs 

entered 

standard 

interview 

liquors 

rnmourcd 

bulwark 

centred 

conquers 

martyred 

proverb 

comfort 

measured 

conquered 

modern 

stubborn 

ventitred 

cupboard 

exercise 

Saturday 

beggared 

avo/rdupois 

•entertain 

honours 

collared 

Urquhart 

20  English  Sounds  Illustrated, 


«e  almost  always  has  an  accent,  primary  or  secondary. 
Symbols  for  oe  :  —  u,  o,  o-e,  ou,  oo,  oe,  ow. 

n«t  son  dove  flood 

drtck  money  touch  does 

dust  come  ro^gh  ro?rlock 


oe  ic ith  secondary  accent, 
unjust  uproot  teacup  humb«g: 

ce  unaccented. 
hubbztb       pzmctilit}-       pugnacious       d??ctility       ?/lterior 

se. 

Symbols  for  ae : — a,  a-e,  ua,  ai,  e,  ae. 

man  bade  plaAl  thresh 

have  gttarantee       plait  Gaelic 

a»  unaccented. 
alpaca          ambassador          compact  (sb.)         abstract  (sb.) 

e. 

S}rmbols  for  e  : — e,  ea,  a,  a-e,  u,  ai,  ei,  ie,  eo,  ue,  ay,  ey,  «e,  ava 

get  any  said  leopard  says 

red  many  le/sure  Geoffrey  Reynard 

head  ate  he/fer  g?ress  fVptid 

bread  b?a-}-  fr/end  gz^est  Abergarenny 

e  unaccented. 

precept  stipend  sensation  mendacity 

insect  index  vexation  pestiferous 

i. 

Symbols  for  i: — i,  i-e,  y,  e,  o,  u,  ie,  ee,  ui,  ai,  hi,  oa,  ive,  eo,  e-e, 
a-e,  ia,  ia-e,  u-e,  ei,  ey,  ea,  eig,  ('),  ehea,  ewi-e,  ois,  uy.. 
oi,  igh,  ay,  ieu. 

f/t  hzymn  women  bz«/ld  groats 

b/d  nymph          b?^sy  gif/lt  fYvepence 

g/ve          pretty  s/eve  Samt  John     Theobald 

live          jEngland        breeches        exhibit  Te/ynmouth 


The  Short  Vowels. 


21 


i  unaccented. 

•d/sturb 

mischief 

Samt  Paul 

lett?ice 

forehead 

plentiful 

Bessie 

college 

forfeit 

housewife 

restive 

cherries 

courage 

pulley 

chamois 

plenty 

coffee 

village 

donkey 

plaguy 

remain 

circuit 

landscape 

guinea 

Denbigh 

clrceive 

biscK/t 

miniature 

foreign 

Jervoi's 

minded 

captam 

marr/age 

sovereign 

Rothsay 

churches 

fountain 

carriage 

James's 

Beaul/ett 

o. 

Symbols  for  o : — e,  a,  an,  ou,  ow,  ho,  o-e,  o-ue. 

hot  want  fault          hough  honour 

rod  salt  va?dt          Glo?tcester        shone 

watch        halter  laitrel         knowledge         pedagogic 

o  unaccented. 
prosperity         hostility         ostensible         prostration 

o'. 

o'  is  always  unaccented. 
'.Symbols  for  o' : — o,  ow,  oe,  owe,  ough,  6t,  aoh,  olqu. 

omit  protect  elocution  folkrning  furlo^y/i 

obey  motto  invocation  follower  depof 

molest  hero  wido^c  heroes  Pharao/j 

provide  heroine  follow  follo?ced  Co/<y?dioun 


Symbols  for  u  : — u,  oo,  ou,  o,  or,  o-e. 


p?(t 

bwlfinch 

book 

pitss 
p?«sh 

foot 
soot 

nook 
cook 

'b/csh 
pwll 
bull 

good 
wood 
wool 

shook 
rook 
look 

full 

hood 

hook 

pulpit 

stood 

brook 

crook 
could 
wo?dd 


wolf 
woman 
worsted 
Bolinsbroke 


22  English  Sound*  Illustrated. 

u  unaccented. 

iulnl  manhood  inferential 

wilfwl  childhood  instrwment 

painfwl  into  prejudice 

For  the  combination  yu  see  p.  23. 

THE  DIPHTHONGS  ILLUSTRATED. 

ai. 

Symbols  for  ai : — i,  i-e,  y,  y-e,  ie,  ye,  ig,  igh,  ighe,  eigh,  ui,  ui-e. 


kind 

try 

tie 

sigh 

guile 

mmd 

fly 

die 

sighed 

buy 

fibre 

cycle 

dye 

height 

aisl& 

tile 

type 

sign 

sleight 

eying: 

dine 

style 

tight 

gifi'ding 

eye 

ai  unaccented. 

idea 

migration 

vivacious 

itinerate 

organization 

/rate 

minute 

qiii'escent 

identical 

outli'ne 

au. 

Symbols  for  au  : — ou,  ow,  owe,  ough,  oughe,  hou,  aou,  o,  eo. 

hoi^se         co?d  voiced  plough  caoutchouc- 

do?fbt        no?f  boired  ploi(^//ed  compter 

honi          ho?c  hough          hour  Macleodi 

au  unaccented, 
hoicever. 

oi. 

Symbols  for  oi : — oi,  oy,  oye,  uoi,  uoy,  uoye,  eoi. 

bo/1  boy  annoyed  quoit  huoyid 

coin          toy  destroyed          buoy  bourgeo/s* 

oi  unaccented. 
turmoil  envoy 


Illustrated. 


23 


Symbols  for  yu: — u-e,  u,  ue,  ni,  eu,  oeu,  ew,  yu,  you  ieu,  lew, 
yew,  eau,  ewe,  iewe,  hu,  xih,  ug,  ugh,  ughe,  eo,  ueue,  ua, 
eve. 


unite 


due 

few 

yew 

cue 

peic 

beauty 

Tuesday 

yule 

ewe 

suit 

you 

bedewed 

feud 

youth 

vieiced 

eulogy 

lieu 

Jmraonr 

mance?fvre      vieic 

buhl 

yu  unaccented. 

be 

gradual 

absohttc 

rp 

tortwous 

resohtte 

itlar 

vahfable 

virt?«- 

cate 

tribute 

value 

qiicuc 

manti^amaker 

Leveson-G-ower 


static 

mildezr 

curlew 


R  ILLUSTRATED. 
It  after  the  Long  Vowels  and  the  Diphthongs  ea,  ia,  oa,  ua. 

Examples  of  words  in  which  r  is  silent,  though  written  in 
our  ordinary  spelling,  have  been  given  above  in  the  illustrations 
of  the  vowels  aa,  oe,  o  and  a,  but  the  sound  of  r  may  be  heard 
in  all  the  examples  which  follow.  For  illustrations  showing 
how  different  forms  of  the  same  word  may  have  r  silent  [or 
sounded,  see  p.  34. 

aar. 

aar  final,  pronounced  aa  when  not  followed  by  a  vowel  in 
the  next  word,  but  written  full  length. 

are    (aar)  mar  far  spar 

par    (paar)  tar  czar  star 

bar    (baar)  car  jar  scar 


aar  final  and  unaccented. 
memoir  (memwaar) 


reservoir  (rezavwaar) 


English  Sounds  Illustrated. 


aar  followed  by  a  vowel. 

starry  (staari) 
jarring  (jaaring) 


marring  (maaring) 
debarring  (dibaaring) 


oer. 


oer  final,  pronounced  oe  when  not  followed  by  a  vowel  in 
the  next  word,  but  written  full  length. 

fur  (foer)  spur          her  sir  purr 

bur  (boer)          slur  prefer       fir  err 

cur  (koer)          blur  deter         stir  were 


oer  followed  by  a  vowel. 

furry  (foeri) 
spurring  (spoering) 


stirring  (stoering) 
erring  (oering) 


er,  ear  and  ea. 

er.     Always  followed  by  a  vowel. 

Mary  (Meri)         fairy  (feri)         wearing  (wering) 

For  other  examples,  see  p.  16. 

ear  final,  pronounced  ea  when  not  followed  by  a  vowel  in 
the  next  word,  but  written  full  length. 

Symbols  for  ear  : — are,  air,  ear,  ere,  eir,  aver,  ayor,  eyre, 
e'er. 

f  stare 
)  stair 

scare 

snare 
I  sware 
(  swear 


(  pare       ( tare 
«!  pair       i  tear 


( pear  dare 

f bare  care 

(  bear  (  ware 

/  mare  {  wear 

(  mayor  share 

ear  final  unaccented. 
welfare  horsehair 


f  fair 
1  fare 
rare 
yare 
\  hare 
I  hair 
spare 


square 


somewhere 


blare 

lair 

glare 
flare 

chair 
where 

/air 
I  ere 

f  there 
'!  their 

]  heir 
V  eyre 

prayer 
ne'er 

nowhere 


ea  medial,  the  sound  of  r  following  it  having  disappeared. 


R  Illustrated.  25 

Symbols  for  ea: — are,  air,  ear,  ere,  eir,  ayer,  ayor,  ar,  aire. 

•cares    (keaz)          wherefore  (wheafor)        mayors  (meaz) 
stairs  (steaz)      .    theirs        (dheaz)  scarce     (skeas) 

pears    (peaz)          prayers      (preaz)  aired      (ead) 

eyar  and  eya. 

Very  rare.     Exx. : — 

layer  (leyar)  layers  (leyaz) 

player  (pleyar)  players  (pleyaz) 

iar. 

The  combination  iyr  does  not  exist  in  our  language,  the  long 
vowel  iy  being  always  changed  into  the  diphthong  ia  by  r 
following. 

iar  final,  pronounced  ia  when  not  followed  by  a  vowel  in 
the  next  word,  but  written  full  length. 

( peer         veer           leer            queer  rear  blear 

(  pier       ( sear            cheer       ("  tear  drear  clear 

( beer      <  seer           jeer         (.  tier  C  hear  mere 

(  bier       ( sere            freer          near  (.  here  sphere 

( deer      ( sheer         steer          gear  spear  C  we're 

(  dear      (.  shear         sneer          fear  smear  ( weir 

iar  final  unaccented. 

compeer  reindeer  headgear 

iar  folloiccd  by  a  voiccl. 

cheery         cheering         hearing         hearer         dearest 
weary          steering         clearing        clearer        merest 

ia  medial — no  sound  of  r  following.  Note  that  in  a  few 
cases  r  is  not  written  in  our  ordinary  spelling. 

Symbols  for  ia : — eer,  ear,  ere,  ier,  eir,  eere,  eare,  ea,  eu. 
peers  beard  tiers  veered  real  theatre 
cheers  spheres  weird  feared  ideal  museum 

ia  unaccented. 

compeers  greybeard 

ia  final. 

idea  panacea 


26  English  Sounds  Illustrated. 

or,  oar  and  oa. 

or  final.  Rare.  Pronounced  o  when  not  followed  by  a 
vowel  in  the  next  word,  but  written  full  length.  Exx.  :  — 

or  nor  for  your 

or  final  unaccented. 

therefore  lessor  vendor  guarantor 

or  followed  by  a  vowel. 

story         chorus         boring         soaring         pouring 
glory        porous         storing        roaring         flooring 

oar  final,  pronounced  oa  when  not  followed  by  a  vowel  in 
the  next  word,  but  written  full  length. 

Symbols  for  oar  : — ore,  oar,  our,  oor,  uor,  or,  oer,  awer. 

ore  core 

pore          gore 

bore         wore 

more        fore 

tore          sore 

oa  final  occurs  in 

Noah  boa 

oar  medial  does  not  occur  in  my  pronunciation. 

owar  and  owa. 

Very  rare.     Exx.:  — 

lower     (lowar)  lowering  (lowaring) 

rower    (rowar)  lowers       (lowaz) 

mower  (mowar)  lowered     (lowad) 

uar  and  ua. 

The  combination  u\vr  never  occurs  in  English,  the  long; 
vowel  uw  being  always  changed  into  the  diphthong  ua  by  r 
following. 

uar  final,  pronounced  ua  when  not  followed  by  a  vowel  in 
the  next  word,  but  written  full  length. 

poor  sure  truer  doer 

moor  tour  brewer  wooer 


shore 

store 

roar 

floor 

lore 

swore 

hoar 

fluor 

yore 
score 

oar 
boar 

pour 
four 

corps 
o'er 

snore 

soar 

door 

drawer 

R  after  the  Short  Vowel*. 


followed  by  a  vowel. 

poorest  tourist  boorish  assuring 

surest  touring  mooring  pleurisy 

ua  medial — no  sound  of  r  following.     Notice  that  in  a  few 
cases  r  is  not  written  in  our  ordinary  spelling. 

Symbols  for  ua  : — oor,  ure,  our,  ewer,  oer,  over,  oore,  ue,  via, 

boors        assured         brewers        wooers        fluent 
moors       gourd  doers  moored        truant 

It     AFTER   THE   SHORT   VOWELS. 

ar. 

ar  is  always  unaccented. 

ar  final,  pronounced  a  when  not  followed  by  a  vowel  in  the 
next  word,  but  written  full  length. 

seller 
baker 


beggar 
collar 


gramma?-    runner 
cellar          reader 


cent?-e 

leisure 

martr/r 

metre 
sailor 
tailor 

measwe 
honour 
labour 

conqwer 
liqwor 
Chesh/re- 

ar  followed 

by  a  voifd. 

around 

marine 

mystery 

inventory 

aright 

nan-ate 

gallery 

swr?-ound 

arrest 

library 

generous 

surrender 

baronial 

contrary 

interrupt 

injury 

parental 

solitary 

history 

armoury 

oer. 

aer. 

er. 

ir. 

hurry 

many 

merry 

miracle 

curry 

tarry 

error 

irritate 

currant 

carr}r 

peril 

myriad 

worry 

carrot 

unaccented. 

unaccented. 

nourish 

perennial 

irascible 

irrational 

miraculous 

r?-ection 

'28  English  Sounds  Illustrated. 


or. 

o'r. 

nr. 

sorry 
horrid 

unaccented. 

voracious 

courier 
unaccented. 

forehead 
majority 

adoration 
aborigines 

adjuration 
Imrrah 

quarry 

R  final  never  occurs  after  any  short  vowel  except  a. 

R  AFTER  THE  TRIPHTHONGS  iiia,  aim,  oia,  yua,  AND  THE 
DIPHTHONGS  ai,  yu. 

aiar,  aia  and  air. 

In  all  the  following  examples  r  final  is  silent  unless  followed 
•by  a  vowel  in  the  next  word,  but  it  is  written  in  every  case. 

aiar  final. 

fire  tire  pyi'e  buyer  briar 

mire  wire  higher  liar  prior 

hire  lyre  crier  friar  choir 

uiar  followed  by  a  vowel. 

miry  fiery  tiring  hiring 

aia  followed  by  a  consonant.     No  sound  of  r. 

tired         hired         fires         buyers         trial         denial 
only  in  unaccented  syllables.     Rare. 

/rate  /ronical 

v 
auar  and  ana. 


auar  final. 

our              flour              tower 

shower 

sour            flower            power 

plougher 

auar  folio  iced  by  a  voice!  . 

sourest                 flowering 

towering 

floury                   showery 

overpowering 

aua  followed  by  a  consonant.     No  sound  of  r. 

hours         towers         soured         flowered,  allowance 


R  after  Triphthongs.  29> 

oyar  and  oya. 

These  are  very  rare. 

oyar  final. 

destroyer  employer 

oya  before  a  consonant.     No  sound  of  r. 

destroyers  employers  loyal 

yuar,  yua  and   yur. 

yuar  final. 

pure        lure         cure         ewer         sewer         fewer 

yuar  followed  by  a  rowel. 

purest  luring  curing  enduring 

yua  followed  by  a  consonant.     No  sound  of  r. 

lured  cured  cures  sewers  dual' 

yur  only  in  unaccented  syllables.     Rare, 
'dzwation  penztry 


III. 

ENGLISH  ANALYSIS. 

THE  CONSONANTS. 

It  is  convenient  to  begin  with  the  study  of  the  consonants, 
because  they  are  more  easily  described  and  classified  than  the 
vowels. 

Consonants  are  formed  by  stopping  or  squeezing  the  breath 
.after  it  has  left  the  larynx,  except  in  the  case  of  the  sound  h, 
and  the  glottal  stop,  used  in  German.  These  are  formed  by 
squeezing  or  stopping  the  breath  in  the  larynx  itself. 

There  is  no  sharp  line  of  demarcation  between  consonants 
.-and  vowels. 

The  English  consonants  are  twenty-three  in  number,  besides 
t  Le  two  composite  consonants  ch  and  j.  So  as  our  alphabet 
does  not  furnish  a  symbol  for  each  of  them,  we  employ  the  six 
•digraphs  ng,  wh,  th,  illi,  sh  and  zh,  each  of  which  combina- 
tions represents  a  single  sound,  unless  the  letters  are  separated 
by  a  hyphen.  The  hyphen  is  used  in  such  words  as  engage. 
,out-housc,  mishap  (in-geyj,  aut-haus,  mis-hsep),  and  the  like,  to 
indicate  that  each  letter  is  to  be  sounded  separately. 

Names  of  the  Consonants.  It  is  necessary  in  studying 
the  consonants,  to  practise  sounding  them  alone,  without  any 
vowel ;  but  in  class  teaching,  and  whenever  we  speak  of  the 
consonants,  we  want  some  names  that  are  distinctly  audible. 
;So  they  should  be  called  pa,  l»a,  and  so  on,  as  in  the  words 
parental,  balloon,  the  following  vowel  being  sotmded  as  gently 
.as  possible. 

One  of  the  names  will  be  found  difficult,  and  will  require  a 
Httle  practice,  namely  nga,  for  in  English  iig  is  never  met 


The  Stops.  31 

with  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  or  syllable,  though  it  occurs 
at  the  beginning  of  words  in  other  languages,  as  for  instance  in 
the  names  of  certain  places  in  New  Zealand. 

Imitate  -ngcr,  the  conclusion  of  the  word  singer,  taking  care 
not  to  pronounce  the  double  sound  ngg,  as  in  finger,  which  is 
written  phonetically  finggar. 

The  Consonants  classified.  Stops  and  Continuants. 
(Refer  to  the  table  on  p.  ii.)  It  has  been  stated  above  that  in 
forming  consonants  the  breath  is  stopped  or  squeezed,  and  the 
difference  between  stopping  and  squeezing  the  breath  is  very 
obvious  when  we  compare  the  six  stops,  p,  b,  t,  d,  k,  g,  with 
any  of  the  continuants,  for  instance  with  s  and  sh.  We  can 
prolong  s  and  sh  as  long  as  we  please,  for  the  passage  through 
the  mouth  is  not  completely  closed,  and  the  breath  issues  from 
it  all  the  while  ;  but  in  forming  the  six  stops  it  is  entirely 
closed,  and  opened  again  with  an  explosion.  So  they  are 
sometimes  called  shut  or  explosive  consonants,  whilst  such 
consonants  as  s  and  sh  are  called  continuants. 

THE  STOPS. 

Lip,  point  and  back  Consonants.  The  six  stops  may  / 
be  classified  according  to  the  place  where  the  breath  is  stopped. 
In  the  lip  stops  p  and  b  it  is  stopped  by  closing  the  lips,  in  the 
point  stops  t  and  d,  by  the  point  of  the  tongue  touching  the 
iipper  gums,  and  in  the  back  stops  k  and  g,  by  the  back  of  the 
tongue  touching  the  soft  palate.  These  three  classes  of  con- 
sonants are  sometimes  called  labial,  dental  and  guttural. 

Hard  and  soft  Consonants.  The  consonants  p,  t  and 
k  are  called  hard,  whilst  b,  d  and  g  are  called  soft,  because  in 
p,  t  and  k  there  is  a  more  forcible  explosion  of  the  breath.  But 
this  is  not  the  most  important  point  of  difference  bet  ween  these 
two  classes  of  consonants.  The  essential  difference  can  be 
more  easily  appreciated  if  we  study  some  of  the  open  con- 
sonants or  continuants.  Take  for  instance  s  or  z  and  prolong 
them.  The  sound  of  s,  or  hissing,  is  evidently  formed  by 
the  breath  in  the  mouth.  But  in  the  prolonged  z  or  buzzing,  a 
faint  sound  of  voice,  formed  in  the  larynx,  is  distinctly  heard 


32  English  Analysis. 

at  the  game  time.  And  the  same  thing  may  be  very  well  ob- 
served in  prolonging  f  and  v.  Also  if  f  be  suddenly  stopped 
there  is  silence,  but  on  stopping  v  we  clearly  hear  a  vowel 
sound  like  the  cr  in  beaver  or  a  in  variety.  Again,  if  we  try 
to  prolong  b,  a  faint  sound  is  heard ;  but  if  we  attempt  to  pro- 
long p,  there  is  no  sound  whatever  till  the  lips  part  with  a 
sudden  explosion. 

But  perhaps  the  most  convincing  experiment  of  all  is  to  pro- 
long z  or  v,  or  any  one  of  the  soft  continuants,  whilst  the  ears 
are  stopped.  The  buzzing  sound  formed  in  the  larynx  Avill  then 
be  heard  very  clearly  indeed,  as  a  loud  noise,  whilst  it  is  alto- 
gether absent  in  the  corresponding  hard  consonants,  s  and  f. 

The  essential  difference  between  the  hard  and  soft  con- 
sonants is,  therefore,  that  the  hard  consonants  are  simply 
formed  by  the  breath,  whilst  in  the  soft  consonants  there  is 
a  faint  sound  of  voice.  They  are  midway  between  the  con- 
sonants and  the  vowels.  And  although  the  names  hard  and 
soft  sound  best,  and  are  most  convenient  for  general  use,  the 
two  classes  are  more  accurate!}7  described  as  breathed^  or  voice- 
less and  voiced  consonants. 

It  is  of  great  importance  to  realize  very  distinctly  the 
difference  between  voiced  and  voiceless  consonants,  for  it  at 
once  furnishes  a  key  to  several  sounds  which  do  not  exist  u\ 
English,  e.g.  to  the  German  eh  in  /c/j,  which  is  a  voiceless  y,  to 
the  French  voiceless  1  and  r,  and  even  to  the  terrible  Welsh  11. 
which  is  only  a  voiceless  1,  and  presents  no  difficulty  to  those- 
who  have  learnt  this  secret. 

To  sum  up,  we  may  distinguish  the  six  stops  as  follows : — 

1.  The  hard  lip  stop,  p. 

2.  The  soft    „       „     b. 

3.  The  hard  point,,      t. 

4.  The  soft      „     „     d. 

5.  The  hard  back  „     k. 
0.  The  soft      „     „     g. 


The  Liquids. 


33 


THE  LIQUIDS. 

The  Nasal  Consonants.    We  have  in  English  three  nasal 

consonants,  the  lip  nasal  in,  the  point  nasal  n,  and  the  back 
nasal  ng.  They  resemble  the  stops  in  having  the  mouth  aperture 
completely  closed,  and  correspond  exactly  with  the  lip,  point 
and  back  stops  respectively  as  to  the  place  of  closure.  Like 
the  soft  stops  &,  d  and  g,  they  are  voiced. 

There  is  only  this  difference  between  them  and  the  soft  stops, 
that  the  passage  through  the  nose  is  left  open,  the  soft  palate 
being  lowered  so  as  to  allow  the  breath  to  pass  up  behind  it 
and  escape  through  the  nostrils.  It  is  therefore  possible  to 
prolong  them.  A  cold  in  the  head,  by  stopping  up  the  nose 
passage,  makes  it  difficult  to  pronounce  the  nasals,  so  that  we 
are  apt  to  substitute  for  them  the  corresponding  soft  stops  6,  d 
and  g. 

The  back  nasal  \  «*  and  the  symbol  \(M  in  ordinary 
spelling.  To  prevent  confusion  between  the  back  nasal  ng 
in  sing,  singer,  and  the  symbol  ng,  which  in  ordinary 
spelling  has  various  uses,  it  will  be  well  to  refer  to  the  exx.  of 
n  used  for  ng  on  p.  12,  and  to  observe  that  in  ordinary 
spelling  nk  always  has  the  value  ngk,  whilst  ng  has  four 
different  values,  namely  ng,  ngg,  n-g  and  nj.  Examples:  — 


=  ngk      ng—ng       ng  —  ngg        ng  =  n-g 


ng  —  nj 


ink 

sing 

finger 

engage 

strange 

sink 

singer 

anger 

engrave 

hinge 

think 

singing 

hunger 

ungraceful 

lounging 

thank 

hang 

longest 

penguin 

danger 

tinker 

hanging 

angry 

plunging 

monkey     long 


anguish 


donkey      longing        language 


congestion 
ungenerous 


The  Side  Consonant  It  is  generally  formed  by  closing 
the  breath  passage  in  the  centre  with  the  point  of  the  tongue 
against  the  upper  gums,  and  letting  the  breath  escape  at  the 
two  sides,  so  that  the  stream  of  breath  is  divided,  and  it  is  often 
called  a  divided  consonant.  But  some  persons,  myself  among 

I.  P.  D 


34  English  Analysis. 

the  number,  let  the  breath  escape  on  one  side  only,  so  it  seems 
better  to  call  it  a  lateral  or  side  consonant. 

The  English  1  is  voiced,  but  voiceless  1  occurs  in  French  and 
in  Welsh. 

The  Trilled  Consonant  R.  The  letter  r  will  be  discussed 
'in  connexion  with  the  vowels  (see  pp.  55-62),  but  two  important 
points  concerning  it  must  be  noticed  here  by  anticipation. 

1.  In  many  words  which  in  our  ordinary  spelling  are  written 
with  r,  we  hear  a  vowel  sound,  like  the  a  in  attend,  villa, 
which   must   not  be  mistaken  for  the  consonant  r.      This  is 
clearly  heard  in  boor,  near,  fire,  our,  which  may  be  compared 
with  boot,  neat,  fight ,  out. 

2.  The  consonant  r  is  never  heard  unless  a  vowel  follows  in 
the  same  or  in  the  next  word.     So  r  is  sounded  in  rat,  tree, 
merry,  sorry,  poor  old  man,  dear  Annie,  never  ending,  far  off", 
but  silent  in  poor  child,  dear  me,  never  mind,  far  distant. 

English  r,  like  the  point  continuants,  is  formed  with  the 
point  of  the  tongue  against  the  roots  of  the  teeth.  The  action 
of  the  tongue  in  forming  it  may  be  understood  by  observing 
how  it  is  possible,  by  blowing  on  the  lips,  as  babies  sometimes 
do,  to  make  them  vibrate,  so  that  the  breath  passage  is  alter- 
nately open  and  shut.  This  is  a  trill  on  the  lips.  The  point 
of  the  tongue  can  be  made  to  vibrate  in  like  manner,  which 
produces  a  prolonged  r,  and  the  uvula  also  can  be  trilled,  this 
being  the  way  in  which  r  is  pronounced  by  the  Parisians,  and 
in  many  parts  of  France  and  Germany. 

It  has  been  asserted  that  English  r  is  not  a  trill,  but  a  simple 
continuant.  Certainly  in  pronouncing  it  we  do  not  repeatedly 
open  and  close  the  breath  passage,  but  I  think  it  may  safely 
be  affirmed  that  it  is  blown  open  just  once,  there  being  the 
same  sort  of  flapping  movement  as  in  a  prolonged  trill,  but  not 
repeated.  For  English  children  who  find  it  difficult  to  pro- 
nounce r  can  learn  to  do  so  by  practising  first  a  prolonged  trill 
with  the  point  of  the  tongue ;  so  the  name  trill  does  not  seem 
unsuitable. 

English  r  is  voiced,  but  voiceless  r  occurs  in  French. 

The  Liquids.  The  nasals  ni,  n  and  ng,  with  1  and  r,  are 
commonly  called  liquids,  and  it  is  convenient  to  retain  this 


The  Continuants.  35 

name  and  to  regard  them  as  one  group,  intermediate  between 
the  stops  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  continuants  on  the  other,  for 
they  have  two  characteristics  in  common.  (1)  They  partially 
obstruct  the  breath  passage,  not  closing  it  entirely  like  the 
stops,  nor  leaving  a  free  channel  for  it  through  the  mouth,  like 
the  continuants.  And  (2)  they  combine  very  readily  with 
other  consonants. 

THE  CONTINUANTS. 

We  have  observed  that,  in  the  English  stops  and  liquids,  the 
place  of  closure  in  the  mouth  is  either  the  lips,  the  point  of  the 
tongue  against  the  upper  gums,  or  the  back  of  the  tongue 
against  the  soft  palate.  But  the  English  continuants  are  formed 
in  six  different  places.  Beginning,  as  before,,  with  those  which 
are  formed  by  the  lips,  and  arranging  them  in  order  according 
to  the  place  of  formation,  we  have  six  classes  of  continuants, 
namely,  lip,  lip-teeth,  point-teeth,  point,  palatal,  and  glottal 
continuants. 

We  have  no  back  continuants  in  English,  but  they  exist  in 
German,  the  hard  back  continuant  being  heard  in  "  ac/t "  and 
the  corresponding  soft  sound  in  "  Wa</en." 

The  tip  Continuants  WH  and  W.  These  sounds  differ 
from  one  another  simply  in  that  wh  is  hard  or  breathed,  whilst 
w  is  soft  or  voiced.  The  sound  wh  occurs  only  at  the  beginning 
of  words,  and  many  persons — most  southerners  indeed — never 
use  this  sound,  but  substitute  for  it  the  voiced  consonant  w. 
They  pronounce  ichcn  like  wen,  ichale  like  icail,  and  so  on. 
But  those  who  generally  omit  this  sound  may  sometimes  be 
heard  to  utter  it  in  an  emphatic  "tchere?" 

"Wh  and  w  are  not  simple  lip  continuants.  We  meet  with 
these  in  German  "Q^elle,"  and  south  German  "TPesen."  In  the 
English  wli  and  w  the  lips  and  tongue  take  the  same  position 
as  in  the  back-round  vowel  uw  (oo  in  pool),  that  is  to  say,  the 
lips  are  rounded,  not  opened  as  a  slit,  but  with  the  corners 
drawn  together,  and  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  raised  towards 
the  soft  palate.  So  they  may  be  called  back-round  continuants. 
See  pp.  42  f. 


36  English  Analysis. 

In  ordinary  spelling  it  is  the  rule  to  use  u  for  the  sound  w  after  q 
and  g.  Exx.  of  u  pronounced  as  w  : — quench,  quick,  queen,  anguish, 
language,  persuade. 

The  reason  why  qu  stands  for  kw  is  that  it  is  borrowed  from  Latin, 
and  u  is  the  Latin  symbol  for  w.  So  Lat.  ulnum  became  Eiig.  wine. 

The  Lip-teeth  Continuants  F  and  %'.  These  form 
a  pair  of  hard  and  soft  consonants.  Both  are  produced  by 
pressing  the  lower  lip  against  the  upper  teeth,  so  that  the 
stream  of  breath  passes  between  the  teeth. 

The  Point-teeth  Continuants  Til  and  D1I.  Refer 
to  the  examples  given  on  p.  13.  These  sounds  are  formed  by 
placing  the  point  of  the  tongue  against  the  edges  of  the  upper 
teeth,  so  that  the  breath  passes  between  the  teeth,  as  it  does 
in  f  and  v.  The  difficulty  which  foreigners  and  young 
children  often  find  in  producing  these  sounds  may  be  overcome 
by  observing  their  mechanism,  which  is  really  very  simple. 
It  is  however,  generally  very  difficult  for  the  ear  to  distinguish 
sounds  which  have  not  been  acquired  in  infancy  or  childhood, 
so  that  these  sounds  are  liable  to  be  mistaken  for  f  and  v,  or  .s 
and  z,  by  foreigners  who  have  not  been  carefully  taught,  even 
after  a  long  residence  in  England ;  and  the  same  mistakes  are 
often  made  by  young  English  children. 

The  distinction  between  the  hard  or  breathed  th  in  "  f/nstle," 
"  ether,"  "sheaM,"  and  the  soft  or  voiced  dh  in  "this,"  "either,'' 
"  sheathe."  is  just  the  same  as  the  difference  between  f  and  v 
or  any  other  pair  of  hard  and  soft  consonants,  though  the  fact 
may  be  overlooked,  as  we  use  the  same  symbol  th  for  them  both. 

There  are  many  instances  in  which  we  end  a  noun  with  th, 
and  the  corresponding  verb  with  dh,  wrhilst  the  plural  noun 
ends  in  dhz,  just  as  f  is  changed  into  v  in  similar  cases. 
Examples : — 

f  V  VZ 

thief  thieve  thieves 

shelf  shelve  shelves 

th  dh  dhz 

wreath       wreathe       wreaths 
bath         bathe         baths 


The  Continuants.  37 

The  Point  Continuants  S  and  Z.  These  are  formed 
by  placing  the  point  of  the  tongue  close  to  the  upper  gums ; 
but  they  differ  from  t  and  d,  in  that  the  tongue  does  not  quite 
touch  the  gums.  A  little  channel  is  left  for  the  breath.  S  is 
the  most  clearly  audible  of  all  the  consonants,  and  can  be 
distinctly  heard  without  any  vowel,  as  in  hissing,  or  in  the 
French  and  German  pst. 

The  only  difference  between  s  and  z  is  that  z  is  voiced  and 
s  is  not.  Our  frequent  use  of  the  symbol  s  for  the  sound  z  is 
confusing,  and  obscures  the  fact  that  we  have  two  different 
plural  terminations  where  to  the  eye  there  is  but  one,  e.g.  in 
cats,  s,  and  in  dogs,  z.  See  further  on  pp.  63,  64. 

The  Point  Continuants  §H  and  XII.  The  forma- 
tion of  sh,  and  of  the  corresponding  voiced  consonant  zh, 
is  very  differently  explained  by  different  writers.  If  I  had 
regard  to  English  only,  I  should  venture  to  call  them  Blade 
Continuants,  as  being  formed  not  only  with  the  point  of  the 
tongue,  but  with  the  blade  as  well,  but  they  seem  to  be 
differently  formed  in  different  languages.  The  blade  is  the 
part  of  the  tongue  immediately  behind  the  point.  In  forming 
them  I  myself,  and  I  believe  English  people  generally,  raise 
the  blade  as  well  as  the  point,  and  draw  the  tongue  a  little 
further  back  than  for  s  and  z. 

S,  z,  sh  and  zh  are  commonly  called  sibilants,  on  account  of 
their  hissing  sound.  Observe  that  zh  is  the  same  as  French  j 
in  je. 

It  S3ems  pretty  clear  that  English  people  in  general  fonu  sh  and  zh 
as  I  do,  with  the  blade  of  the  tongue,  so  that  they  are  further  back 
than  s  or  z,  because  when  the  point-sounds  s  or  z  are  followed  by  the 
sounds  i  or  y,  formed  with  the  middle  of  the  tongue,  the  s  or  z  is 
transformed  into  sh  or  zh,  and  the  i  or  y  frequently  disappears.  In 
such  cases  there  is  evidently  a  compromis?,  and  the  tongue  has  un- 
consciously taken  an  intermediate  position,  between  that  for  s  or  z  on 
the  one  hand,  and  1  and  y  on  the  other. 

We  have  examples  of  this  change  in  common  endings  -sion  and  -clal, 
for  the  endings  of  such  works  as  mission,  vision,  social  are  pronounced 
-sJian,  -zhan  and  -slial. 

The  S3und  zh  was  noticed  in  English  as  far  back  as  the  year  1688 
(Sweet,  Hist,  of  English  Sounds,  p.  267),  and  Prof.  Skeat  says  that  in 
pleasure  and  leisure  it  is  still  older. 


38  English  Analysis. 

The  Soft  Palatal  Continuant  Y.  We  form  y  by 
raising  the  middle,  technically  called  the  front,  of  the  tongue, 
and  bringing  it  near  the  hard  palate.  The  tongue  is  in  fact 
for  a  moment  in  the  same  position  as  for  the  vowel  iy.  In 
some  words  the  distinction  between  y  and  the  short  vowel  i 
is  not  very  clearly  marked. 

There  are  many  common  endings,  such  as  -ion,  -ious,  in  which 
i  is  sometimes  silent,  or  it  may  be  pronounced  as  y  or  as  i. 
After  r,  it  is  generally  pronounced  as  i.  Exx. : — 

Silent  i.  ^  =  y                     i'  =  i. 

grac/ous  bih'ous  victorious 

motion  onion  criterion 

judicial  labzal  material 

The  corresponding  hard  or  breathed  consonant,  which  is  similar  to 
the  German  ich  sound,  is  said  to  be  heard  occasionally  in  such  English 
words  as  hue,  human,  and  pure  ^hyu,  hyuman,  pyuar). 

The  Glottal  Continuant  H.  Some  persons  do  not 
reckon  h,  or  the  glottal  stop  ('),  as  consonants,  because  they 
are  not  formed  in  the  super-glottal  passages,  but  in  the  glottis 
itself,  that  is,  in  the  opening  between  the  vocal  chords.  But 
they  do  not  seem  to  differ  essentially  from  the  other  conso- 
nants, h  being  formed  by  squeezing  the  breath  in  the  glottis, 
and  (')  by  stopping  it  there,  just  as  the  other  consonants  are 
formed  by  squeezing  or  stopping  it  after  it  has  left  the 
larynx. 

The  opening  of  the  glottis  for  the  formation  of  h  is  shown 
in  diagram  IV.  2  on  p.  xv. 

The  Composite  Consonants  CII  and  .1.  It  is  not 
difficult  to  hear  that  each  of  these  is  composed  of  two  sounds 
— that  eh  =  t,  sh,  and  j=d,  zh.  Dr.  Murray  calls  them  con- 
sonantal diphthongs.  In  the  phonograph  the  succession  of 
sounds  can  be  reversed,  so  that  eh  is  heard  as  sh,  t. 

In  ordinary  spelling  we  sometimes  symbolise  the  first  part 
of  these  composite  consonants  correctly,  using  tch  for  ch  and 
dy  or  dye  for  j,  as  in  "  fe£c/j,"  "judgment,"  "edge"  and  we 
never  use  _/  at  the  end  of  a  word,  either  gc  or  dye  being  put 
for  it,  as  in  "  change,"  "  hin^re,"  "  ridge,''  ';  lodge.'' 


The  Vowels.  39 

It  sometimes  happens  that  t  and  sh  come  together  in  places 
where  each  sound  belongs  to  a  separate  syllable,  as  in  nutshell. 
In  such  cases  we  write  tsh — not  noschel  but  ncetshel. 

It  is  interesting  to  observe  that  the  period  when  words  spelt  with  ch 
were  derived  from  the  French  may  be  determined  by  their  pronuncia- 
tion. Those  borrowed  at  an  early  period  are  pronounced  ch,  as  chine, 
rich,  but  the  later  ones  retain  the  French  pronunciation  sh,  like 
machine. 

Syllabic  Consonants.  The  consonants  m,  n  and  1  are 
often  so  prolonged  as  to  form  a  distinct  syllable,  as  in  schism, 
open,  bottle  (sizm',  owpn',  botl'),  and  they  may  then  be  called  vocal 
or  syllabic.  M,  n  and  1  are  always  syllabic  when  they  occur 
at  the  end  of  a  word,  preceded  by  a  consonant,  as  in  the  exx. 
given  above,  or  between  two  consonants,  as  in  owpn'd,  botVd. 
They  are  seldom  syllabic  in  any  other  case,  but  in  a  few  in- 
stances syllabic  n  is  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  in  strengthening, 
prisoner  (strengthn'ing,  prizn'ar). 


THE  VOWELS. 

Vowels  are  voice-sounds  modified  by  giving  some  definite 
shape  to  the  passages  above  the  glottis,  but  without  audible 
friction.  The  breath  is  not  stopped  or  squeezed  as  in  forming 
a  consonant,  but  the  line  of  demarcation  between  vowels  and 
consonants  is  not  very  clearly  marked. 

The  vowels  will  be  found  to  present  much  more  serious 
difficulties  than  the  consonants,  for  several  reasons.  First, 
because  the  English  vowels  are  not  always  easy  to  distinguish, 
but  shade  off  imperceptibly  into  one  another  in  many  cases. 
Secondly,  because  our  alphabet,  originally  intended  for  a  lan- 
guage with  a  much  simpler  vowel  system,  is  quite  inadequate 
to  represent  the  numerous  vowel-sounds  of  the  English  lan- 
guage. And  lastly,  because  the  five  characters  we  have  and  the 
digraphs  formed  by  combining  them  are  used  in  such  a  hap- 
hazard manner  that  hardly  any  of  them  can  be  recognised  as 
certainly  intended  to  represent  any  particular  sound. 

We  may  observe  for  instance  that  a  is  used  for  nine  different 


40  English  Analysis. 

sounds,  as  in  father,  fat,  fate,  fare,  fall,  want,  any,  villa, 
tillage,  and  that  there  are  no  less  than  twenty-one  different 
symbols  for  the  sound  ey  in  fate,  namely,  a-e,  a,  ai,  ay,  aye, 
ah,  ag-e,  aig,  aigh,  ait,  alf,  ao,  au,  ci,  ey,  ea,  eh,  eye,  eig,  eigh, 
eighe,  as  in  fate,  lady,  fail,  may,  played,  dahlia,  champagne, 
campaign,  straight,  trait,  halfpenny,  gaol,  gauge,  vein,  they, 
break,  eh,  obeyed,  reign,  iceigh,  ireighed,  and  nearly  as  many 
for  uw  in  pool,  see  p.  18. 

The  number  of  vowels  and  diphthongs  for  which  Dr.  Murray 
has  provided  symbols  in  the  Oxford  Dictionary,  exclusive  of 
those  borrowed  from  French  and  German  and  not  yet  natural- 
ized, is  fifty-two ;  but  for  an  elementary  course  of  lessons  on 
phonetics  it  seems  sufficient  to  use  twenty-four.  The  English 
vowels  are  peculiarly  difficult  to  master,  the  French  and  Ger- 
man vowel  systems  being  much  more  simple  ;  but  students  who 
proceed  at  once  to  these  without  first  learning  to  distinguish 
accurately  the  sounds  of  their  mother  tongue,  will  in  all  pro- 
bability introduce  the  English  vowels  unawares  into  their 
French  and  German,  and  are  not  likely  to  acquire  a  correct 
pronunciation  of  these  or  of  any  other  foreign  languages. 

Hew  Symbols  for  the  "Wowels. — It  is  obvious,  from  what 
has  been  already  stated,  that  to  represent  twenty-four  vowels 
and  diphthongs  a  number  of  new  symbols  must  be  employed, 
and  that  students  must  be  careful  to  observe  the  value  of  these 
symbols,  and  to  remember  that  the  same  symbol  always  stands 
for  the  same  sound. 

Before  attempting  to  classify  the  vowels,  or  to  study  them 
in  detail,  the  keywords  on  p.  iii.  should  be  learnt  by  heart,  and 
then  the  names  of  the  vowels  themselves,  as  this  is  the  easiest 
way  of  committing  them  to  memory.  The  vowels  are  copiously 
illustrated  on  pp.  15-23. 

Pronunciation  of  e. — One  name,  that  of  e  in  fairy  (feri), 
will  be  found  difficult  to  pronounce,  for  we  are  always  accus- 
tomed to  follow  it  with  the  sound  r,  as  in  fairy,  or  a  as  in  fair, 
air,  where  the  last  sound  is  like  a  in  villa.  Try  to  pronounce 
air  without  this  final  a,  and  to  keep  the  e  pure  and  unchanged. 
This  is  a  useful  exercise,  because  the  sound  required  is  practi- 
cally the  same  as  the  French  e  or  e  in  meme,  zele,  etc. 


The  Five  Principal  Vowels.  41 

THE  FIVE  PRINCIPAL  VOWELS. 

The  best  key  to  the  classification  of  the  vowels  is  the  mastery 
of  the  five  principal  ones,  namely,  aa,  ey,  iy,  ow,  uw,  as  in 

father,  fate,  feet,  pole,  pool  (faadhar,  feyt,  fiyt,  powl,  puwl). 
These  are  approximately  the  sounds  given  to  a,  e,  i,  o,  u  in 
German,  Italian,  and  most  continental  languages,  so  that  it 
seems  appropriate  to  use  digraphs  beginning  with  a,  e,  i.  o,  u, 
to  represent  them. 

We  may  observe  also  that  these  five  sounds  are  represented 
in  the  continental  fashion  in  some  English  words,  e.g.,  in  father, 
obey,  machine,  pole,  rule,  and  that  only  two  of  the  symbols 
adopted  here,  namely,  iy  and  uw,  are  altogether  new,  as  we 
meet  with  aa  in  baa,  kraal,  bazaar,  ey  in  they,  grey,  obey,  and 
ow  in  a  great  many  words,  such  as  boid,floio,  grow. 

It  may  be  useful  to  remember  that  the  symbols  used  for 
aa,  ey,  iy,  ow,  uw,  by  the  Indian  Government  and  the 
Church  Missionary  Society,  in  geographical  names  and  native 
names  in  general,  are  d,  e,  i,  o,  u. 

This  diagram  shows  the  position  of  the  tongue  in  forming  the 
five  principal  vowels. 


Tongue 

Aa  in  father. — When  we  sound  aa  in  father  the  tongue  is 
lowered,  and  the  mouth  passage  is  wide  open,  so  it  is  called  an 
open  vowel ;  and  it  is  reckoned  one  of  the  back  roiccls,  although 
the  back  of  the  tongue  is  not  raised  in  forming  it.  Mr. 


42  English  Analysis. 

Jespersen,  in  his  Articulations  of  Speech  Sounds,  observes  that 
it  is  rightly  called  a  back  vowel,  because,  although  the  back  of 
the  tongue  is  not  absolutely  as  high  as  the  middle,  it  is  at  the 
back  that  the  tongue  is  nearest  to  the  palate,  so  that  this  is  the 
place  of  greatest  friction,  and  the  vowel  should  be  named 
accordingly.  It  is  sometimes  called  the  Italian  a,  and  it  is  a 
favourite  sound  with  singers.  The  symbol  most  commonly  used 
for  it  in  English  is  ai\  as  in  hard,  cart,  etc.  See  pp.  15  f. 

Ey  in  fate  and  iy  in  feet. — It  is  very  obvious  that 
when  we  pass  from  aa  to  iy  we  raise  the  lower  jaw  consider- 
ably. But  the  sound  can  be  produced  without  thus  closing  the 
jaws ;  and  if  by  an  effort  we  keep  down  the  lower  jaw,  we  can 
see  that  the  tongue  rises  and  approaches  very  near  to  the  hard 
palate.  It  is  the  so-called  front  of  the  tongue  which  rises 
most,  that  is  the  part  just  in  front  of  the  centre,  so  iy  is  called 
a  front  vowel.  And  in  forming  ey  the  jaw  and  the  same  part 
of  the  tongue  are  raised,  but  not  quite  to  the  same  extent ;  so 
ey  likewise  is  called  a,  front  vowel,  and  distinguished  from  iy 
as  being  half -closed,  whilst  iy  is  said  to  be  closed. 

Ey  and  iy  are  sometimes  called  palatal  vowels,  and  this 
name  may  serve  to  remind  us  of  their  relation  to  the  palatal 
consonant  y,  which  is  formed  by  placing  the  tongue  in  the  same 
position  as  for  the  vowel  iy. 

Ow  in  pole  and  uw  in  pool. — The  most  obvious 
fact  when  we  pass  from  aa  to  uw  is  that  the  lips  are  contracted 
and  the  corners  of  the  mouth  drawn  towards  one  another,  so 
that  it  approaches  the  form  of  a  circle,  and  that  at  the  same 
time  the  lower  jaw  is  raised.  This  movement  of  the  lips  is 
called  rounding,  and  uw  is  said  to  be  a  round  vowel.  Ow  is 
formed  in  the  same  way,  but  the  lips  are  not  so  much  con- 
tracted, and  the  jaw  not  so  much  raised.  It  is  intermediate 
between  aa  and  uw,  and  is  called  half-closed,  whilst  uw  is  said 
to  be  closed. 

But  another  movement  takes  place  in  forming  ow  and  uw, 
which  is  not  so  obvious  as  the  process  of  rounding.  Ventrilo- 
quists can  produce  ow  and  uw  tolerably  well  without  moving 
their  lips  at  all,  and  there  are  some  few  lazy  people  who  always 
pronounce  them  in  this  fashion ;  but  whether  the  lips  are 


The  Five  Principal  Vowels.  43 

rounded  or  not,  the  back  part  of  the  tongue  is  always  raised  in 
forming  these  vowels  and  brought  near  the  soft  palate  for  uw, 
and  not  quite  so  near  for  ow,  as  shown  in  the  diagram.  They 
are  therefore  called  back-round  vowels. 

The  consonants  wh  and  w  are  related  to  uw,  as  y  is  to  iy, 
being  formed  by  placing  the  lips  and  tongue  in  the  same  posi- 
tion as  for  uw. 

Observe  how  the  five  principal  vowels,  aa,  ey,  iy,  ow,  and  uw 
are  placed  and  named  in  the  scheme  on  p.  x.  That  scheme 
does  not  pretend  to  scientific  accuracy,  but  it  seems  to  be  the 
most  convenient  way  of  exhibiting  the  vowels  in  a  tabular  form. 

Ey  and  ow  are  not  pm-e  vowels. — Ey  and  ow  are  so 
far  from  being  pure  vowels  that  they  might  be  classed  with  the 
diphthongs.  But  they  are  the  best  representatives  we  have  of 
the  close  e  and  o  of  French,  German,  and  Italian,  and  it  is 
convenient  to  find  a  place  for  them  amongst  the  vowels. 

The  best  way  to  convince  oneself  that  ey  in  fate  becomes 
gradually  closer,  and  ends  in  a  sound  approaching  to  iy,  whilst 
ow  closes  up  and  ends  in  a  sound  which  is  almost  uw,  is  to 
observe  how  they  are  pronounced  in  singing  by  untrained 
singers.  Such  persons  will  be  heard  to  pass  rapidly  to  the 
close  iy  or  uw  sound,  and  to  prolong  it,  producing  a  very  dis- 
agreeable effect.  But  a  well-taught  singer  will  hold  the  first 
and  more  open  sound  as  long  as  possible,  changing  it  just  at  the 
end  of  the  note,  and  will  be  careful,  in  singing  French,  German, 
or  Italian,  to  keep  the  vowel  quite  pure  and  unaltered  through- 
out. 

It  is  important  for  all  students  of  French  and  German  to 
recognise  the  diphthongal  character  of  ey  and  ow,  for  if  they 
fail  to  do  so,  they  will  not  succeed  in  pronouncing  the  close  e 
and  o  of  those  languages,  which  must  be  kept  pure  to  the  end. 

It  is  said  that  aa,  iy,  and  uw  are  diphthongal  also,  and  that  the  only 
long  vowel  in  English  which  is  kept  unaltered  to  the  end  is  oc  in  burn. 
But  it  seems  to  me  that  in  the  best  southern  English  aa  is  not  a  diph- 
thong, and  that  the  change  at  the  end  of  iy  and  uw  is  not  obvious 
unless  they  are  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  in  seeing,  doing  (siying,  duwing), 
when  they  certainly  become  closer  at  the  end,  and  conclude  with  the 
sounds  y  and  w  respectively. 


44  English  Analysis. 

JK  in  fairy  and  d  in  Paul. — In  our  ordinary  spelling 
e  is  always  represented  by  some  vowel  or  vowels  followed  by  r, 
most  frequently  by  a  or  ai,  as  in  Mary,  fairy,  and  the  commonest 
symbol  for  6  is  or,  as  in  port,  corn,  horse,  lord.  See  exx.  of 
e  and  o  on  pp.  16-18.  As  already  observed,  we  must,  in 
studying  e,  learn  to  pronounce  it  without  adding  that  sound  of 
a  in  villa  which  is  heard  after  it  in  care,  pair,  wear,  and, 
indeed,  wherever  the  r  is  not  followed  by  a  vowel  and  trilled,  as 
it  is  in  Mary. 

JE  and  o  differ  from  ey  and  ow  respectively  in  being  more 
open.  In  both  cases  the  jaw  and  tongue  are  lowered,  and  in  the 
case  of  o  the  lips  are  less  contracted.  E  may  be  called  a  lialf- 
opcn  vowel.  It  is  practically  the  same  as  the  French  open  e  in 
pres,  zele,  etc.  O  on  the  other  hand  is  an  abnormal  vowel, 
having  nothing  corresponding  to  it  in  French  or  German, 
though  it  is  often  supposed  to  be  the  same  as  French  o  in 
liominc.  It  is,  in  fact,  not  only  more  open  than  o  in  Jiommc, 
but  has  the  tongue  even  lower  than  for  aa  in  father,  so  it 
must  undoubtedly  be  reckoned  as  an  open  vowel. 

We  may  regard  the  front  vowels  e,  ey,  iy,  and  the  back- 
round  vowels  6,  ow,  uw,  as  forming  two  corresponding  series 
of  sounds,  but  with  this  irregularity,  that  o  is  much  more  open 
than  e.  Observe  the  position  of  e,  ey,  iy,  and  o,  ow,  uw,  in 
the  scheme  on  p.  x.,  and  compare  with  the  French  vowels  on 
p.  xi. 

It  would  appear  that  one  reason  why  the  Bsll-Ellis-Sweet  vowel  scheme 
differs  so  much  from  thosa  adopted  by  foreign  phoneticians,  is  that  in 
English  the  abnormally  open  vowel  6  in  Paul  is  more  open  than  aa  in 
father.  For  in  the  Bell  scheme  aa  is  placed  half  way  between  the  open 
and  the  shut  vowels,  instead  of  being  reckoned  an  open  vowel,  as  it  is  by 
phoneticians  in  general.  And  it  is  not  surprising  that  no  one  starting 
from  a  French  or  German  basis  has  placed  aa  so  high,  seeing  that  in  those 
languages  there  is  110  back-round  vowel  which  has  the  tongue  lower  than 
aa. 

Oe  in  burn. — This  vowel,  like  e,  is  always  represented  by 
some  vowel  followed  by  r.  It  has  no  particular  symbol  belong- 
ing to  it,  but  is  written  er,  ir,  or,  ur,  as  in  herd,  bird,  icord, 
turn,  and  in  various  other  ways.  See  the  exx.  on  p.  10. 


The  Short  Voicels.  4o 

As  the  tongue  is  in  a  position  intermediate  between  that  for  a 
front  or  a  back  vowel,  it  is  called  a  mixed  voicel,  and  it  is 
accordingly  placed  between  the  front  and  back  vowels  in  the 
scheme  on  p.  x.  Like  e  it  is  half 'open.  We  do  not  meet  with 
it  in  French  or  German. 

THE  SHORT  VOWELS. 

It  will  be  convenient  to  begin  with  the  consideration  of  the 
short  vowels  in  accented  syllables,  because  there  is  great  un- 
certainty about  unaccented  vowels,  whilst  the  accented  ones  are 
clear  and  well  defined. 

Six  Short  Accented  Vowels.  We  meet  with  six  short 
vowels  in  unaccented  syllables,  namely  ce,  ae,  e,  i,  o,  u,  as  in 
putty,  pat,  pet,  pit,  pot,  put.  These  six  accented  vowels  are 
always  close  or  stopped,  i.e.,  followed  by  a  consonant  in  the 
same  syllable,  and  as  it  is  not  easy  to  pronounce  them  alone,  it 
is  convenient  to  give  them  the  names  cet,  set,  et,  it,  ot,  ut. 

It  is  noticeable  that  we  do  not  meet  with  any  one  of  these 
short  vowels  in  the  French  language,  and  that  three  of  them, 
namely  ce,  ae,  o,  do  not  occur  in  German  either.  Observe  also 
that  each  of  the  vowels  ae  and  o  is  more  open  than  any  sound  of 
its  own  class,  either  in  French  or  German. 

Long  ami  Short  Vowels  Compared.  It  is  instructive 
to  compare  each  of  these  short  vowels  with  the  long  vowel  most 
nearty  corresponding  to  it,  as  in  the  following  exx.  : — 

oe  and  ce  in  boen  and  boen. 
e       .,     ae  ,,  Meri    ,,    maeri. 
ey    „     «    „  geyt    „    get. 

«J  „  *  >,  fijt  »  fit-  _ 
6  .,  o  „  Pol  ,,  Poli. 
uw  „  u  „  puwl  „  pul. 

If  each  of  these  six  short  vowels  is  prolonged,  care  being 
taken  not  to  alter  its  character  in  any  way,  it  will  be  found 
that  every  one  of  them  differs  more  or  less  in  formation  and 
sound  from  the  corresponding  long  vowel.  This  is  not  the  case 
in  French,  where  precisely  the  same  sound  may  be  long  or  short, 
and  nearly  all  the  vowels  may  be  lengthened  or  shortened  with- 


46  English  Analysis. 

out  altering  their  quality,  as  is  shown  in  the  table  of  French 
vowels  on  p.  xi.  In  German  there  is  usually  a  difference 
between  long  and  short  vowels,  as  in  English,  but  it  is  not 
necessary  to  make  any  difference  except  that  of  length  between 
the  long  vowels  in  "  lahm  "  and  "  m#hen,"  and  the  short  ones 
in  "Lamm"  and  "Manner"  respectively.  The  nature  of  the 
difference  between  the  long  and  short  vowels  can  be  more 
conveniently  discussed  after  we  have  examined  each  short  vowel 
separately. 

The  Short  Front  Towels — ee  in  pat.  Note  that  the 
symbol  for  this  vowel  can  easily  be  written  without  lifting  the 
pen,  and  made  quite  distinct  from  ce,  if  the  first  part  is  made 
like  a  reversed  e. 

It  is  a  common  mistake  to  suppose  that  «e  is  the  short  vowel 
corresponding  to  aa  in  father.  In  point  of  fact  it  is  a  front 
vowel,  like  e  in  fairy,  but  more  open.  It  is  not  found  in 
French  or  German.  The  German  a  in  Mann  and  French  a  in 
patte  differ  from  it  and  from  one  another.  The  short  vowel 
which  corresponds  with  aa  in  father  is  German  a  in  Mann. 

E  in  pet  may  be  called  a  half-open  vowel,  being  decidedly 
more  open  than  ey.  It  is  intermediate  between  ey  in  fate  and 
e  in  fairy. 

I  in  pit  is  the  short  vowel  corresponding  to  iy,  but  it  is  by 
no  means  identical  with  it,  as  may  easily  be  perceived  if  we 
prolong  it,  taking  care  not  to  alter  the  sonnd  at  all.  Fill  and 
feel,  fit  and  feet,  differ  in  the  quality  of  the  vowel,  as  well  as 
in  its  length ;  and  it  is  sufficiently  obvious  that  in  the  short 
vowel  i  the  tongue  is  lowered,  making  it  more  open  than  iy. 

The  importance  of  distinguishing  between  the  sounds  iy  and 
i  is  seen  in  the  study  of  French,  where  the  long  and  short  i 
differ  only  in  length.  The  short  i  infini,  for  instance,  is  just  as 
close  as  long  i  in  livre,  and  fini  must  not  be  pronounced  with 
the  open  i  of  English  finny,  nor  with  the  long  vowel  heard  in 
fee  and  knee. 

The  Short  Back-round  Vowel* — o  in  pot.  The  vowel 
o  in  pot  is  unknown  in  French  and  German.  It  is  the  short 
vowel  corresponding  with  the  long  o  in  Paul,  and  is  pronounced 
with  the  tongue  in  the  lowest  position  possible. 


The  Short  Vowels.  47 

U  in  put  is  not  a  very  common  sound  in  English.  It  bears 
the  same  relation  to  uw  as  i  does  to  iy,  being  decidedly  more 
open  than  its  corresponding  long  vowel  uw.  The  u  of  pull  or 
full  when  prolonged  is  quite  distinct  from  the  long  uw  in  pool, 
fool. 

The  Short  Vowel  oe  in  but.  The  symbol  most  frequently 
used  for  oe  is  u,  but  it  is  often  represented  by  o,  as  in  "  son," 
"  dove,"  "  among,"  "  mother."  It  is  not  found  in  French  or  Ger- 
man, and  may  be  regarded  as  an  abnormal  vowel.  Though  a 
back  vowel,  it  is  not  rounded. 

On  the  distinction  between  oe  and  a,  which  sound  much  alike, 
e.g.,  in  another  (anoedhar),  see  p.  51. 

The  use  of  o  in  those  words  where  it  is  pronounced  as  OR  was  introduced 
by  the  French,  who  substituted  it  for  u  from  a  desire  for  clearness  in 
writing.  V  was  then  written  w,  and  ou  or  on  was  clearer  than  MM  or  un ; 
and  we  find  accordingly  that  o  is  rarely  used  for  03  except  where  it 
was  introduced  for  the  sake  of  clearness,  e.g.  before  v  or  n  or  m,  or  after 
m.  Sovereign  was  written  for  suvereign,  but  the  visible  o  has  affected 
the  pronunciation.  For  these  remarks  I  am  indebted  to  Prof.  Skeat. 

In  some  of  the  northern  counties  the  vowels  ce  and  M  in  but  and  put 
are  very  frequently  interchanged;  and  as  we  have  no  distinctive  symbols 
for  these  two  sounds,  but  use  u  for  them  both,  it  is  difficult  to  correct 
this  provincialism. 

Relations  of  Long  and  Short  Vowels.  Refer  to  the 
tables  of  vowels  on  pp.  x.-xiii.  In  the  coupling  of  long  and 
short  vowels  there  are  some  pairs  which  call  for  remark.  It  is 
sufficiently  obvious  that  the  vowels  iy  and  i,  6  and  o,  uw  and 

u,  as  in  feet,  fit,  Paul,  Polly,  pool,  pull,  must  be  reckoned  as 
pairs;  but  the  relationships  of  e,  ae  and  oe  are  not  so  clear.  The 
position  of  e  is  between  ey  and  e,  but  somewhat  nearer  to  e. 
Compare  the  sounds  ey  and  e  in  gate  and  get,  and  e  and  e  in 
fairy  and  ferry.  But  as  in  all  the  cases  where  we  unquestion- 
ably have  a  pair  of  long  and  short  vowels,  the  short  vowel  is 
more  open  than  the  long  one,  it  seems  right  to  pair  e  with  the 
closer  ey,  and  to  regard  «e  in  marry  as  the  short  vowel  corres- 
ponding to  e  in  Mary. 

Again,  oe  in  burn  is  not  formed  in  the  same  place  as  oe  in 
bun.  It  is  however  so  difficult,  for  English  people  at  least,  to 


48  English  Analysis. 

pronounce  a  short  accented  vowel  in  a  mixed  position,  that  the 
attempt  to  shorten  oe  apparently  results  in  the  short  back  vowel 
ce,  a  little  more  open  than  oe,  and  decidedly  further  back. 

Harrow  ami  Wide  "Vowels.  There  seems  also  to  be 
another  difference  between  the  long  and  short  vowels  in  English 
and  German.  In  the  Bell-Ellis-Sweet  system,  i,  o,  u  are  called 
wide  vowels,  because  in  them  the  tongue  is  said  to  be  relaxed 
and  widened,  whilst  in  the  corresponding  long  vowels,  Dr. 
Sweet  says  it  is  "  bunched  up,"  and  these  vowels  are  called 
narrow.  In  the  Bell  system  great  importance  is  attached  to 
this  distinction,  and  all  the  vowels  are  classified  as  narrow  or 
wide,  and  arranged  in  separate  tables  accordingly.  But  Dr. 
Sweet  acknowledges  that  in  some  cases  it  is  difficult  to  distin- 
guish between  narrow  and  wide  vowels,  and  we  find  not  only 
the  three  great  advocates  of  this  sj'Stem  differing  among  them- 
selves as  to  which  vowels  are  narrow  or  wide,  but  Dr.  Sweet 
himself  has  changed  his  mind  as  to  the  classification  of  a  good 
many  vowels  since  he  wrote  his  Handbook,  and  the  vowels  in 
French  pcre  and  pcur,  with  many  others,  have  been  transferred 
from  the  narrow  table  of  vowels  to  the  wide,  in  his  more  recent 
Primer  of  Phonetics.  Moreover,  many  phoneticians  altogether 
refuse  to  recognise  this  distinction,  and  I  have  not  thought  it 
necessaiy,  in  my  scheme  of  vowels,  to  separate  the  narrow  and 
the  wide. 

For  my  own  part,  I  agree  with  Dr.  Sweet  that  the  distinction 
is  a  real  one,  and  I  think  he  observes  truly  in  the  Primer  of 
Phonetics  that  if  we  take  a  low-wide  (i.e.,  an  open-wide)  vowel 
such  as  «e  in  man,  we  can  raise  it  through  e  in  men  to  the  high 
(close)  position  of  i  in  it,  without  its  ever  running  into  the 
narrow  vowel  e  in  Fr.  etc.  But  in  classifying  narrow  and  wide 
vowels  I  should,  like  Mr.  Jespersen,  reckon  all  the  English  short 
accented  vowels  as  wride,  together  with  the  German  short 
accented  vowels  in  "Sonne,"  "konnen,"  "diinn,"  and  all  the  long 
vowels  in  English  and  German  as  narrow,  though  Dr.  Sweet 
considers  oe  to  be  narrow  and  aa  to  be  wide. 

This  at  least  seems  quite  clear,  that  there  is  a  difference  of 
some  sort  between  the  long  and  short  vowels  in  English  and  in 
German  ;  for  it  cannot  be  accidental  (1)  that  the  short  accented 


Unaccented  Vowels.  49 

vowels  are  slightly  more  open  than  the  corresponding  long  ones ; 
(2)  that  it  is  very  difficult  to  lengthen  the  short  ones  without 
altering  their  quality  ;  and  (3)  that  it  is  also  difficult  to  pro- 
nounce them  in  open  syllables.  We  always  find  them  stopped, 
that  is,  followed  by  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable. 

In  an  elementary  work  of  this  kind,  not  much  can  be  done 
towards  the  settlement  of  a  question  which  has  so  long  caused 
perplexity  and  divisions  among  phoneticians ;  but  the  subject  is 
interesting  in  itself,  and  has  so  much  importance  attached  to  it 
in  the  works  of  our  three  great  English  phoneticians,  that  it 
seems  impossible  to  pass  it  over  in  silence.  It  is  a  question 
which  still  awaits  solution. 

UNACCENTED  VOWELS. 

The  unaccented  vowels  must  be  discussed  separately.  They 
constitute  a  great  difficulty  in  our  language,  for  they  are  not 
easy  to  distinguish  from  one  another,  and  persons  whose  ear  is 
not  trained  by  the  study  of  phonetics  imagine  that  in  most 
cases  they  pronounce,  or  ought  to  pronounce,  unaccented  vowels 
according  to  the  spelling,  when  in  reality,  whatever  the  spelling 
may  be,  we  very  seldom  hear  any  vowel  in  unaccented  syllables 
except  these  two  : — (1)  a  as  heard  in  attend,  portable,  villa,  and 
(2)  i  as  in  immense,  plentiful,  horrid. 

In  this  matter  nothing  can  be  learnt  from  the  generality  of 
pronouncing  dictionaries,  which  are  all  quite  misleading,  except 
the  large  unfinished  Neio  English  Dictionary,  where  they  are 
very  carefully  distinguished.  Prof.  Trautmann  has  made  a  very 
careful  study  of  English  unaccented  vowels  in  his  Sprachlaute, 
pp.  169-182. 

A  comparison  of  the  frequency  with  which  the  different 
unaccented  vowels  occur  shows  that  a  is  extremely  frequent,  i 
frequent,  o'  somewhat  rare,  and  all  the  rest  extremely  rare. 

Examples  of  the  very  rare  unaccented  vowels  will  be  found 
in  pp.  16-29,  and  the  student  will  do  well  to  read  them 
through  before  proceeding  to  consider  a,  i  and  o'.  It  will  then 
be  seen  that 

(1)  A  large  proportion  of  these  examples  are  compound  words, 

I.  P.  E 


BO  English  Analysis. 

where  there  is  a  slight  stress  on  the  weaker  syllable,  as  for 
instance  in 

dh<?rin  fdtel  impowst  eenjoest 

oethkwq/k        daunf<5l          inmoiust  tiykcep. 

(2)  Long  vowels,  and  also  diphthongs,  appear  occasionally  in 
initial  syllables  without  any  accent  whatever,  as  in 

sewzksestik         ii/kwoliti       pdtentas  poit-etik 

paateyk  krzyeyshan  jwtudishal  atdia 

foetiliti  othoriti          kowdnsidans       yuua.it. 

(3)  The  retention  of  a  rare  vowel  in  an  unaccented  syllable  is 
sometimes  due  to  assimilation,  the  vowel  being  the  same  as  that 
of  the  accented  syllable  adjoining,  as  in 

poevoes  hoebceb  selp'seka. 

There  are  also  some  extremely  rare  cases  which  do  not  fall 
under  any  of  the  above  rules,  e.g. : — 

plsekaad  kon-kn'?/t  kompcekt  insekt 

sedvoes  impoteyshan         priysept  staipend 

We  may  now  turn  to  the  commoner  unaccented  vowels,  a, 
i  and  o'. 

The  obscure  vowel  "a"  in  attend,  portable,  villa, 

sometimes  called  the  natural  or  the  neutral  voicel,  is  fully 
illustrated  on  pp.  19,  27.  It  would  seem  that  English  people 
in  general  fail  to  notice  the  existence  of  this  vowel  and  confuse 
it  with  SK  in  cat,  man,  etc.,  for  most  dictionary  makers  use  the 
same  symbol  for  se  and  a,  and  yet  the  two  vowels  are  quite 
different  in  formation  and  in  sound.  It  would  be  less  surprising 
if  it  were  mistaken  for  ce  in  pwtty,  which  in  sound,  though  not 
in  formation,  resembles  it  very  closely. 

A  is  called  the  natural  voicel  because  it  is  formed  when  the 
vocal  organs  are  in  the  position  most  easy  and  natural  to  them, 
and  no  effort  is  made  to  pronounce  any  vowel  in  particular. 
Speakers  who  hesitate  use  it  to  fill  up  gaps  in  their  sentences. 
The  tongue  is  in  that  intermediate  position,  with  neither  back 


Unaccented  Vowels.  61 

nor  front  especially  raised,  which  produces  a  mixed  vowel,  and 
about  as  high  as  for  e  in  pet,  so  that  it  may  be  called  half- 
open. 

It  is  a  curious  fact  that  the  natural  vowels  used  in  different 
languages  to  fill  up  gaps  in  speaking  are  not  identical.  The 
French  use  the  vowel  in  le,  and  the  Germans  that  in  "  Sonnc," 
which  differ  somewhat  from  the  English  a  and  from  one  another, 
whilst  Scotchmen  use  a  prolonged  close  e,  as  in  German  geh. 
The  Trench  natural  vowel  is  slightly  rounded. 

The  distinction  between  ce  and  a.  Although  ce,  the 
so-called  but  vowel,  and  the  obscure  vowel  a,  sound  very  much 
alike,  they  can  almost  invariably  be  distinguished  by  following 
the  rule  that  a  has  no  accent  whatever,  whilst  ce  has  some 
sort  of  accent,  primary  or  secondary.  Some  exceptions  to  this 
rule  are  given  on  p.  20.  Hcebceb  is  a  case  of  assimilation. 
Compound  words  which  are  felt  to  be  compounds,  such  as 
teacup,  unfit,  unkind,  and  all  words  beginning  with  un-,  have 
a  slight  stress  on  the  weaker  syllable,  and  should  be  written 
with  ce — tiykoep,  oenfU,  cenkdind,  and  so  on;  but  compounds 
like  welcome,  which  are  not  felt  to  be  such,  and  where  the 
weaker  syllable  consequently  has  no  stress  whatever,  should 
be  spelt  with  a — welkam. 

Exx.  of  ce  and  a  : — 

amoeng  oend'cen  koerant  anoedhar 

aboev  moedhar  hoandrad  aboendans 

ajoest  soemar  moestar  ajoastmant 

oanj'oast  koalar  noembar  oenk'oemfatabl' 

Unaccented  i  and  i'.  There  are  two  varieties  of  un- 
accented i.  The  i  in  rabbit,  frolic,  is  practically  the  same  as 
accented  i  in  bit,  lick  /  but  a  more  open  sound,  intermediate 
between!  and  e,  is  often  used,  e.g.  in  the  terminations,  -iz,  -id, 
-nis,  -lis,  and  the  prefixes  in-,  igz-,  iks-,  and  wherever  i  is 
final,  or  followed  by  a  vowel. 

Tor  purposes  of  discussion,  this  open  i  may  be  written  i% 
and  it  should  always  be  written  so  in  words  where  it  is  followed 
by  a,  as  in  priti'ar,  mimorVal,  to  show  that  there  are  two 
distinct  vowels,  and  not  a  diphthong  as  in  tear,  real  (tiar,  rial). 


52  English  Analysis. 

But  in  other  cases  it  need  have  no  special  symbol,  and  may  be 
represented  by  i. 

Exx.  of  i',  intermediate  between  i  and  e. 

fish/z  fulms  i'nteyl  folz 

wish/a  gudn/s  *ngeyj  men 

weytzd  restli's  z'gzist  mer/'ar 

wonti'd  fruwtli's  aksiyd  glori'as 

All  the  cases  where  I*  is  used  instead  of  i  seem  to  be  accounted 
for  either  by  position  or  by  spelling.  By  position,  when  the 
vowel  is  final,  as  in  foil,  or  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  in  meri'ar, 
and  by  spelling  in  all  other  cases,  such  as  fishiz,  fulnis,  where 
e  is  written,  and  in  aiming  at  e  we  produce  a  sound  inter- 
mediate between  e  and  i,  but  nearer  to  i. 

Care  must  be  taken  in  weak  syllables  to  distinguish  between 
i  and  a.  It  is  a  bad  fault,  but  a  very  common  one,  to  pronounce 
a  instead  of  i,  and  one  may  often  hear  yunati,  abilati,  and  the 
like.  Irish  people  also  introduce  a  into  the  terminations  -iz, 
-id,  -nis,  and  -li.s,  pronouncing  them  -az,  -ad,  -nas,  -las. 

Short  o'  in  pillow.  This  vowel  differs  slightly  from  the 
long  ow  in  pole,  low,  being  more  open  and  mixed  than  the 
first  part  of  ow,  whilst  the  second  part  of  ow  is  hardly  heard. 
It  is  most  usually  found  at  the  end  of  words,  or  in  the  last 
syllable  followed  by  a  consonant,  as  in  follow,  hero,  followed, 
heroes  (folo',  hiaro',  folo'd,  hiaro'z).  When  it  occurs  in  initial 
or  medial  syllables,  as  in  pro'siyd,  elo'kyushan,  the  syllables  are 
always  open,  that  is,  they  do  not  end  in  a  consonant. 

Unaccented  ow  may  be  distinguished  from  o'  by  observing 
that  this  rare  sound  occurs  only  in  compounds  such  as  inmowst, 
impowst,  where  there  is  a  slight  stress  upon  it,  or  in  initial 
syllables,  with  a  vowel  following,  as  in  koicdes,  koicdpareyt. 

O'  in  final  syllables  should  never  be  allowed  to  degenerate 
into  a.  Careless  speakers  often  pronounce  fela,  winda,  and  so 
on,  and  even  add  on  a  r,  saying  "  dha  icindar  iz  oicpn\" 
Walker  says  that  in  his  time  belas  and  gcelas  for  bellows  and 
gallows  were  universal,  but  we  have  now  returned  to  the 
forms  belo'z,  godo^z. 

E*   and  u'  in  "survey"  and  "value."      Besides  i', 


Diphthongs.  53 

which  has  already  been  discussed,  there  are  two  other  vowels 
in  unaccented  syllables  for  which  no  distinctive  symbols  need 
be  used.  For  purposes  of  discussion  they  may  be  represented 
as  e'  and  u'.  They  are  generally  represented  by  ey  and  n. 

E*  is  extremely  rare.  It  is  found  in  survey  (sb.)  and  essay 
(soeve',  ese'),  and  bears  the  same  relation  to  long  ey  in  fate  as 
o*  does  to  ow. 

IP  is  more  frequent,  and  occurs,  like  o%  in  final  syllables, 
open  or  close,  and  in  initial  and  medial  syllables  which  are 
open.  It  most  frequently  appears  as  part  of  the  diphthong  yu. 
It  differs  from  u  in  put,  and  from  unaccented  u  in  fulfil,  icilful, 
manhood  (msenhud),  etc.,  in  being  somewhat  mixed.  When 
followed  by  a,  it  must  be  written  u',  to  distinguish  u'a  from  the 
diphthong  in  poor,  sure  (puar,  slruar). 

Exx.  of  u» : — 

intw  \selyud  prejwdis  inflwenshal 

vselyit  voetywz  dywreyshan  inflw'ans 

voetyw  instmmant  my?mifisant  inkonggrw'as 

DIPHTHONGS. 

Diphthongs  are  not  formed  by  simply  pronouncing  two  vowels 
in  succession.  They  begin  with  one  vowel  and  end  with 
another,  but  the  change  from  one  to  the  other  is  gradual.  The 
vocal  organs  pass  through  all  the  intermediate  positions,  so  that 
the  sound  is  changing  all  the  time,  and  it  is  therefore  difficult, 
in  some  cases,  to  analyse  them  accurately. 

The  diphthongs  ea,  ia,  oa,  ua,  occurring  in  bear,  bier,  boar, 
boor,  are  seldom  met  with  except  when  r  follows,  so  they  will 
be  discussed  in  connexion  with  that  consonant,  and  ey  and  ow, 
which  may  be  reckoned  as  diphthongs,  have  been  explained 
already ;  so  we  have  to  consider  here 

The  diphthongs  ai,  an,  oi,  yu,  as  in  time,  loud,  noise, 
tune.  There  is  some  diversity  of  opinion  as  to  the  elements  of 
which  these  diphthongs  are  composed.  The  fact  is  that  it  is 
difficult  to  dwell  upon  the  separate  elements  without  altering 
their  character.  I  should  say  that  the  result  of  a  rough  analysis, 


54  English  Analysis. 

the  only  analysis  of  which  children  would  be  capable,  is  as 
follows : — 

ai  in  taim  =  aa,  iy.          oi  in  noiz  =  6,  iy. 
au  „  laud  =  aa,  uw.         yu  „  tyun  =  y,  uw. 

But  on  analysing  ai  more  carefully,  we  find  that  it  lies 
between  aa  and  iy,  without  quite  reaching  either  extremity. 
The  first  sound  in  ai  is  the  French  a  in  patte,  midway  between 
aa  and  »e,  for  which  we  may  use  the  symbol  a,  and  the  last  is 
i%  the  vowel  between  e  and  i. 

There  are  however  three  English  words  containing  a  diphthong 
which  resembles  ai,  and  yet  is  not  quite  identical  with  it, 
having  the  full  sound  of  aa  for  its  first  element.  It  may  be 
represented  by  aai,  and  is  heard  in  Isaiah,  aye,  and  ayah 
(Aizaaia,  aai,  aaia). 

Au  is  composed  of  a  and  the  mixed  vowel  u%  as  in  "  prej?t~ 
dice,"  <:  influence,"  and  oi  of  6  and  i'. 

Ifu  in  accented  syllables  is  composed  of  y  and  uw,  but  in 
unaccented  syllables,  e.g.  in  regular  (regyular),  it  consists  of 
y  and  u'.  The  sound  of  u  as  in  put,  fulfil,  is  never  heard  in 
this  diphthong,  nor  do  we  ever  meet  with  the  short  form  of  yu 
in  monosyllables  or  accented  syllables. 

So  this  is  the  more  accurate  analysis  of  these  four  diphthongs  : 
ai  =  a,  i'.  Accented  yu  =  y,  uw. 

au  =  a,  \\\          Unaccented  yu  =  y,  u'. 
oi  =  6,  i'. 

As  the  length  of  yu  can  be  determined  by  the  accent,  it  is  not 
necessary  to  use  the  awkward  symbol  yuw  for  the  diphthong 
in  tune. 

In  words  where  unaccented  yu  is  followed  by  a,  as  in 
annual,  conspicuous  (senyual,  kanspikyuas),  yu  is  often  reduced 
to  yw  and  ceases  to  form  a  separate  syllable.  When  such 
words  have  another  syllable  added  to  them,  as  in  annually, 
conspicuously  (senywali,  kanspikywasli),  yu  is,  I  think,  always 
reduced  to  yw, 

Many  phoneticians  omit  yu  from  among  the  diphthongs,  and  regard  it 
simply  as  a  combination  of  a  consonant  with  a  vowel,  but  it  seems  con- 
venient to  follow  the  example  of  Dr.  Murray,  who  reckons  it  as  a 
diphthong. 


IV. 
ENGLISH  SYNTHESIS. 


Combinations  of  R  with  Vowels,  Diphthongs  and  Triphthongs. 

aa            jar 

star 

jaa(r) 
staa(r) 

jaaring 
staari 

jaad 

staaz 

oe            fur 

stir 

foe(r) 
stoe(r) 

foeri 
stoering 

foez 
stoed 

a               beggar 
render 

bega(r) 
renda(r) 

begari 
rendaring 

begaz 
rendad 

ia             fear 
steer 

fia(r) 
stia(r) 

flaring 
stiaring 

fiaz 
stiad 

ua            moor 
assure 

mua(r) 
ashua(r) 

muaring 
ashuaring 

muaz 
ashuad 

aia          fire 
prior 

faia(r) 
praia(r) 

faiaring 
praiari 

faiad 
praiaz 

aua          sour 
tower 

saua(r) 
taua(r) 

sauarist 
tauaring 

sauad 
tauaz 

yua          cure 
lure 

kyua(r) 
lyua(r) 

kyuaring 
lyuaring 

kyuaz 
lyuad 

e,  ea        bear 
stare 

bea(r) 
stea(r) 

bering 
stering 

beaz 
stead 

6,  oa       roar 
store 

roa(r) 
stoa(r) 

roring 
storing 

roz 
stod 

The  following  combinations  are  very  rare  :  — 

eya            player            pleya(r) 
o>va           lower               lowa(r)        lowaring 
oia             employer         emploia(r) 

pleyaz 
lowad 
emploiaz 

56  English  Synthesis. 

R  IN  COMBINATION  WITH  THE  VOWELS. 

The  consonant  r  is  the  most  perplexing  element  in  our  lan- 
guage. Dr.  Ellis  wrote  in  1875,  that  after  more  than  thirty 
years'  study,  he  was  not  certain  whether  he  had  yet  mastered 
its  protean  intricacies ;  so  it  will  need  special  attention  on  the 
part  of  the  student. 

The  manner  in  which  r  is  formed  has  been  explained  on 
p.  34,  and  a  large  number  of  examples  showing  it  in  combination 
with  the  vowels  will  be  found  on  pp.  23-29.  The  chief  facts 
concerning  it  will  however  be  more  easily  grasped  by  referring 
to  the  table  at  the  head  of  this  chapter,  which  shows  the 
changes  that  take  place  in  the  inflections  of  words  ending  in  r. 

There  is  so  much  diversity  of  practice  in  the  pronunciation 
of  words  written  with  r,  that  it  may  be  well  to  repeat  that 
the  pronunciation  given  here  is  my  own,  i.e.  that  of  an  educated 
Southerner.  The  same  alphabet  can  however  be  used  to  repre- 
sent other  pronunciations,  as  is  shown  on  pp.  16f. 

The  chief  points  to  be  noticed  are  these : — 

1.  R   is    never    heard    unless   a   vowel    follows   it. 

Accordingly  it  will  be  seen  on  inspecting  the  table  that  r  is 
written  before  a  vowel  in  jarring,  starry  (jaaring,  staari),  etc., 
but  omitted  when,  in  other  forms  of  the  same  words,  a  conso- 
nant is  added,  as  in  jarred,  stars  (jaad,  staaz). 

There  is  an  apparent  exception  to  this  rule  in  such  words  as  barrel, 
barren,  quarrel,  sorrel,  which  are  often  pronounced  (bserl',  baern',  kworl', 
sorl'),  but  in  these  cases  the  1*  and  n»,  being  syllabic,  are  equivalent  to 
vowels. 

2.  All  words  ending  in  R  have  at  least  two  forms. 

R  final  is  never  heard  unless  a  vowel  follows  in  the  next  word. 
So  r  final  is  sounded  in  "  stir  up,"  "  render  an  account,"  "  fear 
of  punishment,"  but  silent  in  "  stir  the  fire,"  "  render  thanks," 
"  fear  nothing." 

In  this  book  the  longer  forms,  stoer,  rendar,  fiar,  and  so  on, 
are  always  employed,  but  in  the  table  at  the  head  of  this  chap- 
ter r  final  is  enclosed  in  brackets,  to  indicate  that  it  is  some- 
times silent. 


R  in  Combination  with  the  Vowels.  57 

We  have  an  analogous  case  in  the  article  a  or  an,  where  the 
n  disappears  before  a  consonant  in  the  next  word.  And  the 
same  thing  occurs  frequently  in  French,  where  many  final  con- 
sonants are  silent  unless  there  is  a  liaison  with  a  vowel  in  the 
word  which  follows. 

3.  R  sometimes  lengthens  the  vowels  which  pre- 
cede it. 

Compare  for  instance : — 


bad  and  bar 
bed    ,,     her 
bid     „     stir 
nod    ,,     nor 
bud    ,,     fur 

(bsed,  baar) 
(bed,  hoer) 
(bid,  stoer) 
(nod,  nor) 
(bced,  foer) 

It  is  only  in  unaccented  syllables  that  we  meet  with  a  short 
vowel  before  final  r,  and  that  vowel  is  always  the  same,  namely 
a,  whatever  may  be  written  in  our  ordinary  spelling,  e.g.  in 
pillar,  centre,  silver,  sailor,  honour,  pleasure,  martyr. 

4.  R   produces   Diphthongs    and  Triphthongs.     On 
referring  to  the  table  on  p.  55,  it  will  be  seen  that  r  produces 
the  four  diphthongs  ea,  ia,  oa,  ua,  besides  eya  and  owa  which 
are  very  rare,  and  three  triphthongs,  aia,  ana,  uya,  besides 
the  rare  triphthong  oia,  all  ending  with  the  vowel  a,  as  in  villa. 

5.  These    Diphthongs     and    Triphthongs    remain 
when  R  disappears,   as  may  be  seen  by  the  exx.  in  the 
table.     The  a  which  preceded  the  r  is  even  more  distinctly 
heard  in  fears,  moors,  fires  (fiaz,  muaz,  faiaz),  where  the  r  is 
silent,  than  in  fearing,  mooring,  firing. 

6.  The  "a"  is  often  a  separate  syllable,  though  not 
commonly  reckoned  as  such.     Sere  is  as  truly  a  dissyllable  as 
seer.     Compare  also  the  following  exx. : — 

rear  and  freer  hour   and  shower 

poor     „     doer  flour     „  flower 

hire     „     higher  pure     „  ewer 

lyre      „     liar  cure      „  skewer. 

7.  e    and  6  are  not    always    changed  into  ea,  oa 
by  R  following  them,  so  they  are  put  last  in  the  table  as 


58  English  Synthesis. 

requiring  more  explanation.  But  the  four  vowels  ey,  iy,  ow, 
uw  and  the  four  diphthongs  ai,  au,  oi,  yu,  never  have  r 
immediately  after  them.  The  sound  a  as  in  "  villa  "  is  always 
inserted  before  r. 

This  rule  is  never  broken  in  accented  syllables,  but  in  un- 
accented syllables  there  are  some  rare  exceptions.  See  air 
and  yur  on  pp.  28,  29.  In  these  cases  the  r  belongs  to  the 
syllable  which  follows,  and  so  is  disconnected  from  the  preced- 
ing ai  or  yu. 

8.  English  people  often  think  they  hear   IS  when 
it  is  silent.     Many  fancy  that  they  hear  it  in  such  words  as 
fierce,  fears,  moors  (fias,  fiaz,  muaz),  when  what  they  really 
hear  is  the  sound  a  as  in  villa.     And,  as  Prof.  Skeat  has  re- 
marked, some  even  think  that  they  hear  it  in  barn  pronounced 
like  the  German  Bahn  (baan),  and  in  arms  and  lord,  when  they 
sound   exactly  like  alms    and  laud  (aamz,  lod).     But  in  such 
cases  the  r  only  serves  to  indicate  that  we  pronounce  the  long 
vowels  aa  and  o  instead  of  the  short  vowels  ee  and  o  as  in  am 
and  odd  (sem,  od). 

9.  This  occasions  many  mistakes  in   French  and 
German.      For   (1)  Englishmen   often  fancy  that  they  pro- 
nounce r  when  they  really  neglect  to  do  so,  and  (2)  they  have 
a  bad  habit  of  inserting  a,  either  before  it  or  as  a  substitute 
for  it,  pronouncing  French  dire  and  pour  just  like  English  dear 
and  poor,  and  so  on. 

These  are  the  principal  points  to  be  observed,  but  it  may  be 
useful  to  note  some  further  details. 

ia,  ua.  The  diphthongs  ia  and  na,  as  in  peer,  poor,  are 
not  longer  than  the  vowels  iy  and  uw,  from  which  they  are 
derived,  the  first  element  being  shorter  than  iy  or  uw.  But  in 
sound  these  first  elements  resemble  the  long  vowels  iy  and  uw 
in  peel  and  pool  rather  than  the  short  i  and  u  in  pit  and  put, 
being  much  closer  than  these.  The  length  of  the  last  element 
is  variable,  being  shorter  wrhen  followed  by  the  sound  of  r, 
as  in  peerage,  poorest,  than  when  the  r  is  silent.  When  the  r 
is  heard,  this  a  can  hardly  be  reckoned  as  a  separate  syllable. 

In  some  words  ia  has  a  tendency  to  change  into  yoe,  that  is, 
the  stress  is  transferred  to  the  second  element,  which  is 


R  in  Combination  with  the  Vowels.  59 

lengthened,  whilst  the  first  is  so  shortened  as  to  become  a 
consonant.  Ear  is  often,  and  year  almost  always,  pronounced 
exactly  like  year  in  yearn  (yoen),  except  that  the  final  r  is 
liable  to  be  trilled  when  a  vowel  follows,  and  it  is  only  by  a 
special  effort  that  any  one  can  pronounce  year  as  yiar.  And 
in  like  manner  here,  near,  dear  are  often  pronounced  hyoer, 
nyoer,  dyoer. 

There  is  also  in  ua  a  tendency  to  become  6,  as  in  your, 
generally  pronounced  yor,  and  rhyming  with  for.  Compare 
also  Bournemouth  and  Eastbourne,  pronounced  by  some  Buan- 
mauth  and  lystbuan,  and  by  others  Bdnmath  and  lystbon. 
And  it  is  not  unusual  to  hear  shor  and  sholi  for  sure  and  surely, 
though  this  pronunciation  is  not  to  be  recommended. 

aia,  ana,  yua.  In  these  also  the  final  a  is  decidedly 
shortened  when  r  follows,  as  in  fiery,  flowering,  purest  (faiari, 
flauaring,  pyuarist). 

They  are  not  the  sounds  generally  represented  by  e  and  o, 
as  in  pet  and  pot.  But  just  as  in  representing  the  diphthongs 
in  peer  and  poor,  we  found  it  convenient  to  use  the  symbols  ia 
and  ua  rather  than  iya  and  uwa,  so  for  the  sounds  in  bear 
and  boar  it  is  convenient  to  use  ea  and  oa  instead  of  ea  and 
oa.  But  the  connexion  between  the  sounds  in  wering  and 
wear,  hdri  and  hoar  must  not  be  forgotten. 

ea,  oa.  In  these  the  first  sounds  are  e  and  o  as  \nfairy 
and  Paul,  but  shortened.  In  ea  and  oa  the  second  element, 
a,  is  short  and  less  distinct  than  at  the  close  of  ia,  ua, 
aia,  uua,  yuar,  so  that  it  cannot  be  reckoned  as  a  separate 
syllable. 

The  use  of  these  diphthongs  varies  very  much  in  the  speech 
of  different  people ;  and  also  in  the  mouth  of  the  same  person 
the  diphthongs  ea,  oa  are  liable  to  be  reduced  to  e  and  6  re- 
spectively when  the  word  in  which  they  occur  is  inflected,  or 
«ven  when  its  position  in  the  sentence  is  changed,  so  that  they 
are  very  perplexing.  The  following  rules  apply  to  my  pro- 
nunciation, but  are  not  of  universal  application. 

ea  is  distinctly  heard  when  no  r  is  sounded  after  it,  but  it 
is  reduced  to  e  when  the  r  is  sounded  on  account  of  a  vowel 
following  in  the  same  or  in  the  next  word,  or  at  least  the 


60  English  SynfTiesis. 

second  part  of  the  diphthong  so  nearly  disappears  as  to  be 
practically  unnoticeable.  So  if  we  did  not  aim  at  a  fixed  spell- 
ing for  each  word  we  ought  for  6ear,  stare,  etc.,  to  write  bea, 
stea  and  so  on,  when  such  words  are  at  the  end  of  a  sentence, 
or  followed  by  a  consonant  in  the  next  word,  e.g.  in  "  a  black 
bear,"  "  to  stare  wildly,"  and  ber,  ster  when  the  next  word 
begins  with  a  vowel,  as  in  "bear  it,"  "do  not  stare  at  him." 
But  it  seems  most  convenient  to  write  bear,  stear,  etc.,  in 
every  case. 

When  these  words  ending  in  -ear,  or,  to  speak  more  exactly, 
in  -ea  or  -er,  are  inflected,  they  follow  the  same  rule,  and  we 
have  er  before  a  vowel  and  ea  before  a  consonant ;  so  we  pro- 
nounce and  write  er  in  bearing,  staring  (bering,  stering),  and 
ea  in  bears,  stares  (beaz,  steaz). 

It  is  a  curious  fact  that  in  the  word  girl  a  sound  is  often  heard  inter- 
mediate between  ea  and  oe.  The  dictionaries  give  oe,  making  it 
rhyme  with  pearl,  and  that  is  the  pronunciation  I  myself  aim  at,  but 
my  friends  tell  me  I  really  pronounce  it  differently,  something  like  ea 
in  pear.  And  certainly  this  intermediate  sound  is  the  prevailing  one 
amongst  cultivated  people,  whilst  some  of  them  definitely  pronounce 
it  ea,  as  if  it  wore  spelt  gairl. 

oa  is  not  so  often  heard  as  ea,  being  noticeable  only  when 
such  a  word  as  roar,  store  is  at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  in  which 
case  the  r  of  course  disappears.  So  in  /  heard  the  lion  roar, 
Give  me  some  more,  Shut  the  door,  we  hear  roa,  moa,  doa.  But 
if  such  words  are  followed  by  another  word,  or  inflected,  the 
a  disappears ;  and  if  it  is  a  vowel  that  follows,  we  hear  or,  as 
in  Give  me  some  more  ink  (mor),  roaring,  storing  (roring, 
storing),  or  if  a  consonant,  simply  d,  as  in  Give  me  some  more 
pens  (mo)  roared,  stored  (rod,  stod). 

All  such  words  as  roar,  store,  door,  pour  have  therefore  in 
reality  three  different  forms,  according  to  position,  ending  in 
oa  when  final,  in  or  when  followed  by  a  vowel,  and  in  6  when 
followed  by  a  consonant,  though  it  is  convenient  to  use  for  them 
the  fixed  spellings  roar,  stoar,  doar,  poar. 

As  the  different  forms  of  the  words  we  write  with  the  endings 
ear  and  oar  are  difficult  to  remember,  it  may  be  convenient  to 
arrange  some  of  them  in  a  tabular  form,  to  show  more  clearly 


R  in  Combination  with  the  Vowels.  61 

how  the  pronunciation  is  affected  by  their  position  in  the  sen- 
tence. 


Before  a 
vowel. 

Before  a 
consonant. 

Final. 

bear 

ber 

bea 

bea 

pear 

per 

pea 

pea 

wear 

wer 

wea 

wea 

boar 

bor 

bo 

boa 

hoar 

hor 

ho 

hoa 

soar 

sor 

so 

soa 

Examples. — Bear  up  (ber).  Bear  no  malice  (bea).  More  than 
I  can  bear  (bea).  The  wild  boar  is  fierce  (bor).  The  boar  was 
killed  (bo).  He  caught  a  wild  boar  (boa). 

Or  in  weak  words  and  syllables.  In  the  weak  words  or, 
nor,  for,  your,  and  in  the  unaccented  final  syllables  of  therefore, 
icherefore,  lessor,  vendor,  guarantor  we  have  the  ending  or, 
before  a  vowel  and  o  in  other  cases,  but  oa  is  seldom  or  never 
heard,  and  we  spell  them  all  with  or,  thus: — 6r,  ndr,for,  ydr, 
dhearfdr  and  so  on. 

Eya,  owa,  oia.  Although  ey  and  ow  are  among  the  com- 
monest vowels  in  our  language,  all  these  combinations  are 
extremely  rare.  For  before  r  it  is  much  easier  to  pronounce 
the  corresponding  open  vowels  e  and  6.  And  the  combinations 
eyr,  owr  are  unknown  in  English,  it  being  still  more  difficult 
to  pass  from  ey  or  ow  to  r  without  inserting  a.  Great  care 
must  therefore  be  taken  in  pronouncing  such  German  words  as 
schicer,  Ohr,  (1)  to  avoid  the  open  vowels  heard  in  bear  and.  boar, 
and  (2)  not  to  insert  a  after  ey  and  ow.  It  used  to  distress 
my  excellent  German  mistress  Frau  Flohr  very  much,  that  her 
pupils  would  persist  in  pronouncing  her  name  just  like  the 
English  word  "floor." 

Varieties  of  Pronunciation  in  words  spelt  with  r.  It  may  be  well 
to  show  how  the  alphabet  used  here  can  be  employed  to  represent  some 
varieties  of  pronunciation  in  words  spelt  with  r.  To  represent  correctly 
some  pronunciations  which  are  frequently  heard,  it  would  be  necessary 
to  use  : — 

1.  aa  instead  of  aa  in  such  words  as  jarred,  stars,  barn,  far  (jaad, 


62  English  Synthesis. 

staaz,  baan,  faar)  to  indicate  that  the  sound  heard  is  a  diphthong  ending 
with  the  a  in  villa.  To  write  r  before  a  consonant  would  be  misleading, 
as  the  consonant  r  is  not  heard,  but  only  a  vowel  glide. 

2.  oar  instead  of  er  wherever  I  write  er,  i.e.  in  such  words  as  fairy, 
bearing,  staring  (feary,  bearing,  stearing),  Avhere  a  vowel  follows  the  r, 
to  indicate  that  a  diphthong  is  heard  and  not  a  simple  vowel. 

3.  oa  instead  of  6   in  words  spelt  with  or  followed  by  a  consonant, 
such  as  cord,  north  (koad.  noath),  etc.,  to  show  that  the  simple  vowel  is 
changed  into  a  diphthong. 

4.  owar  instead  of  oar  in  more,  door  (mowar,  dowar)  etc.,  to  indicate 
that  in  such  words  there  is  the  half-closed  vowel  of  pole,  and  not  the 
open  vowel  of  Paul. 

DOUBLED  SOUNDS. 

These  are  not  very  frequent,  though  doubled  letters  are  very 
common  in  our  ordinary  spelling,  but  several  consonants  and 
the  short  vowel  i  are  sometimes  doubled. 
Examples  of — 

tt,  dd,  kk.  mill.  nn.  11,  ss,  ii. 

kowtteyl  immyuar  sowlli 

heddres  unnesisari  howlli 

bukkeys  unnown  missteytmaut 

bukkiyping  inneyt  pitiing 

kseriing 

In  the  case  of  doubled  i,  what  is  done  is  to  give  a  sudden 
increase  of  force  to  the  vowel,  which  marks  the  beginning  of  a 
new  syllable.  But  when  explosive  consonants  are  doubled  it 
should  be  noticed  that  the  first  consonant  differs  from  the 
second.  The  organs  of  speech  take  the  right  position  for  the 
formation  of  the  consonant,  whatever  it  may  be,  and  the  re- 
opening of  the  passage  through  the  mouth  is  delayed  a  little, 
but  the  opening  or  explosion  is  not  made  twice  over.  The  first 
consonant  is  heard  in  the  act  of  closing  and  the  second  in  the 
act  of  opening. 

When  a  liquid  or  a  continuant  is  doubled,  the  sound  is  pro- 
longed, and  an  increase  of  force  is  given  to  indicate  the  beginning 
of  a  new  syllable.  In  the  case  of  continuants  it  is  not  easy  to 
make  the  increase  of  force  heard,  and  this  proves  somewhat 
inconvenient  for  ladies  whose  names  happen  to  begin  with  S, 


•    Inflections.  63 

unless  they  have  a  well-known  name  like  Smith.  Servants 
attempting  to  announce  such  a  name  as  Miss  Soames  or  Miss 
Sprigg  generally  call  it  Mis  Oictnz  or  Mis  Prig,  and  the  only 
safeguard  against  this  is  to  make  a  pause  after  Miss  when  giving 
them  the  name. 

CONSONANTS  COMBINED. 

Combinations  of  Consonants.  Itnplosive  and  ex- 
plosive Consonants.  It  is  not  only  doubled  consonants 
which  are  liable  to  be  modified  in  the  manner  just  described, 
for  whenever  two  consonants  which  are  ordinarily  explosive 
come  together,  these  is  only  one  explosion,  the  first  consonant 
being  heard  only  in  the  act  of  shutting  the  breath  passage, 
whilst  the  second  is  heard  in  the  act  of  opening.  In  such 
cases,  though  both  consonants  may  be  called  stops,  or  shut 
consonants,  it  is  only  the  second  that  is  explosive.  The  first  is 
said  to  be  implosive.  Observe  how  the  consonants  are  formed 
in  such  words  as  "sefci,"  "lo/tf,"  "  roe&rZ,"  "  be^rcZ,"  for  instance. 
There  is  no  explosion  for  the  k,  p,  b  and  g  in  these  cases. 

Shut  consonants  followed  by  a  liquid  are  modified  in  a  similar 
way,  the  vocal  organs  being  placed  in  the  right  position  for  the 
liquid  before  the  explosion  takes  place. 

Examples  :—  Braiin',  beyfcn', 


INFLECTIONS. 

The  real  character  of  English  inflections  is  often  disguised 
by  our  spelling.  For  instance,  the  termination  t  in  looked  is 
written  ed,  though  it  is  really  the  same  as  the  t  in  slept.  And 
there  are  also  vowel  changes  which  do  not  appear  in  written 
English.  We  find,  for  example,  that  the  present  and  past 
tenses  of  the  verb  to  read  are  written  alike,  although  pronounced 
respectively  riyd  and  red.  It  may  therefore  be  convenient, 
without  giving  a  complete"  view  of  the  inflections  of  English,  to 
show  those  which  are  not  clear  in  our  ordinary  spelling. 

The  terminations  t,  d,  id,  s,  z,  iz.  These  endings  to 
verbs  and  nouns  are  written  in  our  ordinary  spelling  as  t,  d, 
ed,  s,  ce,  es,  as  in  the  following  examples:  — 


64 


English  Synthesis. 


felt 
hoped 
moved 
added 


t  =  t 
d  =  t 
d  =  d 
»M!  id 


hopes 
pence 
pens 
dresses 


ce  =    8 

8      =      Z 

es  =  iz 


The  rules  governing  the  use  of  these  terminations  are  that — 

(1)  After  a  hard  consonant  we  use  a  hard  consonant,  either  4 
or  s,  as  the  case  may  be. 

(2)  After  a  soft  consonant  or  &  vowel  we  use  a  soft  consonant, 
either  d  or  z. 

And  the  exceptions  are  these : — 

(1)  After  a  liquid  we  sometimes  use  t,  and  in  the  word  pence 
we  use  s  after  the  liquid  n,  although  all  our  liquids  are  soft. 

(2)  After  consonants  which  cannot  conveniently  be  combined 
with  d  or  z  because  of  their  similarity  to  them,  we  retain  the 
vowel  i,  making  the  terminations  id  and  iz. 

The  consonants  which  cannot  be  combined  with  d  are  the 
point  stops  t  and  d,  and  those  which  cannot  be  combined  with 
z  are  the  point  continuants  or  sibilants  s,  z,  sh,  zh,  and  the 
composite  consonants,  ending  in  sibilants,  ch=t,  sh,  and  j  =d, 
zh. 


Examples 

of  endings  t, 

d,  id,  s, 

z,  iz  :  — 

After  hard 

After  soft 

After 

After 

After  t,  d,  and 

consonants. 

consonants. 

vowels. 

liquids. 

sibilants. 

dropt 

robd 

pleyd 

dremt 

spotid 

nokt 

begd 

friyd 

sind 

dredid 

poeft 

livd 

flowd 

loent 

dresiz 

goetht 

beydhd 

vyuwd 

boent 

myuziz 

drest 

myuzd 

fsensid 

longd 

pushiz 

pusht 

ruwzhd 

folo'd 

sweld 

ruwzhiz 

fecht 

ejd 

pleyz 

dwelt 

fechiz 

drops 

robz 

friyz 

driymz 

ejiz 

spots 

dredz 

flowz 

penz 

noks 

begz 

vyuwz 

pens 

posfs 

livz 

fsensiz 

singz 

goeths 

beydhz 

folo'z 

telz 

The  word  haus  makes  the  plural  hauziz,  changing  s  into  z 
before  the  termination  iz. 

Note  particularly  that  after  the  liquids  m,  n,  1  in  the  follow- 


Inflections. 


Ing  words  we  should  pronounce  t,  though  they  are  often  written 
with  ed : — 

bocnt,  loent,  dremt,  divelt,  spilt,  spelt,  spoilt.  But  in  the 
Biblical  phrase  "  they  spoiled  the  Egyptians,"  where  the  mean- 
ing is  "  they  took  spoils  from,"  we  pronounce  spoild. 

Change  of  th  to  dh.  The  plural  of  substantives  and  the 
3rd  person  of  verbs  ending  in  th  are  very  frequently  formed  by 
changing  th  to  dh  and  adding  z,  just  as  f  is  often  changed  to 
v  in  similar  cases,  e.g.  in  loaf,  loaves,  thief,  thieves  (lowf, 
lowvz.  fhiyf,  thiyvz).  After  a  short  vowel  or  a  consonant  the 
th  is  retained,  as  in  breaths,  deaths,  months,  tenths,  healths, 
"but  after  a  long  vowel  the  change  generally  takes  place,  as  in 
these  examples : — 

owth  owdhz 
paath  paadhz 
kloth  klodhz 


baaih  baadhz 
shiyth  shiydhz 
wriyth  riydhz 

Changes  of  Vowels.     The  following   changes   of  vowels 
are  not  apparent  in  ordinary  spelling  :  — 


mauth   maudhz 
yuth      yudhz 
truwth  truwdhz 


child 

woman 

pence 

say 

do 

read 

eat 

dream 

lean 

leap 

mean 

hear 

can 

shall 

do 


children 

women 

sixpence 


chaild 
wuman 

pens 

sey 
duw 


childran 
wimin 
sikspans 
sez>  se(i 
doez 


riyd  paslieme  and  part,  red 


does 

read 

eat,  ate 

dreamed 

leaned 

leaped 

meant 

heard 

can't 

shan't 

don't 

There  is  no  change  of  vowel  in  the  plural  gentlemen,  nor  in. 
plurals  formed  from  names  of  nations  ending  in  a  sibilant,  such 
as  Englishmen,  Frenchmen,  Welshmen,  which  are  pronounced 
just  like  the  singular. 

i.  r.  F 


iyt 

driym 

liyn 

liyp 

miyn 

hiar 

ksen 

shsel 

duw 


et 

dremt 

lent 

lept 

ment 

hoed 

kaant 

shaant 

downt 


06  English  Synthesis. 

The  past  tense  of  ask  (aask)  is  pronounced  aast,  the  k  being 
dropped. 

Note  that  there  is  a  distinction  in  sound,  though  not  in 
spelling,  between  the  following  verbs  and  the  corresponding 
adjectives  : — 

Past  tenxe  and  part,  of  verb.  Adjcctinc. 

aged  °yj(l.  eyji'l 

learned  loent  loenid 

cursed  knest  koesid 

blessed  blest  blesid 

beloved  biloevd  bilobvid 

And  used,  past  tense  and  part,  of  to  use,  is  pronounced  yuzdr 
whilst  used  =  accustomed  is  pronounced  yust. 

The  form  yust  is  probably  due  to  assimilation,  for  nsed  = 
accustomed  is  always  followed  by  to.  But  when  used,  past 
tense  or  part,  of  use,  is  followed  by  t,  as  in  "  I  used  two- 
brushes,"  "  It  has  been  used  to-day,"  the  pronunciation  ynzd  is- 
retained. 

ACCENT. 

In  English  the  accented  syllables  are  strongly  emphasized r 
whilst  the  unaccented  ones  are  pronounced  indistinctly,  so  that 
students  of  Trench,  where  every  syllable,  unless  elided,  is  heard 
<iuite  clearly,  and  the  accent  or  stress  is  nearly  equal  throughout 
the  sentence,  have  to  pay  special  attention  to  the  difference  be- 
tween the  two  languages  in  this  respect. 

In  many  words  we  have  principal  and  secondary  accents,  e.g. 
in  ventilation,  characteristic,  where  the  first  syllable  has  a 
secondary  accent.  But  in  this  scheme  secondary  accents  are 
not  marked. 

Accented  syllables  are  marked  thus:— infest.  When  printer* 
have  a  difficulty  in  supplying  the  type,  or  the  vowel  has  already 
a.  diacritic  mark  over  it,  a  turned  point,  before  the  accented 
vowel,  can  be  used  instead,  thus :— infest,  inijrotant. 

It  would  be  superfluous  to  mark  the  accent  under  ordinary 
circumstances,  except  in  the  case  of  foreign  or  unfamiliar  words, 
but  in  lessons  for  children  it  must  be  inserted,  unless  its  place 
can  be  easily  determined  by  rule.  In  phonetic  spelling  it  would 
be  easy  to  distinguish  nearly  all  those  pairs  of  words  which  we 


Accent.  67 

.ire  in  the  habit  of  spelling  alike  and  accenting  differently, 
-without  marking  the  accent,  as  may  be  seen  in  the  following 
examples : — 

rebel  =  rebl'  or  ribel 

accent  =  a.'kstmt  ,,  aeksent 

present  —  prezant  ,,  prizent 

absent  =  a^osant  ,,  sebsent 

record  =  rekod  .,  rikod 

protest  =  prow  test  ,,  pro'test 

refuse  =  refyus  „  rifynz 

In  our  language  the  accent  generally  falls  upon  the  first 
syllable,  and  in  a  good  many  words  it  has  been  shifted  accord- 
ingly. The  following  words,  for  instance,  used  to  be  accented 
on  the  second  syllable,  but  now  have  the  accent  on  the  first : — 

balcony,  barrier,  effort,  essay,  record  (subst.).  And  two 
other  facts  should  be  noted  : — 

(1)  a  and  o'  are  never  accented,  and — 

(2)  Certain  terminations,  the  commonest  of  which  are  -slian, 
-~han,  -slial,  and  -iti,  always  cause  the  accent  to   be   on  the 
preceding  syllable. 

So  in  this  book  words  which  have  no  accent  marked  are 
accented  according  to  the  following — 

Accent  Rules. 

1.  Words  ending  in  -slum,  -zhan,  -slial,  or^iti,  have  the  accent 
on  the  preceding  syllable.  Examples:  —  ditoemineyshan, 
dirizhan,  bcnifishal,  impyuniti. 

'2.  Other  words  are  accented  on  the  first  syllable,  unless  the 
vowel  of  that  syllable  is  a  or  o',  in  which  cases  the  accent  is 
on  the  second  syllable.  Examples  :—  ainceng,  parental,  pro'test, 
o'hcy. 

Accentuation  of  Compound  Words.  In  words  which 
are  not  compounds,  we  do  not  accent  two  consecutive  syllables, 
but  one  or  more  unaccented  S3rllables  occur  between  the  prin- 
cipal and  secondary  accents,  as  in  k'ceraktaristik,  ditoemindy- 
x/ian.  In  fact,  the  secondary  accents  are  introduced  merely 
because  it  is  difficult  to  pronounce  many  unaccented  syllables 


G8  English  Synthesis. 

in  succession.  But  in  compound  words,  or  rather  in  such 
words  as  are  felt  to  be  compounds,  each  part  of  the  word  has 
its  own  proper  accent,  so  that  the  accents  may  happen  to  fall 
upon  two  consecutive  syllables,  as  in  mfydsdevant. 

In  compound  words  one  of  the  accents  is  subordinated  to  the 
other,  and  may  be  called  a  secondary  accent.  In  pitfdl, 
aiLtbrcyk,  icochwocd,  for  instance,  the  chief  stress  is  on  the 
first  syllable,  and  in  cennoicn,  disteystful,  it  is  on  the  second. 

The  prefix  oen  is  always  felt  to  be  separable,  arid  has  a  slight 
stress  upon  it.  On  the  other  hand,  some  familiar  words,  such  as 
brckfast,  koebard,  are  no  longer  felt  to  be  compounds,  and  in 
these  only  one  syllable  is  accented. 

Ijevel  Stress.  The  word  amen  and  the  interjections, 
halloa  !  bravo  !  are  said  to  have  level  stress,  as  in  them  both 
syllables  are  equally  accented,  but  such  instances  ai'e  rare. 

Shifting  Accent.  There  are  a  few  dissyllables  which 
have  the  principal  accent  on  the  first  or  second  syllable,  accord- 
ing to  circumstances.  We  say,  for  instance,  "  His  age  is 
fifteen."  "  I  have  fifteen  shillings."  "  Some  fell  by  the  way- 
side." u  A  wayside  inn."  "  They  sat  outside."  "  An  outside 
passenger."  "  He  went  downstairs,"  "  A  downstairs  room." 
"Among  the  Chinese."  "A  Chinese  lantern."  ''I  saw  the 
princess."  "  I  saw  Princess  Alice." 

Contrasted  Words.  The  accent  is  also  shifted  when  wo 
want  to  contrast  two  words,  the  principal  stress  being  laid  on 
the  syllable  which  serves  to  distinguish  them.  So  we  say, 
agreeable  and  disagreeable,  decided  and  undecided,  open  and 
re-open,  ascend  and  descend,  though  the  principal  accents  gener- 
ally fall  as  follows  : — disagreeable,  undecided,  rc-6pen.  ascend, 
descend, 

Sentence  Stress  or  Emphasis.  This  subject  will  not 
be  fully  treated  here,  and  in  the  reading-book  sentence  stress 
has  not  been  marked  in  any  way.  All  that  has  been  done  is  to 
indicate  the  strongest  syllable  in  each  word,  and  it  is  left  to  the 
reader  to  distinguish  how  the  words  must  be  more  or  less 
strongly  stressed  according  to  their  places  in  the  sentence. 
But  it  seems  necessary  to  indicate  the  principles  which  govern 
the  use  of  stress  in  sentences.  These  appear  to  be  two : — 


Accent.  69 

(1)  Logical  Stress.     In  English  the  most  important  words 
in  the  sentence  are  stressed,  e.g.  in  "  Give  me  some  bread"-  the 
stress  falls  upon  give  and  bread,  at  least  under  ordinary  circum- 
stances.    But  just  as,  in  exceptional  cases,  we  have  seen  that 
the  stress  in  words  may  for  special  purposes  be  shifted  from 
one   syllable   to   another  for  the   sake  of  contrast,    so    under 
special  circumstances  we  might  say,  "  Give  m£  some  bread" 
implying  that   the   speaker  is  afraid  of  being  overlooked,  or 
"  Give  me  some  bread  "  to  intimate  that  he  does  not  ask  to  have 
it  all.     But  as  M.  Passy  has  observed,  in  such  cases  the  stressed 
words  or  syllables  are  those  which  are  the  most  important  under 
the  circumstances,  so  that  they  are  not  real,  but  only  apparent 
exceptions  to  the  rule. 

(2)  Rhythmical  Stress.     The  stress  is  also  much  affected 
by  the  rhythm  of  the  sentence.    We  have  noticed  how  in  words 
of  many  syllables  there  is  generally  a  well-marked  secondary 
stress,  just  because  it  is  not  convenient  to  pronounce  many 
weak  syllables  in  succession.     Words  which  are  an  exception  to 
this  rule,  such  as  temporarily,  laboratory,  where  we  have  four 
weak  syllables  coming  together,  are  difficult  to  pronounce  on 
that   account.     And  so  in  sentences   there   is   a   tendency  to 
introduce  stress  at  regular  intervals,  it  being  convenient  to  find 
a  series  of  syllables  to  lean  upon  at  intervals  which  are  tolerably 
regular.    It  is  true  that  the  logical  accent  falling  upon  the  chief 
words  in  the  sentence  is  of  the  first  importance,  and  cannot  be 
altogether  set  aside  ;  and  yet  if  a  set  discourse,  or  any  long 
sentence,  be  listened  to  with  a  view  to  noticing  the  stress,  it 
will  be  found  that  the  accents  seem  to  occur  very  regularly. 
And  closer  observation  will  show  that,  as  a  general  rule,  we 
unconsciously  select  amongst  the  accented  syllables  some  which 
shall  bear  the  chief  stress,  and  contrive  to  let  these  occur  at 
regular    intervals   of    time,   hurrying    over   the    intermediate 
syllables  if  they  are  many,  and  taking  them  slowly  if  they  are 
but  few. 

This  principle  of  rhythm  in  prose  was  first  expounded  by 
Mr.  Joshua  Steele  in  his  Easai/  towards  Establishing  the  Melody 
and  Measure  of  Speech,  A.D.  1775,  and  his  Prosodla  Rationalis, 
1779,  and  succeeding  teachers  of  elocution  have  approved  of 


70  English 

this  view,  e.g.  Dr.  Rush,  Philosophy  of  the  Voice,  p.  3G4;  Dr. 
Barber,  and  Chapman  in  his  Rhythmical  Grammar.  The  theory 
was  first  brought  to  my  notice  many  years  ago  in  Curwen's 
Grammar  of  Vocal  Muxic,  p.  108,  and  since  then  I  have  often 
listened  to  speaking  with  a  view  to  testing  it,  and  have  never 
failed  to  observe  that  the  strongly  accented  syllables  occur 
with  great  regularity.  Even  when  there  is  a  pause  in  speaking, 
the  interval  then  found  between  the  two  nearest  strong 
syllables  is  a  multiple  of  the  time  which  usually  elapses.  I 
observe  however  a  tendency  to  shorten  the  interval  between 
the  last  two  strong  syllables  before  a  pause. 

It  is  right  to  mention  that  neither  Dr.  Ellis  nor  Dr.  Sweet 
believe  in  this  law  of  rhythm  ;  but  the  evidence  of  my  own  ear 
so  strongly  confirms  Steele's  rule  that  I  cannot  refuse  to  accept 
it,  and  I  am  said  to  have  a  good  ear  for  time  in  music.  I  think 
however  that  a  first-rate  reader  or  speaker  does  not  adhere  so 
strictly  to  the  rule  as  ordinary  people,  and  that  if  you  would 
find  examples  where  it  absolutely  governs  the  accentuation,  you 
must  listen  to  the  reading  of  passages  which  have  been  read 
over  and  over  again  till  they  are  nearly  known  by  heart,  c.<j. 
the  liturgy  of  the  Church  of  England. 

If  the  ear  did  not  expect  the  strong  syllables  to  occur 
regularly,  the  variety  produced  by  the  skilful  speaker  who 
occasionally  departs  from  the  rule  would  not  be  appreciated  as 
it  now  is,  and  the  rule  does  not  cease  to  be  a  rule  because  it  is 
subject  to  some  exceptions. 

QUANTITY. 

Although  the  English  vowels  naturally  fall  into  two  classes, 
long  and  short,  their  length  is  not  always  fixed  and  invariable. 
It  depends  upon  two  things,  ( J)  whether  they  are  accented  or 
unaccented,  and  (2)  whether  they  are  followed  by  a  hard 
consonant. 

It  is  obvious,  for  instance,  that  unaccented  6  in  dthoritf  is 
shorter  than  accented  6  in  othar,  that  kaad  is  longer  than  kaaf, 
and  ina>n  longer  than  kcvt. 

Dividing  the  vowels  into  long,  half-long,  and  short,  they  may 
be  classified  thus  : — 


Quantity.  71 

Long.  All  so-called  long  vowels  and  diphthongs,  when  they 
•are  accented  and  either  final  or  followed  by  a  soft  consonant. 
Exx:— 

faa(r)  feyl  blow  taim 

foe(r)  h'yl  bluw  laud 

Half-Long.  (1)  All  so-called  long  vowels  and  diphthongs, 
when  followed  by  a  hard  consonant.  Examples  : — 

kaat  feyt  bowt  lait 

hoet  fiyt  buwt  aut 

.     (2)  All    so-called   short   vowels,  when  followed    by   a  soft 
•consonant.     Examples  :— 

seen  lifed  fed  hil  rod 

meed  kteb  hen  pig  dol 

Short.  All  so-called  short  vowels,  when  followed  by  a  hard 
•consonant.  Examples:  — 

koet  peet  pet  pit  pot 

keep  mcep  pek  stif  dros 

For  further  details,  see  the  chapter  on  quantity  in  Dr.  Sweet's 
Primer  of  Spoken  English. 

It  is  important  to  notice  the  influence  of  hard  and  soft 
•consonants  on  the  quantity  of  the  vowels  which  precede  them, 
because  English  people  are  apt  to  introduce  this  habit  of  altering 
the  length  of  the  vowels  into  the  German  language,  where  their 
length  is  not  affecteel  by  the  consonant  which  follows.  Prof. 
Vietor  frequently  calls  attention  to  this  mistake  in  his  book  on 
'German  Pronunciation. 

The  following  arrangement  may  be  a  help  in  remembering 
the  rules  for  quantity. 

Long.  Half-long.  Short. 

I  kaa(r) 

"^       '         (  kaad  kaat 

=2  Short  k;en  kset 

*£"  "  •'  (.  pleyel  pleyt 

1  Short  led  let 

(  flow 

(L  flowd  flowt 

rod  rot 


72  English  Synthesis. 

SYLLABLE  DIVISION. 

Speech  is  not,  as  some  persons  imagine,  divided  into  words; 
by  means  of  pauses,  or  in  any  such  way  as  will  enable  the  ear 
to  perceive  the  division.  Common  phrases,  such  as  "  at  all 
events,"  are  often  mistaken  by  children  for  single  words,  until 
they  have  been  seen  in  writing.  Indeed  it  is  now  generally 
recognised  that  the  true  unit  of  speech  is  the  sentence,  and  not 
the  word,  whether  we  regard  speech  phonetically,  or  as  the 
expression  of  thought,  or  go  back  to  the  history  of  its  origin. 
This  theory  was  first  propounded  by  Waitz,  and  there  is  a  very- 
interesting  exposition  of  it  in  Sayce's  Science  of  language, 
vol.  i.  85-87,  110-132. 

Breath  Groups.  Regarded  phonetically,  speech  consists 
of  breath  groups,  and  these  again  are  composed  of  syllables-. 
The  breath  group,  which  is  usually  a  whole  sentence,  and  oc- 
casionally only  a  part  of  one,  is  easily  recognised,  as  it  consists 
of  all  the  sounds  uttered  without  pausing  to  take  breath ;  but 
the  limits  of  the  syllable  are  not  always  very  clearly  defined. 

Intensity  of  Sound.  The  grouping  of  sounds  in  syllables: 
depends  upon  the  relative  intensity  of  the  sounds,  that  is,  on 
their  being  more  or  less  easily  heard.  And  their  intensity  de- 
pends partly  on  the  fact  that  some  sounds  are  naturally  more 
sonorous  than  others,  and  partly  on  the  force  of  expiration  used 
in  tittering  them. 

Intensity  due  to  particular  Sounds.  In  such  a  word! 
as  solid,  the  division  into  syllables  is  due  to  the  difference  in 
the  qualities  of  the  sounds  employed.  The  two  vowels  are  more 
sonorous  than  either  of  the  three  consonants,  and  each  vowel 
forms  the  nucleus  of  a  syllable,  the  intermediate  consonant  1 
belonging  to  neither  syllable  in  particular. 

Intensity  due  to  Effort  of  Speaker.  But  if  we  study 
the  syllable  division  of  such  words  and  phrases  as  pitiin(/r 
inissteytmant,  koj>i  it,  Mis  8mith,  we  find  that  a  new  syllable 
may  be  begiin,  without  any  change  of  sound,  by  merely  giving; 
a  fresh  impulse  of  force  to  the  sounds  i  and  s. 

Syllable  Division.  These  then  are  the  two  facts  upon 
which  S}dlable  division  depends;  and  wherever  there  is  a  marked! 


Syllable  Division.  73 

increase  of  intensity,  due  either  to  the  character  of  the  sound 
uttered,  or  to  the  force  of  utterance,  we  have  a  new  syllable. 

Syllables  without  "Vowels.  Syllables  can  be  formed 
without  any  vowel,  for  some  consonants  are  much  more  sonorous 
than  others.  We  can  hear  such  sounds  as  sh  and  the  com- 
bination pst  very  distinctly;  and  in  English,  as  we  have  already 
observed,  a  prolonged  m,  n  or  1  can  form  a  syllable  without 
the  aid  of  any  vowel,  as  in  schism,  reasons,  troubled  (sizm',, 
riyzn'z,  troebl'd). 

Wor«l  Division.  The  division  of  syllables  is  generally, 
but  not  always,  made  to  correspond  with  the  word  division. 
Dr.  Sweet  observes  that  we  distinguish  a  name  and  a  try  from 
an  aim  and  at  Rye  by  the  syllable  division,  that  is,  by  making 
the  stress  begin  on  the  first  sound  of  the  second  word.  Other- 
wise the  phrases  would  sound  exactly  alike.  He  shows  also- 
how  in  some  cases  the  word  and  syllable  division  do  not  corre- 
spond, e.g.  in  "  not  at  ul"  where  the  syllable  division  is  "a-tol,'" 
a  new  stress  beginning  on  the  t  cf  at. 

Rules  for  Syllable  Division.  In  English  these  are  as 
follows : — 

When  a  single  consonant  occurs  between  two  vowels. 

(1)  If  the  preceding  vowel  is  accented,  as  in  solid,  riyparr 
u-eyting,  the  consonant  belongs  equally  to  the  syllables  before 
and  after,  so  that  we  may  divide  the  word  as  best  suits  our 
convenience.     And  it  seems  most  convenient  to  join  the  con- 
sonant to  the  preceding  vowel  for  two  reasons ;  first,  because  all 
the  short  accented  vowels  are  difficult  to  pronounce  without  a 
vowel  following  them,  so  that  the   easiest   division  is  fuen-i, 
raib-it,  med-o',  vil-a,  sol-id,  icul-in,  and  so  on ;  and  secondly, 
because  by  this  means  we  can  often  separate  a  termination  from 
the  word  to  which  it  has  been  appended,  as  infol-ing,  stoicn-ir 
pleys-iz. 

(2)  But  if  the  preceding  vowel  is  unaccented,  the  consonant 
belongs  to  the  syllable  which  follows,  thus  : — ri-lent,  pro'-siydy 
a-tend,  lceb-a-ra-ta-ri. 

Between  two  weak  vowels,  however,  a  feeling  of  derivation 
sometimes  overrides  this  rule,  and  in  such  a  word  as  punishes 
the  sh  may  be  joined  to  the  preceding  syllable,  or  connected 


74  English  Synthesis. 

with  it  and  the  syllable  that  follows,  but  it  is  impossible  to  say 
pcenl-shar  ;  so  we  divide  thus:— pcen-ish-ar. 

When  tico  or  more  consonants  occur  between  tivo  voiccls. 

(1)  If  the  preceding  vowel  is  short  and  accented,  one  or  more 
consonants  must  close  the  syllable,  for  the  short  accented  vowels 
never  occur  in  open  syllables.     So  we  divide  thus  : — troth-liny, 
mcet-ras,  vcs-paz,  sik-li,  _pro</-»7S,   although  the   combinations 
bl,  tr,  sp,  kl,  j$r,   are  often  met  with  at  the  beginning  of 
words. 

(2)  But  if  the  preceding  vowel  is  unaccented,  we  piit  as  many 
consonants  as  possible  with  the  following  syllable ;  that  is,  as 
many  as  can  be  combined  together  at  the  beginning  of  a  word. 
So  we  divide  thus:— a-trmkt,  a-kros,  di-prdiv,  di-kleym,  o^-bliyk, 
pro'-gresiv,  in-tens,  in-lierit,  in-triucd,  ig-zcekt,  kan-siyl,  kaiu- 
praiz. 

(3)  And  if  the  preceding  vowel  is  long  and  accented,  we  do 
the  same,  dividing  thus: — stey-bliny,  cey-yrant,  ziy-bra,  laan- 
<lri,  siym-strcs. 

Exceptions  to  the  above  rules. 

When  a  group  of  consonants  begins  with  s,  the  s  belongs  to 
the  preceding  syllable.  So  we  divide  dis-koe-rij,  dis-paiz,  inis- 
'tcykj  beys-mant,  maas-tar,  klaas-ping,  although  «k,  sp,  st,  sni, 
«p  are  combinations  which  occur  at  the  beginnings  of  words. 

The  compounds  eli=:t,  sh,  and  j  =  «I,  zh,  are  not  divided  in 
syllable  division,  but  must  be  reckoned  as  one  consonant,  so  we 
divide  fcch-iny,  lej-ar=  fetish-ing,  ledzli-ar.  It  is  only  in  com- 
pound words,  such  as  ncet-shcl,  that  the  two  elements  of  ch  arc 
separated,  and  j  is  never  divided  in  this  manner. 

Tl  and  dl  can  be  combined  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable, 
though  not  at  the  beginning  of  a  word.  We  divide  thus  : — 
<liysan-tli,  prczan-tli,  di-sdid-t-dli,  fann-dling. 

The  above  rules  do  not  apply  to  compound  words,  which  are 
•divided  according  to  their  component  parts. 

IXTOXATIOX. 

The  chief  distinction  between  the  use  of  the  voice  in  speaking 
and  in  singing  is,  that  whilst  in  singing  it  is  sustained  for  a 
time  at  the  same  pitch,  in  speaking  it  is  continually  rising  and 


Intonation.  75 

falling.  And  not  only  do  single  syllables  rise  and  fall,  but  wo 
frequently  hear  a  rise  succeeded  by  a  fall  on  the  same  syllable, 
or  the  opposite,  that  is,  a  syllable  falling  and  then  rising  again. 
The  intervals  through  which  the  voice  rises  and  falls  in  speak- 
ing are  however  very  difficult  to  ascertain  accurately,  nor  has 
any  sort  of  notation  been  invented  which  can  adequately  express 
them,  so  that  the  acquisition  of  good  intonation,  which  is  of  high 
importance  in  reading  and  speaking,  must  depend  more  on  the 
feeling  and  taste  of  the  speaker,  and  on  his  opportunities  of  ob- 
serving and  imitating  good  models,  than  on  any  systematic  in- 
struction. It  may  suffice  now  to  state  two  rules  which  govern 
English  musical  intonation,  and  which  demand  our  attention  the 
more  because  they  do  not  prevail  in  French. 

1.  Syllables  which  are  accented  rise  in  pitch. 

2.  In  interrogative  sentences  the  voice  rises  at  the  end,  but 
all  other  sentences  have  a  fall  at  the  close. 

Key.  The  key  in  which  speakers  pitch  their  utterances  de- 
pends partly  on  their  vocal  organs,  men  naturally  using  a  lower 
key  than  women  and  children,  and  great  differences  being  ob- 
servable between  individuals  of  the  same  age  and  sex.  Some- 
thing also  depends  on  the  speaker's  frame  of  mind.  Joy,  or  any 
great  excitement,  naturally  leads  to  the  i;se  of  a  higher  key  than 
usual. 

Pitch  of  the  Vowels.  Each  of  the  vowels  has  a  pitch 
natural  to  itself,  and  the  relative  pitch  of  the  vowels  has  been 
carefully  examined  by  Dr.  Trautmann.  I  regret  that  I  am 
not  able  to  verify  his  conclusions,  but  it  seems  worth  while  to 
quote  them. 

His  system  is  best  exemplified  by  the  French  vowels,  as  in 
tout,  drolc,  homme,  pate,  pattc^  pris ,  r'fr.  fini,  pcur,  pcu  (peii), 
/m,  and  is  as  follows  : — 


76  English  Synthesis. 

It  will  been  seen  that  the  vowels  thus  form  the  chord  of  the 
dominant  seventh. 

Three  other  vowels  in  Dr.  Trautmann's  scheme  are  not  of  any 
practical  importance.  One  of  them  is  often  heard  in  Hanover, 
but  the  other  two  are  not  known  in  any  language. 

VARIABLE  WORDS. 

In  the  attempt  to  spell  the  English  language  phonetically,  we 
are  met  by  a  serious  difficulty  arising  from  the  fact  that  a 
large  number  of  words  are  pronounced  in  different  ways.  We 
have  (1)  those  which  are  pronounced  differently  by  different 
well-educated  people,  and  (2)  those  which  are  pronounced 
differently  by  the  same  persons  under  different  circumstances. 

The  first  class  of  words  need  not  trouble  us  much.  At 
present  we  have,  it  is  true,  no  standard  pronunciation,  but  when 
a  considerable  number  of  well-educated  people  have  given  some 
attention  to  phonetics  and  are  able  to  put  down  their  pronuncia- 
tion on  paper,  it  may  be  hoped  that  we  shall  arrive  at  a  con- 
sensus of  opinion  in  the  matter,  and  find  out  what  pronunciation 
is  most  general  among  cultivated  English  people,  and  fix  our 
standard  accordingly. 

The  following  examples  of  words  of  this  class  are  taken  froni 
a  paper  drawn  up  for  the  English  Spelling  Reform  Association 
by  the  late  Mr.  Evans.  They  are  given  first  in  ordinary  spell- 
ing, and  then  according  to  rny  own  pronunciation. 

Accented  Vowel  Sounds. 

(1)  aa  or   ae.     Path,  pass,  past,  cask,  grafting,  command, 
advance,  stanching,  answer,  half,  laug/i,  staff,  after,  laughter. 

Paath,  paas,  paast,  and  with  aa  in  every  case. 

(2)  aa  or   o.      Daunt,    haunt,    haunch,    launch,    aauntlet> 
laundress. 

Dont,  hunt,  haanch,  laanch,  gaantlit,  laandris. 

(3)  o  or  o.     Often,  costing,  soften,  malt,  salt,  falter,  paltry. 
6fn',  kosting,  sofn',  molt,  solt,  foltar,  poltri. 

(4)  aa  or  aa.     Parse,  anus,  carves.    (Cp.  ^;«ss,  alms,  calves^ 
and  for  the  diphthong  aa,  see  pp.  Gl  f.) 

Paaz,  aamz,  kaavz. 


Variable  Words.  77 

(5)  oa  or  6.     Lord,  sort,  stork.     (Cp.  laud,  sought,  stalk.) 
Lod,  sot,  stok. 

(6)  owa,  oa,  or  6.     Wore,  pour,  icorn,  jjoured,  boarder. 
Woar,  poar,  won,  pod,  bodar.     See  pp.  59-62. 

(7)  yu  or  uw.     Lute,  lucent,  luminous,  salute. 
Lyut,  lyusant,  lyuminas,  salyut. 

Unaccented  Vowel  Sounds. 

(8)  6  or  o.     Austerity,  auxiliary,  already. 
Osteriti,  ogzilyari,  dlredi. 

(9)  i  or  a.     Satirize,  heresy. 
Sset/raiz,  her /si. 

(10)  ai  or  i.     Civilization,  authorization,  equalization. 
Sivilnuzeyshan,  otharou'zeyshan,  iykwalouzeyshan. 

Consonants. 

(11)  ty  or  ch.      Nature,  fortune,  question,  furniture,  for- 
feiture, investiture,  fustian,  celestial. 

Neyc/iar,  foc/zan,  kwesc/jan,  foenicfiar,  fofic/jar,  investic/jar, 
foesfo/an,  silesfyal. 

(12)  dyorj.     Cordial,  guardian,  educate. 
Kodf/al,  gaacZyan,  erfyukeyt. 

(13)  sy  or  sh.     Issue,  sensual — iayu,  sens/iwal. 

(14)  zy  or  zh.     Casual,  visual — kxzhyw&l,  vizywal. 

(15)  ch  or  sh.     Bench,  milch,  venture — benc/j,  mils/i,  ven- 
o/iar. 

(1C)  j  or  zh.     Fringe,  bulge — frinj,  boslj. 

We  come  next  to  the  second  class  of  variable  words,  namely, 
those  which  vary  in  the  speech  of  the  same  person,  (1)  ac- 
cording to  their  connexion  in  the  sentence,  or  (2)  on  different 
occasions,  i.e.  as  he  may  be  (a)  speaking  rapidly  and  familiarly, 
or  (b)  speaking  slowly  and  distinctly  in  addressing  a  large  num- 
ber of  people,  or  (c)  singing.  The  pronunciation  of  singers  will 
not  be  discussed  here,  but  the  words  which  vary  in  speaking 
are  so  numerous  and  occur  so  frequently  that  they  require  to  be 
considered  in  detail. 

Nearly  all  these  variable  words  may  be  arranged  in  four 
groups,  thus :— 


78  English 

1.  Words  ending  in  r. 

2.  Weak  words,  i.e.  those  which  may  occupy  a  subordinate 
place  in  the  sentence  and  so  have  no  accent. 

3.  Words  where  the  weak  syllables  vary. 

4.  Words  which  may  have  a  syllable  more  or  less. 

A  few  words  such  as  again  (age3'n,  agen)  do  not  fall  under 
any  of  the  preceding  groups. 

Words  ending  in  r.  We  have  already  seen  that  atf 
words  ending  in  r  have  two  forms,  the  r  not  being  heard  iinless 
a  vowel  follows  in  the  next  word,  and  that  in  words  which 
have  the  diphthongs  ea  and  oa  the  a  sometimes  disappears, 
pp.  v.  7,  13-15. 

Weak  %Vor«I.«i.  A  variation  in  one  of  these' weak  words, 
namely,  an,  is  recognised  in  our  ordinary  spelling,  for  we  write 
a  or  an  according  as  a  consonant  or  a  vowel  follows  in  the  next 
word ;  but  the  variations  which  we  do  not  thus  indicate  are 
very  numerous  indeed.  For  where  words  occup\'  a  subordinate 
place  in  a  sentence  and  consequently  have  no  accent,  clear 
vowels  generally  become  obscure,  or  they  disappear  altogether, 
and  consonants  are  very  often  dropped.  And,  as  a  rule,  this  is 
not  due  to  slovenly  speaking,  but  is  a  necessity  of  the  case. 
To  pronounce  such  words  always  in  their  emphatic  forms  would 
be  very  strange  and  unnatural,  and  quite  contrary  to  the  genius 
of  our  language.  In  fact  no  Englishman  could  do  it,  however 
carefully  he  might  aim  at  correctness  and  precision  in  his 
speech. 

For  example,  the  word  and  has  four  forms,  used  \)y  every- 
body, and  all  recognised  in  the  Oxford  Dictionary.  When  we 
make  a  pause  after  it,  we  pronounce  it  (1)  a>nd,  to  rhyme  with 
hand  (bsend),  but  the  two  forms  most  frequently  used  are  (2) 
and,  like  and  in  husband  (huzband),  (3)  an,  like  an  in  organ 
fugan);  as  in  "  pen  and  ink"  (and),  "go  and  see'1  (an),  whilst 
in  some  familiar  phrases,  as  in  "bread  and  butter.''  it  is  invari- 
ably weakened  to  (4)  n\ 

The  d  need  not  disappear  before  every  consonant,  but  only 
before  those  with  which  it  could  not  combine  at  the  beginning 
of  a  word.  We  can  use  the  form  and  in  ':  strong  and  well," 
<•}>.  "dwell,"  "cold  and  raw.''  cp.  "draw,"  an°l  so  on,  but  in 


Weak  Words, 


79' 


familiar  speech  no  one  adheres  to  this  rule,  and  even  in  public 
reading  and  speaking  one  may  often  hear  the  d  dropped  before 
a  vowel. 

And  again,  the  has  two  forms,  recognised  by  singers,  though 
not  distinguished  in  ordinary  spelling.  Before  a  vowel  it  is 
<//</,  and  before  a  consonant  dfia.  We  say  dhi  cepV,  dhi  orinj, 
ilha  melan,  dha  pear. 

The  following  list,  based  upon,  but  not  quite  identical  with, 
the  list  in  Dr.  Sweet's  Elementarbuch,  contains  nearly  all  those 
words  which  have  weak  forms.  The  emphatic  forms  of  a,  an, 
the  (ey,  sen,  dhiy),  are  never  heard  unless  we  purposely  isolate 
them,  as  these  words  always  occupy  a  subordinate  place  and 
are  closely  connected  with  the  noun  which  follows. 


Empliatic. 

Weak. 

Empliatic. 

Weak. 

a  or  an: 

ey,  sen, 

a,  an. 

madam  : 

msedam, 

mam,  m'.. 

am  : 

sem, 

am,  in. 

mseni, 

and: 

send, 

and,  an,  n'. 

me: 

miy, 

mi. 

are  : 

aar,  aa, 

ar,  a. 

must  : 

mcest, 

mast,  mas. 

as  : 

SBZ, 

az,  z. 

my: 

mai, 

mai,  mi. 

at: 

set, 

at. 

of: 

ov, 

av. 

be: 

tty, 

bi. 

or  : 

Or,  o 

or,  ar,  a. 

been: 

biyn, 

bin. 

(rarely  oa), 

can: 

kan, 

kan,  kn'. 

nor  : 

nor,  no, 

nor,    nar, 

could  : 

kud, 

kad. 

(rarely  noa), 

na. 

do: 

duw, 

du,  da,  d. 

not: 

not, 

n't. 

does  : 

doez, 

daz. 

saint  : 

seynt,        sint,sin,sn. 

for: 

for,  fo, 

for,  far,  fa. 

shall  : 

sheel, 

shal,  shl'. 

(rarely  foa), 

she: 

shiy, 

shi,  sh. 

from  : 

from, 

fram. 

should  : 

shud, 

shad,  shcl. 

had: 

lued, 

had,  ad,d. 

sir  : 

soer,  soe, 

sar,  sa. 

has  : 

hsez, 

haz,  az,  z. 

some  : 

soem, 

sam. 

have  : 

hsev, 

hav.  av,  v. 

such: 

stech, 

sach. 

he: 

hiy, 

hi.  iy.  i. 

than  : 

dhsen, 

dhan. 

her: 

hoer, 

liar,  ar,  a. 

that  : 

dh»t, 

dhat,  dht. 

him: 

him, 

im. 

the: 

dhiy, 

dhi,  dha. 

his  : 
is  : 

hiz, 
iz, 

ix. 

7,  S. 

their  :  ) 
there:  j 

dhea,  dher, 

dhar,  dha. 

English  Synthesis. 


Emphatic. 

Weak. 

Emphatic.        Weak. 

them: 

dhem, 

dham, 

were  : 

woer,  woe,  war,  wa. 

dhm'. 

(rarely  wer,  wea), 

through 

thruw, 

thru. 

who  : 

huw,            1m. 

till: 

til, 

tl. 

will: 

wil,            wl,  al,  1. 

to: 

tuw, 

tu,  ta. 

would 

wad,           wad,  ad,  d. 

us: 

038, 

as,  s. 

you: 

yuw,           yu,  ya. 

was  : 

woz, 

waz. 

your: 

yor,  yu,       yar,ya,yor. 

we  : 

wiy, 

wi. 

(rarely  yuar,  yua,  yoa). 

1%'ord*  where  the  weak  Syllables  vary.     The  princi- 
pal variations  which  take  place  in  weak  syllables  are  these : — 

1.  The  vowels  «e,  o,  o%  oe,  o  are  liable  to  be  redxiced  to  a. 

2.  e  is  reduced  to  i,  and  ey  becomes  e  or  i. 

3.  a  before  n  or  1,  and  u  before  1,  disappear,  and  the  n  or  1 
becomes  syllabic,  so  that  the  syllable  is  not  lost. 

reduced  to  a.     Exx. — 


a-     ascend 

gesend           or 

asend 

assent 

sesent            „ 

asent 

admit 
abstain 

sedmit            ,, 
sebsteyn       „ 

admit 
absteyn 

<»     confirm 
confound 

konfoem        ,, 
konfaund     ,, 

kanfoem 
kanfaund 

o»    polite 
provision 

po'lait            „ 
pro'vizhan    „ 

palait 
pravizhan 

4>e  perform 

poefom          ,, 

pafoin 

surprise 
eastern 
withered 

soepraiz        ,, 
iystoen         ,. 
widhoed       ,, 

sapraiz 

iystan 
widhad 

o     forgive 
forget 

f"giv             „ 
foget   .          ,, 

fagiv 
faget 

ekses 
eksept 


ikses 
iksept 


Weak  Syllables. 


81 


isenshal 

kaindnis 

kauntlis 

separit 

vaialit 

yestadi 

holidi 

ksendidet      or       kaendidit 

sedvo'ket        „        sedvo'kit 

olwez  „        olwiz 

paadn' 
foln' 

maashl' 
praektikl' 

yusfl' 
pleyfl' 
byutifT 
wcendafl'i 


In  most  of  these  words,  and  in  others  which  resemble  them, 
the  clear  pronunciation  of  the  unaccented  vowels  is  very  rare, 
and  is  hardly  ever  heard  except  in  slow  public  reading  or  speak- 
ing. The  doubtful  vowels  in  initial  syllables  are  scarcely  ever 
pronounced  clearly  except  when  the  words  in  which  they  occur 
stand  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  after  a  pause. 

As  regards  the  exx.  of  e,  it  should  be  remembered  that 
unaccented  i  is  often  intermediate  between  e  and  i,  and  the 
attempt  to  pronounce  e  in  unaccented  syllables  generally  results 
in  this  intermediate  sound,  clear  unaccented  e,  as  in  insect, 
being  very  rare. 

It  is  noticeable  that  when  we  compare  dissyllables  whose 
first  syllable  is  unaccented  and  variable  with  corresponding 
forms  having  more  than  two  syllables,  we  generally  find  that, 
in  these  longer  forms,  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  always 

I.  P.  G 


essential 

esenshal      or 

kindness 

kaindnes       ,, 

countless 

kauntles        ,, 

separate  (adj.) 

separet          ,, 

violet 

vaialet          „ 

ey  yesterday 

yestadey       „ 

holiday 

holidey         „ 

candidate 

ksendideyt    ,, 

advocate 

sedvo'keyt    „ 

always 

olweyz          „ 

an  pardon 

paadan          ,, 

fallen 

folan             „ 

al    marshal 

maashal        ,, 

practical 

prsektikal     „ 

ul    useful 

yusful           „ 

playful 

pleyful         „ 

beautiful 

byutiful       ,, 

wonderfully 

woendafuli  ,, 

82  English  Synthesis. 

obscure.  We  sometimes,  though  very  rarely,  pronounce  admit, 
konftiem,  poefom,  foge"t,  ekstfs,  but  we  always  say  admishan, 
kanfoeming,  pafdmans,  fagetful,  ikst'siv,  and  so  on. 

Words   which  may  have  a  Syllable  more  or  less. 

It  is  surprising  how  numerous  these  words  are.  In  estimating 
the  number  of  syllables  in  a  word,  the  spelling  rather  than  the 
sound  is  generally  taken  for  a  guide,  but  in  speaking  the  real 
number  of  syllables  is  often  more  or  less  than  the  conventional 
reckoning.  It  frequently  depends  on  the  position  of  the  word 
or  the  rhythm  of  the  sentence. 

In  poetry  we  find  a  few  of  these  variations  indicated  by  the 
spelling,  e.g.  '£  and  's  for  it  and  is,  when  they  are  not  to  be 
pronounced  as  separate  syllables,  and  ev'n,  falln1 ,  know'st,  seest, 
for  even,  fallen,  knowest,  seest. 

In  writing  verse,  some  confusion  arises  from  the  artificial 
reckoning  of  syllables  according  to  spelling  rather  than  accord- 
ing to  sound.  For  instance,  hour  and  fire  have  as  much  claim 
to  be  called  dissyllables  as  power  and  higher,  and  it  is  quite 
according  to  rule  to  make  hour  rhyme  with  power,  and  fire  with 
higher,  and  so  on.  But  when  such  words  are  not  at  the  end  of 
a  line,  a  distinction  is  made  between  them,  and  hour  and  fire 
are  invariably  treated  as  monosyllables.  So  too  chasm  may  not 
be  reckoned  as  two  syllables,  though  it  is  really  pronounced  so, 
just  as  distinctly  as  heaven. 

Variable  words  having  a  syllable  more  or  less  may  be  classed 
as  follows  : — 

1.  Weak  words,  which  may  be  reduced   to  consonants  and 
cease  to  be  syllables.     See  above,  pp.  78-80. 

2.  Words  ending  in  iar,  uar,  aiar,  auar,  or  yuar,  as  : — 

sere )  hire      )  .  -„,-.,- 

r     siar  ,  .  ,       t  haiar  a  }  nauar 

seer  )  higher  ) 


poor       puar  dire      )      .  pure        pyuar 

brewer  bruar  dyer     / c  newer     nyuar 

The  rule  for  these  is  that  they  are  pronounced  as  two 
syllables,  unless  they  happen  to  be  followed  \)y  a  vowel  in  the 
next  word,  causing  the  r  to  be  trilled  ;  in  which  case  the  a 
often  ceases  to  be  a  syllable,  and  is  reduced  to  a  mere  vowel- 


A  Syllable  More  or  Less.  S3 

glide.  In  "  the  hour  of  trial,"  "  the  power  of  steam,"  hour  and 
power  can  be  pronounced  as  monosyllables,  but  in  "  this  very 
hour,"  "power  to  resist,"  or  in  the  plural  forms  hours, powers, 
they  must  be  pronounced  as  dissyllables. 

3.  Words  in  which  n%  1'  or  ar  is  followed  by  an  unaccented 
vowel,  such  as  : — 

n*    lessening            lesn'ing  or  lesning 

„      prisoner              prizn'ar  „  priznar 

1'    traveller             trsevl'ar  „  trsevlar 

ar    memory              memari  „  memri 

,,      wandering          wondaring  „  wondring 

revarans  revrans 


It  will  be  seen  by  these  examples  that  n'  may  be  .reduced  to 
n,  1'  to  I,  and  ar  to  r. 

This  uncertainty  as  to  the  use  of  ar  or  r  gives  rise  to  the 
common  mistakes  laibarari,  ffenari,  wmbare'la,  for  laibrari, 
Henri,  osmbr^la. 

4.  Words  where  in  like  manner  1,  u,  o'  or  yu  is  followed  by 
an  unaccented  vowel,  and  may  be  reduced  thus : — i  to  y,  u  to 
w,  o'  to  w,  and  yu  to  yw.  Exx. : — 

1  suppliant  soepli'ant  or  soeplyant 

„  glorious  glori'as  „  gloryas 

„  period  piari'ad  ,,  piaryad 

,,  lovelier  loevli'ar  „  loevlyar 

u  influence  influ'ans  „  inflwans 

o'  following  folo'ing  „  folwing 

yu  individual  individyual  ,,  individywal 

,,  tempestuous  tempestyuas  ,,  tempestywas 

,,  casuistry  ksezyuistri  ,,  kaezywistri 

It  must  however  be  acknowledged,  as  regards  this  last  class  of  words, 
that  some  readers  of  poetry  would  retain  the  full  number  of  syllables, 
in  spite  of  the  metre.  It  is  an  open  question  whether  we  are  to  consider 
that  a  syllable  is  elided,  or  that  the  poet  has  chosen  to  vary  his  metre 
by  occasionally  introducing  a  superfluous  syllable.  It  is  unquestionable 
that  the  best  poets  do  at  times  deliberately  introduce  extra  syllables,  so 
the  reader  is  free  to  follow  his  own  taste  in  this  matter. 

We  often  find  in  poetry  that  words  ending  in  syllabic  nj  are  written 
thus : — giv'n,  ev'n  j  and  the  is  written  th'  as  if  to  indicate  that  a 


84  English  Synthesis. 

syllable  is  to  be  elided.  But  in  prose  we  should  never  drop  these 
syllables,  nor  does  it  seem  possible  to  do  so  in  poetry,  except  in  those 
instances  where  n»  happens  to  be  followed  by  a  vowel  in  the  next  word, 
where  we  could  reduce  it  to  n. 

SPELLING  OF  VARIABLE  WORDS. 

The  rules  followed  in  this  work  as  to  the  spelling  of  variable 
words  are  these : — 

1.  Words  variously  pronounced  by  different  people  are  spelt 
in  accordance  with  my  own  pronunciation. 

2.  Words  pronounced  differently  by  the  same  persons  under 
different  circumstances  have  a  fixed  spelling, 

a.  Words  ending  in  r  have  the  r  always  written. 

b.  Weak  words  are  written  in  their  emphatic  forms. 

c.  Words  in  which  the  weak  syllables  vary,  or  where  there 
may  be  a  syllable  more  or  less,  are  written  to  represent  the 
colloquial  usage  of  a  careful  speaker. 

3.  In   the  selections  of  poetry,   the  rule  of  having  a  fixed 
spelling  for  variable  words  has  been  set  aside  where  it  was 
requisite  to  do  so,  in  order  to  indicate  the  number  of  syllables 
required  by  the  rhythm. 

In  these  cases,  and  in  a  few  instances  when  the  pronuncia- 
tion seems  doubtful,  alternative  forms  are  given  at  the  foot  of 
the  page. 

Exceptions  to  the  above  rules : — 

1.  Words  beginning  with  wh  and  those  ending  with  oar 
are  not  spelt  as  I  usually  pronounce  them.     My  pronunciation 
of  such  words  is  variable,  and  I  seldom  pronounce  wh  and 
oar,  generally  substituting  w  and  or,  so  that  token  is  =  wen, 
and  oar  is  =  or,  except  where  the  words  containing  them  are 
specially  emphasized.     But  the  forms   in  wh   and  oar  have 
been  used  throughout. 

2.  The  following  words  are  written  in  their  weak  forms: — 

a  is  written  a 

an  ,,        an 

and  ,,        and 

the  ,,         dhi  or  dha 

that  rcl.  or  conj.          ,,         dhat 

to       unstressed  tu 


Spelling  of  Variable  Words.  85 

The  demonstrative  that  is  written  dhcet.  It  is  convenient  to 
be  able  to  distinguish  dhat  and  dhcet  in  such  sentences  as, 
1  believe  that  that  (dhat  dhcet)  is  true. 

And  to,  when  stressed,  as  in  to  and  fro,  is  written  tuw, 
like  the  words  too  and  two. 

These  spellings  should  also  be  noted  : — 

or      is  icritten    or        oar,  ore      are  written  oar 
nor  „          nor      the  Nore  „          Noar 

for  „          for       four,  fore  „          foar 

your  „          yor      yore  „          yoar 

The  longer  forms  of  or,  nor  and  for  (oa,  noa,  foa)  are  occa- 
sionally heard  when  speakers  pause  upon  these  words,  but  this 
is  quite  exceptional,  as  for  seldom,  and  or  and  nor  never,  are 
found  at  the  end  of  a  sentence.  These  long  forms  never  occur 
in  my  own  pronunciation. 


V. 

LOAN  WORDS  USED  IN  ENGLISH. 

The  right  pronunciation  of  loan  words  from  French  and 
other  languages  is  a  very  perplexing  question.  Many  of  them 
are  pronounced  in  various  ways,  and  it  is  by  no  means  easy  to 
decide  what  pronunciation  should  be  recommended,  and  whether 
those  who  are  able  to  pronounce  the  language  from  which  they 
are  borrowed  should  use  a  foreign  or  an  anglicized  pronuncia- 
tion. On  the  whole,  it  seems  best  to  anglicize  them,  as  far  as 
custom  will  permit,  for  many  foreign  words,  especially  French 
ones,  require  a  great  effort  to  pronounce  them  in  the  foreign 
fashion  when  they  occur  in  the  middle  of  an  English  sentence, 
even  on  the  part  of  those  who  know  them  well,  and  they  must 
be  miserably  mispronounced  by  the  average  Englishman. 
Moreover  the  French  pronunciation  of  a  French  word,  in  such 
a  position,  far  from  being  appreciated  by  Frenchmen,  is  particu- 
larly offensive  to  them. 

There  are,  however,  a  few  foreign  sounds  which  all  should 
try  to  learn,  and  which  can  be  very  easily  acquired  in  child- 
hood. For  instance,  the  use  of  English  ong  as  in  song,  in  the 
Fr.  bonbon,  bdton,  etc.,  is  not  tolerated  amongst  well  educated 
people,  who  are  expected  to  know  the  French  nasal  vowel  on. 

SPECIAL  SYMBOLS  REQUIRED. 

The  minimum  number  of  foreign  sounds  for  which  fresh 
symbols  are  required  seems  to  be  nine,  as  follows  : — 

Fr.       Germ.  Fr.  Germ. 

a  as  in  patte  Mann  an  as  in    pan  x.  as  in  ac/i 

o      „     peu     schon  in        „      pin  $     ,,      ic/i 

ii      ,,     pu      Kwhn          on        ,,      pont 
eun      „     un 

86 


The  Most  Necessary  Foreign  Sounds.  87 

a  serves  for  two  sounds  which  are  not  identical,  short  Fr.  a 
in  "patte,"  and  short  German  a  in  "Mann." 

aa  is  used  to  represent  (1)  the  Fr.  a  in  "  pdte,"  (2)  the  long 
Fr.  a  in  "menage,"  and  (3)  the  long  Germ,  ah  in  "la/iin." 

a  is  used  for  the  short  vowels  (1)  e  in  Fr.  "  le"  and  (2)  e 
in  Germ.  "  Gabe." 

oe  represents  French  eu  in  u  pewr." 

ny  is  used  for  French  gn  in  "  vignette." 

Generally  speaking,  the  length  of  the  Fr.  vowel  is  not  indi- 
cated. When  we  have  in  English  pairs  of  narrow  and  wide 
vowels,  such  as  those  in  gat  e,  get  (ey,  e),  feet ,  fit  (iy,  i),  fool, 
full  (uw,  u),  the  symbol  for  the  long  narrow  vowel  is  more 
suitable  for  the  corresponding  short  narrow  vowel  in  French 
than  the  symbols  e,  i,  u  would  be,  because  these  would  mis- 
lead the  English  people  by  suggesting  that  the  vowels  ought 
to  be  wide,  and  more  open  than  they  really  are.  So  ey,  iy 
and  uw  are  used  for  the  vowels  in  "  etc","  "  fan,"  "  towt." 

Many  English  people  fail  to  pronounce  the  French  nasal 
vowel  a??,  and  use  on  instead,  as  in  encore,  carte  blanche,  pro- 
nounced by  them  "onkor,"  "kartblonsh." 

It  is  not  necessary  to  provide  symbols  for  the  German 
glottal  stop,  nor  for  the  French  voiceless  liquids. 

In  the  following  list,  final  r  is  put  in  brackets  in  words 
which  are  thoroughly  anglicized,  to  show  that  it  is  silent  unless 
a  vowel  follows  in  the  next  word.  When  r  is  not  bracketed,  it 
should  be  trilled,  though  it  requires  some  effort  to  do  so  when 
it  is  final,  or  followed  by  a  consonant,  as  in 

abattoir,  abatwaar.  aperpu,  apersu. 

belles  lettres,  bel  letr.  arpeggio,  arpejyo'. 

THE  MOST  NECESSARY  FOREIGN  SOUNDS. 

Hints  for  learning  the  most  necessary  foreign 
Sounds.  The  formation  of  the  sounds  represented  by  these 
nine  symbols  is  explained  in  the  French  and  German  sections 
of  this  book.  But  as  it  is  a  considerable  undertaking  to  learn 
all  these  foreign  sounds,  it  may  be  worth  while  to  note  that 
some  occur  much  more  frequently,  and  are  much  more  necessary 


88  Loan  Words  used  in  English. 

than  others.  There  are  only  three  foreign  sounds  which  occur 
very  frequently,  namely  a,  an,  and  on,  and  one  tolerably  often, 
namely  ii,  making  four  in  all.  And  as  already  observed,  most 
English  people  pronounce  an  and  on  alike,  making  them  both 
equal  on.  This  seems  the  more  excusable,  as  I  am  informed,  on 
the  authority  of  M.  Passy,  that  young  children  in  Paris  are 
doing  the  same,  and  it  seems  likely  that  the  next  generation  of 
Parisians  will  drop  an  altogether.  This  leaves  then  practically 
a  minimum  of  three  foreign  sounds  to  be  learnt — a,  on  and  ii. 

Concerning  a  I  may  observe  that,  although  we  have  many 
more  French  than  German  loan  words,  the  German  a  in  Mann 
is  decidedly  easier  than  the  French  a  in  patte,  which  is  inter- 
mediate between  the  English  sounds  in  father  and  man,  and 
this  German  sound  also  serves  to  represent  a  in  Italian  much 
better  than  the  French  patte  vowel.  So  it  is  best  for  those  who 
cannot  hope  to  master  both  vowels  to  content  themselves  with 
the  German  short  a.  It  is  not  at  all  difficult  to  acquire  this 
sound.  All  that  is  necessary  is  to  shorten  the  vowel  in  father. 

It  is  a  curious  fact  that  this  short  German  a  may  be  heard  in  two 
genuine  English  words  in  the  mouths  of  children  in  the  middle  and 
lower  classes,  namely  in  Mamma  and  Papa,  where  they  introduce  it 
into  both  syllables,  wrongly  accenting  the  first  of  them.  They  ought 
to  pronounce  Mamaa,  Papaa,  but  they  actually  do  pronounce  Mdmd, 
Papa. 

The  three  most  necessary  foreign  sounds  are  explained  further 
on  in  this  volume  as  follows  : — a,  Fr.  "  patte,"  p.  127 ;  Germ. 
"Mann,"  p.  151;  on,  Fr.  "on,"  pp.  131f.;  ii,  Fr.  "pw,"  pp.  129f. 

For  the  remaining  foreign  sounds  the  references  are: — o, 
Fr.  "peu,"  pp.  129f.;  an,  Fr.  "pan";  en,  Fr.  "p£n";  and  eun, 
Fr.  "MM,"  pp.  131f.;  x,  Germ.  "  acft,"  and  9,  Germ,  "ic/z," 
p.  147. 


LIST  OF  LOAN  WORDS. 


abandon,  ab'a?idon. 
abatis,  ab'atiy. 
abattoir,  ab'atwaar. 


abbe,  abey. 

ab  initio,  seb  inishio'. 

accelerando,  sekselirsendo'. 


a,  patte,  Mann,     u,  pew,  schon.     ii,  pw,  kw/tn.     an,  pan. 


List  of  Loan  Words. 


89 


acciacatura,  achakatuwra. 

accolade,  seko'leyd,  ako'l'ad. 

accoucheur,  akushoer. 

accoucheuse,  akushoez. 

adagio,  adaajyo'. 

ad  hominem,  sed  hominem. 

adieu,  adyu. 

ai  infinitum,  sed  infinaitam. 

ad  interim,  sed  intarim. 

ad  libitum,  sed  libitam. 

ad  nauseam,  sed  nosisem. 

ad  valorem,  sed  valorem. 

segis,  iyjis. 

aegrotat,  igrowtset. 

2Eneid,  Iniyid,  lyniid. 

a  fortiori,  ey  foshi'orai. 

agape,  segapi. 

agio,  sej'io',  eyjio'. 

Agnus  Dei,  segnas  diyai,  agnuws 

deyiy. 

aide-de-camp,  eydaka?*. 
aiguille,  eygwiyl. 
a  la  carte,  a  la  kart. 
a  la  mode,  selamowd,  alamowd. 
alcalde,  alk-aldey. 
al  fresco,  alfresko'. 
alga,  pi.  algae,  selga,  seljiy. 
alguazil,  selgwazil. 
alibi,  selibai. 
allegretto,  aleygreto'. 
allegro,  aleygro'. 
al  segno,  al  seynyo'. 
alto,  alto',  selto'. 
alto-rilievo,      alto'     or     selto' 

riliyvo'. 
amateur,     8ematyua(r),     some- 


times amatoer,  sematoer  or 

sematyua(r). 
Ameer,  amia(r). 
amende  honorable,  amdnd  on- 

oraabl. 

amour,  anma(r). 
amour-propre,  amuwr  propr. 
amphora,  semfara. 
anabasis,  ansebasis. 
anacoluthon,  senako'lyuthan. 
ancien    regime,    ansyen     rey- 

zhiym. 

andante,  and'antey,  send'senti. 
anglice,  senglisi. 
Anno  Domini,  seno'  Dominai. 
ante  meridiem,  senti  miridyem. 
a  outrance,  a  uwtra?is. 
aper^u,  ap'ersu. 
aphasia,  afeyzya. 
Aphrodite,  ^Efro'daiti. 
a  piacere,  a  piyach'erey. 
aplomb,  apldn. 
aposiopesis,  sepo'saio'piysis. 
a  posteriori,  ey  postiari'6rai,-ri. 
applique,  apHykey. 
appogiatura,  apojatuwra. 
appui,  apwiy. 
a  priori,  ey  prai'orai. 
apropos,  apropow. 
arc-boutant,  aarbuwta?i. 
Areopagus,  ^Eriopagas. 
arfete,  ar'et. 
argot,  argo'. 
Aries,  Eriiyz. 
armada,  aaraeyda. 
arpeggio,  arpejyo'. 


en,  pin.     on,  pont.     cun,  un.     x,  ac/i.     y,  ic/i. 


90 


Loan   Words  used  in  English. 


arras,  seras. 

arriere-pensee,  aryer  pansey. 

arrondissement,  arrfndiysmem. 

artiste,  artiyst. 

asafcetida,  eesafetida. 

Ate,  eyti. 

atelier,  atelyey. 

atoll,  atol,  setol. 

attache,  atashey. 

auberge,  owberzh. 

au  courant,  ow  kura«. 

au  fait,  ow  fey. 

au  fond,  ow  fon. 

au  naturel,  ow  naturel. 

au  revoir,  ow  ravwaar. 

auto-da-fe,  oto'dafey. 

avalanche,  sevalaansh. 

avant-courier,  avaant,  or  avsen- 

kuri'a(r). 
ave,  eyvi. 
ayah,  aaya. 
Baal,  Beyal. 
baboo,  baabu. 
Bacchas,  Bsekas. 
bacillus,  basilas. 
bacterium,  bsektiari'am. 
badinage,  badiynaazh,  bsedinej. 
bagatelle,  bsegatel. 
bakshish,  bsekshiysh. 
ballade,  balad. 
ballet,  baley. 
bambino,  bambiyno'. 
banquette,  banket, 
barege,  barej'zh. 
bas  bleu,  baa  blu. 
bashi-bazouk,  bcesliibaztiwk. 


basso-rilievo,  baso-riliyvo'. 

basta,  basta. 

Bastille,  Bastiyl. 

bateau,  bato'. 

baton,  baaton,  bsetan. 

battue,  batti. 

bavardage,  bavardaazh. 

bdellium,  delyam. 

beau  garcon,  bow  garson. 

beau-ideal,  bowaidial. 

beau-monde,  bo'mdnd. 

bel- esprit,  bel  espriy. 

belles-lettres,  bel  letr. 

benedicite,  benidaisiti. 

ben  trovato,  ben  tro'vaato'. 

bergfall,  berkfal,  boegfol. 

bete  noire,  beyt  nwaar. 

betise,  beytiyz. 

bezique,  beyziyk. 

bienseance,  byenseyans. 

bienveillance,  byenveyly«ns. 

biga,  baiga. 

bijou,  biyzhu. 

bijouterie,  biyzhuwtariy. 

billet-doux,  bileydiiw. 

bizarre,  bizaar. 

bizarrerie,  bizaarariy. 

bise,  biyz 

blague,  blag. 

blancmange,    blamaanzh,   bla- 

monzh. 
blase,  blazey. 
blonde,  blond. 
Boanerges,  Bowan'oejiyz. 
bodega,  bo'diygn. 
Boer,  Bua(r). 


patte,  Mann,     o,  pen,  schon.     ii,  pu,  kt't/jn.     a»,  pan. 


List  of  Loan  Words. 


91 


bolus,  bow  las. 

bolero,  bo'lero'. 

bona  fide,  bowna  faidi. 

bon-bon,  bon  bon. 

bonbonniere,  bonbonyea(r). 

bon  Chretien,  bo?i-kreyty£?i. 

bonhomie,  bonomiy. 

bon  mot,  bon  mow,  pi.  mowz. 

bonne,  bon. 

bonne  bouche,  bon  buwsh. 

bon-ton,  bon  ton. 

bon  vivant,  bon  viyvan. 

bon    voyage,    bon    vwayaazh, 

bon  voiaazh. 
Bootes,  Bo'owtiyz. 
boudoir,  buwdwaar. 
bougie,  buwzhiy. 
boulevard,  bulvaar. 
bouleversement,     bulversmcm, 

bulvoesmant. 
bouquet,  bukey. 
bourgeois,  burzhwa  (but  when 

meaning  a  size  of  printing 

type,  pronounced  "  boejois.") 
bourgeoisie,  burzhwaziy. 
Bourse,  Burs,  Buas. 
bouts-rimes,  buw  riymey. 
bravura,  bravuwra. 
bric-a-brac,  brikabrsek. 
brochure,  broshiir. 
Brumaire,  Brumer. 
brunette,  brunet,  briinet. 
brusque,  briisk. 
brusquely,  briiskli. 
brusqueness,  brtisknis. 
brusquerie,  brtiskariy. 


buffet,    biifey,    a   refreshment 

bar. 
buffet,   boefit,    a   sideboard    or 

a  cupboard, 
bureau,  byuaro',  byurow,  and 

when   an    office    is    meant, 

sometimes  "  bvirow." 
caballero,  kabalyero'. 
cabaret,  kabarey. 
cabbala,  ksebala. 
cabriolet,  kabrio'ley. 
cache,  kash. 
cachet,  kashey. 
cachucha,  kachuwcha. 
cacique,  kasiyk. 
cacoethes,  kseko'iythiz. 
cadenza,  kadentsa. 
cadi,  kaadiy,  keydi. 
cadre,  kadr. 
cafe,  kafey. 

caftan,  kaftaan,  kseftan. 
caisson,  keysan. 
camera   obscura,   ksemera   ob- 

skyiiara. 

camaraderie,  kamaraadariy. 
Campagna,  (the)  Kampaanya. 
campanile,  kampaniyley. 
Canaan,  Keynan. 
canaille,  kanaay. 
canard,  kanaar.  kanaad. 
canon,  kaenyan. 
cantabile,  kantaabiyley. 
cantata,  kantaata. 
cantatrice,  kantatriychey. 
cap-a-pie,  ksepapiy. 
capriccio,  kapricho'. 


In,  pt?i.     on,  pont.     cun,  un.     x,  ac/i.     ^,  ich. 


92 


Loan  Words  used  in  English. 


capriccioso,  kaprichowzo'. 

carafe,  karaaf. 

carbonari,  karbo'naariy. 

carillon,  kariylyon. 

carmagnole,  karmanyol. 

carte-blanche,  kart  blansh. 

carte-de-visite,  kart  da  viyziy t. 

caryatid,  pi.  -ides,  kseri'setid, 
-idiyz. 

casino,  kasiyno'. 

catalogue  raisonne,  katalog 
reyzoney. 

catena,  katiyna. 

Cithedra,  kathiydra,  ksethidra. 

cause  celebre,  kowz  seleybr. 

causeuse,  kowzoez. 

cavass,  kavses. 

cavatina,  kavatiyna,  kseva- 
tiyna. 

centime,  sanHym. 

cerise,  seriyz. 

chaise-longue,  sheyz  Icmg. 

chalet,  shaley. 

chamois,  shamwaa  ;  when  lea- 
ther is  meant,  "  shsemi." 

chaperon,  shseparown,  -on. 

char-a-banc,  sharaba?i. 

chargfe  d'affaires,  sharzhey 
daf'er. 

charivari,  shariyvaariy. 

chasse,  shasey. 

chasseur,  shasoer. 

chateau,  shaato'. 

chatelaine,  shataleyn. 

chef,  shef. 

chef  d'ceuvre,  sheydoevr. 


chemise,  shimiyz. 
chemisette,  shemizet. 
chenille,  shiniyl. 
cheval-glass,  shaval  glaas. 
chevaux  de   frise,    shevo'   da 

friyz. 

chevrette,  shevret. 
chiaroscuro,  kyaaro'skuwro'. 
chiffon,  shiyfoji. 
chiffonier,  shifania(r). 
chignon,  shinyo?z. 
cicala,  sikaaia. 
cicerone,         chiycheyrowney, 

sisarowni. 

cicisbeism,  chichisbiyizm'. 
cicisbeo,  chichisbeyo'. 
ci-devant,  siydavaii. 
cinquecento,  chingkwichento'. 
clairvoyance,       klervwaya?is, 

kleavoians. 
claque,  klak. 
claqueur,  klseka(r). 
clientele,  kliyantel,  klaiantel. 
cloture,  klowtiir. 
cobra  de    capello,  kowbra  da 

kapelo'. 

cognac,  konysek. 
cognoscenti,  kono'shentiy. 
collaborateur,  kol'abo'ratoer,  or 

spelt   collaborator,  kal'aeba- 

reyta(r). 

colporteur,  kolportoer. 
comme  il  faut,  kom  iy  fow. 
commode,  kamowd. 
communique,  kom'uniykey. 
complaisant,  komplezaant. 


patte,  Mann,     ii,  peii,  schon.     ii,  pw,  kii/m.     an,  pan. 


List  of  Loan  Words. 


93 


compte  rendu,  kont  ra?zdu. 
con  amore,  kon  amorey. 
concierge,  kcwsyerzh. 
concordat,  kankodset. 
condottieri,  kondotyeriy. 
confrere,  ko?ifrer. 
conge  d'elire,  kowzhey  d  eyliyr. 
connoisseur,  koneys6er. 
contre-temps,  kontratan. 
conversazione,  konvassetsi6wm. 
coquette,  koket. 
cordon,  kordon. 
corps   diplomatique,  kor  diy- 

plowm'atiyk. 
corsage,  korsaazh. 
cortege,  korteyzh. 
corvee,  korvey. 
costumier,  kostyumya(r). 
coterie,  kowtariy. 
cotillon,  ko'tilyan. 
couchant,  kauchant. 
couleur  de  rose,  kuloer  da  rowz. 
coup  de  grace,  kuw  da  graas. 
coup  de  main,  kuw  da  m&n. 
coup  de  soleil,  kuw  da  soley. 
coup  d'etat,  kuw  d  eyt'a. 
coup  d'oeil,  kuw  d  oey. 
coupe,  kuwpey. 
coupon,  kuwpoji. 
coute  que  coute,  kuwrt  ka  kuwt. 
crayon,  kreyan. 
creche,  kreysh. 
crescendo,  kreshendo'. 
cretin,  kriytin. 
crevasse,  krivses. 
crochet,  krowshey. 


croquet,  krowkey. 
cui  bono,  kai  bowno'. 
cuisine,  kwiziyn. 
cuisse,  kwiys. 
cul-de-sac,  kill  da  sak. 
Culturkampf,  kultuwrkampf. 
cure,  kiirey. 
Czar,  Zaa(r). 
Czarina,  Zaariyna. 
Czarewitch,  -owitz,  Zaaravich, 

-vits. 

Czech,  Chek. 
dais,  deyis. 
dauseuse,  dansoez. 
Dauphin,  dofin. 
debonair,  debanea(r). 
debris,  debriy. 
debut,  deybu. 

debutant,  -ante,  debutaw,  -ant, 
dejeuner  a  la  fourchette,  dey- 

zhoeney  a  la  fuwrshet. 
dementi,  deymcwtiy. 
denoument,  deynuwmaw. 
de  novo,  da  nowvo'. 
depot,  depo'. 
da  rigueur,  da  riygoer. 
deshabille,  desabiyl. 
detour,  detua(r). 
de  trop,  da  trow. 
devoir,  devwaar. 
dies  non,  daiiyz  non. 
Dieu  et  mon  droit,  Dyo  ey  mou 

drwaa. 

dilettante,  dilit'senti. 
distrait,  diystrey. 
divan,  divsen. 


on,  pont.     eun,  un.     x,  acA.     ^,  ich. 


94 


Loan  Words  used  in  English. 


Dives,  Daiviyz. 
doctrinaire,  doktrinea(r). 
dolce  far  niente,  dolchey  faar 

nientey. 
donna,  dona. 
douane,  duwaan. 
double    entendre,  duwbl'    an- 

tdndr. 

douceur,  duwsoer. 
eau  de  Cologne,  ow  da  Kalown. 
eau-de-vie,  ow  da  viy. 
ecarte,  eyk'artey. 
eclaircissement,       eykl'ersiys- 

man. 

eclat,  eykl'a. 
edelweiss,  eydalvais. 
edition  de  luxe,  eydiysyon  da 

liiks. 

Effendi,  Efendiy. 
Eiffel,  aifl'. 
Eisteddfodd,  aistefod. 
elan,  eylan. 
elite,  eyliyt. 
eloge,  eylowzh. 
embarras  de  richesse,  amb'ara 

da  riyslies. 

embonpoint,  anbowpw&i. 
embouchure,  anbuwshiir. 
emeute,  eymoet,  imyut. 
employe, ajiplvvayey,  emploiey. 
empressement,  anpresman. 
en  bloc,  an  blok. 
encaenia,  ensiynya. 
enceinte,  ans'^nt. 
encore,  a?ik'6r. 
en  famille,  an  famiyl. 


enfants  perdus,  anfan  perdii. 
enfant  terrible,  anfan  teriybl. 
en  masse,  an  mas. 
ennui,  annwiy. 
en  regie,  an  reygl. 
en  route,  an  ruwt. 
ensemble,  ans'anbl. 
entente  cordiale,  aniant  kord- 

yal. 

entourage,  ant'uwraazh. 
en  tout  cas,  an  tuw  ka. 
entree,  «?itrey. 
entremets,  antramey. 
entre  nous,  cmtra  nuw. 
envelope,  aanvilowp,  envilowp. 
epergne,  epoen. 
esclandre,  eskla??dr. 
escritoire,  eskriytwaar. 
espieglerie,  espyeyglariy. 
espionage,  espyonaazh. 
esprit  de  corps,  espriy  da  kor. 
etablissement,  eyt'abliysma?i. 
etagere,  etazh'er. 
etiquette,  etiyket. 
exigeant,  -te,  egziyzha'»,  -ant. 
ex-officio,  eks  ofishyo'. 
ex  parte,  eks  paati. 
expose,  ekspo'zey. 
extempore,  ekstempari. 
facade,  fasaad. 

facile  princeps,  fsesili  prinseps. 
fac.on  de  parler,faso?i  da  parley. 
faience,  faiaws. 
faineant,  feyneya?i. 
fait  accompli,  feyt  a 
fakir,  fgekia(r). 


patte,  Mann,     o,  pew,  schy'n.     ii,  pw,  kw/m.     an,  pan. 


List  of  Loan   Words. 


95 


fantasia,  fsenteyzha. 

fantoccini,  fsento'chiyniy. 

farceur,  farsoer. 

faubourg,  fowbuwr. 

faute  de  mieux,  fowt  da  myo. 

fauteuil,  fowtoel. 

faux  pas,  fow  paa. 

felo  de  se,  felo1  di  siy. 

femme   de   chambre,    fam    da 

shcmbr. 
fete,  feyt. 

feu  de  joie,  fo  da  zhwa. 
fiacre,  fiyakr. 
fiance,  -ee,  fiyansey. 
fiasco,  frasko'. 
fichu,  fiyshu. 
finale,  fiynaali. 
finesse,  fiynes. 
firn,  fiyrn. 
flambeau,  flsembo'. 
flamboyant,  flsemboiyant. 
fleche,  fleysh. 
fleur  de  lis,  floer  da  liy. 
forte,  fortey. 
fortissimo,  fortiysiymo'. 
fracas,  fraka. 
franc,  frsengk. 
Frau,  Fran. 
Fraulein,  Froilain. 
gala,  gaala. 
garcon,  garson. 
gasconade,  gseskaneyd. 
gauche,  gowsh. 
gaucherie,  gowshariy. 
Gemini,  Jeminai. 
gendarme,  zhandaarm. 


genre,  zhanr. 

giaour,  jaua(r). 

glace,  glasey. 

glacier,  glsesya(r). 

glacis,  glasiy. 

glissade,  gliysaad. 

goitre,  goita(r). 

gramme,  gram,  grsem. 

grande  vitesse,  grand  viytes. 

groschen,  groshan. 

guillotine,  gilyo'tiyn. 

guipure,  giyp'iir. 

habitue,  abiytwey. 

harem,  herem. 

hauteur,  howtoer. 

haut  ton,  how  ton. 

Hebe,  Hiybi. 

Herr,  Her. 

hiatus,  haieytas. 

Hinterland,  Hintarlant. 

honi  soit  qui  mal  y  pense,  honiy 

swa  kiy  mal  iy  pans. 
hors  de  combat,  ho  da  komba. 
hotel  de  ville,  owtel  da  viyl. 
Huguenots,  Hyuganots. 
hyperbole,  haipoebali. 
ich  dien,  iy9  diyn. 
imbroglio,  imbrowlyo'. 
impasse,  ejipaas. 
impromptu,  impromptyu. 
incognito,  inkognito1. 
insouciance,  e?isuwsiyans. 
jager,  yeygar. 
jalousie,  zhaluwziy. 
jardiniere,  zhardiynyer. 
je  ne  sais  quoi,  zha  na  sey  kwa. 


pzn.     on,  pont.     eun,  un.     x,  ach.     c,  ich. 


96 


Loan  Words  used  in  English. 


jet  d'eau,  zhey  d  ow. 

jeu  d'esprit,  zho  d  espriy. 

journal,  zhuwrnal. 

jujube,  zhuwzhuwb. 

Kaiser,  Kaiza(r). 

khan,  kaan. 

Khedive,  Keydiyv. 

kindergarten,  kindagaatn'. 

kiosk,  kiyosk. 

kirschwasser,  kiyrshvasar. 

kraal,  kraal. 

kreutzer,  kroitsar. 

kyrie,  kirii. 

Koran,K6raan,  K.6rsen,  K'oran. 

laissez  faire,  lesey  fer. 

Lama,  Laama. 

landsturm,  landshtuwrm. 

landwehr,  landver. 

Laocoon,  Leyoko'on. 

lapis  lazuli,  leypis  Isezyulai. 

lapsus  linguae,  Isepsaslinggwiy. 

lares,  leriyz. 

Lateran,  Lsetaran. 

latrine,  latriyn. 

lazzaroni,  Isetsarowniy. 

legerdemain,  lejadameyn. 

levee,  levi. 

lingua  franca,  linggwa  f  rsengka. 

liqueur,  liykoer. 

litterateur,  liteyratoer. 

litre,  liyta(r). 

locale,  lo'kal. 

locum  tenens,  lowkam  tiynenz. 

Louvre,  (the)  Luwvr. 

louvre,  (a)  luwva(r). 

Madame,  Madam. 


Mademoiselle,  Madmwazel. 
Madonna,  Madona. 
Magna  Charta,  Msegna  Kaata. 
maison   de  sante,   meyzon  da 

santey. 

maitre  d'hotel,  meytr  d  owtel. 
mal  a  propos,  mal  a  propow. 
marguerite,  margariyt. 
marionette,  mseri'anet. 
mark  (Germ,  coin)  maak. 
Marseillaise,  Maaselyeyz. 
massage,  masaazh. 
materiel,  materiyel. 
matinee     musicale,     matiney 

miiziykal. 

mauvaise  honte,  moveyz  ont. 
mediocre,  mediowka(r). 
meerschaum,  miasham. 
melee,  meyley. 
menage,  menaazh. 
menagerie,  men-azhariy. 
menu,  menu,  menyu. 
mesalliance,  meyzaliyans. 
messieurs,  mesliaz. 
metayer,  meteyey. 
metempsychosis,       metempsi- 

kowzis. 

metre,  miyta(r). 
metronome,  metronom. 
mirabile  dictu,mireybili  diktyu 
mirage,  miyraazh. 
mitrailleuse,  miytrayoez. 
modus   vivendi,   mowdas   vai- 

vendai. 

moire,  mwarey. 
Monseigneur,  Mo?iseyuyoer. 


a,  patte,  Mann,     o,  pew,  schon.     ii,  p?i,  kiihn.     a?i,  pan. 


List  of  Loan  Words. 


Monsieur,  MiisyiL 

morceau,  morsow* 

mot,  mow. 

motif,  mo'tiyf. 

muezzin,  muwedzin. 

mufti,  moefti. 

munshi,  muwnshiy. 

nai've,  naiyv. 

naivete,  naivtey. 

nee,  ney. 

neve,  neyvey. 

nirvana,  noevaana. 

nisi,  naisai. 

noblesse  oblige,  nobles  obliyzh. 

nom  de  plume,  now  da  pltim. 

nom  de  guerre,  non  da  ger, 

nonchalant,  nonshaldn. 

nonchalance,  nonshhldns. 

nonpareil,  nonparel. 

nous,  naus. 

nous  verrons,  nuw  verow. 

nouveaux  riches,  nuwvo'  riysh. 

nuance,  niiaws. 

oasis,  oweysis. 

obbligato,  obliygaato'. 

octroi,  oktrwaa. 

oesophagus,  iysofagas. 

olla  podrida,  ola  podriyda, 

on  dit,  on  diy. 

oubliette,  nwbliet. 

outre,  uwtrey. 

pace,  peysi. 

paillasse,  pselyas. 

paletot,  peel  to'. 

panacea,  pgenasiya. 

papier-mache,  papyey  maashey. 


par  excellence,  par  ekselans. 

parterre,  part'er,  paatea(r). 

parvenu,  parvanii. 

Pasha,  Pashar  Pashaa. 

passe,  pasey. 

passe-partout,  pas-partuw. 

pastille,  peestiyL 

patois,  patwa. 

penchant,  panshan. 

pension,  pansy  on. 

perdu,  perdu. 

persiflage,  persiyfiaazh. 

persona  grata,poeso  wna  grey  ta. 

personnel,  personal. 

petite,  patiyt. 

petite  culture,  patiyt  kiilt'tir. 

pfennig,  pfeniyQ. 

phthisis,  thaisis. 

piano  (subst.)  pi'ano',  pi'seno'. 

piano  (adv.)  piaano'. 

pianoforte,  pi'ano'foti. 

piastre,  pi-8esta(r). 

piazza,  pi'atsa,  pi'setsa. 

piece  de  resistance,  pyeys  da 

reyziystans, 
pince-nez,  p^ws  ney. 
piquant,  piykant. 
pique,  piykey. 
pis  aller,  piyz  aley. 
plebiscite,  plebisiyt. 
Pleiades,  Plaiadiyz. 
poco    curante,   powko'    kuwr- 

antey. 
poignard,    ponyad,    sometimes 

spelt  "  poniard." 
point  d'appui,  pu£n  d  apwiy. 


pin.     on,  pont.     eun,  un*    x,  ac/i.     ^,  ich. 


i.  P. 


H 


98 


Loan  Words  used  in  English. 


pongee,  ponjiy. 

porte  cochere,  port  koslrer. 

portemonnaie,  portmoney. 

portiere,  portyer. 

poste  restante,  post  restant. 

postmeridiem,powstmiridyem. 

pour    encourager    les    autres, 

puwr  ankurazhey  leyz  owtr. 
pour  parler,  puwr  parley. 
pour     prendre    conge,     puwr 

prandr  konzkey. 
precis,  preysiy. 
prefet,  prefey. 
prestige,  prestiyzh. 
preux  chevalier,  pruw  slieva- 

lia(r). 

priedieu,  priydyo. 
prima  donna,  priyma  dona, 
prima  facie,  praima  feyshiy. 
proces  verbal,  prosey  verbal. 
promenade,  promnaad. 
pronunciamento,  pro'noenshi'a- 

mento'. 

pro  rata,  prow  reytey. 
programme,  prowgrgem. 
protege,  proteyzhey. 
pugaree,  poegari. 
quantite  negligeable,  kantiy  tey 

neglij'zhabl. 
quartette,  kwotet, 
quasi,  kweysai. 
quatrefoil,  ksetrafoil. 
queue,  ko. 
qui  vive,  kiy  viyv. 
quondam,  kwondsem. 
raconteur,  rak'ontoer. 


ragout,  raguw. 

raison  d'etre,  reyzwi  d  eytr. 

Rajah,  Raaja. 

rallentando,  ralent'ando'. 

ranche,  raansh. 

rapprochement,  rapr-oshman. 

rationale,  raeshaneyli. 

rechauffe,  reshowfey. 

razzia,  ratsya. 

recherche,  reslrershey. 

reconnaissance,  rikonisans. 

reconnoitre,  rekanoita(r). 

refrain,  rifreyn. 

regime,  reyzhiym. 

Reichsrath,  Raipsraat. 

Reichstag,  Rai^staag. 

Renaissance,  Rineysans. 

rendezvous,  randeyvuw. 

rentes,  ra?it. 

repertoire,  repertwaar. 

repousse,  rapusey. 

requiem,  rekwiem. 

restaurant,  restoraji. 

resume,  reyz'iimey. 

reveille,  reveyey. 

reverie,  revariy. 

riant,  riycm. 

ricochet,  riko'shey. 

role,  rowl. 

rondeau,  rondo', 

rondel,  rondel. 

roturier,  ro'tiiriyey. 

roue,  ruwey. 

rouge,  rtawzh. 

rouge  et  noir,  ruwzli  ey  nwaar. 

roulade,  ruwlad. 


patte,  Mann,     ii,  pew,  scho?i.     ii,  ptt,  kilhu.     a?2,  pan. 


a 


List  of  Loan  Words. 


99 


ruche,  rush. 

ruse,  ruz,  ruwz. 

sabot,  sabo'. 

sachet,  sashey. 

saga,  seyga. 

sahib,  saaiyb. 

salaam,  salaam. 

salon,  salon. 

sangfroid,  sanfrwa. 

sans- culottes,  san  kiilot. 

sans-facon,  saw  fason. 

sans-souci,  san  suwsiy. 

Sassenach,  Ssesinsek. 

sauerkraut,  sauakraut. 

sauve  qui  peut,  sowv  kiy  po. 

savant,  savan. 

savoir-faire,  savwar  fer. 

savoir-vivre,  savwar  viyvr. 

scrutin  de   liste,  skriite«    da 

liyst. 

scherzo,  skertso'. 
seance,  seya?zs. 
seigneur,  seynyoer. 
seigneury,  siynyari. 
serviette,  servyet. 
Sevres,  Seyvr. 
sgraffito,  grsefito'. 
sheikh,  shiyk. 
siesta,  siyesta. 
Signor,  Siynyor. 
Signora,  Siynyora. 
Signorina,  Siynyoriyna. 
silhouette,  siluet. 
sine  qua  non,  saini  kwey  non. 
sobriquet,  sobrikey. 
soi-disant,  swa  diyzan. 


soiree,  swaarey.. 

solidaire,  solidea(r). 

sortie,  sortiy. 

sotto  voce,  soto'  vowchey. 

sou,  suw. 

souvenir,  suwvaniyr. 

staccato,  stakaato'. 

suave,  sxiaav. 

sub  judice,  soeb  judisi. 

suite,  swiyt. 

surveillance,  soeveylyans. 

tableau  vivant,  table'  viyvan. 

table  d'hote,  taabl'  d  owt. 

tapis,  tapiy. 

tazza,  tsetsa. 

technique,  tekniyk. 

terra  incognita,  tera  inkognita. 

tete-a-t6te,  teyt  a  teyt. 

thaler,  taaler^ 

tic  douloureux,  tik  duwluruw. 

timbre,  t£nbr. 

tirade,  tireyd. 

toilette,  twalet. 

tour  de  force,  tuwr  da  fors. 

tournurer  tuwrnur. 

tout  ensemble,  tuwt  ansdnbl. 

train  de  luxe,  tren  da  liiks. 

trait,  trey. 

tremolo,  tremo'lo. 

trio,  triyo'. 

trisagion,  tris'segion. 

troupe,  tiruwp. 

tulle,  till. 

tu  quoque,  tyu  kwowkwi. 

turquoise,  tiirkwaz,  toekoiz. 

uhlan,  uwlan. 


en,  pin.     on,  po?it.     eun,  un.     x.,  ac/i.     ^,  ic/t. 


100 


Loan  Words  used  in  English. 


ukase,  yukeys. 

Vallauris  (ware),  Valariy. 

Valenciennes,  valrmsyen. 

valet,  vselit. 

valet  de    chanibre,    valey  da 

shanbr. 
valise,  valiyz. 
vaudeville,  vowdviyl. 
vedette,  videt. 
vertu,  vertti. 
verve,  verv. 
vignette,  vinyet. 
vinaigrette,  vineygret 
violoncello,  vaialanchelo'. 
virtuoso,  voetyuowzo'. 


vis  a  vis,  viyz  a  viy. 
vise,  viyzey. 
viseed,  viyzeyd. 
vivandiere,  viyvandyer. 
vivat,  viyvaa. 
viva  voce,  vaiva  vowsi. 
volte  face,  volt  fas. 
Walhalla,  Vselh'sela. 
zeitg*eist,  tsaitgaist. 
zeitung,  tsaitung. 
zenana,  zinaana. 
zither,  zithar. 
Zollverein,  Tsolfarain. 
zouave,  zuwaav. 


in,  pin.     on,  pont.     eun,  un.     x,  ach.     ^,  ich. 

a,  patte,  Mrrnn.     o,  peit,  sclion.     ti,  pu,  kulm.     an,  pan, 


VI. 
HINTS  FOR  TEACHERS. 

METHOD  RECOMMENDED. 

The  subject  of  phonetics  having  as  yet  been  very.'  little 
taught  in  English  schools,  the  outline  of  a  method  which  has 
been  found  practically  useful  may  not  be  unacceptable. 

The  imitative  faculties  are  so  strong  in  early  childhood  that 
it  is  desirable  to  try  to  give  young  children  a  practical  mastery 
of  the  sounds  from  the  very  beginning,  before  they  can  be 
expected  to  learn  much  as  to  the  manner  of  their  formation. 
They  ought  to  have  some  drill  in  pronouncing  the  sounds  of 
English  and  French  in  the  Kindergarten.  Experience  shows 
that  little  children  of  six  years  of  age  are  quite  capable  of  ob- 
serving some  of  the  most  important  distinctions  in  phonetics, 
e.g.  between  lip,  point  and  back  consonants,  between  stops  and 
continuants,  and  between  consonants  which  are  voiced  and  tin- 
voiced.  But  it  is  impossible  to  teach  phonetics  systematically 
without  some  phonetic  notation  ;  and  as,  in  secondary  schools, 
most  children  come  having  already  learnt  the  ordinary  spelling 
at  home,  it  seems  difficult  to  attempt  a  course  of  lessons  in 
phonetics  before  they  are  tolerably  familiar  with  the  ordinary 
spelling,  say  at  about  ten  years  of  age.  And  meantime  the 
teacher  who  is  acquainted  with  the  subject  may  do  much  in 
teaching  them  to  pronounce  clearly  and  well,  and  may  lay  a 
good  foundation  for  the  more  systematic  teaching  which  is  to 
follow. 

In  the  following  suggestions  on  the  teaching  of  phonetics  I 
assume  then  that  the  children  are  about  ten  years  of  age,  but 
it  is  hoped  that  they  may  be  useful  for  older  pupils  also,  as  it 
is  not  proposed  to  sketch  out  a  course  of  lessons  in  detail,  but 

101 


102  Hints  for  Teachers. 

only  to  give  some  broad  outlines  and  general  instructions  which 
each  teacher  can  adapt  to  his  own  class. 

The  first  and  most  important  matter  will  be  to  teach  the 
English  sounds  as  thoroughly  as  possible,  for  when  this  is  done, 
the  formation  and  classification  of  French  and  German  sounds 
will  easily  be  understood.  But  as  it  may  be  taken  for  granted 
that  the  pupils  already  know  a  little  French,  at  least  as  it 
appears  in  books,  and  in  any  case  a  few  foreign  sounds  are 
wanted  for  the  pronunciation  of  loan  words  from  French  and 
other  languages,  it  will  be  desirable  to  teach  a  few  of  the  most 
prominent  sounds  of  French  and  German,  in  connexion  with 
English  phonetics,  before  beginning  a  systematic  study  of  the 
sounds  of  these  languages ;  to  do  so  will  vary  the  lessons  agree- 
ably and  make  them  more  interesting. 

The  chief  things  we  have  to  teach  are  these  : — 

1.  English  sounds  and  the  ordinary  alphabet  do  not  corre- 

spond. 

2.  A  phonetic  English  alphabet. 

3.  A  few  sounds  from  French  and  German. 

4.  The  structure  of  the  vocal  organs. 

5.  Formation  and  classification  of  sounds. 

6.  To  read  English  aloud  from  phonetic  spelling. 

7.  To  analyze  English  words  into  their  component  sounds. 

It  will  be  convenient  to  discuss  separately  the  teaching  of 
each  of  these  divisions  of  the  subject,  although  instruction  in 
several  of  them  may  be  going  on  simultaneously. 

I.  Sounds  and  Symbols  do  not  agree.  First  show  that 
the  sounds  of  English  do  not  correspond  with  the  26  letters  of 
our  alphabet,  and  that — 

1.  For  some  sounds  we  must  use  digraphs,  e.g.  sli,  th,  ee, 
oo,  as  in  she,  the,  peel,  pool. 

2.  For  some  we  have  no  symbols  at  all.     We  cannot  dis- 
tinguish the  sounds  in  Imt  and  put,  this  and  f/astle,  sir  and 
leisure. 

3.  We  often  use  different  symbols  for  the  same  sound,  as  in 
till,  cat,  ^ueen,  ec7/o. 

II.  The  Phonetie  Alphabet.     It  is  best  to  learn  this  by 


Method  Recommended.  103 

degrees,  taking  a  few  new  sounds  in  each  lesson,  and  carrying 
on  simultaneously  the  teaching  as  to  formation  and  classification 
of  letters,  and  the  combination  of  the  easier  sounds  in  words. 

Point  out  the  difference  between  the  sounds  and  their  names, 
showing  that  the  names  are  generally  distinct  from  the  sounds. 

Be  careful  to  have  the  names  of  ng  and  e  well  pronounced. 
See  pp.  30,  31,  40. 

When  teaching  the  vowels  and  diphthongs,  let  the  list  of 
key-words  be  learnt  first,  and  then  the  names  of  the  sounds. 

The  children  should  finish  learning  the  alphabet  before  learn- 
ing the  formation  and  classification  of  all  the  sounds,  and  it 
will  be  convenient  to  teach  the  names  of  the  short  vowels  before 
attempting  the  long  ones.  The  reasons  for  this  are  that  (1) 
whole  sentences  can  be  constructed  with  short  vowels  only,  and 
(2)  that  we  use  no  new  symbols  for  the  vowels  in  pet,  pit,  pot, 
put.  So  it  is  a  good  plan  to  teach  words  having  these  four 
vowels  as  soon  as  the  six  stops  and  three  nasals  have  been 
learnt.  The  first  spelling  lesson  contains  no  sounds  besides 
these,  and  it  might  be  read  in  the  second  lesson  of  the  course. 

The  order  suggested  is  as  follows  :— 

1.  Stops  and  Nasals  with  e,  i,  o,  u       Spelling  Lesson  I. 

2.  Consonants  as  far  as  dh                             „  „                II. 

3.  All  the  Consonants                                      ,,  ,,              III. 

4.  The  Short  Vowels  ce,  ae                            „  „              IV. 

5.  The  Short  Unaccented  Vowels  a,  i,  o'      „  ,,        V.,  VI. 

6.  The  Long  Vowels                                       „  „  VII.,  VIII. 

7.  The  Diphthongs                                           ,,  ,,       IX.,  X. 
The  diphthongs  might  be    learnt  after  the  reading  lessons 

have  been  begun, 

The  teacher  will  find  all  the  rarer  sounds  fully  illustrated  on 
pp.  11-29. 

When  the  children  have  learnt  to  analyze  ch,  j,  and  the 
diphthongs  into  the  sounds  which  compose  them,  they  should, 
in  repeating  the  alphabet,  say  : 

ch  =  t,  sh  ai  =aa,  iy  oi  =6,  iy 

j     =  d,  zh  au  =  aa,  uw  yu  =  y,  uw 

III.  The    most    necessary   Sounds   in    French   and 


104  Hints  for  Teachers. 

German.  These  are  the  vowels  in  patte,  pen,  pu,  the  four 
nasal  vowels,  and  the  consonants  in  ach  and  icli.  Diagram  V., 
on  p.  xv.,  will  be  a  help  in  teaching  some  of  the  new  vowels. 

French  sounds  should  also  be  compared  with  English  when 
teaching  the  English  diphthongs  ia,  ua  in  peer  and  poor. 
Compare  these  diphthongs  with  the  sounds  iy  and  uw  as  they 
occur  both  in  English  words  without  r  and  in  French  words 
with  r  following,  thus : — 

peel  peer  Fr.  pire 

pool  poor  Fr.  pour 

Pronounced. 

piyl  pia(r)  piyr 

puwl  pua(r)  puwr 

IV.  Structure  of  the  Vocal  Organs.     This  cannot  be 
explained  much  more  simply  than  by  referring  to  the  diagrams 
on  pp.  xiv.,  xv.,  and  using  the  explanations  on  pp.  8-10. 

V.  Formation    and    Classification    of   the    Sounds. 

This  must  be  taught  in  such  a  way  as  to  lead  the  children  to 
discover  as  much  as  possible  by  their  own  observation.  Many 
details  which  have  been  mentioned  in  the  previous  chapters 
should  be  omitted,  being  intended  for  the  teacher  only,  who 
will  want  to  know  much  more  than  he  is  able  to  impart ;  but 
the  order  in  which  the  chief  facts  are  there  explained  has  been 
carefully  arranged  to  assist  students  in  passing  from  the  more 
obvious  distinctions  to  those  which  are  less  noticeable,  and 
more  difficult  to  grasp,  and  this  order  might  be  followed  in 
teaching  children. 

It  will  certainly  be  found  expedient  in  teaching  to  explain 
consonants  before  vowels,  and  the  stops  first  of  all.  Again, 
amongst  the  stops,  p  and  b,  in  which  the  action  of  the  lips  can 
so  easily  be  seen,  naturally  come  first.  Then  the  distinction  as 
to  place,  between  lips,  point  of  the  tongue  and  back  of  the 
tongue,  is  easier  to  make  out  than  that  between  voiced  and 
unvoiced  consonants,  so  it  should  be  the  first  distinction  noted. 
Two  children  of  six  have  been  found  quite  well  able,  in  one 
lesson  of  a  few  minutes,  to  pronounce  the  name  of  ng,  and  to 
classify  the  stops  and  nasals  as  lip,  point  and  back  consonants, 


Method  Recommended. 


105 


observing  the  difference  for  themselves.  The  difference  between 
stops  and  continuants  is  also  very  easy  to  observe,  and  it  might 
come  next  in  order. 

Again,  though  we  have  observed  that  it  is  convenient  to  teach 
the  names  and  sounds  of  the  short  vowels  at  a  very  early  stage, 
we  shall  find,  when  the  formation  and  classification  of  the  vowels 
are  to  be  taught,  that  it  is  easier  to  begin  by  studying  the  long 
vowels,  and  not  those  which  are  short  and  fleeting. 

It  is  a  useful  exercise  to  let  the  children  write  the  consonants 
down  the  middle  of  a  sheet  of  paper,  gradually  filling  in  the 
names  which  describe  them,  thus : — 

ENGLISH  CONSONANTS. 


fp     Hard)   _  . 
b     Soft  j  LlPS" 

t 

H 

) 

Stops  - 

d 

S 

[  Point. 

k 

H 

) 

g 

S 

[  Back. 

(            (m 

S 

Lips. 

,2     Nasal  Jn 

S 

Point. 

I                Ing 

S 

Back. 

£     Side       1 
iTrill      r 

S 
S 

-  Point. 

wh 
w 

H 

S 

|  Lips. 

f 

V 

H 

S 

j  Lip-teeth. 

th 

H 

i  Point-teeth 

fill 

S 

j 

Continuants  ( 

H 

\ 

z 

S 

-  Point. 

sh 

H 

1 

zh 

S 

j 

y 

S 

Palatal. 

h 

H 

Glottal. 

.,     fch=  t,  sh. 
Composite  3  . 

(j    =  d,  zh. 


106  Hints  for  Teachers. 

The  German  consonants  in  ach  and  icli  might  be  taught  in 
connexion  with  the  English  continuants,  the  French  vowels  in 
patte,  pen,  pu,  immediately  after  the  classification  of  the  five 
principal  vowels,  aa,  ey,  iy,  ow,  uw,  and  the  nasal  vowels 
when  all  the  long  English  vowels  have  been  studied. 

VI.  Reading  aloud  from  Phonetic  Spelling.  This 
exercise  is  a  very  necessary  one,  and  will  afford  an  excellent 
opportunity  for  training  the  children  to  pronounce  clearly  and 
well.  But  it  will  be  found  necessary  to  recognise  some  differ- 
ences between  the  pronunciation  represented  in  this  book  and 
that  of  the  teacher,  seeing  that  no  two  people  pronounce  exactly 
alike,  and  to  tolerate  some  varieties  of  pronunciation  among  the 
children  themselves.  We  cannot  fix  upon  any  standard  pronun- 
ciation which  will  be  universally  accepted.  There  are  sevei-al 
pronunciations  of  English  tolerated  amongst  educated  people, 
besides  those  which  are  condemned  as  vulgar.  The  teacher 
should  study  the  varieties  of  pronunciation  pointed  out  on  pp. 
7G-84,  as  well  as  the  common  mistakes  to  be  guarded  against 
on  pp.  111-115. 

Though  it  has  been  thought  desirable  to  use  fixed  forms  of 
spelling  for  the  weak  and  variable  words,  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  this  does  not  accurately  show  their  pronunciation 
when  combined  in  sentences,  and  the  teacher  must  not  encour- 
age an  unnatural  use  of  the  emphatic  forms.  He  should  study 
the  list  of  weak  words  on  pp.  79,  80,  and  make  the  children  notice 
some  of  the  weak  forms  in  the  course  of  the  reading  lessons. 

It  would  not  be  difficult  to  begin  reading  a  narrative  in  the 
very  first  lesson,  deciphering  it  by  the  help  of  an  occasional 
reference  to  the  phonetic  alphabet ;  but  this  course  is  not 
recommended.  The  children  would  not  see  what  was  aimed 
at,  or  why  they  should  be  trotibled  with  an  unaccustomed 
spelling,  unless  they  had  first  received  a  little  instruction  in 
phonetics.  Before  they  attempt  to  read  a  narrative  they  should 
(1)  commit  to  memory  all  the  consonants  and  vowels  (the  diph- 
thongs might  be  learnt  afterwards) ;  (2)  learn  some  of  the  more 
obvious  distinctions  between  different  classes  of  sounds ;  and 
(3)  read  some  of  the  spelling  lessons — at  least  the  first  five — 
learning  to  spell  the  words  aloud.  They  might  begin  to  read 


Method  Recommended.  107 

the  first  spelling  lesson  as  early  as  the  second  lesson  of  the 
course. 

VII.  Analysis  of  Word*.  This  is  a  matter  of  no  little 
difficulty,  because  in  English  we  pronounce  unaccented  words 
and  syllables  so  indistinctly,  and  some  of  the  sounds  are  sc 
short  and  fleeting  that  it  is  difficult  to  ascertain  their  real 
character.  Moreover  our  minds  are  much  confused  by  our 
irregular  spelling,  and  it  is  as  difficult  to  learn  to  trust  the 
ear  in  phonetics  as  to  trust  the  eye  in  drawing.  Just  as  the 
beginner  in  drawing  thinks  he  sees  foreshortened  lines  and 
spaces  nearly  as  large  as  those  which  face  him,  because  he- 
knows  what  their  size  really  is,  and  imagines  that  a  distant 
hill  looks  green  when  it  really  looks  blue  or  purple,  because 
he  knows  if  it  were  near  he  would  see  it  to  be  covered  with 
green  grass  and  trees,  so  that  he  cannot,  without  long  training, 
learn  to  trust  his  sight  and  draw  things  as  they  appear ;  so 
beginners  in  phonetics,  thinking  they  know  words  to  be  pro- 
nounced according  to  the  spelling,  seem  unable  to  trust  their 
ears  and  to  write  down  what  they  hear.  And  even  after  some 
training,  we  are  still  liable,  when  we  repeat  words  to  see  how 
we  pronounce  them,  to  depart  from  the  pronunciation  which  we 
use  when  we  are  speaking  unconsciously. 

For  instance,  Dr.  Ellis  tells  of  an  old  lady  who  stoutly  as- 
serted that  she  always  pronounced  lecture  as  lektyuar,  and  the 
very  next  minute  unawares  said  lekchar,  with  the  same  ending 
as  teacher,  just  like  other  people.  Dr.  Sweet  too  observes  that 
few  people  realize  that  they  pronounce  farther  and  save  her 
exactly  \ikefather  and  savour.  It  is  a  good  experiment,  if  we 
can  find  a  friend  upon  whom  we  may  venture  to  try  such  ex- 
periments without  endangering  our  friendship,  to  ask  some  one 
who  says  this  year,  changing  the  s  into  sh,  or  adds  r  to  idea  in 
the  idea  of  it,  whether  he  ever  pronounces  in  this  fashion,  for 
the  reply  will  undoubtedly  be  an  indignant  denial,  although 
most  cultivated  men  and  a  large  proportion  of  cultivated 
women  pronounce  in  this  manner,  and  we  shall  probably  soon 
catch  him  in  the  very  act  he  so  vehemently  repudiated. 

As  therefore  the  analysis  of  words  is  difficult,  and  that  of 
sentences  far  more  so,  it  will  be  sufficient  to  ask  children  to 


103  Hints  for  Teacher*. 

analyse  single  words.     For  this  purpose  they  should  have  much 
practice  in — 

(1)  Spelling  aloud  words  pronounced  by  the  teacher. 

(2)  Spelling  aloud  words  seen  in  phonetic  spelling. 

(3)  Writing  phonetically  from  dictation  ;  and  lastly, 

(4)  Transcribing  into  phonetic  spelling  words  and  passages 
spelt  in  the  ordinary  way. 

This  last  is  difficult,  and  should  be  reserved  to  the  end  of 
the  course.  A  series  of  graduated  exercises  in  it  is  given 
at  II.  67-75.  For  the  Key,  see  I.  115-119. 

How  to  Spell  aloud.  The  only  difficulties  here  are  (1) 
Syllable  division,  and  (2)  How  to  name  the  short  vowels.  Rules 
for  syllable  division  are  given  on  pp.  72-74 ;  but  the  teacher 
will  not  go  far  wrong  if  he  follows  these  two  simple  directions. 
(1)  Aim  at  a  natural  division  of  syllables,  according  to  sound 
and  not  according  to  spelling.  Hour,  fire,  and  chasm  are  dis- 
syllables in  reality,  just  like  power,  higher,  and  season,  and 
should  be  divided  accordingly.  (2)  When  several  consonants 
occur  between  two  vowels  they  may  be  divided  at  pleasure  in 
the  way  which  seems  most  natural. 

Short  accented  vowels,  when  isolated,  are  to  be  called  «?t, 
ait,  et,  it,  ot,  ut,  because  it  is  difficult  to  pronounce  them 
alone,  but  the  introduction  of  the  t  sound  would  make  a  con- 
fusion in  spelling,  so  the  children  should  take  them  with  the 
consonant  which  follows,  not  breaking  up  at  all  such  mono- 
syllables as  if,  on,  and  dividing  such  words  as  bed,  nod  into 
two  parts  only,  thus: — b,  ed ;  11,  od. 

Short  unaccented  vowels  require  to  be  treated  differently, 
except  i  in  close  syllables,  that  is  in  syllables  ending  with  a 
consonant.  I  may  be  taken  with  the  consonant  following  it  in 
such  words  as  in-tend,  dis-tress;  but  in  open  syllables,  where  no 
consonant  follows  in  the  same  syllable,  it  must  be  pronounced 
alone,  e.g.  in  ni-s£s-i-ti,  di-pdz-i-ta-ri. 

The  unaccented  vowels  a  and  o'  are  to  be  called  by  their 
names — a  and  short  o'.  Otherwise,  if  a  were  taken  with  a 
consonant  following,  the  children  would  identify  it  with  ce, 
making  the  an  in  organ  (ogan)  just  like  «en  in  hunter  (hoentar), 
and  if  they  tried  to  pronounce  an  isolated  o%  or  o'  with  a  con- 


Method  Eecommended.  109 

sonant  following,  they  would  really  pronounce  ow,  making  o'z 
in/bZo'2  like  owx  \nflowz. 

The  short  open  unaccented  vowels  u  as  in  tn^w,  infltfans, 
and  ey  as  in  essay  (esey),  survey  (soevey),  subst.,  are  so  rare, 
except  when  u  occiirs  as  part  of  the  diphthong  yu  (see  pp.  53,  54), 
that  it  is  hardly  worth  while  to  make  the  children  call  them 
short  u  and  short  ey.  It  may  suffice  to  call  them  uw  and  ey. 

Miscellaneous  Exercises.  The  teacher  will  have  no 
difficulty  in  inventing  a  variety  of  exercises  to  test  the  chil- 
dren's knowledge  and  cultivate  their  powers  of  observation. 
It  will  interest  them,  for  instance,  and  be  useful  also,  to  give 
them  a  list  of  words  in  ordinary  spelling  illustrating  the  nine 
values  of  the  letter  a  (pp.  39  f.)  or  the  four  values  of  the  digraph 
ng  (p.  33),  and  to  ask  them  to  write  after  each  word  the  proper 
phonetic  symbol  for  a  or  ng.  But  it  would  be  a  waste  of  time 
to  attempt  to  show  them  all  the  intricacies  of  ordinary  spelling, 
as  exhibited  in  the  exx.  on  pp.  11-29. 

How  to  teach  the  Sounds  of  French  and  German. 
It  is  so  easy  to  explain  the  sounds  of  French  and  German  when 
once  a  good  foundation  of  English  phonetics  has  been  laid,  that 
the  teacher  will  probably  find  no  difficulty  in  simplifying  the 
French  and  German  sections  of  this  book  and  adapting  them  to 
his  class.  The  cultivation  of  the  ear  and  the  vocal  organs  to 
enable  the  children  to  distinguish  and  reproduce  correctly  the 
new  sounds  and  combinations  of  sounds,  will  no  doubt  require 
a  good  deal  of  patience,  but  the  work  will  be  wonderfully 
facilitated  by  a  sound  elementary  knowledge  of  phonetics,  and 
what  is  learnt  will  be  so  clearly  grasped  that  it  will  not  easily 
be  forgotten. 

The  other  important  requirement  is  that,  in  the  children's 
first  course  of  lessons  in  a  foreign  language,  some  sort  of  pho- 
netic spelling  should  be  used.  The  particular  alphabets  used  in 
this  work  are  commended  to  the  teacher's  notice  as  being  pecu- 
liarly easy  to  read,  to  write,  and  to  print ;  but  it  is  probable 
that  some  may  prefer  to  use  the  international  alphabet  of  the 
Maltre  Plwnetique,  or  the  French  alphabet  of  Franke's  Phrases 
de  tons  les  Jours,  as  that  little  book  contains  such  good  material 
for  conversation. 


110  Hints  for  Teachers. 

Teachers  who  have  tried  the  experiment  of  using  phonetic 
spelling  in  this  way  are  unanimous  in  pronouncing  it  a  far  more 
effectual  plan  than  to  begin  with  ordinary  spelling.  The  child 
sees  how  each  word  should  be  pronounced,  and  is  saved  from 
those  perpetual  corrections  and  fault-findings  which  are  so 
wearisome  and  discouraging  to  beginners.  To  those  who  ob- 
serve that  this  involves  the  trouble  of  learning  two  things 
instead  of  one,  M.  Passy's  reply  is  that  when  a  man  is  told  to 
convey  a  load  from  one  place  to  another,  he  does  not  complain 
because  he  has  to  take  a  wheelbarrow  as  well. 

It  may  perhaps  be  useful  and  instructive  to  print  here  the 
rules  which  have  been  adopted  by  the  Phonetic  Teachers' 
Association. 

PRINCIPES  PEDAGOGIQUES  DE  L' ASSOCIATION  PHO- 
NETIQUE  DES  PKOFESSEURS  DE  LANGUES 
VIV  ANTES, 

Secretaire,  M.  PAUL  PASSY,  6,  Rue  Labordere,  Ncuilly  s. 
Seine. 

1. — Ce  qu'il  faut  etudier  d'abord  dans  une  langue  etrangere, 
ce  n'est  pas  le  langage  plus  ou  moins  archa'ique  de  la  literature, 
mais  le  langage  parle  de  tous  les  jours. 

2. — Le  premier  soin  du  maitre  doit  etre  de  rendre  parfaite- 
ment  familiers  aux  eleves  les  sons  de  la  langue  etrangere.  Dans 
ce  but  il  se  servira  d'une  transcription  phonetique,  qui  sera  em- 
ployee a  1'exclusion  de  1'orthographe  traditionelle  pendant  la 
premiere  partie  du  cours. 

3. — En  second  lieu,  le  maitre  fera  etudier  les  phrases  et  les 
tournures  idiomatiques  les  plus  usuelles  de  la  langue  etrangere. 
Pour  cela  il  fera  etudier  des  textes  suivis,  dialogues,  descriptions 
et  recits,  aussi  faciles,  aussi  naturels  et  aussi  interessants  que 
possible. 

4. — II  enseignera  d'abord  la  grammaire  inductivement,  comme 
corollaire  et  generalisation  des  faits  observes  pendant  la  lecture  ; 
une  etude  plus  systernatique  sera  reservee  pour  la  fin. 

5. — Autant  que  possible,  il  ratachera  les  expressions  de  la 
langue  etrangere  directement  aux  idees,  ou  a  d'autres  expres- 


Common  Mistakes.  Ill 

sions  de  la  meme  langue,  non  a  celles  de  la  langue  maternelle. 
Toutes  les  fois  qu'il  le  pourra,  il  remplacera  done  la  traduction 
par  des  Ie9ons  de  choses,  des  Ie9ons  sur  des  images  et  des  expli- 
cations donnees  dans  la  langue  etrangere. 

6. — Quand  plus  tard  il  donnera  aux  eleves  des  devoirs  ecrits 
a  faire,  ce  seront  d'abord  des  reproductions  de  textes  deja  lus 
et  expliques,  puis  de  recits  faits  par  lui-meme  de  vive  voix ;  en- 
suite  viendront  les  redactions  libres  ;  les  versions  et  les  themes 
seront  gardes  pour  la  fin. 

COMMON  MISTAKES. 

The  varieties  of  pronunciation  among  educated  English 
people  are  so  numerous  and  so  perplexing,  that  it  is  by  no 
means  easy  to  say  what  may  be  tolerated  and  what  must  be 
reckoned  as  a  mistake.  In  the  following  list  I  mention  some 
pronunciations  which  occur  in  the  most  instructive  book  which 
has  been  written  on  English  pronunciation — Dr.  Sweet's  Ele- 
mentarbuch.  But  I  wish  it  to  be  understood  that  I  do  not 
deny  that  some  of  these  so-called  mistakes,  e.g.,  dhi  aidiar  av 
it,  are  extremely  common  amongst  educated  Englishmen.  I  do 
not  presume  to  lay  down  any  authoritative  rule  of  pronunci- 
ation, but  it  may  perhaps  be  useful  to  point  out  what  I  myself 
should  aim  at  in  teaching  children  to  pronounce  the  English 
language.  Teachers  of  children  are  compelled  to  be  dictators. 

The  following  list  is  not  meant  to  include  provincialisms  or 
vulgarisms  of  any  sort,  but  only  some  slip-shod  habits  into 
which  well  educated  people  may  easily  fall  unawares. 

I.  Do  not  introduce  final  r  because  the  next  word  begins 
with  a  vowel.  Avoid  : — 

1.  -a  changed  to  -ar,  as  in  "  Vikt'ori'ar  auar  kwiyn,"  "dhi 
aidiar  ov  it,"  "  dha  sowfar  iz  koevad,"  etc. 

2.  -6  changed  to  or,  as  in  "  dha  lor  av  dha  Lod." 

3.  -aa  changed  to  -aar,  as  in  "  papaar  iz  gon  aut." 

4.  -o'  changed  to  -ar,  as  in  "  dha  winclar  iz  owpn',"  "  dha 
felar  iz  leyzi." 

II.  Do  not  alter  final  point  consonants  because  the  next  word 
begins  with  y.  Avoid  : — 

1.  s  changed  to  sh,  as  in  "  dhish  yoer,"  "  siksh  yoez."  This 
practice  is  extremely  common,  even  amongst  highly  educated 


112  Hints  for  Teachers. 

people.  A  lady  of  the  name  of  Alice  Young,  told  me  that  a, 
large  proportion  of  her  friends  called  her  "  ./Elish  Yoeng,"  and 
many  dignitaries  of  the  Church  are  caught  in  this  pitfall. 

2.  z  changed  to  zh,  as  in  "  sezh  yuzhwal,"  "  sezh  yet,"  "  61 
dhiyzh  yoez,"  "  preyzh  yiy  dha  Lod."     The  change  of  z  to  zh,  or 
to  sh,  before  sh  in  such  phrases  as  "  is  she,"  pronounced  "  izh  " 
or  "  ish  shiy,"  seems  however  to  be  unavoidable  in  rapid  speech. 

3.  t,  with  y  following,  changed  to  ch,  as  in  "  hi  wil  miy 
chuw  "  (miyt  yuw),  "  laas  chiar  "  (laast  yiar),  "  ey  chiaz  agow  " 
(eyt yiaz),  "down  chuw  (or  "  cha  ")  now  "  (downt  yuw).    In  "laast 
yiar"  avoid  also  dropping  the  t  and  reducing  it  to  "  laash  yiar." 

4.  d,  with  y  following,  changed  to  j,  as  in  "  it  woz  pey  jesta- 
di  "  (peyd  yestadi),  "  it  mey  ju  heziteyt  "  (meyd  yu). 

III.  Pronounce    clearly    the    endings  n,   ing,  o%    o,  iti. 
Avoid  : — 

1.  11  changed  to  m,  after  a  lip  consonant,  as  in  "ilevm'   a 
klok,"  "  givm'  oep,"  "a  keep  m'  sosar." 

2.  ing  changed  to  in,  as  in  "  telin,"  "  givin,"  etc. 

3.  o*  changed  to   a,   as  in  "winda,"  "pila,"  for  "  windo'," 
"  pilo'." 

4.  6  changed  to  oa  ( =  oa),  as  in  u  ritn'  in  dha  loa,"  as  if  lore 
were  written  instead  of  law.     So  raw,  daic,  flaiv  must  have  a 
pure  unaltered  vowel,  and  not  end  with  a  vowel  glide  as  roar  . 
door,  floor  often  do. 

5.  iti  changed  to  ati,  as  in  "yunati,"  "abilati." 

IV.  Keep  ty  and  dy  clear  in  accented  syllables.     Avoid  : — 

1.  ty  changed  to  ch,  as  in  "  opachuwniti "  (opatyuniti). 

2.  dy  changed  to  j,  as  in  "  juaring"  (dyuaring).  Observe  that 
in  unaccented  syllables  the  change  of  ty  to  ch  is  often  allowed, 
as  in  nature,  venture,  question,  and  the  change  of  dy  to  j  occa- 
sionally, as  in  soldier. 

V.  Pronounce  r  carefully  in  unaccented  syllables.    Avoid : — 

1.  Introducing  a  before  it  when  it  follows  a  consonant,  as  in 
"  Henari,"  "  oambarela." 

2.  Dropping  an  r  or  otherwise  mispronouncing  a  word  in 
which  r  occurs  twice,  as  in  laibrari,  Febru'ari,    tempararili, 
sekritari,    ditiari'arcyt,    litarari,     laibaratari,    mispronounced 
"  laibri,"  "  Febyuari,"  "  temparali,"  and  so  on. 


Common  Mistakes. 


113 


VI.     Keep  a  and  i  distinct  from  one  another  in  unaccented 
syllables,  as  far  as  can  be  done  without  pedantry.     Avoid : — 

1.  i  changed  to  a,  as  in  "  Apral,"  "  vizabl',"  "  herasi,"  as  well 
as  in  the  ending  -iti,  already  mentioned. 

2.  a  changed  to  i,  as  in  "  mirikl'." 

Avoid  also  these  miscellaneous  mistakes,  which  are  all  heard 
in  the  speech  of  educated  people  : — 


antarctic 

arctic 

aye  (yes) 

biography 

calisthenic 

catch 

Christian 

drama 

economic 

God 

heterogeneous 

homogeneous 

I  dare  say 

idyll 

Isaiah 

just 

neighbourhood 

nomenclature 

panorama 

philanthropic 

philosopher 

presumptuous 

primer 

question 

recognise 
rheumatism 


Mispronounced. 
sentaatik 

Properly. 
sentaaktik 

aatik 

aaktik 

ey 
biyografi 
kselistenik 

aai1 

baiografi 
kaelisthenik 

kech 

ksech 

krishtyan 
drsema 

kristyan  or  krischan 
draama 

eko'nomik 
God 

iyko'iiomik 
God 

hetaro'genyas 
or  hetaro'jenyas 
howmo'genyas 
ai  desey 
idil 

hetaro'jiynyas 

howmo'jiynyas 
ai  dear  sey 
aidil 

Aizaia 

Aizaaia 

jest 
neybarud 
nowmenklachar 
psenarsema 
filantropik 
filosifar 

jcest 
neybahud 
nowmenkleychar 
psenaraama 
filanthropik 
filosafar 

priz-oemshas 

prizoemtywas 

praimar 
kwesshan 

primar 
kweschan 

or  kweshshan 

rekanaiz 
ruwmatizam 

rekagnaiz 
ruwmatizm' 

I.  p. 


1  On  the  diphthong  aai,  S3e  p.  54. 


114 


Hints  for  Teachers. 


schism 
sure 
surely 
thank 


Mispronounced. 

sizim 

shoar 

sholi 

thengk 


Properly. 

sizm' 

shuar 

shuarli 

thsengk 


And,  above  all,  avoid  : — 

Faults  characteristic  of  Teachers,  that  is  to  say, 
pedantic  efforts  to  pronounce  as  we  spell.  The  derivation  of 
the  word  "pedantic"  might  in  itself  serve  as  a  warning 
against  this  fault,  but  it  will  be  useful  to  give  some  illustra- 
tions of  what  is  meant.  A  well-known  teacher  of  elocution 
tells  me  that  she  thinks  she  shall  be  compelled  to  leave  off 
teaching  in  girls'  schools,  because  the  mistresses  require, 
amongst  other  things,  that  she  should  make  the  girls  pronounce 
mountain  and  fountain,  with  the  ending  -teyn,  like  obtain, 
and  several  of  the  mistakes  given  below  are  such  as  none  but 
teachers  could,  I  think,  be  guilty  of,  though  others  are  more 
widely  spread. 


mountain 

fountain 

cp.  villain 
chaplain 
captain 
curtain 

often 

cp.  soften 

associate  (sb.) 

associate  (vb.) 

cp.  social 
musician 
officiate 

propitiation 

conquer 

cp.  exchequer 
liquor 


Mispronounced, 

maun  teyn 
faunteyn 


oftan  or  oftan 

asowsyit 
asowsieyt 


pro'pisieyshan 
kongkwar 


Properly. 
mauntin 
fauntin 

vilin 

chseplin 

kgeptin 

koetin 
ofn'  or  ofn' 

sofn'  or  sofn' 
asowshyit 
asowshieyt 

sowshal 

myuzishan 

ofishiey t  or  afishieyt 
pro'pishieyshan 
kongkar 

ekschekar 

likar 


Key  to  the  Spelling  Lessons. 


115 


soldier l 

inspiration 

recitation 

cp.  admiration 
resignation 
respiration 

England 

cp.  pretty 

says,  said 


Mispronounced. 
sbwldyar 
inspaireyshan 
riysaiteyskan 


Engglancl 
seyz,  seyd 


Properly. 

sowljar 

inspireyshan 

resiteyshan 
sedmireyshan 
rezigneyshan 
respireyslian 

Inggland 
priti 

sez,  sed 


KEY  TO  THE  SPELLING  LESSONS. 


I. 

ate 

it 

on 

pot 

kid 

good 

big 

ebb 

in 

pet 

put 

cod 

nook 

bog 

egg 

odd 

pit 

bed 

could 

cook 

Tom 

II. 


men 
kino- 


ill 
if 

rock 
rook 

wet 
thin 

fill 
full 

pith 
with 

thick 
lock 

of 

when 

then 

bull 

fit 

look 

wreck 
rick 

wen 
whet 

them 
fell 

deaf 
give 

foot 
wood 

pull 
wool 

III. 

is 
this 

was 
wash 

should 
shook 

yell 
his 

chick 
hook 

etch 
edge 

rich 
hedge 

puss         dish  yes  hiss        John         which       lodge 

says         push  yet  chin       Jem  witch        push 


IV 

up 

as 

cup 

rag 

dove 

rash 

madge 

ITS 

ash 

cap 

thumb 

have 

push 

gush 

at 

buck 

bud 

than 

thus 

much 

bush 

add 

back 

bad 

&ung 

puss 

match 

dull 

am 

book 

rug 

sang 

rush 

judge 

pull 

1  The  only  words  with  endings  similar  to  that  of  soldier,  are  pro- 
cedure, verdure,  grandeur,  and  it  is  best  to  pronounce  -jar  in  them  all ; 
but  as  they  are  not  in  such  common  use  as  soldier,  the  ending  -dyar  is 


116 


Hints  for  Teachers. 


amid 

aback 

attack 

among 

above 


abash 

attach 

amass 

amiss 

ahead 


V. 

villa 

dollar 

Bella 

miller 

Anna 

rudder 

Hannah 

collar 

gunner 
fuller 

a 

an 

and 

the   before  vowel 
the  before  consonant 
that  rel.  or  conj. 


VI. 

that  demonstrative 

to 

two,  too 

a  man 

an  ox 

pen  and  ink 

VII. 


the  orange 

pretend 

the  nuts 

select 

putty 

protect 

folly 

window 

fully 

follow 

resist 

following 

palm 

they 

he 

pause             no             who 

calm 

obey 

me 

port                go             do 

barn 

pale 

see 

law                so             shoe 

cart 

pace 

feel 

draw              bowl         rude 

are 

eight 

piece 

for                  boat         rule 

far 

gate 

machine 

nor                 coat          boot 

VIII. 

burn 

fairy 

father 

repairing              recourse 

tnrn 

hairy 

martyr 

despairing           portion 

dirt 

Mary 

regard 

daisy                      mowing 

hurt 

daring 

bazaar 

station                  motion 

word 

wearing 

return 

peaceful                ruler 

Persian 

tearing 

deserve 

deceive                  truthful 

IX. 

bide 

prying 

how 

join           joying         new 

bite 

flying 

now 

choice       cloying       few 

cry 

house 

bowing 

boy           duke           unique 

fly 

mouse 

allowing 

joy            duty           unite 

allowable.  Soldiers  themselves  cry  out  that  they  would  rather  be 
called  sojaz  than  son-ldyaz,  when  some  young  lady  at  a  penny-reading 
scrupulously  pronounces  the  word  according  to  the  spelling. 


Key  to  the  Exercises.  117 

X. 

wear  there  rear  door  hoar 

pear  hair  fears  more  poor 

where  ear  seer  roars  tours 

air  peer  hear  soars  doer 

tares  tiers  oar,  ore  wore  moor 

dares  dear  or  four,  fore  wooer 

cares  mere  pour  for  sure 

rare  near  tore  nor  brewer 


KEY  TO  THE  EXERCISES. 

EXERCISE  I. 

Bel,  eg,  in,  stif,  od,  ful,  digd,  livd,  led,  ded,  piti,  meri,  sori, 
Wili,  redi,  sens,  stik,  blok,  horid,  plenti,  plentifuli. 

EXERCISE  II. 

Jon  hsed  a  gud  dog.  Flori  lukt  set  it.  A  bseg  ful  ov  wul. 
A  wuli  Item.  Hiz  fut  iz  wet.  Hiz  haend  iz  ful.  Ssem  left  hiz 
buk.  Jim  tuk  it.  Wili  iz  not  stedi.  Gfiv  him  ten  minits. 

EXERCISE  III. 

JEn  iz  a  gad  kuk.  Henri  haez  a  priti  boks.  Ten  penz. 
Twenti  pens.  Fifti  buks.  Siksti  bedz.  Meni  koks  and  henz. 
A  boks  ov  briks.  Wili  nokt.  Jon  helpt  Tom.  Mini  hsez  bred 
and  egz.  Ned  spelz  wel.  Kiti  hsez  meni  frendz. 

EXERCISE  IV. 

Dha  bel  woz  ringing.  yEni  woz  thingking.  Dha  hem  iz 
dringking.  Mezhar  dhis  bit  ov  wud.  A  mosi  bsengk.  A  hoch- 
poch.  Mfech  dhset  red  wul.  Put  in  a  stich.  Dringk  dha  milk. 
Fseni  iz  set  lezhar.  Ned  hsez  a  trezhar.  Jon  iz  veri  Eenggri. 
Tom  iz  senggling. 

EXERCISE  V. 

Heyst  meyks  weyst.  Now  peynz,  now  geynz.  II  wiydz 
grow  apeys.  Ikstriymz  (or  ckstriymz)  miyt.  Chseriti  biginz 


118  Hints  for  Teachers. 

set  howm.  Greyt  iz  dha  truwth,  and  it  shgel  priveyl.  Noen  ov 
dhiyz  thingz  muwvd  him.  Dha  toeng  iz  not  stiyl,  beet  it  kcets. 
Trezhaz  ov  wikidnis  (or  -ncs)  profit  noathing. 

EXERCISE  VI. 

Aamz  aar  dha  solt  ov  richiz.  Truwth  mey  biy  bleymd,  boet 
kaant  biy  shejond.  Hiy  dhat  sliypith  (or  -eth}  in  haavist  iz  a 
seen  dhat  kosith  sheym.  A  soft  (or  soft}  aansar  toenith  awey 
roth.  01  hoer  paadhz  aar  piys.  Fowond,  ioraamd. 

EXERCISE  VII. 

A  stich  in  taim  seyvz  nain.  If  dhan  duw  il,  dha  joi  feydz, 
not  dha  peynz ;  if  wel,  dha  peyn  doeth  feyd,  dha  joi  rimeynz. 
Dha  ppen  sez  tu  dha  pot,  "  Kiyp  of,  or  yu  1  smoech  miy."  Moe- 
dar  wil  ant.  Huw  nowz  noathing,  davits  noething.  AVoan  fow 
iz  tnw  meni,  and  a  hoendrad  frendz  tuw  fyu.  Now  kros  now 
kraun. 

EXERCISE  VIII. 

Ant  ov  det,  aut  ov  deynjar.  A  profit  hsez  now  onar  in  hiz 
own  koentri.  Fizishan,  hiyl  dhaiself.  Dha  risiyvar  z  (or  -vaz) 
pez  baad  sez  dha  thiyf.  A  rowling  stown  gaadhaz  now  mos. 
Dhau  shselt  suwnar  ditekt  an  sent  (or  aant)  muwving  in  dha 
daak  nait  on  dha  blsek  oeth,  dhsen  61  dha  mowshanz  ov  praid  in 
dhain  haat. 

EXERCISE  IX. 

,  Maen  pro'powziz,  God  dispowziz.  Kowlz  tu  Nyukaasl'.  Mis- 
fochanz  nevar  kosm  siuggl'.  Hevn'  and  oeth  fait  in  veyn  agenst 
(or  ayeynst}  a  doans.  Dha  rivar  paast  and  God  fogotn'.  When 
dha  teyl  ov  briks  iz  doebl'd,  Mowziz  koamz.  Iz  Sol  olso'  amoang 
dha  profits  ? 

EXERCISE  X. 

Moar  heyst  woes  spiycl.  A  skoldid  dog  fiaz  kowld  wotar.  II 
duaz  aar  il  diymaz.  Dhear  z  (or  dhcaz)  meni  a  slip  twikst  dha 
keep  and  dha  lip.  Dha  fiar  ov  msen  bringith  (or  -ctJi)  a  snear. 
A  puar  mren  iz  betar  dhsen  a  fuwl.  Bifoar  onar  iz  hyumiliti. 


Key  to  the  Exercises. 


119 


EXERCISE  XI. 

Dha  greyps  aar  sauar.  Nolij  iz  pauar.  A  boent  chaild 
dredz  dha  faiar.  It  iz  not,  it  iz  not,  seth  dha  baiar,  boat  when 
hiy  iz  gon  (or  gon}  hiz  wey,  dhen  hiy  bowstith.  Dhey  woer 
mseriing  and  giving  in  mserij.  Tu  dha  pyuar  61  thingz  aar 
pyuar.  Wiy  kaunt  dhem  blesid  which  indyuar  (or  endyuar). 

EXERCISE  XII. 

A  hori  owld  msen.  A  dering  robari.  Dha  doar  woz  ajaar. 
Wild  iz  poras.  Clera  wil  not  ritoen.  Meri  iz  injoiing  hoer 
raid.  Mistar  Jownz  iz  imploiing  a  gaadnar.  Hoer  mowtivz 
aar  not  aperant.  Maroko'  weaz  wel.  Sera  iz  laiing  daun. 
Luwiyza  iz  oentaiing  a  not.  Dhey  aar  ristoring  dha  choech. 


Class  1. 

divizhan 
siveriti 
obzaveyshan 
iksp'senshan, 

p'senshan 
eksibishan 
prejudishal 
insensibiliti 
dilyuzhan 
imposibiliti 
obligeyshan 


or  eks- 


EXERCISE   XIII. 
Class  2. 

pro'tekt 

advaiz 

parental 

o'biydyant 

mo'lest 

kantinyu 

abominabl' 

kansivl 


Class  3. 
kondisend 
ritoen 
ditoemin 

igzibit,  or  egzibit 
intelijant 
intimideyt 
dislaik 


VII. 

FRENCH  ANALYSIS. 

The  following  pages  are  not  an  attempt  to  treat  the  sounds 
of  the  French  language  very  fully,  but  only  to  give  an  easy 
introduction  to  the  study  of  French  pronunciation,  in  the  hope 
that  students  will  at  least  go  on  to  read  M.  Paul  Passy's  Sons 
du  Francais  and  Le  Francais  ParU,  if  they  have  not  leisure  to 
attempt  any  larger  treatises  on  the  subject.  The  pronunciation 
of  the  French  language  presents  special  difficulties  to  English 
people,  for  French  and  English  are  strongly  contrasted  with 
one  another,  not  only  in  their  system  of  sounds,  but  in  their 
accentuation  and  intonation.  German  pronunciation  is  com- 
paratively easy. 

THE  CONSONANTS. 

This  is  the  easiest  part  of  our  task.  A  comparison  of  the 
table  of  French  consonants  on  p.  vii.  with  the  English  table  on 
p.  vi.  does  indeed  show  a  formidable  array  of  nine  new  con- 
sonants, five  of  which  are  included  in  the  alphabet  on  p.  iv., 
but  the  difficulty  is  greater  in  appearance  than  in  reality,  as 
will  be  seen  when  these  consonants  are  explained  in  detail. 

No  logs  than  five  of  the  symbols  in  the  scheme  of  French 
consonants  on  p.  vii.,  namely,  r2,  V3,  '«,  cw,  and  'y,  can  be  dis- 
pensed with  in  writing,  though  they  are  wanted  to  make  the 
scheme  complete,  and  to  enable  us  to  explain  the  sounds  of 
French. 

It  will  be  found  that  the  points  requiring  most  attention  are 
the  use  of  unvoiced  1  and  r,  as  in  table  and  autre  (tab'l,  ot'r), 
and  what  is  really  more  difficult,  the  use  of  the  familiar  voiced 
r  in  unaccustomed  positions. 

120 


Stops.     Liquids.  121 

THE  STOPS. 

The  French  stops,  p,  b,  t,  d,  k,  g,  correspond  with  the 
English  stops.  They  are  formed  in  the  same  way,  and  we  use 
the  same  symbols  to  represent  them.  The  usual  symbols  for  k 
are  c  and  qu}  as  in  cow,  qui  (kou,  ki). 

There  are,  however,  three  points  of  difference  in  the  formation 
and  sound  of  the  French  and  English  stops,  recognised  by 
phoneticians,  but  not  very  important  for  beginners.  First,  the 
English  hard  stops,  p,  t,  k,  when  they  occur  before  an  accented 
vowel,  are  pronounced  with  a  forcible  expulsion  of  the  breath, 
so  that  they  may  be  said  to  be  aspirated,  and  this  is  not  the 
case  in  French. 

Secondly,  according  to  M.  Passy,  the  French  soft  stops,  b,  d, 
g,  differ  from  English  b,  d,  g  in  being  fully  voiced. 

And  thirdly,  the  French  point  stops  t  and  d  are  formed  by 
placing  the  point  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  teeth  (some 
say  the  back  and  some  the  edge  of  the  teeth),  whilst  in  the 
English  t  and  d  the  point  of  the  tongue  touches  the  upper 
gums.  They  are  therefore  decidedly  further  forward  than  our 
point  stops. 

THE  LIQUIDS. 

The  Nasals.  The  French  nasals  are  three  in  number, 
m,  ii  and  A.  The  back  nasal  (English  and  German  iig), 
does  not  exist  in  French,  but  we  find  "a  new  palatal  nasal  A, 
which  does  not  occur  in  English  and  German. 

The  Liii»-\a*al  1WE  is,  properly  speaking,  a  voiced  con- 
sonant, but  under  special  circumstances  it  is  liable  to  become 
voiceless.  It  is  never  syllabic  as  in  English.  At  the  end  of 
a  breath  group,  after  a  consonant — a  position  in  which  English 
m  becomes  syllabic — it  is  voiceless,  and  is  written  thus :  '111, 
as  in  the  words  prismc,  rhumafisme,  pronounced  pris'm,  ruma- 
tis'm.  Compare  English  chasm,  criticism  (ksezm',  kritisizm'). 
On  the  pronunciation  of  words  like  prismc,  when  not  at  the 
end  of  a  breath  groiip,  see  pp.  140-142. 

The  Poiiit-Xasal  ]¥  is  slightly  different  from  the  English 
n,  in  that  the  point  of  the  tongue  is  placed  against  the  teeth. 
In  this  respect  it  corresponds  with  the  French  point-stops 
d  and  t. 


122  French  Analysis. 

The  Palatal-Nasal  a.  This  sound  does  not  occur  fre- 
quently, and  like  the  English  and  German  ii»,  it  is  never 
heard  at  the  beginning  of  a  word.  It  is  formed  in  the  same 
part  of  the  mouth  as  y,  that  is,  by  the  front  of  the  tongue  and 
the  hard  palate.  But  the  tongue  comes  into  contact  with  the 
palate,  so  that,  as  in  the  case  of  the  other  nasal  consonants,  the 
mouth  passage  is  closed,  and  the  breath  is  sent  through  the 
nose.  The  nearest  approach  to  it  in  English  is  the  ny  in  onion, 
pinion  (oenyan,  piny  an). 

M.  Passy  says  that  French  people  have  different  ways  of 
pronouncing  this  sound,  and  that  many  educated  people  sound 
it  as  iiy,  making  the  last  syllable  of  rtyner  like  that  of  panier. 
But  in  panier,  and  wherever  n  is  followed  by  y,  n  is  not  formed 
in  the  same  place  as  t  and  d,  but  is  more  or  less  thrown  back, 
or  palatalized. 

Lt  in  French,  like  t,  d  and  n,  is  formed  by  placing  the 
point  of  the  tongue  against  the  teeth ;  and  as  in  English  1,  the 
sides,  or  at  least  one  side  of  the  tongue,  is  left  open  as  a  passage 
for  the  breath.  But  the  most  important  point  to  be  observed  is 
the  same  which  has  been  already  noticed  in  explaining  French 
ni. 

Voiceless  LJ.  At  the  end  of  a  breath  group,  after  a  con- 
sonant, French  1  is  always  voiceless,  and  we  represent  it  by  '1. 
This  requires  special  attention,  for  in  the  same  position  English 
1  is  voiced  and  syllabic.  Compare  English  table,  noble,  with 
French  table,  noble.  Breathed  1  will  present  no  difficulty  to 
those  who  have  mastered  the  distinction  between  breathed  and 
voiced  sounds.  See  pp.  31f.  On  the  variations  of  such  words  as 
table,  pcuple,  under  different  circumstances,  see  pp.  140-142. 

The  Welsh  breathed  1,  written  II  in  Llangolleu,  etc.,  differs 
from  French  '1  in  having  the  breath  expelled  much  more  forci- 
bly, so  that  it  may  be  said  to  be  aspirated,  and  also  in  occur- 
ring sometimes  at  the  beginning  of  words. 

It  Mouille.  This  sound  is  the  same  as  the  Italian  gl,  and 
is  an  1  formed  by  contact  of  the  tongue  and  palate,  correspond- 
ing to  the  palatal-nasal  A.  It  is  still  heard  in  the  South  of 
France,  but  has  been  supersoded  in  the  north  by  y,  and  may 
therefore  be  omitted  from  our  alphabet. 


The  Liquids.  123 

R  ami  R2.  The  symbol  r2  is  used  to  denote  the  guttural 
r  which  .is  used  in  Paris  and  is  now  becoming  general  in  all  the 
large  towns  of  France.  It  is  very  different  from  our  English 
r,  being  formed  further  back  in  the  mouth  than  k  and  g,  by 
trilling  the  uvula.  But  in  the  country  and  the  smaller 
towns  r  is  formed  as  in  English,  with  the  point  of  the  tongue, 
and  this  pronunciation  is  not  considered  faulty.  And  the 
Parisian  guttural  r2  is  not  allowed  to  be  used  on  the  stage,  or 
in  singing. 

It  is  quite  unnecessary  for  English  people  to  learn  to  pro- 
nounce r2,  and  indeed  it  is  so  difficult  for  us  that  the  attempt 
would  certainly  result  in  failure. 

Some  forty  years  ago  the  Parisian  guttural  r  was  thought 
to  be  affected,  and  the  servant-maids  who  were  engaged  to 
speak  French  with  us  in  the  nursery  were  chosen  from  the  dis- 
trict round  Orleans,  so  that  we  might  learn  the  purer  French 
of  that  province. 

Voiced  R.  French  r,  like  the  other  French  liquids,  is 
usually  voiced,  and  the  French  voiced  r,  when  formed  with  the 
point  of  the  tongue,  is  like  the  English  r  in  rat,  tree,  etc.,  but 
more  distinctly  trilled.  Yet  it  is  perhaps  the  most  troublesome 
of  all  the  French  consonants  for  English  students.  For  in 
English  this  sound  never  occurs  before  a  consonant,  nor  is  it 
ever  heard  at  the  end  of  a  word,  unless  the  next  word  begins 
with  a  vowel.  Moreover,  it  usually  converts  the  preceding 
vowel  into  a  diphthong,  by  introducing  the  sound  a,  as  in  peer, 
poor  (pia(r),  pua(r)).  See  pp.  57f.  So  English  people  find  it 
very  difficult  (1)  to  pronounce  r  as  a  consonant  when  it  is  final 
or  followed  by  another  consonant,  and  (2)  to  keep  long  vowels 
followed  by  r  pure  to  the  end. 

Although  French  r  is  short,  and  slightly  trilled  as  compared 
with  the  r  heard  in  Italian,  the  best  way  to  learn  to  pronounce 
it  properly  is  to  begin  by  practising  a  long  trill,  and  then  to 
learn  to  hold  the  vowels  which  precede  it  steady  and  unchanged 
passing  suddenly  from  them  to  the  r  sound.  It  will  be  a  useful 
exercise  to  learn  to  distinguish  accurately  between  the  English 
and  French  words  given  below,  where  the  difference  is  only  in 
the  treatment  of  r. 


124  French  Analysis. 

English.  French.  English.  French. 
peer                  pire                              rear  rire 

tier  tiro  sere  sire 

dear  dire  poor  pour 

leer  lyre  tour  tour 

Voiceless  R.  The  sound  r  follows  the  same  rule  as  ni 
and  1,  becoming  voiceless  at  the  end  of  a  breath  group  after 
a  consonant,  as  in  poudre,  maitre  (poud'r,  met'r).  'JR.  is  rather 
more  difficult  for  English  people  than  cl,  and  needs  some  prac- 
tice. It  should  be  pronounced  very  softly.  It  is  a  good  exercise 
to  learn  to  make  a  long  trill  without  any  voice.  The  sound  is 
very  like  the  purring  of  a  cat. 

Compare  with  Fr.  "srmt'r,"  "fib'r,"  Eng.  centre,  fibre  (senta(r), 
faiba(r)),  where  we  introduce  the  obscure  vowel  a,  and  do  not 
pronounce  the  r  unless  a  vowel  follows  in  the  next  word. 

On  the  pronunciation  of  the  above  words,  when  not  at  the  end 
of  a  breath  group,  see  pp.  140-142. 

THE  CONTINUANTS. 

The  Front-round  Lip-continuant  U.  This  sound  is 
heard  in  huHe,  huit,  nuit,  lui,  etc.,  and  is  apt  to  be  confounded 
by  English  people  with  w  or  on  (Eng.  uw).  They  do  not  dis- 
tinguish as  they  ought  between  lui  and  Louis  (b.d,  Lwi),  but 
pronounce  them  both  alike  "  Iwi  "  or  "  loui." 

The  consonant  u  is  derived  from  the  vowel  11,  bearing  the 
same  relation  to  it  as  the  consonants  w  and  y  do  to  ou  and  i 
(Eng.  uw  and  iy)  respectively.  See  pp.  35,  38.  So  when  the 
student  can  pronounce  the  French  u  in  Im,  lu,  iiu,  etc.,  he 
need  only  try  to  pronounce  this  vowel  very  rapidly  and  pass 
quickly  to  the  vowel  which  follows,  and  he  will  not  fail  to 
produce  the  consonant  u  in  buis,  lui,  nuit,  etc. 

Observe  that  the  action  of  the  lips  is  the  same  for  w  and  u, 
but  a  different  part  of  the  tongue  is  raised,  namely,  the  back  foi 
w  and  the  front  for  u. 

Voiceless  U.  The  lip-continuant  u  generally  ceases  to  be 
voiced  when  it  follows  a  voiceless  consonant,  as  inpuis,fuis 
(p'wi,  fid).  But  some  Frenchmen  pronounce  u  in  puis  like 


The  Continuants.  125 

u  in  buis,  so  the  distinction  is  not  of  much  importance,  and  it 
is  practically  unnecessary  to  write  'u. 

The  Back-round  Lip-continuant  W.  This  does  not 
occur  in  French  so  frequently  as  in  English,  but  it  is  heard  in 
oui,  Rouen,  bois,  voix  (wi,  Rwcm,  bwa,  vwa)  and  many  other 
words.  After  a  voiceless  consonant  it  generally  becomes  voice- 
less, as  in  poids,  foi  (p'wa,  f wa) ;  but  there  is  no  necessity  to 
use  the  symbol  'w.  It  is  never  so  strongly  aspirated  as  the 
English  wh  in  ichcre. 

There  is  some  difference  between  English  and  French  w  heard  when  we 
carefully  compare  them,  as  in  French  oui  and  English  tve.  The  distinc- 
tion appears  to  be  that  French  w  is  narrow,  whilst  English  w  is  wide. 

The  Lip-teeth  Continuants  F  and  Y.  These  are  like 
English  f  and  v,  and  need  no  special  remark. 

The  Point-Continuants  or  Sibilants  S,  Z,  CH,  JT.  All 

that  we  need  notice  here  is  that  in  French  ch  and  j  stand  for 
the  simple  sounds  which  are  represented  in  English  by  sh  and 
zh,  and  not  for  the  composite  sounds  tsh  and  dzh,  for  which 
we  use  the  symbols  ch  and  j.  French  cliou  is  like  English 
shoe,  and  not  like  chew,  and  French  joue  differs  in  like  manner 
from  English  Jeic.  Many  French  words,  such  as  je,  joue,  jeunc, 
begin  with  j=  English  zh,  a  sound  which  we  use  only  in  the 
middle  of  words,  as  in  leisure,  treasure,  'measure  (lezhar,  trezhar, 
mezhar),  etc. 

The  Palatal  Continuant  Y.  This  sound  very  seldom 
occurs  at  the  beginning  of  words,  and  is  not  often  represented 
by  y.  The  symbols  for  it  are  i,  i',  y,  ill  and  11,  as  in  Men, 
viens,  mangions,  a'ieul,  yeux,  joyeux,  paitte,  fille  (byen,  vy£?z, 
manjyo??,  aj-eul,  yen,  jwayeu,  pa:y,  fi:y).  Though  not  so 
difficult  as  the  1  mouille  which  it  has  superseded,  see  p.  viia.  12, 
it  needs  attention  and  practice,  because  in  English  we  are  not 
accustomed  to  pronounce  it  at  the  end  of  our  words. 

Y  after  a  hard  consonant  generally  becomes  voiceless,  fol- 
lowing the  same  rule  as  u  and  w.  It  is  voiceless,  for  instance, 
in  pied,  cJrien  (p'ye,  ch'yen),  but  it  is  practically  unnecessary 
to  use  the  symbol  'y  to  represent  this  sound.  cy  is  nearly  the 
same  as  the  German  ch  in  ich. 


126  French  Analysis. 

The  Glottal  Continuant  H.  This  sound  has  ceased  to 
be  used  in  Paris  and  in  most  parts  of  France.  The  so-called 
aspirated  h  only  denotes  that  there  must  be  no  liaison  with  the 
preceding  word.  But  this  produces  an  awkward  hiatus,  quite 
contrary  to  the  genius  of  the  French  language,  e.g.  in  en  haut 
(an  o),  and  M.  Passy  recommends  the  retention  of  the  h,  as 
in  the  French  of  Normandy.  I  myself  was  taught  to  sound  it 
in  my  childhood  by  bonnes  who  were  supposed  to  pronounce 
better  than  the  Parisians,  but  it  is  probable  that  most  students 
will  prefer  to  omit  it,  following  the  example  of  the  Parisians 
and  of  the  great  majority  of  French  people  in  this  respect. 

THE  VOWELS. 

The  French  vowel  system  is  very  different  from  ours,  as  may 
be  seen  by  a  comparison  of  the  schemes  on  pp.  x.,  xi. ;  and 
nothing  is  commoner  than  to  hear  English  people,  who  can 
speak  French  quite  fluently,  make  sad  havoc  of  the  vowels.  For 
our  short  vowels  are  quite  different  from  theirs,  and  we  have  a 
tendency  to  turn  our  long  vowels  into  diphthongs,  which  is  a 
great  obstacle  to  us  in  trying  to  acquire  the  long  vowels  of 
either  French  or  German. 

In  studying  the  French  vowels  it  is  best  to  begin  with  the 
eight  normal  vowels  a,  a,  e,  e,  i,  o,  6,  ou,  as  in  pdte,  paitc, 
pres,  ctc,finij  homme,  drole,  tout. 

THE  OPEN  VOWELS. 

A  in  pate  is  very  like  aa  in  father,  but  deeper,  the  tongue 
being  more  depressed.  It  does  not  occur  very  frequently,  and 
is  represented  by  ft  or  «,  or  when  combined  with  w,  by  oi  = 
wa,  exx.  :  male,  jmsser,  trois  (marl,  pase,  trwa).  It  is  easily 
recognised  when  written  d,  and  it  is  heard  in  all  those  words 
which  end  in  -ation  or  -assion  (-asyo»),  and  wherever  oi  is 
preceded  by  r,  making  the  sound  rwa,  exx. :  preparation, 
passion,  trois,  froid  (preparasyon,  pasyo??,  trwa,  frwa). 

French  a  is  sometimes  mistaken  for  English  6  in  Paul,  as  it 
resembles  it  in  being  more  open  than  English  aa,  and  French 
pas  is  pronounced  like  English  pau;  but  this  is  a  bad  fault. 


The  Front  Vowels.  127 

French  a  should  not  be  rounded  like  English.  6,  and  those  who 
cannot  imitate  it  precisely  would  do  better  to  substitute  for  it 
the  English  aa  in  father. 

A  in  patte  is  a  mixed  open  vowel,  differing  from  aa  in 
father  in  being  mixed  and  not  back,  and  from  se  in  fat  in  being 
more  open.  It  is  intermediate  between  the  two,  and  pains 
should  be  taken  to  make  it  distinct  from  both  of  them.  It  is 
generally  short,  as  in  a,  la,  patte,  madame  (a,  la,  pat,  madam), 
but  it  may  also  be  long,  as  in  rare,  cage  (ra:r,  ka:j). 

A  is  easiest  for  English  people  when  it  is  short  and  followed 
by  a  consonant ;  and  if  a  difficulty  is  found  in  pronouncing  final 
a,  as  in  la  mer  (la  me:r),  it  is  best  to  practise  it  a  few  times 
with  the  first  consonant  of  the  next  word,  thus :  —  lam,  lam,  la 
me:r. 

As  I  have  followed  M.  Paul  Passy  throughout  the  French  section  of 
this  book,  it  is  right  to  mention  that,  in  calling  a  in  patte  a  mixed  vowel, 
I  have  ventured  to  differ  from  him.  He  says  that  it  is  a  front  vowel, 
and  observes,  what  is  no  doubt  true,  and  is  shown  in  diagram  v.  (p.  xv.), 
that  in  low  vowels  the  difference  between  front  and  back  is  not  nearl3' 
so  great  as  in  high  vowels.  But  it  appears  to  me  that  although  his 
own  a  may  well  be  described  as  a  front  vowel,  it  is  not  quite  the  normal 
French  a,  but  exceptionally  far  forward.  It  seems  to  my  ear  to  approxi- 
mate very  closely  to  our  English  a;  in  pat,  though  it  is  generally  ac- 
knowledged that  the  normal  French  a  is  about  midway  between,  the  aa 
in  father  and  the  a;  in  pat. 

THE  FRONT  VOWELS. 

There  are  three  front  vowels  in  French  which  are  not  rounded 
and  may  be  considered  normal  sounds,  namely,  the  open  e  in 
pres,  the  close  e  in  in  ete,  and  i  as  in  fini.  They  correspond, 
roughly  speaking,  with  English  e,  ey,  iy  in  fairy,  fate,  feet. 

The  French,  who  use  their  lips  in  speaking  much  more  than 
we  do,  draw  back  the  corners  of  the  mouth  and  lengthen  the 
opening  to  form  the  sound  i,  and  this  they  do  in  a  less  degree 
for  e  and  e. 

I  in  fini.  The  sound  i  in  French  may  be  long,  as  in  abime, 
pire,  rive  (abi:m,  pi:r,  ri:v),  or  short,  as  in  fini,  vie,  lime,  gite, 
vif,  triste  (fini,  vi,  Km,  jit,  vif,  trist).  Special  attention  must  be 
paid  to  the  short  i,  which  does  not  exist  in  English.  For  our 


128  French  Analysis. 

short  i  in  pit  is  very  different,  being  a  wide  vowel,  and  much 
more  open  than  the  long  i.  French  fini  is  not  at  all  like  Eng- 
lish finny. 

Close  e  in  ete  never  occurs  in  close  syllables  and  is  never 
long.  It  is  therefore  shorter  than  English  ey  in  fate,  they,  and 
it  does  not  end  with  an  i  sound  like  ey,  which  is  almost  a 
diphthong.  The  nearest  approach  to  it  in  English  is  the  short- 
ened ey  sometimes  met  with  in  unaccented  syllables,  as  in 
survey  (sb.). 

We  meet  with  e  in  parler,  nez,  pied,  lie",  fai,  donna  i,  gai 
(parle,  ne,  pye,  bit?,  je,  done,  ge). 

Open  e  in  pres  is  nearly  the  same  as  e  in  English  fairy 
(feri),  but  for  all  that  it  is  difficult  for  English  people  to  pro- 
nounce well.  It  is  long  in  tete,  reve,  fer,  vert,  terrc,  frerc, 
chaise,  ncige,  reine  (te:t,  re:v,  fe:r,  ve:r,  te:r  fre:r,  che:z,  ne:j, 
re:n),  and  short  in  tel,  bref,  herbe,  net  (tel,  bref,  herb,  net). 

It  is  more  open  than  our  e  in  pet,  but  slightly  less  open  than 
our  e  in  Mary,  fairy.  When  it  is  long,  there  is  a  difficulty 
in  pronouncing  it  arising  from  the  English  habit  of  always 
following  it  by  r  or  a,  generally  by  a,  thus  forming  the  diph- 
thong ea,  as  in  fairy  (feri  or  feari),  tearing  (tering  or  tearing), 
fares,  cares,  icears,  tears  (feaz,  keaz,  weaz,  teaz).  We  find  it 
hard  therefore  to  pronounce  it  in  any  other  position.  We  have 
to  aim  at  prolonging  the  first  sound  in  air  (ea(r))  without  alter- 
ing it  in  any  way,  as  this  will  give  us  a  vowel  almost  identical 
with  the  French  long  e. 

THE  BACK-ROUND  VOWELS. 

There  are  in  French  three  back-round  vowels,  corresponding 
with  the  three  front  vowels  e,  e,  i,  namely,  open  o  in  liommc, 
close  6  in  di-ole,  and  ou  in  tout.  The  open  o  is  not  nearly  so 
open  as  our  o  in  Paul  or  o  in^otf,  but,  roughly  speaking,  French 
u  corresponds  with  ow  in  pole,  and  ou  with  uw  in  pool. 

Here  again  the  French  use  their  lips  much  more  than  we  do, 
not  only  contracting  and  rounding  them,  but  also  projecting 
them  forward  considerably  for  ou,  and  in  a  less  degree  for  o 
and  o. 

Ou  in   tout.     French  ou  may  be  long,  as  in  rouge,  jour, 


The  Front-round  Vowels.  129 

amour  (rou:j,  jou:r,  amou:r),  or  short,  as  in  loup,  tousse,  gout 
(lou,  tous,  gou).  When  long,  it  is  almost  the  same  as  English 
uw  in  food,  but  it  is  equally  close  throughout,  not  getting 
gradually  closer  like  our  uw.  Short  ou  is  just  as  close  as  long 
ou,  and  must  not  be  made  like  our  u  in  put,  pull,  etc.,  which 
is  a  wide  vowel  and  much  more  open.  The  nearest  approach 
we  have  to  French  short  ou  is  our  short  u  in  open  syllables, 
e.g.  in  influence,  instrument,  into  (intu). 

Close  o  in  drole.  English  students  must  be  careful  not 
to  let  this  sound  become  diphthongal,  like  the  English  ow  in 
pole.  They  should  also  observe  that  French  o  is  not  quite 
identical  with  the  first  element  of  English  ow,  though  it  is  not 
easy  to  define  the  difference,  which  is  easier  to  hear  than  to 
imitate.  It  requires  very  careful  attention  and  imitation  from 
those  who  aim  at  speaking  French  as  well  as  possible.  It  is 
long  in  rose,  chose,  trdne,  cote  (ro:z,  cho:z,  tro:n,  ko:t),  and 
short  in  mot,  saut,  tot,  cote,  aussi,  rideau  (mo,  so,  to,  kote,  osi, 
rido). 

Open  o  in  homme.  This  sound  is  not  very  easy.  It  is 
long  in  corps,  loge  (ko:r,  lo:j),  and  short  in  trop,  sol,  robe,  album 
(tro,  sol,  rob,  albom).  It  differs  from  English  A  in  Paul  and  o 
in  pot  in  two  respects.  In  the  first  place  it  is  not  nearly  so 
open  as  our  open  os,  which  indeed  are  quite  abnormal  sounds. 
So  far,  it  corresponds  with  the  German  o  in  Sonne.  But  it 
differs  from  the  English  and  German  sounds  in  being  less 
clearly  and  distinctly  a  back  vowel.  It  seems  intermediate 
between  o  in  Sonne  and  eu  mpeur,  and  some  people  regard  it 
as  a  mixed  vowel. 

THE  FRONT-ROUND  VOWELS. 

These  vowels  are  found  in  German  as  well  as  in  French,  but 
we  do  not  meet  with  them  in  English  or  in  Italian.  They  may 
be  regarded  as  abnormal  vowels.  They  are  formed,  like  the 
ordinary  front  vowels  e,  e  and  i,  by  the  front  of  the  tongue 
approaching  the  hard  palate,  but  at  the  same  time  the  lips  are 
rounded  as  for  the  back-round  vowels  o,  o,  ou. 

The  French  vowels  belonging  to  this  series  are  three  in 
number,  corresponding  with  the  two  sets  of  vowels  just  men- 

I.  P.  K 


130  French  Analysis. 

tioned,  namely,  eu,  cu  and  u,  as  in  peur,  pen,  pu  (peu:r,  peu, 
pu).  It  is  best  to  begin  by  learning  to  pronounce  u,  which  is 
not  difficult  if  we  first  sound  i,  and  then,  without  stopping  the 
voice  or  altering  the  position  of  the  tongue,  bring  our  lips  into 
the  position  for  ou. 

In  like  manner  a  rounded  e  will  form  eu,  and  a  rounded  e 
will  become  eu,  but  the  sound  eu  is  certainly  more  difficult 
than  u.  The  sound  of  eu  is  very  like  our  English  unrounded 
oe  in  burn  (boen),  though  these  two  vowels  differ  considerably 
in  their  formation. 

Examples  of  eu,  eu  and  u  : — 

Eu  is  long  in  heure,  veuve,  fleuve,  coeur,  mil,  accue.il  (heu:r, 
veu:v,  fleu:v,  keu:r,  eu:y,  akeu:y),  and  short  in  seul,  jcune,  ceuf, 
cueillir  (seul,  jeun,  euf,  keuyir). 

Eu  is  long  in  creuse,  neutre,  Entente,  jeune  (kreu:z,  neu:t'r, 
emeu:t,  jeu:n),  and  short  in  peu,  queue,  veut,  deux  (peu,  keu, 
veu,  deu). 

U  is  long  in  pur,  ruse,  stir,  eurent  (pu:r,  ru:z,  su:r,  u:r),  and 
short  in  vue,  lune,  eu,  eumes,  eiltes  (vu,  lun,  u,  urn,  ut). 

THE  FOUR  NASAL  VOWELS. 

In  forming  most  vowel  sounds,  the  passage  of  the  breath  through 
the  nose  is  stopped  by  raising  the  soft  palate,  so  that  it  issues 
through  the  mouth  alone.  But  if,  in  pronouncing  any  vowel, 
the  soft  palate  is  lowered,  allowing  the  breath  to  escape  partly 
by  the  nose  and  partly  by  the  mouth,  the  vowel  becomes  nasal. 
There  are  no  nasal  vowels  in  the  best  English,  except  in  loan- 
words borrowed  from  French ;  but  in  French  the  four  vowels 
a,  e,  o,  eu,  are  liable  to  be  nasalized,  thus  forming  the  four 
nasal  vowels  which  occur  in  pan,  pin,  pont,  un,  and  which 
in  this  scheme  are  represented  by  an,  en,  on,  eun  in  italics. 

One  of  these  symbols,  namely  en  for  the  sound  in  pin,  will  probably 
seem  strange,  but  it  should  be  remembered  that  in  rien,  Men,  chien, 
Amiens,  pensum,  and  many  other  words,  the  symbol  for  it  is  en. 

Frenchmen,  as  well  as  students  of  other  nations,  are  apt  to 
fancy  that  a  sound  of  11  is  heard  in  these  nasal  vowels.  They 
are  however  simple  vowel  sounds,  and  it  is  only  when  there  is 
a  liaison  with  a  following  vowel  that  any  consonant  is  beard. 


Vowels  in  Unaccented  Syllables.  131 

When  there  is  a  liaison,  add  an  "  n  "  in  ordinary  type  thus : 
mon  enfant  (mown  anfan). 

Examples  of  the  Nasal  Vowels. 

an: — an,  champ, plante  (an,  shan,  pla?i:t). 

en  :—fin,  mince,  soin,  grimper,  plaindre,  faim,  plein,  Men, 
rien,  pensum,  (fen,  men:s,  swen,  grdnpe,  p]£n:d'r,  fen,  p\en, 
by£?i,  ryen,  p^nsom). 

on : — rond,  contc,  nom  (ron,  kon:t,  non). 

eun : — un,  parfum,  jeun  (eun,  parf  ewn,  jeun}. 

When  there  is  a  liaison,  some  speakers  denazalise  these 
vowels  altogether,  and  they  always  lose  more  or  less  of  their 
nasality. 

It  may  be  worth  noting  that  some  of  the  French  nasal  vowels  differ 
from  the  oral  vowels  on  which  they  are  based  in  being  more  open.  En 
at  least  is  unquestionably  more  open  than  e.  My  own  observations  led 
me  to  conclude  that  it  was  the  English  te  nasalized,  before  I  had  studied 
any  books  on  French  phonetics,  and  it  still  seems  to  me  nearer  to  this 
sound  than  to  the  French  e.  But  on  is  hardly  as  open  as  o  in  homme. 
Perhaps,  though  pretty  nearly  on  a  level  with  this  o,  it  may  really  be 
derived  from  the  closer  o  in  drole. 

VOWELS  IN  UNACCENTED  SYLLABLES. 

There  are  three  vowels  which  occur  only  in  unaccented 
syllables  and  are  always  short.  The  most  important  of  these 
is — 

The  Natural  "Vowel  e  in  le. — E  is  called  the  French 
natural  vowel,  because  when  Frenchmen  hesitate  in  speaking 
and  simply  let  the  voice  go  on  without  attempting  to  modify  it, 
this  is  the  sound  they  utter.  It  is  not  quite  the  same  as  a  in 
villa  which  Englishmen  use  in  the  same  way,  the  French  sound 
being  a  little  closer  and  slightly  rounded.1 

There  is  not  much  difference  in  sound  between  French  eu  and 
e,  but  it  is  convenient  to  use  different  symbols  for  them,  because 
there  is  this  important  distinction,  that  eu  may  be  long  and 
accented,  whilst  e  is  always  unaccented  and  short,  and  is  also 
very  often  elided. 

1  F.  Beyer  says  that  it  is  closer  than  eu  in  peur,  but  not  so  close  as  eu 
in  peu,  and  this  appears  to  me  to  be  correct. 


132  French  Analysis. 

Examples  of  e: — je,  me,  le,  de,  nc,  degrc",faisant,faisons, 
faisais,  (fezan,  fezo?i,  feze). 

Two  other  unaccented  Vowels. — There  are  two  other 
vowels  occurring  in  unaccented  syllables  only,  namely  one  in- 
termediate between  e  and  e,  e.g.  in  maison,  which  is  not  pre- 
cisely —  mezon  or  mezo?i,  and  another  which  is  between  o  and  6, 
e.g.  in  comment  (koman  or  komaw).  There  is  no  need  to  use 
special  symbols  for  these  sounds.  They  can  be  represented  by 
the  characters  e  and  o  in  a  work  which  does  not  aim  at  making 
minute  distinctions.  These  vowels  are  always  short. 


VIII. 

FRENCH  SYNTHESIS. 

ACCENT. 

The  French  language  differs  so  much  from  English  in  the  use 
of  accent,  i.e.  stress  or  emphasis,  that  English  students  who 
have  only  paid  attention  to  the  pronunciation  of  particular 
words,  and  not  to  the  accentuation  of  whole  sentences,  can  only 
speak  a  miserable  sort  of  English-French,  totally  different  from 
the  French  language  in  the  month  of  a  native.  Who  has  not 
heard  English  people  say  "  Parlez-vous  francais  ?  "  or"C6mment- 
vous  portez-vous  ?  "  with  a  strong  accent  on  the  first  syllable  of 
the  pi'incipal  words,  bringing  these  out  in  sharp  contrast  to  the 
remaining  syllables,  utterly  regardless  of  French  habits  of 
accentuation  ? 

The  first  point  to  be  observed  with  regard  to  accent  in  French 
is  that  there  is  no  such  well-marked  contrast  between  accented 
and  unaccented  syllables  as  we  find  in  English  and  in  German. 
Dr.  Abbott  in  his  Hints  on  Home  Teaching  goes  so  far  as  to  say 
that  there  is  equal  stress  on  all  the  syllables ;  and  although  this 
is  an  exaggeration,  it  must  be  confessed  that  Frenchmen  are  not 
all  agreed  among  themselves  as  to  where  the  stress  should  fall. 
But  happily  there  is  not  much  difference  of  opinion  among  the 
leading  phoneticians. 

Beginners  must  then  be  frequently  reminded  that  in  French 
the  syllables  should  be  all  perfectly  clear  and  distinct,  like  a 
row  of  pearls  on  a  string,  not  weak  and  confused,  with  a  few 
syllables  coming  into  prominence  here  and  there.  This  remark, 
which  applies  to  the  spoken  language,  must  not,  however,  be 
understood  to  mean  that  everything  which  appears  as  a  syllable 
in  the  ordinary  spelling  is  to  be  clearly  pronounced  as  such.  In 
the  spoken  language  the  vowel  e  very  frequently  disappears, 

133 


134  French  Synthesis. 

petit  is  pronounced  pti,  or  if  a  vowel  follows,  ptit,  and  in  je  ne 
sais  pas  the  vowel  of  ne  is  lost,  and  so  on.  And  in  all  such 
cases  the  syllable  is  lost  also,  for  French  has  no  syllabic  conso- 
nants like  English,  1%  m%  n'  in  "  troubZe,"  "criticism,"  "open." 

The  French  accent  laws  differ  also  from  the  English  in  these 
particulars : — 

(a)  The  syllables  which  bear  the  accent  or  stress  are  not 
necessarily  the  same  as  those  on  which  the  voice  is  raised  to  a 
higher  pitch.  This  has  occasioned  some  difficulty  in  ascertain- 
ing where  the  accent  really  does  fall. 

(6)  The  accent,  as  a  general  rule,  is  not  logical,  that  is,  it  does 
not  serve  to  distinguish  the  principal  words  in  the  sentence. 

The  rule  which  governs  French  accentuation  is  a  very  simple 
one,  and  soon  stated,  but  it  requires  great  attention  on  the  part 
of  English  people  to  carry  it  out  in  practice.  It  is  as  follows : — 

Rule  for  French  Accentuation.  The  accent  falls  on 
the  last  syllable  of  each  sentence  or  breath-group  ;  and  if  the 
breath-group  is  a  long  one,  it  is  broken  up,  at  the  discretion  of 
the  speaker,  into  several  accent-groups,  each  one  of  which  ends 
with  an  accented  syllable. 

So  in  the  two  phrases  given  above — "  Roman  vou  porte  vou?" 
and  "  Parle  vou  franse  ?  " — the  last  syllable  of  each  phrase 
should  have  the  stress,  whilst  the  other  syllables  are  made  as 
equal  as  possible. 

The  following  sentence,  taken  from  M.  Passy's  Le  Frangais 
Parld,  shows  how  longer  sentences  are  broken  up  into  accent- 
groups,    the    last  syllable   of   each   group  bearing  the  accent : 
"  S  etet  eun  om  ]  de  ho:t  nesoms,  |  don  1  ion  \  n  ete  pa  move,  | 
me  ky  ete  |  korowpu  I  par  la  vanite  j  e  par  la  moles." 

The  most  important  exception  to  this  rule  is  that  when  the 
last  syllable  has  the  vowel  e,  the  accent  falls  on  the  preceding 
syllable. 

It  should  be  observed  also  that  a  logical  accent  is  occasionally 
used  in  French  as  in  English,  to  mark  an  antithesis.  F.  Beyer 
gives  as  examples,  "  donncr  et  pardonner  "  ;  " payina  n'est  pas 
le,  mais  la  page  en  fran9ais." 

Secondary  Accents  are  met  with  in  words  where  the 
final  vowel  which  bears  the  principal  accent  is  immediately 


Quantity.  135 

preceded  by  a  long  vowel.  This  long  vowel  then  becomes  half 
long,  and  takes  a  secondary  accent.  Exx.,  baron,  bclton, 
chdteau,  passer,  raison,  and  words  ending  in  -asion,  -ation, 
-fission,  and  -ision. 

The  Accents  in  Poetry.  It  is  evident  that  French 
poetry  cannot  be  scanned  like  English  poetry.  Theoretically, 
there  is  a  fixed  number  of  syllables  in  each  line,  but  in  point  of 
fact  these  syllables  are  not  all  heard,  many  of  the  final  syllables 
in  e  being  omitted,  though  the  readers  sometimes  fancy  that 
they  scrupulously  pronounce  them  according  to  rule.  There  are 
different  theories  as  to  the  principle  of  rhythm  observed  in 
French  poetry.  M.  Passy's  theory  is  that  although  the  number 
of  syllables  is  variable,  there  is  a  fixed  number  of  accent-groups 
in  each  line,  and  the  division  of  the  lines  into  accent-groups  is 
shown  in  the  specimens  of  poetry  in  M.  Passy's  Les  Sons  du 
Frangais  and  Le  Frangais  Parle. 

QUANTITY. 

Here  again  we  are  met  by  the  difficulty  that  phoneticians  are 
not  all  agreed  as  to  the  laws  of  quantity  in  the  French  lan- 
guage. And  certainly  the  differences  of  quantity  or  length, 
like  those  of  accent,  are  not  so  clearly  marked  in  the  French 
language  as  they  are  in  English  and  German.  Moreover  the 
dialects  of  French  differ  as  to  the  length  of  certain  syllables, 
e.g.  the  first  syllables  of  beaucoup  and  comment.  It  is  in 
accented  syllables  that  the  difference  between  long  and  short 
vowels  is  most  apparent,  and  that  there  is  a  general  agreement 
in  the  uses  of  the  various  dialects. 

As  regards  quantity,  French  vowels  may  be  divided  into  three 
classes. 

Class  I.  Two  vowels  which  are  always  short : — e  and  e. 

Class  II.  Seven  vowels: — a,  6,  eu,  an,  en,  on,  eun,  which 
are  more  frequently  long  than  any  others,  and  may  be  called 
long  by  nature.  Note  that  these  consist  of  the  three  which,  in 
this  scheme,  are  marked  with  a  circumflex,  and  the  four  nasal 
vowels. 

Class  III.  The  remaining  seven  vowels : — a,  e,  i,  o,  ou, 
eu,  u. 


136  French  Synthesis. 

As  regards  Class  I.,  reasons  can  be  given  why  e  and  e  are 
always  short,  namely  that  e  is  always  unaccented,  and  that, 
although  e  may  have  an  accent,  it  never  occurs  in  a  position 
where,  by  rule,  other  vowels  would  be  long,  that  is,  not  before 
a  final  consonant. 

Three  rules  concerning  quantity  apply  equally  to  the  vowels 
in  Classes  II.  and  III.  First,  all  final  vowels  are  short,  as  in 
t 6t,  pas,  joue,  vie  (to,  pa,  jou,  vi). 

Secondly,  vowels  in  accented  syllables,  followed  by  a  single 
final  consonant,  are  long,  if  that  consonant  is  r  or  one  of  the 
soft  continuants.  Exx.,  cave,  ruse,  cage,  travail,  soleil,  rare, 
(ka:v,  ru:z,  ka:j,  trava:y,  sole:y,  ra:r,  or  ra:r). 

And  thirdly,  all  vowels  are  generally  long  when  they  occur, 
followed  by  a  consonant,  in  the  final  syllables  of  words  borrowed 
from  foreign  languages.  Exx. : — iris  (iri:s),  blocus  (bloku:s), 
Minos  (Minors). 

Liaison  does  not  lengthen  a  vowel,  apparently  because  the 
consonant  is  pronounced  as  though  it  belonged  to  the  following 
word :  il  n'est  pas  id,  (inepa  zisi). 

The  vowels  in  Class  II. — a,  6,  eu,  and  the  nasal  vowels — 
when  accented  and  followed  by  any  one  or  two  consonants,  are 
long : — cdte,  passe,  jeune,  fonte,  pente,  pdtre,  apotre  (ko:t, 
pa:s,  jeu:n,  fon:t,  pan:t,  pa:t'r,  apo:t'r).  Exceptions  in  the  case 
of  a  : — froide,  froisse,  paroisse  (frwad,  frwas,  parwas). 

Here  again  vowels  are  not  lengthened  by  liaison  :  tant  et 
plus  (tan  teplus). 

The  vowels  in  Class  III. — a,  e,  i,  o,  ou,  eu,  u— followed 
by  any  consonant  other  than  a  soft  continuant  or  r,  may  be 
long  or  short,  but  they  are  most  frequently  short.  One  only, 
namely  e,  may  be  indifferently  long  or  short  in  such  a  position. 
Exx. :— metre  (met'r),  maitre  (me:t'r) ;  sainc  (sen),  Seine 
(se:n)  ;  rcnne  (ren),  reinc  (re:n) ;  tctte  (tet),  tete  (te:t). 

It  is  worth  noting  also  that  the  vowels  in  tons  (tou:s),  botte 
(bwa:t),  serve  to  distinguish  these  words  from  toussc  (tous), 
boitc  (bwat). 

In  unaccented  syllables,  long  vowels  generally  become  half 
long,  and  as  a  rule  their  length  can  then  be  left  unmarked,  but 
it  is  worth  while  to  distinguish  the  half-long  vowels  in  the 


Intonation.     Syllables.  137 

participles   tirant  (ti:ran),  couvant  (kou:van),  from  the   short 
ones  in  the  substantives  tyran  (tiran),  convent  (kouvan). 

INTONATION. 

We  have  seen  that  French  syllables  differ  but  slightly  from 
one  another  in  accent  and  quantity.  And  yet  the  effect  of 
spoken  French  is  not  monotonous,  owing  to  the  well-marked 
modulations  of  the  voice.  English  students,  and  those  of  other 
nations  also,  find  the  French  intonation  extremely  difficult  to 
imitate,  so  that  it  is  often  the  one  thing  wanting  to  those  who, 
in  other  respects,  pronounce  French  almost  like  a  native.  And 
unfortunately  but  little  can  be  done  by  means  of  symbols  ta. 
show  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  voice. 

The  chief  points  of  contrast  to  be  observed  between  the 
English  and  French  systems  of  modulation  are  these  : — 

(1)  In  French  the  voice  rises  and  falls  through  much  larger 
intervals  than  in  English,  producing  a  greater  contrast  between 
the  high  and  low  syllables. 

(2)  Whereas  in  English,  sentences  which  are  not  interroga- 
tive fall  at  the  close,  French  sentences  often,  and  indeed  most 
frequently,  rise  at  the  end,  even  when    they  are   not   inter- 
rogative, in  a  manner  which  sounds  very  strange  to  English 
ears. 

(3)  The  English  rule  that   accented   syllables  rise  in   pitch 
does  not  prevail  in  French,  where  a  syllable  may  rise  without 
being  accented,  or  be  accented  without  rising.    This  fact  is  said 
to  be  the  explanation  of  the  difference  of  opinion  concerning 
the  accent  in  French,  those  syllables  which  are  higher  in  pitch 
appearing  to  be  accented  when  this  really  is  not  the  case. 

SYLLABLES. 

We  have  seen  that  in  English  a  consonant  may  sometimes 
form  the  nucleus  of  a  syllable,  as  in  troubles,  opened  (troebl'z, 
owpn'd),  where  1  and  n  are  syllabic.  But  in  French  there  are 
no  syllabic  consonants,  and  every  syllable  must  have  a  vowel. 
And  as  there  are  no  diphthongs  in  French,  the  rule  is  that  there 
are  as  many  syllables  as  there  are  voicels. 


138  French  Synthesis. 

Such  combinations  as  wi,  wa,  wan,  ya,  ye,  etc.,  are  indeed 
sometimes  reckoned  as  diphthongs,  but  the  first  sound  in  each  of 
them  is  generally  pronounced  as  a  consonant.  M.  Passy  at  least 
reckons  them  as  such,  and  lays  down  the  rule  that  the  number 
of  vowels  and  of  syllables  is  the  same. 

Syllable  Division.  In  French,  as  many  consonants  as 
possible  are  joined  with  the  vowel  that  follows,  and  this  rule 
holds  good  when  final  consonants  are  followed  by  a  vowel  in  the 
next  word.  The  syllables  are  divided  quite  irrespectively  of 
word  division.  Exx. : — tapis,  cadeau,  tableau,  insensibility,  quel 
dgea-t-il?  are  divided  thus:—"  ta-pi,"  "  ka-do,"  "  ta-blo,"  "  en- 
san-si-bi-li-te,"  "  ke-la-ja-til  ?  " 

This  French  habit  is  very  confusing  to  foreigners,  for  the 
words  all  run  into  one  another,  so  that  it  is  impossible  for  the 
ear  to  detect  where  one  word  ends  and  another  begins.  In  Eng- 
lish, on  the  other  hand,  a  new  word  almost  always  begins  a  new 
syllable. 

Open  Syllables.  It  follows  from  the  rule  for  syllable  divi- 
sion that  French  syllables  are  almost  always  open,  that  is,  they 
end  in  a  vowel.  The  vowel  e  never  occurs  in  close  syllables ;  so 
although  it  is  heard  in  fai  (je),  it  is  changed  to  e  in  ai-je  (ej). 
The  French  Academy  have  recognised  this  law  by  altering 
college,  sidgc,  in  the  last  edition  of  their  dictionary,  to  college, 
siege. 

LIAISON. 

As  in  French  open  syllables  are  preferred,  and  combinations 
of  consonants  are  avoided,  many  final  consonants  which  were 
formerly  pronounced,  are  now  silent,  unless  a  vowel  follows  in 
the  next  word.  And  when  such  final  consonants  are  sounded, 
there  is  said  to  be  a  <l  liaison."  Cp.  les  chcvaux  (le  chvo),  un 
grand  chien  (cun  gran  cbydn)  with  les  homines  (lez  om),  un 
grand  homme  (eun  grant  om). 

We  have  parallel  cases  in  English,  as  the  n  of  an  is  never  used  un- 
less a  vowel  follows,  and  it  is  only  before  a  vowel  in  the  next  word  that 
final  r  is  ever  heard. 

Observe  the  change  of  consonants  in  ("lez  om,"  "eun  grant 
om  "),  neuf  heures  (neuv  eu:r),  un  sang  impur  (cun  sank  £?ipu:r) 


Elision.  139 

s  and  f  being  changed  to  z  and  v,  and  d  and  g  to  t  and  k  re- 
spectively. The  rule  is  that  in  liaison  continuants  become  soft, 
and  stops  become  hard. 

Many  more  liaisons  are  made  in  careful  reading  than  in  ordi- 
nary speech.  It  is  very  difficult  for  foreigners  to  know  when 
to  make  a  liaison.  The  following  rules  are  from  Mr.  Beuze- 
maker's  French  and  German  Journal,  very  slightly  modified 
by  M.  Passy.  They  apply  to  colloquial  French. 

The  liaison  should  be  used  before  vowels : — 

1.  Between  articles  and  their  nouns  : — "  Lez  arb'r." 

2.  Between  nouns  and  preceding  adjectives  : — "  voz  anfcm," 
"  se  movez  ekolye."     But  when  the  adjective  follows  the  noun, 
it  is  not  used  in  ordinary  speech : — "eim  gou  orib'l,"  in  elevated 
style,  "  eun  gout  orib'l." 

3.  Between   numerals    and   their   nouns  : — "  diz  om,"  "  vent 
ardwaz." 

4.  Between  pronouns  and  verbs: — "  i(l)  vouz  on  done." 

5.  Between  verbs  and  pronouns: — "  partet  i  (1),"    "dit  el," 
"  prenez  cm." 

6.  Between  adverbs  and  adjectives  or  verbs : — "  trez  aktif," 
11  pluz  okupe." 

7.  Between  prepositions  and  their  complement : — "  chez  el," 
"scrnz  e(k)skuz." 

8.  Between  the  words,  est,  il,  Us  and  a  following  vowel  : — "  il 
et  isi,"  "  iz  on  peur." 

Observe  that  il  and  Us  are  sounded  i  before  a  consonant,  and 
il,  iz,  before  a  vowel. 

Monosyllables  are  oftener  tied  than  longer  words  : — "  trez  en- 
portan,"  but  "  ase,"  or  "  asez  enportan  "  ;  and  that  when  the  first 
word  already  ends  with  a  consonant,  the  liaison  is  generally 
omitted  : — "  anver  el." 

ELISION. 

There  are  some  few  cases  in  which  elision  is  recognised  in  the 
ordinary  French  spelling,  le  and  de  being  written  V  and  tZ'  before 
vowels,  as  in  V enfant,  un  vcrre  d'eau.  But  elisions  are  far  more 
frequent  than  the  spelling  would  lead  us  to  suppose. 

The  only  sound  which  is  elided  is  e,  and  this  usually  disap- 


140  French  Synthesis. 

pears  whenever  it  can  be  omitted  without  bringing  too  many  con- 
sonants together.  Examples  of  its  disappearance  in  the  middle 
of  a  word  are  : — petit  (pti),  second  (zgon),  mesure  (mzu:r),  de- 
main  (dnmi).  In  an  elevated  style  it  is  not  so  often  omitted  as 
in  colloquial  French. 

As  a  general  rule,  three  consonants  cannot  come  together  in 
French  without  e  intervening,  but  M.  Passy  observes  that  this 
rule  has  exceptions.  He  says  :  "When  the  third  consonant  is 
one  of  the  following — 1,  r,  w,  u,  y,  which  may  be  called  vowel- 
like  consonants, — three  consonants  are  quite  natural :  "  Madam 
Blem,"  "  kat  pkmsh,"  "  pom  kztit."  In  some  cases  where  the  first 
consonant  is  one  of  these  five,  it  is  the  same  :  "  eunn  ark-bout- 
an  ";  indeed,  in  this  way  four  consonants  may  be  allowed  :  "  sa 
marsh  byen."  Forms  such  as  "  opstine,"  "  un  bel  statu,"  "  un 
grand  statu,"  were  originally  artificial  (popularly  "  ostine,"  "un 
bel  estatu  "),  but  are  now  quite  natural  to  educated  people. 

The  use  of  e  to  avoid  awkward  combinations  of  consonants  is 
not  limited  to  those  words  in  which  it  is  written.  It  may  be 
heard,  for  instance,  after  arc  in  the  phrase  Varc  de  triomphe, 
and  after  est  in  Vest  de  la  France. 

How  STOPS  ARE  COMBINED. 

It  is  important  to  observe  the  different  way  in  which  the 
stops  are  combined  in  English  and  in  French.  We  have  noticed 
on  p.  63  how  in  English,  when  a  stop  is  followed  by  another 
stop,  or  by  a  liquid,  as  in  "  active,  bacon  (sektiv,  beykn').  the 
first  consonant  is  implosive  and  not  explosive,  that  is,  it  is  heard 
only  in  the  act  of  shutting.  But  if  the  French  actif  (aktif) 
were  pronounced  in  this  way,  a  Frenchman  would  fail  to  hear 
the  k.  In  such  cases  there  should  be  a  slight  explosion,  with  a 
little  escape  of  breath  between  the  two  consonants. 

VARIATIONS  OF  WORDS  ENDING  IN  VOICELESS  M,  I;,  OR  R. 

We  have  seen  already  (pp.  121f .,  124)  that  some  French  words 
end  with  voiceless  m,  1,  or  r,  when  not  followed  by  another  word 
in  the  same  breath-group.  But  these  words  have  the  provoking 
habit  of  going  through  a  good  many  variations  under  different 


Final  M,  L,  and  R.  141 

circumstances.  M.  Passy  writes  to  me  that  they  are  "une 
veritable  scie."  They  are  the  words  commonly  spelt  with 
the  endings  -le,  -re,  -me,  preceded  by  a  consonant,  such  as 
peuple,  table,  spectacle,  souffle,  propre,  arbre,  autre,  tendre,  livre, 
souffre,  rhumatisme. 

All  such  words  have  three  different  forms,  and  some  have  four, 
according  to  their  position  in  the  sentence.  Speaking  generally, 
the  terminations  of  these  words  are  : — 

(1)  '1,  'r,  cm  at  the  end  of  the  breath-group. 

(2)  1,  r,  in  before  a  vowel. 

(3)  le,  re,  me  before  a  consonant,  or  else 

(4)  1  and  r  are  altogether  dropped  before  a  consonant. 
When  English  people  are  in  doubt  whether  to  use  3  or  4,  it  is 

safer  to  use  3,  and  pronounce  le  and  re  before  a  consonant. 

The  first  set  of  endings  hardly  needs  further  illustration,  as 
we  meet  with  them  whenever  a  word  of  this  class  is  isolated,  or 
at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  or  of  any  breath-group.  But  in  fami- 
liar conversation  1  and  r  are  often  dropped  altogether,  and  we 
hear  peup,  kat,  for  peup'l,  kat'r,  and  M.  Passy  says  that  in 
dogme,  he  pronounces  a  voiced  m. 

The  rule  for  the  second  set  appears  to  be  invariable,  final  m, 
1  and  r  being  always  voiced  when  followed  by  a  vowel  in  the 
next  word,  as  in  "  la  Bibl  a?itye:r,"  "  mow  po:vr  ami." 

The  perplexing  point  is  to  know  what  ending  should  be  used 
when  a  consonant  follows  in  the  next  word.  The  general  rule 
is  to  have  voiced  m,  1  or  r  followed  by  the  obscure  vowel  e, 
so  as  to  prevent  three  or  more  consonants  coming  together,  as  in 
"  rumatisme  kronik,"  "  sa  propre  lan:g,"  "  table  d  6:t,"  but  there 
are  many  exceptions.  In  this  position  m  is  not  liable  to  be 


dropped  altogether  by  people  who  pronounce 
pris,  rumatis,  etc.,  are  often  vulgarly  used  ;  b 
pride  themselves  on  speaking  correctly  often 
more  frequently  r,  in  familiar  conversation,  e.g 


;arefully,  though 
it  even  those  who 
drop  1,  and  still 
in" kat  person," 


"  not  tab'l,"  "  pov  garso?i !  "  "  pour  prcmd  kcwja"  In  compounds 
such  as  "  met  d  otel,"  "  eun  kat  plas,"  r  is  invariably  dropped. 
There  is  also  a  third  form  in  use  before  a  consonant,  voiceless 
m,  1  and  r  being  sometimes  used  in  this  position. 

M.  Passy  observes  that  some  French  people  use  syllabic  1 


142  French  Synthesis. 

at  the  end  of  a  breath-group,  or  before  a  consonant,  but  he  con- 
siders this  abnormal.  When  we  anglicize  such  an  expression 
as  table  d'  Jiotc,  syllabic  1  is,  of  course,  quite  allowable,  and  it 
would  be  affectation  to  try  to  avoid  it,  but  it  ought  not  to  be 
used  in  speaking  French. 


GERMAN  ANALYSIS. 

The  sotinds  of  German  are  easier  to  master  than  those  of 
French,  partly  because  they  are  more  like  English  sounds,  and 
partly  because  the  spelling  is  more  regular,  and  consequently  a 
better  guide  to  the  pronunciation.  And  if  French  has  already 
been  acquired,  some  of  those  sounds  which  do  not  occur  in 
English  will  have  been  learnt  already. 

STANDARD  GERMAN. 

The  great  differences  in  pronunciation  between  the  natives  of 
different  parts  of  Germany  must  be  obvious  to  every  one.  It  has 
been  usual  for  English  people  to  accept  the  pronunciation  of 
Hanover  as  the  best  German,  but  the  Germans  themselves  are 
of  a  different  opinion,  and  ridicule  the  Hanoverians  for  their 
provincialisms.  But  although  provincialisms  are  to  be  met 
with  in  all  parts  of  Germany,  there  is  happily  a  pretty  general 
consensus  of  opinion  as  to  what  is  the  best  German.  It  is 
the  language  of  the  stage,  that  is  the  pronunciation  of  north 
Germany,  free  from  provincialisms,  which  may  be  accepted  as 
standard  German,  and  this  it  is  which  all  foreigners  should 
try  to  acquire. 

There  are  indeed  some  few  points  which  may  be  regarded  as 
open  questions,  and  Prof.  Vietor,  whose  pronunciation  I  have 
followed  throughout,  accordingly  gives  some  alternative  forms, 
shown  in  the  foot-notes  to  the  specimens  of  German.  These 
forms  are  what  I  myself  use,  and  they  will  be  found  easier  for 
English  pupils  than  those  given  in  the  text. 

143 


144 


German  Analysis. 


D      d 

K       k,  ck,  ch,  q,  c 


GERMAN  CONSONANTS  ILLUSTRATED. 

Symbols.  Examples. 

P       p,  pp,  b  Paar  (pahr),  "  pair  "  ;  Rappe  (rape), 

"  black  horse  "  ;  ab  ('op),  "  off." 

B       b  Bahn  (bahn),  "  track,"  "  railway." 

T       t,  tt,  th,  d,  dt        Tau,  (tau),  "  rope  "  ;  fett  (fet),  "  fat "  ; 

Thai  (tahl),  "valley"  ;  Hand 
(hant),  "hand";  Stadt  (shtat), 
"  town." 

du  (duh),  "  thou." 

Kahl    (kahl),    "bald";    dick     (dik), 
"thick";    Achse     ('akse),  "axle"; 
Quelle  (kvfile),  "well,"  "spring"; 
Cognac  (konjak),  "  cognac." 
G       g  gut      (guht),       "  good " ;       vergehen 

(ftirgehen),  "  pass  away." 

No  symbol  used         all    ('al),   "  all "  ;   uberall  ('ilhber'al), 
"  everywhere  "  ;  abirren   (ap'iren), 
swerve. 
M      m,  inni  mir  (mihr),  "to  me";  Lamm  (lam), 

"  lamb." 
N       n,  nn  nie    (nih),    "  never " ;  Mann     (man), 

"man." 
NG    ng,  n  singen  (zingen),  "sing"  ;  lang  (lang), 

long  ;  Dank  (dangk),  "  thanks." 
L       1,  II  lahm    (lahm),    "  lame " ;    voll    (fol), 

"  full." 
R  or  R2     r,  rr  rauh    (rau),    "  rough "  ;    Narr    (nar), 

"  fool." 
W     (not  =  Eng.  «•)  used  by  some  Germans  instead  of  v  in 

w,  u  schwcr     (shicchr),     "heavy";     quer 

(kwehr\  "  crosswise." 
Fall    (fal\     "fall":    Scliiff    (shif), 

"  ship  "  ;  vicl  (fihl),  "  much." 
u-ohl   (vohl),   "  well  "  ;  Qual    (kvahl), 

"  torture." 

List  (list),  "  stratagem " ;  Kasse 
(kasc),  "cash";  Fuss  (fulis), 
"  foot." 


Six  New  Consonants.  145 

S       (in  the  combinations  ts  and  ks). 

TS     z,  tz,  t,  c,  besides  Zu  (tsuh),  "  to,"  "  too  "  ;  Satz   (zats), 
ts,  tss,  etc.  "  sentence  "  ;     Nation      (natsidhri), 

"  nation  "  ;  cis  (tsis\  "  C  sharp." 

KS    x,  besides  ks,  chs,  Axt  ('akst\  "  axe." 
etc. 

Z       s  so  (zoh\  "  so." 

SH    sch,  s  scharf  (sharf),  "  sharp  "  ;     sprechen 

(shpragheri),  "  speak "  ;  stehen 
(shteheri),  "  stand." 

ZH  j,  g,  ge  Journal       (zhurnahT),       "journal"; 

Logis  (lohzhih\  "  lodging  "  ;  Ser- 
geant (zarzhdnt),  "  sergeant." 

C       ch,  g.  ich  ('zp),  "I";  soZc/i  (zolc\  "such"; 

Sieg  (zihg\  "victory";  Berg 
(bar$\  "  mountain." 

J       (Eng.  y),  j,  I,  g        ja(jah\  "  yes  " ;  Familie  (famihlje), 

"family";  Siege  (zihje\  "vic- 
tories"; Berge  (barje\  "moun- 
tains "  ;  regnen,  (rehjneri),  "  rain." 

CH    (not  =  Eng.  eft),          ach     (ach\    "ah";     Buch     (buhch\ 
ch,  g  "book";     Tag      (tdhcli),     "day"; 

zog  (tsohcti),  "  drew  "  (sing.). 

Q       g  Tage       (tahqc\      "  days " ;        zog  en 

(tsohqen),  "  drew  "  (plur.). 

H      h  Hand  (hant},  "  hand." 

This   list   gives  only  the  symbols  which   occur  in  German 

words,   and   those   used    for   the    foreign    sound    zh.      Other 

symbols,  used  in  loan-words  borrowed  from  French  and  other 

languages,  are  given  in  Dr.  Victor's   German  Pronunciation, 

but  this  simpler  list  may  be  useful  in  teaching  children,  who 

ought  not,  at  first,  to  be  troubled  with  exceptions. 

Six  NEW  CONSONANTS. 

Most  of  the  German  consonants  are  identical  with,  or  very 
similar  to,  those  used  in  English,  but  there  are  six  new  conso- 
nants, namely  :  ('),  r2,  w,  £,  ch,  q.  We  shall  see,  however, 
that  of  these,  three  are  really  superfluous,  so  that  English 

I.  P.  L 


146  German  Analysis. 

students  need  only  learn  to  pronounce  the  three  following : — 
('),  c,  ch. 

The  Glottal  Stop,  for  which  we  use  the  symbol  ('),  is 
formed  by  bringing  the  vocal  chords  together,  so  as  to  close 
the  glottis,  and  then  suddenly  opening  them  with  an  explosion, 
as  is  done  in  coughing  or  clearing  the  throat.  It  is  not  a  sound 
difficult  to  produce,  but  as  it  is  not  ordinarily  written,  Germans 
and  others  who  have  not  studied  phonetics,  generally  fail  to 
observe  it.  A  German  master  told  me  that  when  he  repeated 
the  vowels  to  classes  of  English  children,  they  always  laughed, 
and  he  was  puzzled  by  this  until  it  was  pointed  out  to  him  that 
in  so  doing  he  sounded  an  emphatic  glottal  stop  before  each 
vowel,  producing  an  effect  very  strange  to  English  ears. 

Students  must  be  very  careful  not  to  forget  to  pronounce  this 
consonant.  It  occurs  before  all  initial  vowels,  as  well  as  in  the 
second  part  of  compounds  like  iiberall,  abirren.  But  in  com- 
pounds which  are  no  longer  felt  to  be  such,  like  allein,  daraus, 
heraus,  hinaus,  it  is  omitted,  as  also  in  phrases  where  little 
words  are  closely  connected  with  the  preceding  word,  and  con- 
sequently unaccented,  e.g.  in  "  will  ich,"  "  hat  er,"  "  muss  es." 

R2.  This  guttural  r,  formed  with  the  back  of  the  tongue  and 
the  uvula,  is  the  same  as  the  r  generally  used  in  Paris,  and 
has  been  discussed  on  p.  123.  Many  Germans  have  substituted 
it  for  the  r  formed  with  the  point  of  the  tongue,  and  the  use 
of  it  is  spreading  in  Germany ;  but  it  is  not  as  yet  heard  in 
the  best  German,  and  there  are  some  Germans  who  omit  final 
r  altogether,  substituting  for  it  some  sort  of  vowel  sound. 
This  also  is  a  practice  to  be  avoided. 

The  Simple  Up  Continuant  IF,  This  again  is  a  sound 
which  it  is  not  necessary  to  use  in  German,  as  it  is  a  substitute 
for  v,  and  though  frequent,  is  by  no  means  universal  amongst 
careful  speakers.  It  is  heard  in  the  combinations  written  schic, 
qu,  and  zic:  e.g.  in  schicer,  quer,  and  zwci,  and  pronounced  either 
(slut>,  kw?,  tsw)  or  (shv,  kv,  tsv).  It  is  not  a  difficult  sound  to 
pronounce,  being  formed  by  simply  bringing  the  lips  together, 
without  rounding  them  or  raising  the  back  of  the  tongue,  as  is 
done  in  pronouncing  English  w.  It  differs  also  from  English 
w  in  bein£  very  often  voiceless. 


Familiar  Consonants.  147 

The  reason  for  drawing  attention  to  this  sound  is  that  it  may 
easily  be  mistaken  for  English  w,  which  ought  never  to  be 
substituted  for  it.  German  Q.uell  must  be  distinguished  from 
English  quell.  It  is  best  to  pronounce  v  (1)  wherever  w  is 
written,  and  (2)  where  u  is  found  in  the  combination  qu. 

The  corresponding  voiced  sound  is  used  in  South  Germany,. 
e.g.  in  the  word  Wesen. 

The  Palatal  Continuant  C,  commonly  called  the  ich 
sound,  is  quite  distinct  from  the<back  continuant  ch,  called  the 
ach  sound.  It  is  sometimes  heard  in  English  hue,  and  we  have 
met  with  it  in  French  pied,  where  the  sign  used  for  it  was  'y 
(see  p.  125).  In  some  combinations  it  is  difficult  to  pronounce, 
especially  after  r,  as  in  the  words  durch  and  FurcM. 

C  always  occurs  after  a  front  vowel  or  a  consonant,  except  in 
a  few  foreign  words,  such  as  Charon. 

There  are  some  instances  in  which  it  may  be  questioned 
whether  c,  or  k  should  be  used,  namely,  those  in  which  g  final 
is  written  after  a  front  vowel  or  a  consonant.  But  Prof.  Victor 
says  that  two-thirds  of  German  speakers  use  c.  in  such  cases, 
and  that  in  the  termination  -ig,  as  in  Konig,  the  c,  sound  is 
almost  universal. 

Except  the  termination  -ig,  the  case  is  quite  analogous  to 
that  of  medial  g ;  that  is  to  say?  either  £  or  k  may  be  used. 
But  ik  for  -ig  final  is  quite  a  provincialism. 

The  Back  Continuant  CH.  This  consonant,  the  so- 
called  ach  sound,  may  be  heard  in  the  Scotch  loch.  Like  uw, 
it  is  formed  with  the  back  of  the  tongue  approaching  the  soft 
palate.  It  occurs  only  after  back  vowels. 

The  Voiced  Back  Continuant  Q,.  This  differs  from 
the  last  sound  only  in  being  voiced.  It  is  somewhat  difficult 
to  pronounce,  but  it  is  always  allowable  to  use  g  in  its  place. 
It  occurs  only  after  back  vowels,  and  is  always  medial,  as  in 
Wagen,  Bogen. 

FAMILIAR  CONSONANTS. 

A  few  points  concerning  these  demand  our  attention,  for  some 
of  them  differ  in  formation  or  in  use  from  our  English  con- 
sonants. 

The  Point  Consonants  T,  B,  ]tf,  L,,  SB,  R  are  some- 


148  German  Analysis. 

what  different  from  the  corresponding  sounds  in  English. 
German  t,  d,  n,  1  ,are  formed  with  the  point  of  the  tongue 
only,  whilst  in  English  t,  d,  n  the  blade,  or  part  immediately 
behind  the  point,  seems  to  be  raised  also  ;  and  in  forming  Eng- 
lish 1  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  raised  as  well  as  the  point.  So 
students  must  endeavour  to  use  the  point  only  in  forming  all 
these  consonants. 

German  sh  is  formed,  Prof.  Vietor  says,  by  a  broad  stream 
of  breath  passing  between  the  teeth,  whilst  the  lips  are  some- 
what protruded:  but  in  English  sh  the  lips  are  not  protruded, 
and  the  blade  of  the  tongue  is  made  to  approach  the  hard 
palate,  leaving  a  central  channel  for  the  -breath. 

It  is  usual  in  Hanover,  and  in  some  other  parts  of  Germany, 
to  substitute  s  for  sh  in  words  beginning  with  the  written 
symbols  sp  and  st,  such  as  sprcchen,  stehen  •  but  this  is  a 
mistaken  attempt  to  follow  the  spelling,  and  ought  not  to  be 
imitated. 

It,  in  German  is  more  distinctly  trilled  than  in  English,  and 
in  the  best  German  it  does  not  lengthen,  or  modify  in  any  way, 
the  vowels  which  precede  it.  It  is  difficult  for  English  people 
to  pronounce  it  when  final  or  followed  by  a  consonant ;  and  the 
worst  mistakes  of  English  students  of  German  are  generally 
due  to  their  habits  of  omitting  it,  and  allowing  it  to  modify 
preceding  vowels  in  their  own  language  (see  pp.  57  f.). 

H  is  always  pronounced.  Illiterate  speakers  do  not  drop 
it  as  they  do  in  England. 

Final  Consonants  are  hard.  The  only  exceptions  to 
this  rule  are  the  liquids  m,  n,  ng,  1,  r.;  for  though  many 
words  are  spelt  with  final  b,  d,  g,  v,  the  sounds  heard  in  such 
cases  are  p.  t,  £  or  eh,  and  f,  as  in  ab.,  Hand,  Sieg,  Berg,  Tag, 
zog,  Moth'. 

Final  Consonants  are  Short.  It  is  very  necessary  to 
draw  the  pupils'  attention  to  this  fact ;  for  in  English,  after 
short  vowels,  final  consonants  are  lengthened,  and  to  do  the 
same  in  German  would  be  a  bad  mistake.  It  is  particularly 
important  to  avoid  lengthening  final  liqiiids.  Pronounce  the 
final  consonants  in  such  words  as  Lamm,  Mann,  lang,  Narr, 
voll  as  abruptly  as  possible. 


German  Vowels  Illustrated.  149 

GERMAN  VOWELS  ILLUSTRATED. 

Symbols.  Examples. 

ah     a,  aa,  ah          da  (dali),  "  there  "  ;  Aal  (ahl),  "  eel "  ;  nah 

(nah\  "  near," 
jili     a,  ah  sden    (zaheri),    "  sow  "' ;.    mahen    (mciheri), 

"  mow." 
eh     e,  ee,  eh          schwer  (slivehr),  "  heavy,"  u  difficult "  ;  Beet 

(beht\. "  flower-bed  "  ;  Reh  (reh\  "  roe." 
ih      i,  ie.  ih,  ieh     mir  (mihr\  "  to  me  "  ;  sie  (zih),  "  she  "  ;  ihn 

(ihn),  "  him  " ;  Viek  (flh\  "  cattle." 
oh     o,  oo,  oh          so  (zoh),  "  so  "  ;  Boot  (boht),  boat ;  roh  (roh), 

"raw,"  "rude." 

uh     u,  uh  du  (duh},  "  thou  "  ;  Kuh  (kuh\  "  cow." 

oh     6,  oh  schon  (shb'hn\  "  beautiful  "  ;   Hb'hle  (hohlc}, 

"  cave." 

uh     ii,  iih  filr  (fiihr),  "for  "  ;  kilhn  (kiihn),  "  bold." 

a       a  ah  ('ap),  "  off." 

e        e  Gebote  (gebohte),  "  commandments." 

a       e,  a  fest  (fast),  "  fast,"  "  firm "  ;  Hande  (hande), 

"hands." 

i        i,  ie  mit  (mit\  "  with " ;  vierzehn  (firtseri),  "  four- 

teen." 

0  o  ob  ('op),  "  if,"  "  whether." 
u      u                      Kunst  (kunst),  "  art." 

ii  o  Gespott  (geslipot],  "  mockery." 

u  li  Hiitte  (hute\  "  hut." 

ai  ei,  ai  Ei  (ai),  "  egg"  ;  Mai  (mai\  "may." 

au  au  AIL  (an),  "  mead,"  "  meadow." 

01  eu,  au  Heu  (hoi\   "  hay "  ;    glciiibig  (gloibig),   "  be- 

lieving." 

The  above  list  does  not  include  symbols  occurring  only  in 
loan-words.  It  should  be  observed,  however,  that  in  French 
loan-words  we  meet  with  four  nasal  vowels,  an,  en,  on,  eun, 
the  French  symbols  being  retained  in  every  case.  Exx. : — 

an  in  Chance  (shanse),  "  chance  "  ;  Trente-et-un  (tranteh  eun). 
in    ,,  Bassin  (basen),  "basin";    train  (tveri),  "baggage"  (of 
an  army) ;  plein  (plen),  "  full." 


150  German  Analysis. 

on   in  Ballon  (balon),  "  balloon." 

eun  „    Trente-et-un  (trant-eh-eww),   parfum    (par/fewn),    "  per- 
fume." 

GERMAN  VOWELS  DESCRIBED. 

The  German  vowel  scheme  shown  on  p.  xii.  should  be 
examined,  and  compared  with  the  English  and  French  schemes 
preceding  it.  We  shall  find  that  in  some  respects  the  German 
vowels  are  like  the  French,  and  that  in  others  they  resemble 
our  own ;  so  that,  to  those  who  know  the  sounds  of  English  and 
French,  the  mastery  of  the  German  vowels  will  prove  to  be  a 
matter  of  small  difficulty.  Several  of  the  English  habits  of 
speech  which  mislead  students  of  French  must  be  guarded 
against  in  German  also ;  therefore  some  of  the  warnings  given 
in  the  chapters  on  French  must  be  repeated  he.re. 

LONG  AND  SHORT  VOWELS. 

An  inspection  of  the  German  scheme  of  vowels  on  p.  xii.  will 
show  at  once  that  here,  as  in  English,  the  long  and  short  vowels 
are  distinct  from  one  another,  there  being  only  two  instances 
in  which  the  corresponding  long  and  short  vowels  are  identical 
in  sound.  And  the  difference  in  each  pair  of  corresponding 
long  and  short  vowels  is  the  same  that  we  have  noticed  in 
English ;  that  is,  the  short  vowel  is  formed  with  a  relaxed  and 
widened  tongue,  so  that  it  is  called  icidc,  and  it  is  also  de- 
ciclely  more  open  than  the  corresponding  long  vowel. 

The  correspondence  of  the  long  and  short  vowels  may  be 
shown  thus : — 

Long  and  Narrow.  Short,  Wide,  and  more  Open. 

eh  as  in  geh.  a  as  in  Hande. 

ih      ,,     ihn.  i      ,,      Sinn, 

oh      ,,     Sohn.  o      ,,     Sonne. 

uh      ,,     Kuh.  u     ,,     dumm. 

oh      ,,     Sohue.  6      ,,     ko'nnen. 

iih      „     kuhn.  u      „     diinn. 

Long.  Short  and  identical  in  soun<l. 

ah  as  in  lahm.  a  as  in  Lamm, 

ah  mahen.  a  Manner. 


Front  Vowels.  151 

The  short  vowel  a  appears  twice  in  the  above  pairs  of  vowels, 
because,  whilst  it  is  identical  in  sound  with  the  long  ah,  it  bears 
the  same  relation  to  eh  as  the  other  short  vowels  do  to  the 
long  ones  most  resembling  them. 

There  is  no  long  vowel  corresponding  with  the  short  e  in 
Gabe.  This  short  vowel  is  always  unaccented. 

But  whilst,  in  the  distinction  between  long  and  short  vowels, 
German  is  like  English  and  unlike  French,  there  are  two  points 
in  which  the  vowels  correspond  with  the  French  and  differ 
from  our  own.  For  first,  we  have  a  series  of  front-round 
vowels,  like  the  French  in  peur,  pen,  pu  /  and  secondly,  the 
German  vowels  do  not,  like  the  English,  tend  to  become  diph- 
thongs. 

OPEN  VOWELS. 

The  Open  Vowels  ah,  a,  as  in  lahm,  Lamm.  There  is 
no  difficulty  in  pronouncing  the  long  vowel  ah,  as  it  is  identical 
with  English  aa  in  father.  But  a  in  Lamm,  Mann,  etc.,  must  on 
no  account  be  made  like  English  a  in  lamb,  man,  for  the  sounds 
are  quite  different.  It  is  however  an  easier  vowel  than  French 
a  in  patte,  because  it  is  precisely  like  English  aa  in  father,  only 
shorter,  whilst  the  French  a  is,  as  we  have  seen,  intermediate 
between  aa  in  father  and  ae  in  fat. 

When  German  a  is  unaccented,  great  care  is  needed  to  avoid 
altering  the  vowel  and  making  it  like  English  a  in  villa,  servant, 
etc.  It  must  be  pronounced  quite  clearly,  as  in  Niemand 
(nihmant),  "  nobody." 

FRONT  VOWELS. 

The  Front  Vowels,  ah,  a,  eh.  The  easiest  of  these  for 
English  students  is  the  short  a,  in  Fest,  Hande,  which  is  the 
same  as  our  e  in  pet.  The  sound  must  not  be  altered  before  r, 
as  English  people  are  apt  to  do,  making  German  Herr  like 
English  her. 

German  ah,  as  in  scien,  mcihen,  corresponds  with  French  e, 
though  the  French  sound  is  more  open,  and  German  eh,  as  in 
geh,  with  French  e.  Here,  as  in  French,  our  difficulty  arises  from 
the  English  tendency  to  turn  long  vowels  into  diphthongs.  We 


152  German  Analysis. 

can  obtain  a  sound  sufficiently  near  to  the  open  ah  by  omitting 
the  final  sound  of  English  bear,  and  the  close  eh,  by  omitting  the 
i  sound  at  the  end  of  obey.  German  Reh  is  not  =  English  ray. 

The  close  German  eh  in  sehr  schwer,  will  be  found  "  sehr 
schwer,"  i.e.  very  difficult,  because  r  follows,  and  this  com- 
bination is  contrary  to  our  English  habits. 

The  Close  Front  Vowels  ih,  i.  The  short  German  i  in 
Sinn,  being  =  English  i  in  pit,  will  be  found  very  easy,  except 
in  the  position  where  all  German  vowels  are  more  or  less  diffi- 
cult, i.e.  before  r,  as  in  Hirt-  and  the  difference  between  the  long 
German  ih  in  ihn  and  English  iy  in  feet,  is  not  very  great.  It  is 
that  English  iy  begins  with  a  more  open  sound  and  gradually 
becomes  closer,  whilst  German  ih  is  equally  close  'throughout. 

Observe  that  though  German  ih  is  shortened  in  unaccented 
open  syllables,  its  quality  is  not  altered.  So  direkt  differs  from 
English  direct,  the  i  being  pronounced  like  our  short  unaccented 
iy  in  the  first  syllable  of  eternal. 

The  symbol  ie  for  short  i,  as  in  vierzehn,  is  very  rarely 
used. 

BACK-ROUND  VOWELS. 

The  Back-round  Vowels  oh,  o,  as  in  Sohn,  Sonne.  Both 
of  these  require  attention.  The  long  oh  must  not  close  with  a 
sound  of  u,  like  English  ow  in  bowl,  but  must  be  kept  un- 
changed to  the  end,  and  it  is  not  quite  like  the  first  part  of 
our  English  ow,  but  apparently  identical  with  French  6  in 
drdle.  See  p.  129. 

The  short  o  is  very  decidedly  more  close  than  English  o 
in  pot  •  it  is  nearer  to  French  o  in  homme,  but  a  little  closer 
than  the  French  o,  and  it  has  not,  like  French  o,  a  leaning 
towards  the  front-round  cu  in  peur,  but  is  clearer,  and  more 
distinctly  a  back  vowel. 

Both  oh  and  o  must  be  clearly  pronounced  before  r,  e.g.  in 
Rohr,  fort.  The  long  oh  is  peculiarly  difficult  in  this  position. 
How  distressed  my  excellent  German  mistress  was,  to  be  sure, 
at  the  ineffectual  attempts  of  her  pupils  to  pronounce  her  name, 
Fran  Flohr  !  The  pronunciations  were  many  and  various,  but 
it  was  most  frequently  pronounced  like  English  flaw. 


Front-round  and  Unaccented  Vowels.  153 

The  symbol  oo  for  long  oh  is  very  rare. 

The    Close    Back-round   Vowels    uli,    n,   as  in  Knit, 

dumm.  These  are  not  difficult,  the  short  u  being  the  same  as 
English  u  in  put,  and  the  long  uh  like  English  uw  in  pool. 
But  the  long  German  uh  is  close  and  unaltered  throughout, 
whilst  English  uw  begins  with  a  more  open  sound  and  is 
gradually  closed. 

FRONT-ROUND  VOWELS. 

The  Front-round  "Vowels  oh,  o,  as  in  Sohne,  kb'nnen. 
These  have  no  equivalent  in  English,  being  quite  distinct  from 
English  oe  in  burn,  which  comes  nearest  to  them  in  sound.  The 
long  oh  is  the  same  as  French  eu  in  peu,  except  in  the  matter 
of  length,  for  French  eu  may  be  short,  as  indeed  it  is  in  peu. 

The  short  o  is  more  like  French  eu  in  peur,  but  it  is  some- 
what closer,  and  is  always  short,  whilst  French  eu  may  be  long, 
as  it  is  in  peur. 

The  symbol  o  for  oh  is  rare. 

The  Close  Front-round  Vowels  iih,  ii,  as  in  kuhn, 
dunn.  These  also  are  missing  in  English,  but  iih  is  =  French 
u  in  pu.  except  that  it  is  always  long,  whilst  French  u  may 
be  short,  and  is  so  in  the  word  pu. 

The  short  ii  is  decidedly  more  open  than  the  long  iih,  but 
this  will  not  be  difficult  for  English  students,  as  we  are  accus- 
tomed to  make  our  short  vowels  more  open  than  the  correspond- 
ing long  ones. 

UNACCENTED  VOWELS. 

Unaccented  e.  This  mixed  vowel  is  the  natural  vowel  of 
German,  that  is  to  say,  the  vowel  uttered  by  Germans  when  they 
simply  emit  the  voice  without  any  attempt  to  modify  it.  It  is 
not  identical  either  with  the  English  natural  vowel,  unaccented 
a  in  villa,  nor  the  French  natural  vowel  e  in  Ic,  but  it  ap- 
proaches very  nearly  to  our  unaccented  a.  According  to  Dr. 
Sweet,  the  difference  is  that  German  unaccented  e  is  narrow, 
whilst  English  a  is  wide.  It  appears  to  me  that  the  German 
natural  vowel  is  also  somewhat  closer  than  the  English,  as  is 
generally  the  case  with  the  narrow  vowels  when  compared  with 


154  German  Analysis. 

the  corresponding  wide  ones.  It  differs  from  French  e  in  le  in 
not  being  rounded. 

Pronounce  German  unaccented  e  somewhat  like  a,  in  villa,  or 
c  in  silver,  not  like  y  in  silly ;  and  take  care  not  to  add  r  when 
a  vowel  follows  in  the  next  word.  English  people  are  apt  to 
do  this,  just  as  they  often  say  in  English,  "  dhi  aidiar  av  it," 
but  this  is  a  very  bad  fault. 

Other  Unaccented  Vowels.  The  other  German  vowels 
are  not  liable  to  change  their  sound  when  unaccented ;  and  as 
English  unaccented  vowels  are  usually  reduced  to  the  obscure 
sound  of  a  in  villa,  special  pains  must  be  taken  to  pronounce 
them  clearly  in  German. 

Attend  particularly  to  unaccented  a,  o  and  u,  and  do  not 
make  the  last  syllables  of  Anna,  Jacob,  Doktor,  Fokus  like 
those  of  English  Anna,  Jacob,  doctor,  focus. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

There  are  in  German  three  diphthongs,  in  all  of  which  the 
stress  is  upon  the  first  element.  They  are  as  follows : — 

Symbols.  Examples. 

ai      ei,  ai         Ei,  "  egg  "  ;  Mai,  "  May." 
au     au  Au,  "  meadow." 

oi      eu,  iiu       lieu,  "hay  ";  glaubig  (gloibic),  "believing." 

These  diphthongs  are  almost  the  same  as  the  English  ai, 
au,  oi,  in  time,  laud,  noise.  The  points  of  difference  to  be 
observed  are  : — 

(1)  In  ai  and  au  the  first  element  is  clearer.    Make  it  like  a 
in  German  Mann. 

(2)  In  oi  the   first  element  is  closer,  just  as  German  o  in 
Sonne  is  much  closer  than  English  o  in  pot.     And  the  first 
element  is  never  lengthened  as  it  sometimes  is  in  English,  e.g. 
in  oil. 

NASAL  VOWELS. 

These  are  identical  with  the  French  nasal  vowels,  see  pp.  130f., 
and  occur  only  in  French  loan-words.  We  can  use  the  italic 
symbols  an,  en,  on,  eun  to  represent  them. 


Nasal  Vowels.  155 

Germans  are  careful  to  distinguish  between  an  and  on,  whilst 
most  English  people  pronounce  them  both  alike,  as  on. 

The  nasal  vowels  are  always  long  in  German.  In  French  they 
may  be  long  or  short. 

In  North  Germany  the  nasal  vowels  are  often  omitted,  and  ong  or 
ang1  may  be  heard  instead  of  the  French  nasal  on  or  an.  But  this  is 
not  worthy  of  imitation. 


X. 


GERMAN  SYNTHESIS. 
VOWELS  FOLLOWED  BY  R. 

As  already  observed,  all  the  German  vowels  are  difficult  to 
English  students  when  they  come  before  r,  especially  the  long 
eh  and  oh,  as  in  schwer,  Ohr.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  alter 
the  sound  in  any  way,  as  we  are  apt  to  do  in  English,  where  we 
allow  the  preceding  vowel  to  become  a  diphthong,  as  in  pare, 
peer,  pore,  poor  (cp.  pale,  peel,  pole,  pool},  or  to  become  a  mixed, 
instead  of  a  clear  front  or  back,  vowelras  in  fern,  fir,  fur,  icord 
(cp.  fell,  fill,  full,  folly). 

It  will  be  found  useful  to  practise  all  the  vowels  in  succession, 
by  pronouncing  aloud  the  examples  given  below.  The  r  must  be 
distinctly  trilled  in  every  case.. 

ah     paar  eh     Pferd  oh     horen  i     irren 

„      art  ,,      Schwert  „      hort  o     fort 

„      zart  ih     mir  ith     fur  ,,     Vorteil 

ah     Bar  n      dir  ,.,      spiiren         u     Urteil 

„      Ahre  „      ihr  a     hart  ,,     durch 

eh     Ehre  oh     Ohr  ,,     wart-en         ,,     Furcht 

„      Ercle  ,,      Moor  a     Herr  o     Morder 

,,      erst  uh     Uhr  „     Herz  it     Biirde 

„      werden  ,,.      nur  i     Hirt  e     Mutter 

Diphthongs  and  Triphthongs  followed  by  R.  We 
have  observed  how,  in  English,  diphthongs  followed  by  r  are 
converted  into  triphthongs,  e.g.  in  ire,  our,  employer  (aia(r), 
au(r),  imploia(r),  pp.  v.,  5,  9.  In  German  also  we  observe  the 
same  triphthongs  occurring  before  final  r,  e.g.  Eicr  (aier), 
(<  eggs,"  Schleicr  (shlaier),  "veil,"  sazt<??-(zauer),  "sour,"  Trauer 
(trailer),  "mourning,"  Feuer  (foier),  "fire,"  teuer  (toier),  "dear." 

156 


Quantity.  157 

But  in  such  cases  the  third  element  of  the  diphthong  is  always 
written  as  e. 

We  find  however  that  when  derivative  or  inflectional  end- 
ings are  added  to  words  ending  in  auer  or  oier,  the  e  dis- 
appears, and  the  r  follows  immediately  after  the  diphthong,  as 
in  saures,  "  sour"  (neut.),  traurig,  "  mournful,"  feurig,  "fiery," 
teures,  "dear  "  (neut.).  Cp.  also  eirund  (airunt),  "oval."  When 
this  is  the  case,  be  careful  to  pass  at  once  from  the  diphthong  to 
the  trilled  r. 

QUANTITY. 

In  German,  as  in  English,  the  difference  between  long  and 
short  vowels  is  generally  clearly  marked,  though  long  vowels  are 
sometimes  reduced  to  half-long.  But  in  some  respects  the  rules 
for  quantity  differ  from  ours,  so  that  they  need  to  be  studied. 
The  rules  for  the  length  of  the  vowels  are  as  follows  : — 

1.  Vowels  are  long  at  the  end  of  words,  whether  they  are 
accented  or  not.     Exx. :  da,  Emma,  Athene,  (atehneh),  Salomo, 
Kakadu,  the  only  exceptions  being  the  final  vowel  e,  and  the 
words  na,  da,  ja  (interjections). 

2.  They  are  long  (1)  before  a  single  consonant,  i.e.  before  one 
which  is  written  as  single  in  the  ordinary  spelling,  for  when  a 
double  symbol  follows,  as  in  diinn,fett,  Wollc,  the  vowel  is  short, 
or  (2)  before  a  combination  which  can  begin  a  syllable.     Exx. : 
ihn,  fur,  schicer,  Mitra.    Observe  that  in  such  cases  the  syllables 
become  open  if  a  vowel  follows,  as  in  ih-nen,  schice-re. 

3.  They  are  seldom  long  before  combinations  of  consonants 
which  cannot  begin  a  syllable.     In  this  case  they  remain  closed 
when  another  syllable  is  added.    Exx.  of  long  vowels  before  such 
combinations  are — Mond,  Magd,  zart,  Krebs,  Pferd. 

4.  In  compound  words,  vowels  which  have  a  secondary  accent 
are   not   shortened  in  consequence.     Exx. :  Vorliebe,  ausgeben, 
Abart,  Abzug. 

5.  In  unaccented  open  syllables,  long  vowels  become  half-long 
or  even  short,  as  ih  in  Militdr  and  eh  in  Sekretar, 

In  German  spelling  the  short  vowels  are  often  indicated  by 
doubling  the  consonant  which  follows,  as  in  satt,  fullen,  and 
the  long  ones  by  adding  h,  or  doubling  the  vowel,  or  by  some 
other  device,  as  in  Mehl,  fiihlen,  Saat,  diescr. 


158  German  Synthesis. 

Mistakes  to  be  avoided.  It  may  be  useful  to  guard 
against  those  mistakes  in  the  quantity  of  the  vowels  to  which 
English  people  are  especially  liable. 

1.  Do  not  make  the  long  vowels  half-long,  when  a  hard  con- 
sonant follows,  because  this  is  the  rule  in  English.      German 
vowels  in  such  a  case  retain  their  full  length.     The  vowels  and 
diphthongs  are  half-long  in  English  fail,  graced,  note,  goose,  ice, 
out,  but  fully  long  in  German  fehl,  gehst,  Not,  Gruss,  Eis,  laut. 

2.  In  compound  words  be  careful  to  make  the  vowel  with  the 
secondary  accent  long.     See  exx.  above. 

3.  Make  even  unaccented  syllables  long   if  they  happen  to 
be  final.     See  exx.  above. 

4.  Do  not  lengthen  a  short  vowel  because  r  follows,  though  it 
is  difficult  for  English  people  to   avoid  this,  when   the  r   is 
followed  by  another   consonant,  or  final,  as  in   icarten,  Bart, 
zart,  hart,  Hirt,  Herr,  Herz,  Erbe,  Urne. 

5.  When  a  long  vowel  is  shortened  to  half-long,  because  it  is 
not  accented,  do  not  on  that  account  alter  its  quality  and  make 
it  more  open.      The  i  in  Militar  should  be  pronounced  like 
English  iy  in  eternal  (iytoenal)  and  e  in  Sekrctar  nearly  like 
English  ey  in  chaotic  (keyotik),  but  without  the  slight  sound  of 
y  heard  in  English. 

Length  of  Consonants.  The  consonants  in  German  are 
never  lengthened,  except  in  compound  words,  such  as  mitteilen, 
Packkorl},  Tauffeier,  Still-leben,  and  even  in  such  cases  they 
are  commonly  short  in  conversational  German. 

English  people  must  guard  against  lengthening  the  conso- 
nants after  short  vowels,  as  we  habitually  do  in  English.  They 
should  practise  them  in  this  position,  pronouncing  them  as 
quickly  and  sharply  as  possible,  e.g.  in  Sinn,  Mann,  Lamm,  con- 
trasted with  English  thin,  man,  lamb. 

ACCENT. 

The  accentuation  of  German  words  and  sentences  is  almost 
identical  with  the  accentuation  of  English,  and  does  not  present 
much  difficulty.  The  principal  rules  are  as  follows  : — 

1.  The  stem  syllable,  being  the  most  significant,  bears  the 
principal  accent.  This  rule  is  almost  universal  in  words  not 


Intonation.  159 

borrowed  from  foreign  languages.  The  chief  exceptions  are 
that  the  particles,  in  some  compound  words,  take  the  principal 
accent ;  exx. :  Antwort,  umvohl,  Ursache,  ausgeben,  in  each  of 
which  the  first  syllable  is  accented. 

2.  The  weaker  syllables  all  have  a  slight  stress,  unless  they 
have  the  vowel  e.     English  pupils  should  note  this,  and  pro- 
nounce the  unaccented  vowels  clearly,  not  making  them  obscure, 
as  we  are  apt  to  do  in  English. 

3.  In  German,  as  in  English,  the  accent  may  be  shifted  when 
two  words  are  contrasted,  as  in  "  zergehen,  nicht  vergehen" 

The  rules  for  accenting  sentences  are  the  same  as  in  English, 
but  these  deviations  should  be  noted  : — 

a.  A  great  number  of  words  receive  the  accent.      Compare 
"  das  Buck  welches  er  mir  gab  "  and  "  the  book  which  he  gdveme," 
where  the  German  has  three  accents  and  the  English  only  two. 

b.  Verbal  forms  following  the  object  must  not  be  strongly 
accented  in  such  clauses  as  the  following :  "  einen  Brief  schrei- 
ben,"  " einen  Brief  gcschrieben  haben"  " icenn  ich  einen  Brief 
schreibe." 

As  in  English,  the  accent  may  be  shifted  so  as  to  emphasize 
any  word  in  the  sentence  to  which  the  speaker  wishes  to  draw 
special  attention.  In  "  Gib  mir  das  Buch  her"  the  stress  might 
therefore  be  laid  at  pleasure  (a)  upon  gib  and  Buch,  which 
would  be  the  regular  accentuation,  or  (6)  on  das,  or  (c)  on  her. 

Some  words,  when  unaccented,  have  weak  forms,  but  the 
cases  are  not  nearly  so  numerous  as  in  English.  Exx.  er,  'er, 
;ar,  'er,  er ;  der,  der,  diir,  der.  And  in  conversation  er  is  some- 
times weakened  to  "  r "  (syllabic),  and  der  in  like  manner  to 
"  dr  "  with  syllabic  "  r." 

INTONATION. 

Little  need  be  said  concerning  intonation  in  German,  for  it 
follows  the  same  laws  as  in  English.  The  chief  point  of  differ- 
ence seems  to  be  one  which  is  very  noticeable  in  the  exclama- 
tion so  /  It  is  amusing  to  English  people  to  observe  the 
variety  of  feelings  which  can  be  expressed  in  German  by  this 
one  little  monosyllable,  by  varying  its  intonation,  and  as  it  were 
singing  a  little  tune  upon  it.  Prof.  Victor  observes  that  when 


160  German  Synthesis. 

monosyllables  such  as  Ja,  so,  wie,  are  used  to  represent  a  whole 
sentence,  all  the  intonation  of  that  sentence  may  be  given  in  a 
single  syllable. 

SYLLABLE  DIVISION. 

Germans  divide  their  syllables  in  the  same  way  as  the 
English,  as  far  as  speech  is  concerned,  but  when  a  consonant 
belongs  equally  to  the  syllables  before  and  after,  as  in  leidcnd, 
and  yet  an  artificial  division  must  be  made,  they  divide  thus  : — 
Ici-dcnd,  whilst  in  similar  cases  we  divide  as  follows: — lead-ing. 


XI. 
SYMBOLIZATION  OF  GERMAN  SOUNDS. 

SYMBOLS  USED  FOR  THE  CONSONANTS. 

The  use  of  some  of  the  consonant  symbols  has  been  shown 
already  (pp.  144f.),  but  a  few  more  explanations  are  needed :  (1) 
to  account  for  some  variety  in  the  symbols  used  for  the  same 
sounds ;  (2)  to  help  students  to  determine  what  sound  is  ex- 
pressed by  a  doubtful  symbol ;  and  (3)  to  guard  against  some 
common  mistakes. 

Doubled  Letters,  and  the  combinations  ck,  tz,  serve 
to  indicate  that  the  preceding  vowel  is  short,  as  in  fett,  Lamm, 
Mann,  veil,  Narr,  Schijf,  dick,  Satz. 

The  distinction  between  the  doubled  letter  ss  (ff)  and  the 
symbol  fs  (ff),  which  is  not  reckoned  as  a  double  letter,  is  not 
usually  shown  when  German  is  printed  in  Roman  characters, 
ss  being  used  for  both.  We  find  long  vowels  before  fs  when 
that  symbol  is  retained  in  the  inflected  forms  of  the  word,  e.g. 
in  Fufs,  pi.  Filfse.  But  as  fs  is  regularly  substituted  for  ss 
at  the  end  of  words,  we  meet  with  fs  after  short  vowels  also, 
e.g.  in  Nufs,  "  a  nut."  In  these  cases  the  inflected  forms  of 
the  word  are  written  with  ss,  thus  : — pi.  Nilsse. 

II,  D,  G,  used  for  hard  Sounds.  We  have  already  ob- 
served that  at  the  end  of  a  word  these  are  used  for  p,  t  and  £ 
or  ch.  Note  that  g  =  £  after  a  front  vowel  or  a  consonant,  as 
in  Sicg,  Berg,  and  <*h  after  a  back  vowel,  as  in  Tag,  zog. 

These  letters  are  also  reckoned  final  and  pronounced  as  hard 
sounds  whenever  they  are  not  initial,  and  are  followed  by  a 
liquid  not  belonging  to  the  stem,  or  by  any  other  consonant. 

So  1>  is  pronounced  p  in  liebt,  "loves,"  ilblicli,  "  customary." 
d  stands  for  t  in  Jiandlicn,  u  handy,"  and  g  for  £  in  rcgsam, 
"  active,"  and  for  ch  in  Wagnis,  "  perilous  enterprise." 

I.  p.  1G1  M 


162  Symbolization  of  German  Sounds. 

But  in  iibler,  "  worse,"  as  the  1  belongs  to  the  stem,  b  is  not 
pronounced  p,  but  b. 

The  rest  of  the  doubtful  symbols,  'arranged  alphabetical!}^ 
are  :  — 

€. 

l.  =  ts  before  front  vowels,  as  in  Offlcicr. 

2.=k  in  other  cases,  as  in  Cognac. 

ce. 

1.  =  kts  before  front  vowels,  as  in  Accent  (Jaktsdnt\  "accent." 

2.  =  k  before  back  vowels,  as  in  Accord,  "accord." 

I'll. 

!.  =  £  after  front  vowels  and  consonants,  as  in  ich,  "  I,"  soldi, 
"such,"  and  always  in  the  ending  chen,  SLsmMamacJien,  "dear 
mamma." 

Also  initial  in  Chcmic,  "chemistry,"  China,  "China/'  and 
some  other  foreign  words. 

2.  =  ch  after  back  vowels,  as  in  etch. 

3.  =k  when  followed  by  radical  s*,  as  in  Fuchs,  "fox,"  sechs, 
"  six,"  etc. 

Also  in  Choi;  "  choir,"  Chronih;  "  chronicle  "  and  a  few  other 
foreign  words. 

4.  =sli  in  Chance,  "chance,"  Chef,  "principal,"  and  some 
other  words  borrowed  from  French. 


l.  =  S,  initial,  and  when  beginning  the  primarily  accented 
syllable  in  foreign  words,  as  in  gut,  "  good,"  reyiercn,  "reign." 

2.=j,  medial,  'after  front  vowels  and  consonants,  as  in  Siege, 
"victories,"  Bcrye,  "mountains,"  regncn,  "rain." 

3.  =  q,  medial  after  back  vowels,  as  in  Tagc,  "days,"  zogen, 
"  drew." 

4.  =  zh  initial  and  medial  in  some  loan  words,  as  in  arran- 
(/ieren,  "  arrange,"  Genie,  "genius,"  "ingenuity." 

5.  =  £  final  after  front  vowels  and  consonants,  as  in  Sicg,  Berg, 
regsam, 

(y.—v\\  final,  after  back  vowels,  as  in  Tag,  zog,  Wagnis. 


Symbols  used  for  the  Consonants.  163 

II. 

Pronounced  h,  or  used  as  part  of  a  digraph  such  as  ah,  eh, 
sh,  th,  or  of  the  trigraph  sch. 

I. 

Stands  for  j  in  unaccented  syllables  in  such  words  as  FamiUc 
(famihlje'),  Spanien  (shpahnjeri). 

JT. 

1.  =j  as  in  ja. 

2.  =  zh  in  some  loan  words,  e.g.  Jalousie,  Journal  (zhurndhl). 


1.  =  n  as  in  nic,  an. 

2.  =  iig  before  k,  as  in  sinkcn,  Dank. 

3.  In  French  loan  words  in  an,  on,  etc.,  to  show  that  the  pre- 
ceding vowel  is  nasal. 

See  also  under  ng. 


Pronounced  as  a  single  sound,  iig,  as  in  singen,  lang. 

S. 

1.  =  z,  initial  before  vowels,  and  medial,  as  in  so,  Rose,  winslc. 

2.  —  s,  initial  before  consonants,  and  final,  as  in  Skizze,  Hals, 
ist. 

3.  =  sh,  initial  in  the  combinations  sp  and  st,  and  so  also 
when  preceded   by   German  prefixes,   as  in  spreclien,   stclien, 
bcsprcclien,  verstehcn. 

T. 

l.--t,  as  in  Tan,  warten,  mit. 

2.  =  ts  in  words  originally  Latin,  before  unaccented  i  fol- 
lowed by  an  accented  vowel,  as  in  Nation,  Patient. 

Tlf. 

Always  pronounced  t.  In  German  words  it  occurs  by  trans- 
position to  show  that  the  vowel  next  to  it  is  long,  as  in  Thai 
for"Tahl,"  cp.  Zahl. 


164  Symbolization  of  German  Sounds. 


After  q  pronounced  v,  or  by  many  persons  as  a  simple  lip 
continuant,  see  pp.  146f. 

SYMBOLS  USED  FOR  THE  VOWELS. 

The  symbols  commonly  used  to  represent  the  German  vowels 
are  shown  on  p.  149.  It  will  be  seen  there  that  the  symbols 
a,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  ii,  ii,  ie,  may  be  used  to  represent  long  or 
short  vowels,  and  that  e  has  three  values,  namely  long  eh  in 
schicer,  short  a  in  fest,  and  unaccented  e  in  Gebotc. 

I  propose  to  give  here  only  the  general  rules  for  determining 
the  vahie  of  these  symbols.  A  full  statement  of  the  rules  and 
exceptions  will  be  found  in  Vietor's  Germ.  Pronunciation. 

The  symbols  a,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  ii,  ii  are  used  to  represent  long 
vowels  when  they  occur  (1)  in  open  syllables,  that  is,  when  they 
are  not  followed  by  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable,  and  (2) 
when,  in  a  final  syllable,  they  are  followed  by  one  consonant 
only.  In  other  cases  they  are  short.  Exx.:  — 

a 
a 
e 
i 
o 
11 
ii 
ii 

E  stands  for  unaccented  e  in  the  unaccented  prefixes  be  and 
ge,  and  in  the  unaccented  derivative  or  inflectional  suffixes  e, 
el,  em,  en,  end,  er,  ern,  es,  est,  et,  as  in  habc,  "  have," 
Vogcl,  "bird,"  Atcin,  "breath,''  lichen,  "  love,"  rasend,  "furious," 
Vater,  "father,"  c.iaern,  "iron,"  alles,  "  all,"  Uidct,  "suffers." 

E  has  the  same  sound  in  dcr,  dcm,  den,  dcs,  cs,  when  they 
are  unaccented. 

Ie  stands  for  short  i  in  riclleicJit,  Viertcl,  vicrzcJni,  vierziy, 
In  other  cases  it  represents  long  in,  as  in  sic,  Liebc. 


laden  (ah) 

war  (ah) 

warten  (a) 

saen  (ah) 

Bar  (ah) 

Hilnde  (a) 

Rede  (eh) 

schwer  (eh) 

fest  (a) 

Igel  (ih) 

mir  (ih) 

Kiste  (i) 

Rose  (oh) 

Gebot  (oh) 

komm  (o) 

rufen  (uh) 

gut  (uh) 

Mutter  (u) 

ode  (oh) 

schon  (oh) 

Morder  (o) 

miide  (uh) 

fur  (uh) 

Htttte  (ii) 

PART    II. 
BEADING   LESSONS 

AND 

EXERCISES. 


i.  p. 


A 

PHONETIC    HEADING    BOOK 

(ENGLISH,   FRENCH  AND   GERMAN] 

WITH 

Exercises 


uv 

LAUEA    SOAMES 


Pontoon 

SWAN    SONNENSCHEIN    &    CO. 
PATERNOSTER  SQUARE 

1891 


SPELING    LESN'Z. 


et 
eb 

eg 

I. 

Nine  Consonants  icith 

it          on          pot          kid 
in          pet        put          kod 
od         pit         bed         kud 

II. 

e,  i,  o.  ii. 

gud 
nuk 
kuk 

big         men 
bog         king 
Torn        gong 

Consonants  to  «lh. 

il 
if 

rok 
ruk 

wet 
thin 

fil 

ful 

pith 
widh 

thik 
lok 

ov 

when 

dhen 

bul 

fit 

luk 

rek 
rik 

wen 
whet 

dhem 
fel 

def 
giv 

fut 
wud 

pul 
wul 

III. 

Remaining  Consonants. 

iz 

dhis 
pus 
sez 

woz 

wosh 
dish 
push 

shud 
shuk 
yes 
yet 

yel 
hiz 
his 
chin 

chik 
huk 
Jon 
Jim 

ech           rich 
ej              tej 
which      loj 
wich        push 

IV. 
Remaining  Short  Accented  Voicels  —  oe,  ae. 

Script  Forms    (Q    d£ 


rseg  dosv  r?esh  Msej 

thoem  hsev  push  goash 

clhsen  dhoes  moech  bush 

soeng  pus  insech  doel 

eeeng  roash  joaj  pul 


Speling  Lesrfz. 

V. 
Unaccented  Vowels — a,  and  ending  ar. 


nmid 

absesh               vila               dolar 

kcslar 

absek 

atsech               Bela              milar 

msenar 

atsek 

amses                ^Ena             roedar 

msetar 

omoeng 

amis                 Hsena           goenar 

meed  liar 

aboev 

ahed                 kolar            fular 

sosniar 

VI. 

• 

Weak  Words.     Unaccented  i  and  o'. 

a 

dheet                     dhi  orinj 

pri-tend 

an 

tu  (to)                   dha  noets 

si-lekt 

and 

tuw  (two,  too)     poeti 

pro'tekt 

dhi 

a  msen                  foli 

windo' 

dha 

an  oks                  full 

fob' 

dhat 

pen  and  ingk      ri-zist 

folo'ing    : 

VII. 

Long  Voifds  —  aa,  ey,  iy,  o,  ow,  uw. 

paam 

dhey             hiy            poz             now 

huw 

kaam 

o'bey            miy           pot             gow 

duw 

baan 

peyl              siy             16                sow 

shuw 

kaat 

peys              fiyl            dro             bowl 

ruwd 

aar 

oyt                 piys           for              bowt 

ruwl 

faar 

geyt              mashiyn  nor             kowt 

buwt 

VIII. 

Long  Voicels  —  oe,  e. 

boen 

feri            faadhar            rip-ering 

rik'os 

toen 

heri           maatar             disp'ering 

poshan 

doet 

Meri           rigaad               dcyzi 

mowing 

hoet 

dering       bazaar               steyshan 

mowshan 

woed 

wering      ritoen                piysful 

ruwlar 

Poesliau 

tering        dizoev               disiyv 

truwthful 

Fpeling  Lesrfz. 


Diphthongs — ai,  an,  oi,  yu. 


baid 

praiing 

hau 

join           joiing 

nyu 

bait 

flaiing 

nau 

chois        cloiing 

fyu 

krai 

haus 

bauing 

boi           dyuk 

yuniyk 

flai 

maus 

alauing 

joi            dyuti 

yunait 

X. 

Diphthongs  —  ea, 

ia,  oa,  ua. 

wear 

dhear 

riar 

doar 

hoar 

pear 

hear 

fiaz 

moar 

puar 

whear 

iar 

siar 

roaz 

tuaz 

ear 

piar 

liiar 

soaz 

duar 

teaz 

tiaz 

oar  (oar,  ore)     woar 

muar 

deaz 

diar 

or  (or) 

foar  (four,  fore) 

wuar 

keaz 

miar 

poar 

for  (for) 

shuar 

rear 

niar 

toar 

nor  (nor) 

bruar 

RIYDING  LESZrZ—PROWZ. 

I. 
DHA  FOKS  AND  DHA  GOWT. 

A  Foks  hsed  folan l  intu  a  wel,  and  hsed  biyn  kaasting  abaut 
for  a  long  taim  hau  hiy  shud  get  aut  agen;2  when  set  length  a 
Gowt  keym  tu  dha  pleys,  and  wonting  tu  dringk,  aast  Renad 
whedhar  dha  wotar  woz  gud,  and  if  dhear  woz  plenti  ov  it. 
Dha  Foks,  disenabling  dha  rial  deynjar  ov  hiz  keys,  riplaid, 
"  Kcem  daun,  mai  f  rend  ;  dha  wotar  iz  sow  gud  dhat  ai  ksenot 
dringk  anoef  3  ov  it,  and  sow  abcendant  dhat  it  ksenot  biy  igz'6- 
stid."  Apon  dhis  dha  Gowt,  widhaut  eni  moar  aduw,  lept  in ; 
when  dha  Foks,  teyking  advaantij  ov  hiz  frendz  honz,  sez 
nimbli  lept  aut;  and  kuwlli  rimaakt  tn  dha  puar  dilyiidid 
Gowt,  "  If  yu  hsed  haaf  sez  moech  breynz  sez  yu  hsev  biad,  yu 
wud  hsev  lukt  bifoar  yu  lept." 

II. 
DHA  MAIZAR. 

A  Maizar,  tu  meyk  shuar  ov  hiz  propati,  sowld  61  dhat  hiy 
hsed  and  kanvoetid  it  intu  a  greyt  loemp  ov  gowld,  which  hiy 
hid  in  a  howl  in  dha  graund,  and  went  kantinyuali  tu  vizit  and 
inspekt  it.  Dhis  rauzd  dha  kyuariositi  ov  woen  ov  hiz  woek- 
man,  huw,  saspekting  dhat  dhear  woz  a  trezhar,  when  hiz 
maastaz  bsek  woz  toend.  went  tu  dha  spot,  and  stowl  it  awey. 
When  dha  Maizar  ritoend,  and  faund  dha  pleys  emti,  hiy  wept, 
and  toar  hiz  hear.  Boet  a  neybar  huw  so  him  in  dhis  ikstrseva- 
gant  griyf,  and  loent  dha  koz  ov  it,  sed,  "Fret  yoself 4  now 
longgar,  boet  teyk  a  stown  and  put  it  in  dha  seym  pleys,  and 
thingk  dhat  it  iz  yor  loamp  ov  gowld  ;  for  sez  yu  nevar  ment  tu 
yuz  it,  dha  woen  wil  duw  yu  sez  moech  gud  sez  dhi  oedhar." 

Dha  woeth  ov  moeni  iz  not  in  its  po'zeshan,5  boet  in  its  yus. 

Alternative  forms : — '  foln'.       2  ageyn.       3  iiroef.        4  yaself. 
5  pazeshan. 


DJia  Milar  and  hiz  Soen.  9 

III. 

DHA  KOK   AND  DHA  JUWIL. 

JEz  a  Kok  woz  skrseching  oep  dha  stro  in  a  faam-yaad,  in 
soech  ov  fuwd  for  dha  henz,  hiy  hit  apon  a  Juwil  dhat  bai 
seem  chaans  hsed  faund  its  wey  dhear.  "  How  ! "  sed  hiy,  "  yu 
aar  a  veri  fain  thing,  now  daut,  tu  dhowz  huw  praiz  yu ;  boet 
giv  miy  a  baali-kon  bifoar  61  dha  poelz  in  dha  woeld." 

Dha  Kok  woz  a  sensibl'  Kok  :  boet  dhear  aar  meni  sili  piypl' 
huw  dispaiz  whot  iz  preshas  ownli  bikoz T  dhey  ksenot  cenda- 
st'send  it. 

IV. 
DHA  KR^:B  AND  HOER  MCEDHAR. 

Sed  an  owld  Krseb  tu  a  yoeng  woen,  "  Whai  duw  yu  wok  sow 
krukid,  chaild  ?  wok  streyt ! " 

"  Mcedhar,"  sed  dha  yoeng  krseb,  "  show  miy  dha  wey,  wil 
yu  ?  and  when  ai  siy  yu  teyking  a  streyt  kos,  ai  wil  trai  and 
foloV 

Igzaampl'  2  iz  betar  dhsen  priysept. 

V. 

DHA  MILAR,  HIZ  SCEN,  AND  DHEAR  AAS. 

A  Milar  and  hiz  Soen  woor  draiving  dhear  Aas  tu  a  ney- 
baring  fear  tu  sel  him.  Dhey  hsed  not  gon 3  faar  when  dhey 
met  widh  a  truwp  ov  goelz  ritoening  from  dha  taun,  toking  and 
laafing.  "  Luk  dhear  ! "  kraid  woen  ov  dhem ;  "  did  yu  evar 
siy  seech  fuwlz,  tu  biy  troejing  along  dha  rowd  on  fut,  when 
dhey  mait  biy  raiding ! "  Dhi  owld  masn,  hiaring  dhis,  kwai- 
atli  bsed  hiz  Seen  get  on  dhi  Aas,  and  wokt  along  merili  bai 
dha  said  ov  him.  Prezantli  dhey  keym  cep  tu  a  gruwp  ov 
owld  men  in  oenist  dibeyt.  "Dhear!"  sed  ween  ov  dhem,  ':it 
pruwvz  whot  ai  woz  a-seying.  Whot  rispekt  iz  shown  tu  owld 
eyj  in  dhiyz  cleyz  ?  Duw  yu  siy  dhset  aidl'  yceng  rowg  raiding, 
whail  hiz  owid  faadhar  hsez  tu  wok  ? — Get  daun,  yu  skeyp- 

Alternative  forms : — 1  bik'oz.  2  egzaampl'.  3  gon. 


10  Riyding  Lesn'z — Prowz. 

greys !  and  let  dhi  owld  msen  rest  hiz  wiari  limz."  Apon  dhis 
dha  Faadhar  meyd  hiz  Soen  dismaunt,  and  got  oep  himself. 
In  dhis  msenar  dhey  hsed  not  pro'siydid  faar  when  dhey 
met  a  kcempani  ov  wimin  and  childran.  "  Whai,  y\\.  leyzi 
owld  felo' ! "  kraid  sevral  tcengz  set  woens,  "  hau  keen  yu  raid 
apon  dha  biyst,  whail  dhset  puar  litl'  Ised  dhear  keen  haadli 
kiyp  peys  bai  dha  said  ov  yu."  Dha  gud-neychad  Milar  stud 
karektid,  and  imiyjitli  tukcep  hiz  Seen  bihaind  him. 

Dhey  heed  nau  olmowst  riycht  dha  taun.  "  Prey,  onist 
frend,"  sed  a  taunzman,  "  iz  dhset  Aas  yor  own?"  "Yes," 
sez  dhi  owld  msen.  "  Ow !  Woen  wud  not  hsev  thot  sow,"  sed  dhi 
oedhar,  "  bai  dha  wey  yu  lowd  him.  Whai,  yu  tuw  felo'z  aar 
betar  eybl'  tu  kseri  dha  puar  biyst  dhsen  hiy  yu ! "  "  Enithing 
tu  pliyz  yu,"  sed  dhi  owld  msen ;  "  wiy  keen  boet  trai."  Sow, 
alaiting  widh  hiz  Sosn,  dhey  taid  dhi  Aasiz  legz  tagedhar,  and 
bai  dha  help  ov  a  powl  indevad  tu  kseri  him  on  dhear  showldaz 
owvar  a  brij  dhat  led  tu  dha  taun.  Dhis  woz  sow  entateyning 
a  sait  dhat  dha  piypl'  rsen  aut  in  kraudz  tu  laaf  set  it ;  til  dhi 
Aas,  not  laiking  dha  noiz  nor  hiz  sityueyshan,  kikt  asoendar 
dha  kodz  dhat  baund  him,  and,  toembling  of  dha  powl,  fel  intu 
dha  rivar.  Apon  dhis  thi  owld  msen,  vekst  and  asheymd, 
meyd  dha  best  ov  hiz  wey  howm  ageyn  1 — kanvinst  dhat  bai 
indevring  2  tu  pliyz  evribodi  hiy  ha3d  pliyzd  nowbadi,  and  lost 
hiz  Aas  intu  dha  baagin. 


VI. 

DHA  KCEXTRI  MEYD  AND  HOER  MJLK-KJEN. 

A  Koentri  Meyd  woz  woking  along  widh  a  ksen  ov  milk  apon 
hoer  hed,  when  shiy  fel  intu  dha  folo'ing  streyn  ov  riflekshanz. 
"  Dha  moeni  for  which  ai  shsel  sel  dhis  milk  wil  ineybl'  miy  tu 
inkriys  mai  stok  ov  egz  tu  thriy  hoendrad.  Dhiyz  egz,  alauing 
for  whot  mey  pruwv  sedl',  and  whot  mey  biy  distroid  bai 
voemin,  wil  pro'dyus  set  liyst  tuw  hoendrad  and  fifti  chikinz. 
Dha  chikinz  wil  biy  fit  tu  kseri  tu  maakit  joest  set  dha  taim 
when  powltri  iz  olwiz3  diar ;  sow  dhat  bai  dha  nyu-yoer  l  ai 

Alternative  forms  : — l  agen.     2  indevaring.      3  olweyz.     4  yiar. 


Dlia  Frogz  Aasking  for  a  King.  11 

ksenot  feyl  ov  haeving  moeni  anoef  *  tu  poecliis  a  nyu  gaun.  Griyn 
—let  miy  kansidar — yes,  griyn  bik'oemz  mai  kamplekshan  best, 
and  griyn  it  shsel  biy.  In  dhis  dres  ai  wil  gow  tu  dha  fear, 
whear  61  dha  yoeng  felo'z  wil  straiv  tu  hsev  miy  for  a  paatnar  ; 
boet  now — ai  shsel  rifyiiz  evri  ween  ov  dbem,  and  widh  a  dis- 
deynful  tos  2  toen  from  dhem."  Traansp'otid  widh  dhis  aidia, 
shiykud  not  fobear3  sekting  widh  hoer  hed  dha  thot  dhat  dhoes 
paast  in  hoer  maind  ;  whendannkeym  dha  ksen  ov  milk!  and 
61  hoer  inrsejinari  hsepinis  vsenisht  in  a  mowmant. 

VII. 

DHA  FROGZ  AASKIXG  FOR  A  KING. 

In  dha  deyz  ov  owld,  when  dha  Frogz  woer  61  set  libati  in 
dha  leyks,  and  hsed  grown  kwait  wiari  ov  folo'ing  evri  woen 
hiz  own  divaisiz.  dhey  asembl'd  woen  dey  tagedhar,  and  widh 
now  litl'  klsemar  pitishand  Jawpitar  tu  let  dhem  haev  a  King 
tu  kijrp  dhem  in  betar  odar,  and  meyk  dhem  liyd  honistar  laivz. 
Juwpitar  novving  dha  vseniti  ov  dhear  haats,  smaild  set  dhear 
rikwest,  and  thruw  daun  a  log  intu  dha  leyk,  which  bai  dha 
splsesh  and  kamowshan  it  meyd,  sent  dha  howl  komanwelth 
intu  dha  greytist  terar  and  ameyzmant.  Dhey  rcesht  cendar  dha 
wotar  and  intu  dha  moad,  and  dead  not  koem  widhin  ten  Hyps 
length  ov  dha  spot  whear  it  ley.  JEt  length  woen  Frog,  bowldar 
dhsen  dha  rest,  venchad  tu  pop  hiz  hed  aboav  dha  wotar,  and 
teyk  a  soervey  ov  dhear  nyu  King  set  a  rispektful  distans.  Pre- 
zantli,  when  dhey  poesiyvd4  dha  log  lai  stok-stil,  oedhaz  big'sen 
tu  swim  up  tu  it  and  araund  it,  til  bai  digriyz,  growing 
bowldar  and  bowldar,  dhey  set  laast  lept  apon  it,  and  triytid  it 
widh  dha  greytist  kantempt. 

Dis'setisfaid  widh  sow  teym  a  ruwlar,  dhey  fothwith  pitishand 
Juwpitar  a  sekand  taim  for  anoedhar  and  moar  sektiv  King. 
Apon  which  hiy  sent  dhem  a  stok,  huw  now  suwnar  araivd 
amoeng  dhem  dhsen  hiy  big'sen  leying  howld  ov  dhem  and 
divauaring  dhem  woan  bai  woen  sez  faast  sez  hiy  kud,  and  it  wo/ 
in  veyn  dhat  dhey  indevad  tu  iskeyp  him.  Dhen  dhey  sent 

Alternative  forms : — l  in-opf.         2  tos.         3  fabear.         4  pasiyvd. 


12  Riyding  Lesn'z — Proicz. 

Moekyuri  widh  a  praivit  mesij  tu  Juwpitar,  bisiyching  him 
dhat  hiy  wud  teyk  piti  on  dhem  woens  moar ;  boet  Juwpitar 
riplaid  dhat  dhey  woer  ownli  soefaring  dha  poenishmant  dyu  tu 
dhear  foli,  and  dhat  anoedhar  taim  dhey  wud  loen  tu  let  wel 
alown,  and  not  biy  dis'setisfaid  widh  dhear  nsecharal  kandishan. 


VIII. 
DHA  KCENTRI  MAUS  AND  DHA  TAUN  MAUS. 

Woens  apon  a  taim  a  Koentri  Maus  huw  heed  a  frend  in  taun 
invaitid  him,  for  owld  akweyntans  seyk,  tu  pey  him  a  vizit  in 
dha  koentri.  Dhi  inviteyshan  biying  sekseptid  in  dyu  fom,  dha 
Koentri  Maus,  dhow  pleyn  and  reef  and  soemwhot  fruwgal  in  hiz 
neychar,  owpn'd  hiz  haat  and  stoar  in  onar  ov  hospitseliti  and 
an  owld  frend.  Dhear  woz  not  a  keafuli  stod  oep  mosl'  dhat 
hiy  did  not  bring  foth  aut  ov  hiz  laadar,  piyz  and  baali,  chiyz- 
peringz  and  noets,  howping  bai  kwontiti  tu  meyk  rep  whot  hiy 
fiad  woz  wonting  in  kwoliti,  tu  syut  dha  pselat  ov  hiz  deynti 
gest. 

Dha  Taun  Maus,  kondisending  tu  pik  a  bit  hiar  and  a  bit 
dhear,  whail  dha  howst  sset  nibling  a  bleyd  ov  baali-stro,  set 
length  ikskleymd  :  "  Hau  iz  it,  mai  gud  frend,  dhat  yu  keen 
indyuar  dha  doelnis  ov  dhis  oenpolisht  laif  ?  Yu  aar  living  laik 
a  towd  in  a  howl.  Yu  kaant  riali  prifoer  dhiyz  solitari  roks 
and  wudz  tu  striyts  tiyming  widh  kserijiz  and  men.  On  mai 
onar,  yu  aar  weysting  yor  taim  mizarabli  hiar.  Wiy  nicest  meyk 
dha  mowst  ov  laif  whail  it  laasts.  A  Maus,  yu  now,  dcez  not 
liv  for  evar.  Sow  kcem  widh  miy,  and  ai  1 1  show  yu  laif  and 
dha  taun." 

Owvapauad  widh  seech  fain  woedz  and  sow  polisht  a  msenar, 
dha  Koentri  Maus  aesentid  ; 2  and  dhey  set  aut  tagedhar  on 
dhear  joeni  tu  taun.  It  woz  leyt  in  dhi  iyvning  when  dhey 
krept  stelthili  intu  dha  siti,  and  midnait  ear  dhey  riycht  dha 
greyt  haus,  whear  dha  Taun  Maus  tuk  oap  hiz  kwotaz.  Hiar 
woer  kauchiz  ov  krimzan  velvit,  kaavingz  in  aivari ;  evrithing 
in  shot  dinowtid  welth  and  Icekshari.  On  dha  teybl'  woer  dha 

Alternative  forms  :—1  wil.  2  asentid. 


DM  Aasiz  Shcedo1.  13 

rimeynz  ov  a  splendid  bsengkwit,  tu  pro'kyuar  which  61  dha 
choisisfc  shops  in  dha  taun  hsed  biyn  rsenssekt  dha  dey  bifoar. 

It  woz  nau  dha  toen  ov  dha  kotyar  tu  pley  dha  howst ;  hiy 
pleysiz  hiz  koentri  frend  on  poepl',  roenz  tuw  and  frow  tu  saplai 
61  hiz  wonts,  presiz  dish  apon  dish  and  deynti  apon  deynti,  and, 
sez  dhow  hiy  woer  weyting  apon  a  king,  teysts  evri  kos  ear  hiy 
venchaz  tu  pleys  it  bifoar  hiz  rosstik  koezn'.  Dha  Koentri  Maus, 
for  hiz  paat,  afekts  tu  meyk  himself  kwait  set  howm,  and 
blesiz  dha  gud  fochan  dhat  hsez  rot  soech  a  cheynj  in  hiz  wey 
ov  laif ;  when,  in  dha  midst  of  hiz  injoimant,  sez  hiy  iz  thing- 
king  widh  kantempt  ov  dha  puar  fear  hiy  hsez  foseykn',1  on  a 
soedn'  dha  doar  flaiz  owpn',  and  a  paati  ov  revl'az  ritoening  from 
a  leyt  entateynmant,  boests  intu  dha  ruwm. 

Dhi  afraitid  frendz  joemp  from  dha  teybl'  in  dha  greytist 
konstaneyshan  and  haid  dhemselvz  2  in  dha  f'oest  konar  dhey 
ksen  riych.  Now  suwnar  duw  dhey  venchar  tu  kriyp  aut  ageyn  3 
dhaen  dha  baaking  ov  dogz  draivz  dhem  bsek  in  stil  greytar 
terar  dh?en  bifoar.  Mi  length,  when  thingz  siymd  kvvaiat,  dha 
Koentri  Maus  stowl  aut  from  hiz  haiding-pleys,  and  biding  hiz 
frend  gud-bai,  whispad  in  hiz  iar,4  "  Ow,  mai  gud  soer,  dhis  fain 
mowd  ov  living  mey  duw  for  dhowz  huw  laik  it ;  boat  giv  miy 
mai  baali-bred  in  piys  and  sikyuariti  bifoar  dha  deyntiist  fiyst 
whear  Fiar  and  Kear  aar  in  weyting." 

IX. 

DHI  AASIZ  SH^EDO'. 

A  yuth,  ween  hot  soemaz  dey,  haiad  an  Aas  tu  kseri  him  from 
yEthinz  tu  Megara.  Mi  middey  dha  hiyt  ov  dha  seen  woz  sow 
skoching,  dhat  hiy  dismauntid,  and  wud  hsev  sset  daun  tu 
ripowz  cendar  dha  shsedo'  ov  dhi  Aas.  Beet  dha  draivar  ov  dhi 
Aas  dispyutid  dha  pleys  widh  him,  dikl'ering  dhat  hiy  hsed  an 
iykwal  rait  tu  it  widh  dhi  oedhar.  "  Whot !  "  sed  dha  yuth, 
"  did  ai  not  haiar  dhi  Aas  for  dha  howl  joeni?"  "  Yes,"  sed 
dhi  eedhar,  "  yu  haiad  dhi  Aas,  beet  not  dhi  Aasiz  shsedo'." 
Whail  dhey  woer  dhces  raenggling  and  faiting  for  dha  pleys, 
dhi  Aas  tuk  tu  hiz  hiylz  and  rsen  awey. 
Alternative  forms : — 1  faseykn'.  2  dhamsclvz.  3  agen.  4  3'oer. 


14  Riyding  LesvUz — Proicz. 

X. 

DHA   MffiNGKI  AND  DHA   DOLFIX. 

It  woz  an  owld  koestam  amoeng  seylaz  tu  kseri  abaut  widh 
dhem  litl'  Moltiyz  Isep-dogz,  or  moengkiz,  tu  amyuz  dhem  on 
dha  voyij  ;  sow  it  hsepn'd  woens  apon  a  taim  dhat  a  msen  tuk 
widh  him  a  Moengki  sez  a  kampsenyan  on  bod  ship.  Whail 
dhey  woer  of  Suwnyam,  dha  fey  mas  promantari  ov  ^Etika,  dha 
ship  woz  kot  in  a  vaialant  stom,  and  biying  kaepsaizd,  61  on 
bod  woer  thrown  intu  dha  wo  tar,  and  hsed  tu  swim  for  Isend  sez 
best  dhey  kud.  And  amoeng  dhem  woz  dha  Mcengki.  A 
Dolfin  so  him  stroegling,  and  teyking  him  for  a  msen,  went  tu 
hiz  asistans  and  boar  him  on  hiz  bsek  streyt  for  shoar.  When 
dhey  hsed  joest  got  opazit  Pairiyas,  dha  liaabar  ov  JEthinz, 
dha  Dolfin  aast  dha  Moengki  if  hiy  woer  an  Athiynyan  ? 
"  Yes,"  aansad  dha  Moengki,  "  ashuaridli,  and  ov  woen  ov  dha 
foest  fsemiliz  in  dha  pleys."  "  Dhen  ov  kos  yu  now  Pairiyas," 
sed  dha  Dolfin.  "  Ow  yes,"  sed  dha  Moengki,  huw  thot  it  woz 
dha  neym  ov  seem  distinggwisht  sitizn' ;  "  hiy  iz  ween  ov  mai 
mowst  intimit  frendz.''  Indignant  set  sow  grows  a  disiyt  and 
folsud,  dha  Dolfin  daivd  tu  dha  botam,  and  left  dha  laiing 
Mcengki  tu  hiz  feyt. 


DHA    "VVlXD    AND    DHA    SCEX. 

A  dispyut  woens  arowz  bitwiyn  dha  Wind  and  dha  Seen, 
which  woz  dha  stronggar  ov  dha  tuw,  and  dhey  agriyd  tu  put 
dha  point  apon  dhis  isyu,  dhat  whichevar  suwnist  meyd  a 
trsevl'ar  teyk  Of  hiz  klowk,  shud  biy  akauntid  dha  moar  paua- 
ful.  Dba  Wind  big'sen.  and  bluw  widh  61  hiz  mait  and  meyn  a 
blaast,  kowld  and  fias  sez  a  Threyshan  stom ;  beet  dha  stronggar 
hiy  bluw  dha  klowsar  dha  trsevl'ar  rsept  hiz  klowk  araund  him, 
and  dha  taitar  hiy  graaspt  it  widh  hiz  hsendz.  Dhen  browk 
aut  dha  Seen  ;  widh  hiz  welkam  biymz  hiy  dispoest  dha  veypar 
and  dha  kowld  :  dha  trsevl'ar  felt  dha  jiynyal  womth.  and  sez 
dha  Seen  shon  braitar  and  braitar,  hiy  sset  daun,  owvalroem  widh 
dha  hiyt,  and  kaast  hiz  klowk  on  dha  graund. 


Raaliz  Tuw  Plaants.  15 

Dhoes  dha  Soen  woz  diklead  dha  kongkarar ;  and  it  hsez  evar 
biyn  diymd  dhat  poesweyzhan1  iz  betar  dhsen  fos;  and  dhat  dha 
soenshain  ov  a  kaind  and  jentl'  maenar  wil  suwnar  ley  owpn'  a 
puar  msenz  haart  dlisen  61  dha  thretningz  and  fos  ov  bloestaring1 
othoriti. 

XII. 

DHA  FOKS  WIDHADT  A  TEYL. 

A  Foks  biying  kot  in  a  trsep,  woz  glsed  tu  kampaund  for  hiz 
nek  bai  liyving  hiz  teyl  bihaind  him  ;  boat  apon  koeming  abrod 
intu  dha  woeld,  hiy  big'sen  tu  biy  sow  sensibl'  ov  dha  disgreys 
soech  a  difekt  wud  bring  apon  him,  dhat  hiy  olmowst  wisht 
hiy  hsed  daid  raadhar  dhsen  koem  awey  widhaut  it.  Hauevar, 
rizolving  tu  meyk  dha  best  ov  a  bsed  msetar,  hiy  kold  a  miyting 
ov  dha  rest  ov  dha  foksiz,  and  pro'powzd  dhat  61  shud  folo'  hiz 
igzaampl'.  "  Yu  hsev  now  nowshan,"  sed  hiy,  "  ov  dhi  iyz 
and  koemfat  widh  which  ai  nau  muwv  abaut ;  ai  kud  nevar 
hsev  biliyvd  it  if  I  hsed  not  traid  it  maiself  ;  3  boet  riali,  when 
woen  koamz  tu  riyzn'  apon  it,  a  teyl  iz  soech  an  oagli,  inkan- 
viynyant,  oennesisari  apendij,  dhat  dhi  ownli  woendar  iz  dhat, 
sez  foksiz,  wiy  kud  hasv  put  oep  widh  it  sow  long.  Ai  pro'powz,4 
dhearfor,  mai  woedhi  bredhrin,  dhat  yu  61  profit  bai  dhi  ikspiy- 
rians  dhat  ai  sem  moMrst  wiling  tu  aford  yu,  and  dhat  61  foksiz 
from  dhis  dey  fowad  koat'of  dhear  teylz."  Apon  dhis  woan  ov 
dhi  owldist  stept  fowad  and  sed,  "  Ai  raadhar  thingk,  mai 
frend,  dhat  yu  wud  not  hsev  advaizd  oes  tu  paat  widh  auar 
teylz  if  dhear  woer  eni  chaans  ov  rik-oevaring  yor  own." 


EAALIZ  Tuw  PLAAXTS. 

In  dha  reyn  ov  Kwiyn  Ilizabath,  tuw  plaants  woer  brot  tu 
Inggland,  for  dha  foest  taim,  bai  Soer  Woltar  Raali,  bowth  ov 
which  aar  nau  veri  moech  yuzd — dha  tabaeko'-plaant  and  dha 
pateyto'.  Soer  Woltar  hsed  seyld  akros  dha  siyz  tu  Amerika, 

Alternative  forms : — :  pasweyzhan.  2  blcestring. 

3  miself.          4  prapowz. 


16  Riyding  Lesriz — Prowz. 

in  soech  ov  nyu  Isendz,  and  hiy  brot  bsek  bowth  dhiyz  plaants 
widh  him. 

When  hiy  woz  in  Amerika,  hiy  hsed  siyn  dhi  Indyanz  smowk, 
and  bifoar  long  hiy  akwaiad  dha  hsebit  himself.  Hiy  bikeym 
ikstriymli  fond  ov  smowking,  and  friykwantli  indoeljd  in  dha 
prsektis. 

When  hiy  ritoend  tu  Inggland,  hiy  woz  siting  bai  dha  faiar 
ween  dey,  and  big'sen  tu  smowk.  In  dha  midl'  ov  hiz  smowking, 
dha  doar  owpn'd,  and  in  keym  hiz  msen-soevant.  Nau  dhis 
msen  hsed  nevar  in  hiz  laif  siyn  eni  ween  smowk,  and  did  not 
now  dhat  dhear  woz  seech  a  plaant  sez  tabseko'.  Sow  when  hiy 
so  dha  smowk  kceming  from  hiz  maastaz  mauth,  hiy  thot  dhat 
hiy  woz  on  faiar !  Hiy  kraid  aut  in  alaam,  rsen  tu  fech  a  bcekit 
ov  wotar  tu  put  dha  faiar  aut :  and  Soer  Woltar  woz  delyujd 
bifoar  hiy  hsed  taim  tu  ikspleyn  whot  hiy  woz  riali  duwing. 

Beet  veri  suwn  dhi  owld  soevant  got  yust  tu  siying  piypl' 
widh  smowk  kceming  aut  ov  dhear  maudhz ;  and  61  dha  yceng 
nowbl'z  ov  dha  kot  big'sen  tu  smowk  bikoz  Soer  Woltar  did 
sow. 

JEt  foest  piypl'  did  not  laik  dha  pateyto'  set  61  ;  nowbadi 
wud  iyt  it.  Yet  Soer  Woltar  towld  dhem  hau  yusful  it  wucl 
biy.  Dha  pateyto',  hiy  sed,  kud  biy  meyd  tu  grow  in  Inggland. 
Hiy  towld  dhem  dhat,  when  dha  kon-haavist  feyld — which  it 
ofn'  yust  tu  duw — piypl'  niyd  not  staav  if  dhey  hsed  plenti  ov 
pateyto'z. 

Kwiyn  Ilizabath,  huw  woz  a  veri  klevar  wuman,  lisn'd  tu 
whot  Soer  Woltar  sed,  and  hsed  pateyto'z  soevd  cep  get  hoer  own 
teybl'.  Dhear  dha  grsend  piypl'  huw  daind  widh  hoer  msejisti 
woer  o'blaijd1  tu  iyt  dhem.  Beet  dhey  spred  a  rip'ot  dhat  dha 
pateyto'  woz  poizn'as,  bikoz  it  bilongz  tu  dha  seym  odar  sez  dha 
dedli  naitsheyd  and  meni  cedhar  poizn'as  plaants.  Sow  in  spait 
ov  61  dhat  dha  Kwiyn  kud  duw,  now  ween  wud  iyt  pateyto'z, 
and  dhey  woer  left  for  dha  pigz. 

Dha  piypl'  did  not  faind  aut  dhear  misteyk  til  meni  yoez  2 
aaftawadz.  Dha  puar  pateyto'  woz  dispaizd  and  forgotn'  3  til 
dha  reyn  ov  dha  French4  King  Luwis  XVI.,  when  dhear  livd 
a  Frenchman  huw  hsed  meyd  a  stcedi  ov  growing  plaants  for 

Alternative  forms  :—1  abluijd.         -  yiaz.         s  fagotn'.         4  Frensh. 


A  Boiz  Advenchaz.  17 

fuwd.  Hiy  felt  shuar  dliat  hiy  kud  meyk  dha  pateyto'  a  greyt 
.blesing  tu  dha  koentri;  and  hiy  big'sen  set  woens  tu  trai. 

Aaftar  a  greyt  diyl  ov  troebl'  hiy  saksiydid.  Piypl'  laaft  set 
him  set  f oest,  and  wud  not  teyk  eni  nowtis  ov  whot  hiy  sed.  Boet 
hiy  went  on  growing  dha  pateyto'  til  hiy  brot  it  tu  poefekshan.1 
lyvn'  dhen  now  ween  wud  hsev  iytn'  it,  if  its  paat  hsed  not 
biyn  teykn'  bai  dha  king.  Hiy  heed  laaj  piysiz  ov  graund 
plaantid  widh  pateyto'z,  and  went  abaut  widh  dha  flauar 
ov  dha  pateyto'  in  hiz  boetn'-howl. 

Now  woan  dead  tu  laaf  set  dha  king,  and  when  hiy  sed  dhat 
pateyto'z  woer  tu  biy  iytn',  piypl'  big'sen  tu  faind  aut  hau  gud 
and  howlsam  dhey  woer.  Bai  digriyz  dha  pateyto'  woz  moar 
and  moar  laikt ;  and  nau  dhear  iz  haadli  eni  vejitabl'  dhat  iz 
moar  halli  istiymd. 


A  Boiz  ADVENCHAZ  AMCENG  DHA  SIY-KEYVZ. 
A  Tcyl  ov  dha  Kromati  Koicst. 

From  Mai  Skuidz  and  Skuwlmaastaz,  dhi  oto'baiografi  ov 
liyn  Milar,  dha  selibreytid  jiyolajist,  huw  woz  twelv  yoez 2 
pwld  when  hiy  hsed  dhis  streynj  advenchar. 

It  woz  on  a  plezant  spring  moning  dhat,  widh  mai  litl' 
kyuarias  frend  bisaid  miy,  ai  stud  on  dha  biych  opazit  dhi 
iystan  promaatari,  dhat  widh  its  stoen  grsenitik  wol,  baaz  sekses 
lor  ten  deyz  aut  ov  evri  fotiyn3  tu  dha  woendaz  ov  dha  Duwkot ; 
and  so  it  streching  pro'vowkingli  aut  intu  dha  griyn  wotar. 
It  woz  haad  tu  biy  disapointid,  and  dha  keyvz  sow  niar.  Dha 
taid  woz  a  low  niyp,  and  if  wiy  wontid  a  psesij  drai-shod,  it 
bihuwvd  oes  tu  weyt  for  set  liyst  a  wiyk ;  boet  niydhar  4  ov  oes 
oendastud  dha  filosafi  ov  niyp-taidz  set  dhset  piari'ad.  Ai  woz 
kwait  shuar  ai  hsed  got  raund  set  low  wotar  widh  mai  oengkl'z 
not  a  greyt  meni  deyz  bifoar,  and  wiy  bowth  infoed  dhat  if  wiy 
beet  saksiydid  in  geting  raund  nau,  it  wud  biy  kwait  a  plezhar 
tu  weyt  ainoeng  dha  keyvz  insaid,  centil5  seech  taim  sez  dha  fol 
ov  dha  taid  shud  ley  bear  a  psesij  for  anar  ritoen. 

Alternative  forms  : — 1  pafekshan.    2  yiaz.    3  f-otiyn.     4  naidliar.     6  -oentil. 
I.  P.    II.  B 


18  Riyding  Lesn'z — Frowz. 

A  nsero'  and  browkn'  shelf  roenz  along  dha  promantari,  on 
which,  bai  dhi  asistans  ov  dha  neykid  fiyt,  it  iz  joest  posibl'  tu 
kriyp.  Wiy  saksiydid  in  skrsembling  oep  tu  it,  and  dhen, 
kroling  oepwadz  on  61  foz — dha  presipis,  sez  wiy  pro'siydid, 
biytling  moar  and  moar  fomidabl'  from  aboev,  and  dha  wotar 
bik'ceming  griynar  and  diypar  bilow — wiy  riycht  dhi  autar 
point  ov  dha  promantari ;  and  dhen,  doebling  dha  keyp  on  a 
stil  nsero'ing  maajin — dha  wotar,  bai  a  rivoes  proses,  bik-ceming 
shaelo'ar  and  les  griyn  sez  wiy  advaanst  inwads — wiy  faund 
dha  lej  toemineyting  joest  whear,  aaftar  kliaring  dha  siy,  it 
owvah'oeng  dha  grsevl'i  biych  set  an  eliveyshan  ov  niali  ten 
fiyt. 

Adaun  wiy  bowth  dropt,  praud  ov  auar  sakses — oep  splsesht 
dha  rsetling  grsevl'  sez  wiy  fel,  and  for  set  liyst  dha  howl 
koeming  wiyk,  dhow  wiy  woer  oenawear  ov  dhi  ikstent  ov  auar 
gud-loek  set  dha  taim,  dha  maavl'z  ov  dha  Duwkot  Keyv  mait 
biy  rigaadid  fez  sowlli  and  ikskliiwsivli  auar  own.  For  woen 
shot  sevn'  deyz,  tu  boro'  emfasis  from  dha  freyziolaji  ov 
Kaalail,  "  dhey  woer  auar  own  and  now  oedhar  msenz." 

Dha  foest  ten  auaz  woer  auaz  ov  shiar  injoimant.  Dha  laajar 
key v  pruwvd  a  main  ov  maavl'z ;  and  wiy  faund  a  greyt  diyl 
adishanal  tu  woendar  set  on  dha  slowps  biniyth  dha  presipisiz, 
and  along  dha  piys  ov  roki  siy- biy  oh  in  froent.  Wiy  saksiydid 
in  disk'oevaring1  for  auaselvz  bai  kriyping,  dwof-bushiz  dhat 
towld  ov  dha  blaiting  influ'ansiz  ov  dha  siy-sprey,  dha  peyl 
yelo'  hoenisoekl',  dhat  wiy  hged  nevar  siyn  bifoar  seyv  in 
gaadn'z  and  shroebariz,  and  on  a  diypli-sheydid  slowp  dhat  liynd 
agenst2  ween  ov  dha  stiypar  presipisiz,  wiy  ditektid  dha 
swiyt-sentid  wudroef  ov  dha  flauar-plot  and  paatear,  widh  its 
delikit  whait  flauaz  and  priti  liyvz,  dhat  bik'oem  dha  moar 
owdarifaras  dha  moar  dhey  aar  krcesht.  Dhear  tuw,  imiyjitli  in 
dhi  owpning  ov  dha  diypar  keyv,  whear  a  smol  striym  keym 
psetaring  in  dit'89cht  drops  from  dhi  owvar-biytling  presipis 
abcev,  laik  dha  foest  drops  ov  a  hevi  thcendar-shauar,  wiy 
faund  dha  hot,  bitar  skoevi-graas,  which  dha  greyt  Kseptin 
Kuk  yuzd  in  hiz  voyijiz;  aboev  61,  dhear  woer  dha  keyvz, 
widh  dhear  pijanz,3  whait,  vearigeytid,  and  bluw,  and  dhear 
Alternative  forms:— l  disk'oevring.  2  ageynst.  3  pijinz. 


A  Boiz  Advenchaz.  19 

mistiari'as  and  gluwmi  debths,1  in  which  plaants  haadn'd  intu 
stown,  and  wotar  bikeym  maabl'. 

In  a  shot  taim  wiy  hged  browkn'  of  widh  auar  hsemaz  howl 
pokit  fulz  ov  stselaktaits  and  petrifaid  mos.  Dhear  woer  litl' 
puwlz  set  dha  said  ov  dha  key  v,  whear  wiy  kud  siy  dha  woek  ov 
konjileyshan  gowing  on,  83z  set  dha  kamensmant  ov  an  Oktowbar 
frost,  when  dha  kowld  noth  wind  boet  beali  roefl'z  dha  soefis  ov 
soem  mauntin  lokan  or  sloegish  mualand  striym,  and  showz  dha 
nyuli-fomd  niydl'z  ov  ais  glisning  from  dha  shoz  intu  dha 
wotar.  Sow  rsepid  wroz  dha  kos  ov  depazishan,  dhat  dhear  woer 
keysiz  in  which  dha  saidz  ov  dha  .holo'z  siymd  growing 
olmowst  in  praposhan  sez  dha  wotarrowz  indhem;  dha  springz 
liping  owvar,  dipozitid  dhear  mainyut  kristalz  on  dhi  ejiz,  and 
dha  rezavwoz  diypn'd  and  bikeym.  moar  kapeyshas  83z  dhear 
maundz  woer  bilt  oep  bai  dhis  kyuarias  meysanri. 

Dha  long  teliskopic  prospikt 2  ov  dha  spaakling  siy,  sez  vyud 
from  dhi  inar  ikstremiti  ov  dha  ksevan,  whail  61  araund  woz 
daak  sez  midnait — dha  scedn'  gliym  ov  dha  siy-goel,  siyn  for  a 
mowmant  from  dha  rises,  sez  it  fiitid  paast  in  dha  soanshain — 
dha  blsek  hiyving  boelk  ov  dha  grsempas,  sez  it  thruw  oep  its 
slendar  jets  ov  sprey,  and  dhen.  toening  daunwadz,  displeyd  its 
glosi  bsek  and  vaast  sengyular  fin ;  iyvn'  dha  pijanz,  sez  dhey 
shot  whizing  bai,  woen  mowmant  skeas  vizibl'  in  dha  gluwm, 
dha  nekst  reydyant  in  dha  lait — 61  akwaiad  a  nyu  intarist  from 
dha  pikyuliseriti  ov  dha  scting  in  which  wiy  so  dhem.  Dhey 
fonid  a  siariyz  ov  soen-gilt  vinyets,  freymd  in  jet ;  and  it  woz 
long  ear  wiy  taiad  ov  siy  ing  and  admaiaring  in  dhem  moech  ov 
dha  streynj  and  dha  byiitiful. 

It  did  siym  raadhar  ominas,  hauevar,  and  pahseps  soemwhot 
syupan'33charal  tu  buwt,  dhat  abaut  an  auar  aaftar  nuwn,  dha 
taid,  whail  yet  dhear  woz  a  ful  faedham  ov  wotar  biniyth  dha 
orau  ov  dha  promantari,  siyst  ttx  fol,  and  dhen,  aaftar  a  kwotar 
uv  an  aiiaz  speys  big'sen  sekchwali  tu  kriyp  oapwadz  on  dha 
biych.  Boet  joest  howping  dhat  dhear  mait  biy  soem  misteyk 
in  dha  msetar,  which  dhi  iyvning  taid  wud  skeas  feyl  tu  rek- 
tifai,  wiy  kantinyud  tu  amyuz  auaselvz,  and  tu  howp  on. 

Auar  aaftar  auar  paast,  length'ning  sez  dha  shsedo'z  length- 
Alternative  form?: — '  depths.  -  prospekt. 


20  Eiyding  Lesriz—Prowz. 

and,  and  yet  dha  laid  stil  rowz.  Dha  seen  hsed  soeugk  bihaind 
dha  presipisiz,  and  61  woz  gluwm  along  dhear  beysiz,  and  doebl' 
gluwm  in  dhear  keyvz ;  boet  dhear  roegid  brauz  stil  kot  dha  red 
glear  ov  iyvning.  Dha  floesh  rowz  haiar  and  haiar,  cheyst  bai 
dha  shsedo'z  :  and  dhen,  aaftar  linggaring  for  a  mowrnant  on 
dhear  krests  ov  hoenisoekl'  and  juwnipar,  paast  awey,  and  dha 
howl  bikeym  sombar  and  grey.  Dha  siy-goel  flsept  oepwadz 
from  whear  hiy  hsed  flowtid  on  dha  ripl',  and  haid  him  slowli 
awey  tu  hiz  loj  in  hiz  diyp-siy  stsek ;  dha  doeski  komarant 
flitid  paast,  widh  hevi'ar  and  moar  friykwant  strowk,  tu  hiz 
whaitn'd  shelf  on  dha  presipis;  dha  pijanz  keym  whizing 
daunwadz  from  dhi  oeplandz  and  dhi  opazit  Isend,  and  disapiad 
amid  dha  gluwm  ov  dhear  keyvz ;  evri  kriychar  dhat  hsed 
wingz  meyd  yus  ov  dhem  in  spiyding  howmwadz,  boet  niydhar1 
mai  kampsenyan  nor  maiself2  hsed  eni,  and  dhear  woz  now  posi- 
biliti ov  geting  howm  widhaut  dhem. 

Wiy  meyd  desparit  efats  tu  skeyl  dha  presipisiz,  and  on 
tuw  sevaral  3  akeyzhanz  saksiydid  in  riyching  midwey  shelvz 
amoeng  dha  krsegz,  whear  dha  perigrin-folkan  and  dha  reyvn' 
bild ;  best  dhow  wiy  hsed  klaimd  wel  anoef 4  tu  rendar  auar 
ritoen  a  msetar  ov  bear  posibiliti,  dhear  woz  now  posibiliti 
whotevar  ov  geting  faadhar  oep — dha  klifs  hsed  nevar  biyn 
skeyld,  and  dhey  woer  not  destind  tu  biy  skeyld  nau.  And 
sow  sez  dha  twailait  diypn'd,  and  dha  prik'eri'as  futing  bikeym 
evri  mowmant  moar  dautful  and  prik'eri'as,  wiy  hsed  joest  tu 
giv  cep  in  dispear. 

"  Wudn't  kear  for  miself,"  5  sed  dha  puar  litl'  felo',  mai 
kampsenyan,  boesting  intu  tiaz,  "  if  it  woer  not  for  mai  ° 
inoedhar  ;  boet  whot  wil  mai u  mcedhar  sey  ?  "  "  Wudn't  kear 
niydhar,"  sed  ai,  widh  a  hevi  haat ;  "boet  it  s  josst  bsekwotar, 
and  wiy  I7  get  aut  set  twelv."  Wiy  ritriytid  tagedhar  intu  woen 
ov  dha  shselo'ar  and  draiar  keyvz,  and  kliaring  a  litl'  spot  ov 
its  roef  stownz,  and  dhen  growping  along  dha  roks  for  dha  drai 
.^raas,  dhat  in  dha  spring  siyzan  hsengz  from  dhem  in  widhad 
^oefts,  wiy  fomd  for  auaselvz  a  mowst  oenk'cemfatabl'  bed,  and 
ley  daun  in  woen  anoedhaz  aamz. 

Alternative  forms : — l  naidhar.         2  miself.        3  sevral. 
4  iii-oef.          5  maiself.         c  11  i.         7  wil. 


A  Boiz  AdvencTiaz.  21 

For  dha  laast  fyu  auaz  mauntinas  pailz  ov  klaudz  heed  biyn 
raizing,  daak  and  stomi  in  dha  siy-mauth,  and  dhey  hsed  Head 
potentasli  in  dha  seting  seen,  and  hsed  won,  widh  dha  diklain 
ov  iyvning,  olmowst  evri  miytiorik  tint  ov  senggar,  from  faiari 
red  tu  a  sombar  thcendaras  braun,  and  from  sombar  braun  tu 
dowlful  blsek,  and  wiy  kud  nau,  get  liyst,  hiar  whot  dhey  po- 
tendid,  dhow  wiy  kud  now  longgar  siy.  Dha  raizing  wind 
big'sen  tu  haul  monfuli  amid  dha  klifs,  and  dha  siy,  hidhatu 
sow  sailant,  tu  biyt  hevili  agenst l  dha  shoar,  and  tu  buwm, 
laik  distress  goenz,  from  dha  risesiz  ov  dha  tuw  diyp-siy  keyvz. 
Wiy  kud  hiar,  tuw,  dha  biytiug  reyn,  nau  hevi'ar,  nau  laitar. 
sez  dha  goests  sweld  or  ssengk  ;  and  dhi  intamitant  psetar  ov  dha 
striymlit  owvar  dha  diypar  keyv,  nau  draiving  agenst1  dha 
presipisiz,  nau  disending  hevili  on  dha  stownz. 

Tuw'odz 3  midnait  dha  skai  kliad,  and  dha  wind  fel,  and  dha 
muwn  in  hoer  laast  kwotar  rowz  red  sez  a  mas  ov  hiytid  aian 
aut  ov  dha  siy.  Wiy  krept  daun  in  dhi  oensoetin  lait,  owvar 
dha  reef  slipari  krsegz,  tu  sesateyn  whedhar  dha  taid  heed  not 
foln'  safishantli  faar  tu  yiyld  oes  a  psesij,  boat  wiy  faund  dha 
weyvz  cheyfing  amoeng  dha  roks,  joest  whear  dha  taid-lain  heed 
restid  twelv  auaz  bifoar,  and  a  ful  fsedham  ov  siy  inklaasping 
dha  beys  ov  dha  promantari. 

A  glimaring  aidia  ov  dha  rial  neychar  ov  auar  sityueyshan 
set  length  krost  mai  maind.  It  woz  not  imprizanmant  for  a  taid 
tu  which  wiy  haed  kansaind  auaselvz ;  it  woz  imprizanmant  for 
a  wiyk.  Dhear  woz  litl'  koemfat  in  dha  thot,  araizing,  aaz  it 
did,  amid  dha  chilz  and  teraz  ov  a  driari  midnait,  and  ai  lukt 
wistfuli  on  dha  siy  sez  auar  ownli  paath  ov  iskeyp.  Dhear  woz  a 
vesl'  krosing  dha  weyk  ov  dha  muwn  set  dha  taim,  skeas  haaf 
a  mail  from  dha  shoar,  and  asistid  bai  mai  kampyenyan,  ai  big'sen 
tu  shaut  set  dha  top  ov  mai  losngz,  in  dha  howp  ov  biying  hoed 
bai  dha  seylaz.  Wiy  so  hoer  dim  boelk  foling  slowli  athwot 
dha  red  glitaring  belt  ov  lait  dhat  hsed  rendad  hoer  vizibl',  and 
dhen  disapiaring  in  dha  moeki  blseknis ;  and  joest  sez  wiy  lost 
sait  ov  hoer  for  evar,  wiy  kud  hiar  an  indistingkt  saund  ming- 
gling  widh  dha  dsesh  ov  dha  weyvz — dha  shaut  in  riplai  ov 
dha  staatl'd  helmzman. 

Alternative  forms : — l  ageynst.         -  todz. 


22  Rii/Jing  Lesn'z — Provcz. 

Dha  vesl',  sez  wiy  aaftawadz  loent,  woz  a  laaj  stown-laitar, 
diypli  leydn',  and  oenfoenisht  widh  a  bowt ;  nor  woer  hoer 
kruw  set  61  shuar  dhat  it  wud  hsev  biyn  seyf  tu  atend  tu  dha 
midnait  vois  from  amid  dha  roks,  iyvn'  hsed  dhey  dha  miynz  ov 
kamyunikeyshan  widh  dha  shoar.  Wiy  weytid  on  and  on, 
hauevar,  nau  shauting  bai  toenz,  and  nau  shauting  tagedhar, 
boetdhear  woz  now  sekand  riplai ;  and  set  length  luwzing  howp, 
wiy  growpt  auar  wey  bsek  tu  auar  koemfatlis  bed,  joest  sez  dha 
taid  hsed  agen  1  toend  on  dha  biych,  and  dha  weyvz  big'sen  tu 
rowl  oepwadz,  haiar  and  haiar  set  evri  dsesh. 

jEz  dha  muwnrowz  and  braitn'd,  aihaed  saksiydid  in  droping 
sez  saundli  asliyp  sez  mai  kampsenyan,  when  wiy  woer  bowth 
arauzd  bai  a  laud  shaut.  Wiy  staatid  oep,  and  agen  krept 
daunwadz  amceng  dha  krsegz  tu  dha  shoar,  and  sez  wiy  riycht 
dha  siy,  dha  shaut  woz  ripiytid.  It  woz  thset  ov  set  liyst  a 
doezn'  haash  voisiz  yunaitid.  Dhear  woz  a  briyf  poz,  folo'd  bai 
anoedhar  shaut,  and  dhen  tuw  bowts,  strongli  insend,  shot  raund 
dha  westan  promantari,  and  shautid  yet  ageyn. 

Dha  howl  taun  hsed  biyn  alaamd  bai  dhi  intelijans  dhat  tuw 
litl'  boiz  hsed  strsegl'd  awey  in  dha  moning  tu  dha  roks  ov  dha 
sosdhan  Syutor,  and  hsed  not  faund  dhear  wey  bsek.  Dha 
presipisiz  hsed  biyn  a  siyn  ov  fraitful  seksidants  from  taim 
iminrori'al,  and  it  woz  set  woens  infoed  dhat  ween  oedhar  ssed 
seksidant  hsed  biyn  sedid  tu  dha  noembar.  Truw,  dhear  woer 
keysiz  rimembad  ov  piypl'  hseving  biyn  taid-baund  in  dha 
Duwkot  keyvz,  and  not  moech  woes  in  konsikwans,  boet  sez  dha 
keyvz  woer  inseksesibl'  iyvn'  dyuaring  niyps,  wiy  kud  not,  it 
woz  sed,  posibli  biy  in  dhem ;  send  dha  sowl  rimeyning  graund 
ov  howp  woz,  dhat  sez  hsed  hsepn'd  woens  bifoar,  ownli  woen  ov 
dha  tuw  hsed  biyn  kild,  and  that  dhi  soevaivar  woz  linggaring 
amoeng  dha  roks,  afreyd  tu  koem  howm.  And  in  dhis  biliyf, 
when  dha  muwn  rowz,  and  dha  soef  fel,  dha  tuw  bowts  hsed 
biyn  fitid  aut. 

It  woz  leyt  in  dha  moning  ear  wiy  riycht  Kromati,  boet  a 

kraud  on   dha   biych   aweytid   auar  araivl' ;  and   dhear   woer 

angshas-luking     laits     glaansing     in    dha    windo'z,    thik    and 

insenifowld ;    ney,  soech  woz   dhi    intarist    ilisitid,   dhat  srem 

Alternative  form  : — '  ageyn. 


Dha  Diskantentid  Pendyulam.  23 

in'omasli  bsed  voes,  in  which  dha  raitar  diskraibd  dhi  insidant 
a  fyu  deyz  aaftar,  bikeym  popyular  anoef  1  tu  biy  hgendid  abaut 
in  insenyuskript,  and  red  set  tiy-paatiz  bai  dhi  eyliyt  ov  dha 
taun. 


DHA  DISKANTENTID  PENDYULAM. 

Anowld  klok  dhat  hsed  stud  for  fif ti  yoez 2  in  a  faamaz  kichin., 
widhaut  giving  its  ownar  eni  koz  ov  kampleynt,  oeli  woen  soemaz 
moning,  bifoar  dha  fsemili  \voz  steering,  scedn'li  stopt.  Apon 
dhis  dha  daial-pleyt  (if  wiy  mey  kredit  dha  feybl')  cheynjd 
kauntinans  widh  alaam,  dha  hsendz  meyd  an  inifektywal 3  efat 
tu  kantinyu  dhear  kos,  dha  whiylz  rimeynd  mowshanlis  widh 
sapraiz,  dha  weyts  hoeng  spiychlis,  iych  membar  felt  dispowzd 
tu  ley  dha  bleym  on  dhi  oedhaz. 

jEt  length  dha  daial  instityutid  a  fomal  inkwaiari  intu  dha 
koz  ov  dha  stop,  when  hsendz,  whiylz,  weyts,  widh  woan  vois, 
pro'testid  dhear  ino'sans  ; 4  boat  nau  a  feynt  tik  woz  hoed  bilow 
from  dha  pendyialam,  huw  dhoes  spowk  :  "  Ai  kanfes  maiself  5  tu 
biy  dha  sowl  koz  ov  dha  prezant  stopij,  and  ai  sem  wiling,  for 
dha  jenaral  ssetisfaekshan,  tu  asain  mai  riyzn'z.  Dha  truwth 
iz,  dhat  ai  sem  taiad  ov  tiking." 

Apon  hiaring  dhis,  dhi  owld  klok  bikeym  sow  inreyjd,  dhat 
it  woz  on  dha  veri  point  ov  straiking.  "  Leyzi  waiar  ! "  iks- 
klej^md  dha  daial-pleyt.  "  JEz  tu  dheet,"  riplaid  dha  pendyu- 
lam  ;  "  it  iz  vaastli  iyzi  for  J7u,  Mistris  Daial,  huw  hsev  olwiz, 
eez  evribodi  nowz,  set  yoself  oep  aboav  miy — it  iz  vaastli  iyzi 
for  yu,  ai  sey,  tu  akyuz  oadhar  piypl'  ov  leyzinis — yu,  huw  hsev 
hsed  noething  tu  duw  61  dha  deyz  ov  yor  laif  beet  tu  stear  piypl' 
in  dha  feys,  and  tu  amyuz  yoself  widh  woching  61  dhat  gowz 
on  in  dha  kichin  !  Thingk,  ai  bisiych  yu,  hau  yu  wud  laik  tu 
biy  sheet  oep  for  laif  in  dhis  daak  klozit,  and  wseg  bsekwadz  and 
fowadz,  yoer  aaftar  yoer,  sez  ai  duw." 

"  A\7hai,"  sed  dha  daial,  "  iz  dhear  not  a  windo'  in  yor  haus 
on  poepas  for  yu  tu  luk  thruw  ?  "  "  For  61  dheet,"  rizyumd  dha 

Alternative  forms : — '  in-oef.         -  }"iaz.         3  inifekchwal.          4  inasn's. 


24  Riyding  Lesrfz — Prowz. 

pendyulam,  "  oldhow  dhear  iz  a  windo',  ai  dear  not  stop,  iyvn' 
for  an  instant,  tu  luk  aut.  Bisaidz,  ai  sem  riali  taiad  ov  mai  wey 
ov  laif;  and,  if  yu  pliyz,  ai  I1  tel  yu  hau  ai  tuk  dhis  disg'cest  set 
mai  imploimant.  Dhis  moning,  ai  hsepn'd  tu  biy  kselkyuleyting 
hau  meni  taimz  ai  shud  hsev  tu  tik  in  dha  kos  ownli  ov  dha 
nekst  foar-and-twenti  auaz — pahseps  seem  ov  yu  aboev  dhear 
ksen  giv  raiy  dhi  igz'sekt  seem."  Dha  minit  hsend,  biying  kwik 
set  h'gaz,  instantli  riplaid,  "  Ey  ti-siks  thauzand  foar  hoandrad 
taimz." 

"  Igz'sekli  sow,"  riplaid  dha  pendyulam ;  "  wel,  ai  apiyl  tu  yu 
61,  if  dha  veri  thot  ov  dhis  woz  not  anoaf  2  tu  fatiyg  woen  ;  and' 
when  ai  big'sen  tu  moeltiplai  dha  strowks  ov  woen  dey  bai  dhowz 
ov  moanths  and  yoez,3  riali  it  iz  now  woandar  if  ai  felt  disk'oarijd 
set  dha  prospikt  :4  sow  aaftar  a  grej't  diyl  ov  riyzn'ing  and 
heziteyshan,  thingks  ai  tu  maiself — ai  1 *  stop  !  " 

Dha  daial  kud  skeasli  kiyp  its  kauntinans  dyuaring  dhis 
harseng  ;  boat  rizyuming  its  grseviti,  dhoas  riplaid :  "  Diar  Mistar 
Pendyulam,  ai  sem  riali  astonisht  dhat  seech  a  yusful  ind'oastri'as 
poesn'  sez  yoself  shud  hsev  biyn  owvak'oam  bai  dhis  sajeschan. 
It  iz  truw,  yu  hsev  doen  a  greyt  diyl  ov  woek  in  yor  taim ;  sow 
hsev  wiy  61,  and  aar  laikli  tu  duw,  and  dhow  dhis  mey  fatiyg 
oas  tu  thingk  ov,  dha  kweschan  iz,  wil  it  fatiyg  oas  tu  duw  ? 
Wud  yu  nau  duw  miy  dha  feyvar  tu  giv  abaut  haaf-a-dcezn' 
strowks  tu  ilastreyt  mai  aagyumant  ?  "  Dha  pendyulam  karu- 
plaid,  and  tikt  siks  taimz  at  its  yuzhwal  peys. 

"  Kau,"  rizyumd  dha  daial,  "  woz  dhset  igz'oeshan  fatiyging 
tu  yu  ?  "  "  Not  in  dha  liyst,"  riplaid  dha  pendyulam,  "  it  iz 
not  ov  siks  strowks  dhat  ai  kampleyn,  nor  ov  siksti,  boat  ov 
milyanz."  "Veri  gud,"  riplaid  dha  daial ;  "  boat  rekalekt,  dhat 
oldhow  yu  mey  thingk  ov .  a  milyan  strowks  in  an  instant,  yu 
aar  rikwaiad  tu  eksikyut  boat  ween ;  and  dhat  hauevar  ofn'  yu 
mey  hiaraaftar  hsev  tu  swing,  a  mowmant  wil  olwiz  biy  givn' 
yu  tu  swing  iu." 

"  Dhset  kansidareyshan  stsegaz  miy,  ai  kanfes,"  sed  dha 
pendyulam. 

"  Dhen  ai  howp,"  sedicl   dha  daial-pleyt,  "  wiy  shsel  61  imiy- 

Altcrnatii-e forms :— 1  wil.         2  in'oef.         3  yiaz.         4  prospekt. 


Dha  Litl'  Drcemar-Boi.  25 

jitli  ritoen  tu  auar  dyuti,  for  dim  meydz  wil  lai  in  bed  til  nu\vn, 
if  wiy  stsend  aidling  dhoes." 

Apon  dhis,  dha  weyts,  huw  hsed  nevar  biyn  akyuzd  ov  lait 
kondoekt,  yuzd  61  dhear  influ'ans  in  oejing  him  tu  pro'siyd ; 
when,  sez  widh  woen  kansent,  dha  whiylz  big'sen  tu  toen,  dha 
hsendz  big'sen  tu  muwv,  dha  pendyulam  big'sen  tu  swing,  and 
tu  its  kredit,  tikt  eez  laud  sez  evar ;  whail  a  biym  ov  dha  raizing 
seen,  dhat  striymd  thruw  a  howl  in  dha  kichin  shoetar,  shaining 
ful  apon  dha  daial-pleyt,  meyd  it  braitn'  oep  sez  if  noething  heed 
biyn  dha  msetar. 

When  dha  faamar  keym  daun  tu  brekfast,  hiy  diklead,  apon 
luking  set  dha  klok,  dhat  hiz  woch  hsed  geynd  haaf  an  auar  in 
dha  nait.  —Jane  Taylor. 

DHA  LITL'  DRCEMAR-BOI. 

"Woen  kowld  DIsembar  moning,  abaut  dha  bigining  ov  dhis 
senchari,  a  French  aami  woz  krosing  dhi  ^Elps.  Dha  men  lukt 
thin  and  hevi-aid  from  wont  ov  f uwd  and  sliyp  ;  and  dha  puar 
hosiz  dhat  woer  drseging  dha  hevi  goenz  stcembl'd  set  olmowst x 
evri  step. 

Beet  dhear  woz  ween  in  dhset  aami  huw  siymd  tu  injoi  dha 
roef  maaching,  and  huw  trsempt  along  thruw  dha  diyp  snow  and 
kowld  grey  mist,  sez  merili  sez  if  hiy  woer  gowing  tu  a  piknik. 
Hiy  woz  a  litl'  droemar-boi,  ten  yoez  2  owld,  huwz  fresh,  rowzi 
feys  lukt  veri  brait  and  priti  amoeng  dha  grim,  skaad  feysiz 
ov  dhi  owld  sowljaz.  When  dha  kceting  wind  whoeld  a  shauar 
ov  snow  in  hiz  feys,  hiy  dsesht  it  awey  widh  a  laaf,  and  awowk 
dhi  eko'z  widh  dha  laivli  rsetl'  ov  hiz  drcem,  til  it  siymd  dhat 
dha  hyuj  blsek  roks  araund  woer  61  ringing  in  koras. 

"  Braavow,  litl'  droemar ! "  kraid  a  tol  msen  in  a  shsebi  grey 
klowk.  Dhis  ofisar  woz  maaching  set  dha  hed  ov  dha  lain  widh 
a  long  powl  in  hiz  hsend,  which  hiy  strosk  intu  dha  snow  evri 
nau  and  dhen,  tu  siy  hau  diyp  it  woz.  u  Braavow,  Pyer,  mai 
boi !  Widh  soech  myuzik  sez  dhset,  woen  kud  maach  61  dha  wey 
tu  Mosko' !  " 

Dha  boi  smaild,  and  reyzd  hiz  hsend  tu  hiz  ksep  in  salyut ; 
Alternative  forms : — l  olmowst.  2  yiaz. 


26  Riyding  Lesn'z — Prowz. 

for  dhis  roef-luking  msen  woz  now  oedhar  dhsen  dha  jenaral  him-i 
self — "  Faiting  Msekdonald,"  sez  hiy  woz  kold — woen  ov  dha 
breyvist  sowljaz  in  Fraans,  ov  huwm  hiz  men  yust  tu  sey  dhat 
woen  salt  ov  hiz  feys  in  bsetl'  woz  woeth  a  howl  rejimant. 

Jcest  dhen  a  streynj,  oenoethli  saund  woz  hoed  faar  awey  cep 
dha  greyt  whait  mauntin-said.  Evri  mowmant  it  gruw  laudar 
and  haashar,  til  set  length  it  sweld  intu  a  diyp,  hos  roar. 
"  On  yor  feysiz,  Isedz  !  "  shautid  dha  jenaral.  "  An  sevalaansh 
iz  kceming." 

Bifoar  hiz  men  hsed  taim  tu  o'bey,  dha  ruwin  woz  on  dhem. 
Daun  thoendad  dha  trimendas  mses  ov  snow,  swiyping  laik  a 
wotafol  along  dha  nsero'  lej-paath;  and,  krseshing  along  widh  it, 
keym  hiyps  ov  stownz  and  grsevl'  and  luws  ceth,  and  cepruwtid 
bushiz,  and  greyt  bloks  ov  ais.  For  a  mowmant  61  woz  daak 
sez  nait;  and  when  dhi  sevalaansh  hsed  paast,  meni  ov  dha 
breyv  felo'z  huw  heed  biyu  stsending  on  dha  paathi  woer  now- 
whear  tu  biy  siyn.  Dhey  hsed  biyn  kserid  owvar  dha  presipis, 
and  woer  iydhar l  kild  or  berid  alaiv  in  dha  snow. 

When  dhear  woz  a  chaans  tu  Ink  araund,  woen  krai  arowz 
from  niali  evri  mauth :  "  Whear  iz  auar  droemar  ?  Whear  iz 
auar  litl'  droemar-boi  ?  " 

Ol  set  weens,  faar  bilow  dhem,  aut  ov  dha  daak,  cennown  goelf 
dhat  ley  bitwi/yn  dhowz  frauning  roks,  arowz  dha  feynt  rowl 
ov  a  drcem,  biyting  dha  chaaj  !  Dha  sowljaz  staatid,  and  bent 
iygali  fowad  tu  lisn'.  Dhen  went  cep  a  shaut  dhat  shuk  tin  ear  ! 
"Hiy  iz  alaiv,  koemridz  !  Auar  Pyer  iz  alaiv,  aaftar  01!  Hiy 
iz  biyting  hiz  drcem  stil,  laik  a  breyv  Ised  !  Hiy  wontid  tu  hsev 
dhi  owld  myuzik  tu  dha  veri  laast !  Beet  wiy  incest  seyv  him, 
l?edz,  or  hiy  I2  friyz  tu  deth  daun  dhear.  Hiy  moest  biy  seyvd!" 

"Hiy  shsel  biy!"  browk  in  a  diyp  vois ;  and  dha  jenaral 
himself  woz  siyn  standing  on  dha  bringk  ov  dha  presipis, 
throwing  of  hiz  klowk. 

"  Now,  now,  jenaral !  "  kraid  dha  grenadiaz,  widh  ween  vois ; 
"  yu  moest  not  rcen  soech  a  risk  sez  dhaet.  Let  ween  ov  ces  gow 
insted  ;  yor  laif  iz  woeth  moar  dhsen  61  ov  auaz  put  tagedhar  !  " 

"  Mai  sowljaz  aar  mai  childran,"  aansad  Maekdonald,  kwaiatli, 
"  and  now  faadhar  groejiz  hiz  own  laif  tu  seyv  hiz  seen.  Kwik 
Alternative  forms : — '  aidhar.  -  wil. 


Dha  LitV  Drcemar-Boi.  27 

nau,  bolz !  Kaast  luvvs  dha  drseg-rowp  ov  dhset  ksenan,  luwp  it 
cendar  mai  aamz,  and  let  miy  daun." 

Dha  sowljaz  o;beyd  in  sailans  ;  and  dim  riekst  mowmant  dhear 
breyv,  tendar-haatid  jenaral  woz  swinging  in  mid-ear,  daun, 
daun,  til  hiy  vsenisht  intu  dha  kowld,  blsek  debth1  bilow. 
Msekdonald  Isendid  seyfli  set  dha  fat  ov  dha  presipis,  and  lukt 
sengshasli  araund  in  soech  ov  Pyer ;  beet  dha  biy ting  ov  dha 
droem  haed  siyst,  and,  in  dhset  oful  sailans,  dhear  woz  noething 
tu  gaid  dha  breyv  jenaral. 

"  Pyer !  "  hiy  shautid,  83Z  laudli  sez  hiy  kud,  "  whear  aar  yu, 
mai  boi  ?  " 

"  Hiar,  jenaral !  "  aansad  a  wiyk  vo!s. 

And,  shuar  anoef, 2  dhear  woz  dha  litl'  felo',  haaf  berid  in  a 
hyuj  maund  ov  soft  3  snow.  Msekdonald  went  tuwodz  4  him  at 
woans,  and  oldhow  hiy  ssengk  weyst-diyp  set  evri  step,  set  laast 
riycht  dha  spot. 

Ol  rait  nau,  mai  breyv  boi ! "  sed  dha  jenaral.  Tearing  of 
hiz  ssesh,  and  noting  woen  end  ov  it  tu  dha  rowp,  hiy  baund 
Pyer  and  himself  foemK  tagedhar  widh  dhi  oedhar  end,  and  dhen 
gey  v  dha  signal  tu  dro  oep. 

When  dha  tuw  keym  swinging  oep  woens  moar  intu  dha  dey- 
lait,  and  dha  sowljaz  so  dhear  pet  stil  alaiv  and  renhoet,  chiar 
apon  chiar  raeng  aut,  rowling  faar  bsek  along  dha  lain,  til  dha 
veri  mauntinz  dhamselvz  5  siymd  tu  rijois. 

"  Wiy  v 6  biyn  oendar  faiar  and  oendar  snow  tagedhar,"  sed 
Msekdonald,  cheyfing  dha  boiz  kowld  hsendz  tendali,  "  and 
noething  shsel  paat  oes  aaftar  dhis,  sow  long  sez  wiy  bowth  liv." 

And  dha  jenaral  kept  hiz  woed.  Yoez 7  leytar,  when  dha 
greyt  woz  woer  61  owvar,  dhear  mait  hsev  biyn  siyn,  woking  in 
dha  gaacln'  ov  a  kwaiat  koentri  haus  in  dha  sauth  ov  Fraans,  a 
stuwping  whait-head  owld  msen,  huw  woz  now  oedhar  dhgen  dha 
i'eymas  Maashal  Msekdonald ;  and  dha  tol,  sowljar-laik  felo' 
apon  huwz  aam  hiy  liynd  for  sapot  hsed  woens  biyn  litl'  Pyer. 
dha  droemar. 

Alternative  forms: — l  depth.       -  in-oef.       3  soft.       4  todz. 
5  dhemselvz.         6  lieev.         7  yiaz. 


28  Riydhig  Lesn'z — Protcz. 

DHA  JAUF. 
From  Peel  grey  vz  Areybya. 

A  brod  diyp  vseli,  disending  lej  aaftar  lej  til  its  inamowst 
debths1  aar  hidn'  from  sait  amid  faar-riyching  shelvz  ov  redish 
rok,  bilovv  evriwhear  stoedid  widh  toefts  ov  paam  growvz  and 
kloestaring  fruwt-triyz  in  daak-griyn  psechiz  daun  tu  dha 
faadhist  end  ov  its  waindingz  ;  a  laaj  braun  mses  ov  iregyular 
meysanri  krauning  a  sentral  hil ;  biyond  a  tol  and  solitari  tauar 
owvaliiking  dhi  opazit  bsengk  ov  dha  holo',  and  faadhar  daun 
smol  raund  toerits  and  fiaet  haus-tops  haaf  berid  amid  dha 
gaadn'  fowlyij,  dha  howl  ploenjd  in  a  poepandikyular  floed  ov 
lait  and  hiyt ;  soech  woz  dha  foest  sespikt  ov  dha  Jauf  sez  wiy 
nau  aprowcht  it  from  dha  west.  It  woz  a  loevli  siyn,  and  siymd 
yet  moar  sow  tu  auar  aiz,  wiari  ov  dha  long  dezo'leyshan  thruw 
which  wiy  hsed,  widh  haadli  an  iksepshan,  joenid  dey  aaftar 
dey  sins  auar  laast  fearwel  glimps  ov  Geyza  and  Pselistain  oep 
tu  dha  foest  entrans  on  inh'gebitid  Areybya.  "Laik  dha 
Pseradais  ov  iytoeniti,  noan  keen  entar  it  til  aaftar  hgeving 
priyvyasli  paast  owvar  hel-brij,"  sez  an  ^Erab  powit,  diskraibing 
seem  similar  lowkseliti  in  ./Eljiari'an  Isendz. 

Riysenimeytid  bai  dha  vyu,  wiy  pusht  on  auar  jeydid  biysts, 
and  woer  olredi  disending  dha  foest  krpegi  slowps  ov  dha  vseli, 
when  tuw  hosman,  wel  drest  and  full  aamd  aaftar  dha  fseshau 
ov  dhiyzpaats,  keym  oep  tuwod2  oes  from  dha  taun,  and  set  woens 
salyutid  oes  widh  a  laud  and  haati  "  Marhaba,"*  or  "  Welkam  "  ; 
and  widhaut  faadhar  prefas  dhey  sedid,  "  Alait  and  iyt."  giving 
dhemselvz 3  dhi  igzaampl'  ov  dha  fomar  bai  disending  briskli 
from  dhear  lait  limd  hosiz,  and  oentaiing  a  laaj  ledhar  baeg  ful 
ov  eksalant  deyts,  and  a  wotar-skin,  fild  from  dha  roaning 
spring ;  dhen  spreding  ant  dhiyz  mowst  opat}run  rifreshmants 
on  dha  rok,  and  seding :  "  Wiy  woer  shuar  dhat  yu  incest  biy 
hoenggri  and  thoesti,  sow  wiy  hsev  koem  redi  pro'vaidid,"  dhey 
invaitid  oes  woens  moar  tu  sit  daun  and  bigin. 

*  a  represents  a  short  vowel  corresponding  with  an  ;  see  p.  87. 
Alternative  forms : — J  depths.  2  tod.  3  dhams  -Ivz. 


Dha  So'saiiti  ov  Buks.  29 


DHA  SO'SAIITI  ov  BUKS. 

Yu  wil  admit,  dautlis,  dhat  akoding  tu  dha  sinseriti  ov  auar 
dizaiar  dhat  auar  frendz  mey  biy  truw,  and  auar  kampsenyanz 
waiz,  and  in  pro'poshan l  tu  dhi  oenistnis  and  diskreshan  widh 
which  wiy  chuwz  bowth,  wil  biy  dha  jenaral  2  chaansiz  ov  auar 
hsepinis  and  yusfl'nis. 

Boat  graanting  dhat  wiy  haed  bowth  dha  wil  and  dha  sens  tu 
chuwz  auar  frendz  wel,  hau  fyu  ov  oes  hsev  dha  paaar !  or,  set' 
liyst.  hau  limitid,  for  mowst,  iz  dha  sfiar  ov  chois !  Niali  61 
auar  asowshieyshanz  aar  ditoemind  bai  chaans  or  nisesiti,  and 
ristriktid  widhin  a  nsero'  soekl'.  Wiy  kaenot  now  huwm  wiy 
wud,  and  dhowz  huwm  wiy  now  wiy  kaenot  hsev  set  auar  said 
when  wiy  mowst  niyd  dhem.  6l  dha  haiar  soekl'z  ov  hyuman 
intelijans  aar,  tu  dhowz  biniyth,  ownli  mowmantarili  and 
paashali  owpn'.  Wiy  mey,  bai  gud  fochan,  abteyn  a  glimps  ov 
a  greyt  powit,  and  hiar  dha  saund  ov  hiz  vois  ;  or  put  a  kwes- 
chan  tu  a  msen  ov  saians,  and  biy  aansad  gud-yumadli. 

WTiy  mey  intruwd  ten  minits  tok  on  a  ksebinit  ministar, 
aansad  probabli  widh  woedz  woes  dhsen  sailans,  biying  diseptiv; 
or  snsech.  woens  or  twais  in  auar  laivz,  dha  privilij  ov  throwing 
a  bukey  in  dha  paath  ov  a  prinses,3  or  aresting  dha  kaind  glaans 
ov  a  kwiyn.  And  yet  dhiyz  mowmantari  chaansiz  wiy  koevit, 
and  spend  auar  yoez,4  and  pseshanz,  and  pauaz  in  poesyiit  ov 
!itl'  moar  dhsen  dhiyz,  whail  miyntaim  dhear  iz  a  so'saiiti 
kaiitiuywali  o\vpn'  tu  oes  ov  piypl'  huw  wil  tok  tu  ces  sez  long 
?ez  wiy  laik,  whotevar  auar  rsengk  or  okyupeyshan — tok  tu  oes 
in  dha  best  woedz  dhey  keen  chuwz  and  ov  dha  thingz  niarist 
dhear  haats.  And  dhis  so'saiiti,  bikoz  it  iz  sow  nyumaras  and 
sow  jentl';  and  keen  biy  kept  weyting  raund  oes  61  dey  long — 
kingz  and  steytsman  linggaring  peyshantli,  not  tu  graant 
odyans,  boet  tu  geyn  it — in  dhowz  pleynli  foenisht  and  nsero' 
senti-ruwmz,  auar  bukkeys-shelvz,  wiy  meyk  now  akaunt  ov 
dhset  koempani,  pahseps  nevar  lisn'  tu  a  woed  dhey  wud  sey  61 
dey  long. 

—  Ruskin  :  "  Sesame  and  Lilies" 

Alternative  forms: — '  prapCshaii.         -'  jenral.         3  prinses.         4  yiaz. 


POWITE1. 

DHA  STRIYT  ov  BAI-AND-BAI. 

Ow  shoen  dha  spot,  mai  yuthful  frendz,  ai  oej  yu  tu  biwear! 
Bigailing  iz  dha  plezn't  wey,  and  softli1  briydhz  dhi  ear; 
Yet  noen  hsev  evar  paasttu  siynz  inowbling,  greyt  and  hai, 
Huw  woens  big'sen  tu  linggar  in  dha  striyt  ov  Bai-and-bai. 

Hau  verid  aar  dhi  imijiz  araizing  tu  mai  sait, 

Ov  dhowz  huw  wisht  tu  shoen  dha  rong,  huw  loevd  and  praizd 

dha  rait, 

Yet  from  dha  silkn'  bondz  ov  slowth  dhey  veynli  strowv  tu  flai, 
Which  held  dhem  jentli  prizn'd  in  dha  striyt  ov  Bai-and-bai. 

"Mai  projikts  thraiv,"  dha  moechant  sed;  "when  dcebl'd  iz  mai 

stoar, 

Hau  friyli  shael  mai  redi  gowld  biy  shauad  amoeng  dha  puar !  " 
Vaast  gruw  hiz  welth,  yet  strowv  hiy  not  dha  monaz  tiar  tu 

drai : 
Hiy  nevar  joenid  onwad  from  dha  striyt  ov  Bai-and-bai ! 

"  Fogiv  2  dhai  oering  broedhar ;  hiy  hsez  wept  and  soefad  long  !  " 
Ai  sed  tu  woan ;  huw  aansad — "  Hiy  hseth  dcen  miy  griyvas 

rong; 

Yet  wil  ai  siyk  mai  broedhar,  and  fagiv  him  ear  ai  dai." 
Alaas !  Deth  shotli  faund  him  in  dha  striyt  ov  Bai-and-bai ! 

Dha  wiarid  woeldling  myuziz  apon  lost 3  and  weystid  deyz, 
Rizolvd  tu  toen  hiardaftar  from  dhi  erar  ov  hiz  weyz, 
Tu  lift- hiz  grovling4  thots  from  oeth,  and  fiks  dhem  on  dha  skai ; 
AVhai  dosz  hiy  linggar  fondli  in  dha  striyt  ov  Bai-and-bai  ? 

Alternative  forms : — 1  softli.       2  fagiv.       3  lost. 

30 


Dha  Jcekdo  ov  Riymz.  31 

Dhen  shoen  dha  spot,  mai  yuthful  frendz  ;  woek  on  whail  yet  yu 

mey; 

Let  not  owld  eyj  oteyk  l  yu  sez  yu  slowthfl'i  diley, 
Lest  yu  shud  geyz  araund  yu,  and  disk'oevar  widh  a  sai, 
Yu  haev  riycht  dha  haus  ov  "Nevar" — bai  dha  striyt  ov  "Bai- 

and-bai." 

— Abdy. 

DHA  J.EKDO  ov  RIYMZ. 

DHA  Jsekdo  2  sset  on  dha  Kaadinalz  chear : 
Bishap  and  sebat  and  praiar  woer  dhear ; 

Meni  a  moengk,  and  meni  a  f raiar, 

Meni  a  nait,  and  meni  a  skwaiar, 
Widh  a  greyt  meni  moar  ov  lesar  digriy, — 
In  suwth  a  gudli  koempani ; 
And  dhey  soevd  dha  Lod  Praimit  on  bendid  niy. 

Nevar,  ai  wiyn,     Woz  a  praudar  siyn, 
Red  ov  in  bnks,  or  dremt  ov  in  driymz, 
Dhsen  dha  Kaadinal  Lod  Aachbishap  ov  Riymz  ! 

In  and  aut,     Thruw  dha  motli  raut, 

Dhset  litl'  Jsekd'6  kept  hoping  abaut ; 

Hiar  and  dhear,     Laik  a  dog  in  a  fear, 

Owvar  koemfits  and  keyks,     And  dishiz  and  pleyts, 
Kaul  and  kowp,  and  rochit  and  pol, 
Maitar  and  krowzhar  !  hiy  hopt  apon  61 ! 

Widh  sosi  ear,     Hiy  poecht  on  dha  chear 

Whear,  in  steyt,  dha  greyt  Lod  Kaadinal  sset 
In  dha  greyt  Lod  Kaadinalz  greyt  red  hset ; 

And  hiy  piad  in  dha  feys     Ov  hiz  Lodships  Greys, 
W'idh  a  ssetisfaid  luk,  sez  if  hiy  wud  sey, 
"  Wiy  tuw  aar  dha  greytist  fowks  hiar  ta-dey !  " 

And  dha  priysts  widh  6,     Mz  soach  friyks  dhey  so, 
Sed,  "  Dha  Devi'  moest  biy  in  dhset  litl'  Jsekd'o  !  " 

Alternative  forms  :—1  owvat6yk.  2  Jsekd'6.  The  syllables  are  both 
'accented,  and  it  depends  on  the  position  of  the  word  which  should  have 
the  chief  stress.  It  is  on  the  second  syllable  when  the  word  is  followed 
by  a  pause. 


32  Riyding  Lesrfz — Powitri. 

Dha  fiyst  woz  owvar,  dha  bod  woz  kliad, 
Dha  flonz  and  dha  koestadz  hsed  61  disapiad, 
And  siks  litl'  singing-boiz, — diar  litl'  sowlz  ! 
In  nais  kliyn  feysiz,  and  nais  whait  stowlz, 

Keym  in  odar  dyu,     Tuw  bai  tuw, 
Maaching  dhset  grsend  rifektari  thruw ! 
A  nais  litl'  boi  held  a  gowldn'  yuar, 
Embost l  and  fild  widh  wotar  aez  pyuar 
JEz  eni  dhat  flowz  bitwiyn  E-iymz  and  Namuar  ; 
Which  a  nais  litl'  boi  stud  redi  tu  ksech 
In  a  fain  gowldn'  hsend-beysn'  meyd  tu  msech. 
Tuw  nais  litl'  boyz,  raadhar  moar  grown, 
Kserid  laevn'dar  wotar,  and  ow  da  Kalown  ; 
And  a  nais  litl'  boi  hsed  a  nais  keyk  ov  sowp, 
Woedhi  ov  woshing  dha  hsendz  ov  dha  Powp. 

Wren  litl'  boi     A  nsepkin  boar, 
Ov  dha  best  whait  daiapar,  frinjd  widh  pingk, 
And  a  kaadinalz  hset  maakt  in  "  poemanant  ingk." 

Dha  greyt  L6d  Kaadinal  toenz  set  dha  sait 
Ov  dliiyz  nais  litl'  boiz  drest  61  in  whait : 

From  hiz  finggar  hiy  droz     Hiz  kostli  2  toekwoz  •' ; 
And,  not  thingking  »t  61  abaut  litl'  Jtekd'oz, 

Dipozits  it  streyt     Bai  dha  said  ov  hiz  pleyt, 
Whail  dha  nais  litl'  boiz  on  hiz  Eminans  weyt ; 
Til,  when  nowbadi  4  z  driyming  ov  eni  soacli  thing, 
Dhset  litl'  Ja3kd'6  hops  of  widh  dha  ring ! 

Dhear  z  a  krai  and  a  shaut,     And  a  dyus  ov  a  rant 
And  nowbadi  siymz  tu  now  whot  dhear  5  abaut, 
Boat  dha  moengks  hsev  dhear  pokits  6]  toend  iusaid  aut 

Dha  fraiaz  aar  niyling     And  hoenting,  nnd  fiyling 
Dha  kaapit,  dha  floar,  and  dha  wolz,  and  dha  siyling. 

Dha  Kaadinal  druw     Of  iych  plcem-koelad  shuw, 
And  left  hiz  reel  stokings  ikspowzd  tu  dha  vyu ; 

Hiy  piyps  and  hiy  fiylz     In  dha  towz  and  dha  hiylz  ; 

Alternative  forms  : — l  imbust.  -  kostli.  3  toekwaaz 

•*  nowbodi.         5  dlicy  aar. 


Dha  Jcekdo  ov  Riymz.  33 

Dhey  toen  oep  dha  dishiz, — dhey  toen  cap  dha  pleyts, 
Dhey  teyk  oep  dha  powkar  and  powk  aut  dha  greyts, 
.  Dhey  toen  oep  dha  roegz,  Dhey  igz-semin  dha  moegz : 

Boet,  now ! — now  soech  thing; — Dhey  kaant  faind  dha  r  ing  ! 
And  dhi  JEbat  diklead  dhat,  u  when  nowbadi  twigd  it, 
Sosm  raaskl'  or  oedhar  hsed  popt  in,  and  prigd  it !  " 

Dha  Kaadinal  rowz  widh  a  dignifaid  hik, 

Hiy  kold  for  hiz  ksendl',  hiz  bel,  and  hiz  buk! 
In  howli  senggar  and  paias  griyf, 
Hiy  solamli  koest  thset  raaskali  thiyf  ! 
Hiy  koest  him  set  bod,  hiy  koest  him  in  bed  ; 
From  dha  sowl  ov  hiz  fut  tu  dha  kraun  ov  hiz  hed  ; 
Hi}'  koest  him  in  sliyping,  dhat  evari l  nait 
Hiy  shud  driym  ov  dha  devl',2  and  weyk  in  a  frait ; 
Hiy  koest  him  in  iyting,  hiy  koest  him  in  dringking, 
Hiy  koest  him  in  kofing,3  in  sniyzing.  in  wingking  ; 
Hiy  koest  him  in  siting,  in  stsending,  in  laiing, 
Hiy  koest  him  in  woking,  in  raiding,  in  fiaiing, 
Hiy  koest  him  in  living,  hiy  koest  him  in  daiing ! 

Nevar  woz  hoed  soech  a  teribl'  4  koes  ! 

Beet  whot  geyv  raiz     Tu  now  litl'  sapraiz, 

Nowbadi  5  siymd  woen  peni  dha  woes ! 

Dha  dey  woz  gon  6,     Dha  nait  keym  on, 
Dha  mcengks  and  dha  fraiaz  dhey  soecht  til  don  ; 

When  dha  saekristn'  so,     On  krcempl'd  klo, 
Koem  limping  a  puar  litl'  leym  Jsekd'6  ; 

Now  longgar  gey,     JEz  on  yestadey  7  ; 
Hiz  fedhaz  61  siymd  tu  biy  toend  dha  rong  wey, 
Hiz  pinyanz  druwpt — hiy  kud  haadli  stsend, — 
Hiz  hed  woz  sez  bold  0ez  dha  paam  ov  yor  hsend ; 

Hiz  ai  sow  dim,     Sow  weystid  iych  lim, 
Dhat,  hiydlis  ov  grsemar,  dhey  61  kraid,  " DJupt  s  him!— 
Dhtet  s  dha  sksemp  dhat  hsez  doen  dhis  sksendalas  thing ! 
Dhiet  s  dha  thiyf  dhat  hsez  got  mi  8  Lod  Kaadinalz  Ring  !  " 

Alternative  forms : — l  evri.        -  devil.        3  koilng.        4  terabl'. 
5  iio\vbodi.  °  gon.  '  ytst.idi.  -H  inai. 

I.  P.    II.  C 


34  Eiyding  Lesn'z — Powitri. 

Dha  puar  litl'  Jgekd'6,     When  dha  mcengks  hiy  so, 
Fiybli  geyv  vent  tu  dha  gowst  ov  a  ko ; 
And  toend  hiz  bold  bed,  sez  mcech  sez  tu  sey, 
"  Prey  biy  sow  gud  sez  tu  wok  dbis  wey  !  " 

Slowar  and  slowar,     Hiy  limpt  on  bifoar, 
Til  dhey  keym  tu  dha  bgek  ov  dha  belfri  doar, 

When  dha  foest  thing  dhey  so, 

Midst  dha  stiks  and  dha  stro, 

Woz  dha  ring  in  dha  nest  ov  dhset  litl'  Jsekd'6  ! 

Dhen  dha  Lod  Kaadinal  kold  for  hiz  buk, 
And  of  dhset  teribl'  koes  hiy  tuk  ; 

Dha  myut  ikspreshan1     Soevd  in  lyu  ov  kanfeshan,2 
And,  biying  dhoes  koepl'd  widh  ful  restityushan, 
Dha  Jsekdo  got  pliynari  sebso'lyushan  ! 
When  dhowz  woedz  woer  hoed,     Dhset  puar  litl'  boed 
Woz  sow  cheynjd  in  a  mowmant,  t  woz  riali  absoed.3 

Hiy  gruw  sliyk,  and  fset ;     In  adishan  tu  dhset, 
A  fresh  krop  ov  fedhaz  keym  thik  eez  a  inset ! 

Hiz  teyl  wsegl'd  moar     lyvn'  dhsen  bifoar  ; 
Boet  now  longgar  it  wsegd  widh  an  impyudant  4  ear, 
Now  louggar  hiy  poecht  on  dha  Kaadinalz  chear. 

Hiy  hopt  nau  abaut     Widh  a  geyt  divaut ; 
JEt  Msetinz,  set  Vespaz,  hiy  nevar  woz  aut ; 
And  sow  faar  from  eni  moar  pilfaring  diydz, 
Hiy  olwiz  5  siymd  teling  dha  konfesaz  c  biydz. 
If  eni  woen  laid,  or  if  eni  woen  swoar, 
Or  sloembad  in  prear-taim  and  hsepn'd  tu  snoar, 

Dhset  gud  Jsekd'6     Wud  giv  a  greyt  "  Ko," 
JEz  moech  sez  tu  sey,  "  Downt  duw  sow  eni  moar  ! ' 
Whail  meni  rimaakt,  sez  hiz  msenar  dhey  so, 
Dhat  dhey  "nevar  haed  nown  soech  a  paias  Jsekd'6  !  " 

Hiy  long  livd  dha  praid     Ov  dhset  koentri  said. 
And  set  laast  in  dhi  owdar  ov  ssengktiti  daid  ; 

When,  sez  woedz  woer  tuw  feynt,     Hiz  merits  tu  peynt, 

Alternative  forms : — l  ekspreshan.    2  konfesban.     3  sebsoed. 
4  impidant.  5  dlweyz.  6  kanfesaz,  when  properly  accented 

on  the  second  syllable,  but  the  rhythm  requires  us  here  to  shift  the  accent 
to  the  first  syllable. 


Ov  cilia  Chattel  widh  dha  Boed  cet  dha  Bush.        35 

Dha  konkleyv 1  ditoemind  tu  meyk  him  a  seynt ! 
And  on  nyuli-meyd  seynts  and  powps,  sez  yu  now, 
It  s  dha  koestam  set  Rowm,  nyu  neymz  tu  bistow, 
Sow  dhey  ksenanaizd  him  bai  dha  neym  ov  Jim  Krow ! 

— Barham. 


Ov  DHA  CHAILD  WIDH  DHA  BOED  .ET  DHA  BUSH. 

"  Mai  litl'  boed,  hau  ksenst  dhau  sit, 
And  sing  amidst  sow  meni  thonz! 
Let  miy  boet  howld  upon  dhiy  get ; 
Mai  loev  widh  onar  dhiy  adonz. 

Dhau  aat  set  prezn't  litl'  woeth ; 
Faiv  faadhingz  noen  wil  giv  for  dhiy ; 
Boat  pridhiy  litl'  boed  koem  foth ; 
Dhau  ov  moar  vselyu  aat  tu  miy, 

T  2  iz  truw,  it  iz  soenshain  3  tadey, 
Tamoro'  boedz  wil  hsev  a  stom  ; 
Mai  priti  woen,  koem  dhau  awey, 
Mai  buzam  dhen  shsel  kiyp  dhiy  worn. 

Dhau  soebjikt  aat  tu  kowld  a  4  naits, 
When  daaknis  iz  dhai  koevaring,  5 
Mi  dey  z  6  dhai  deynjar  greyt  bai  kaits, 
Hau  ksenst  dhau  dhen  sit  dhear  and  sing  ? 

Dhai  fuwd  iz  skeas  and  sksenti  tuw, 
T  iz  woemz  and  trsesh  which  dhau  doest  iyt ; 
Dhai  prezn't  steyt  ai  piti  duw, 
Koem,  ai  1 7  pro'vaid  dhiy  betar  miyt. 

Ai  1  fiyd  dhiy  widh  whait  bred  and  milk, 
And  shugarploemz,  if  dhem  dhau  kreyv  ; 
Ai  1  koevar  dhiy  widh  fainist  silk 
Dhat  from  dha  kowld  ai  mey  dhiy  seyv. 

Alternative  forms: — *  kongkleyv.      2  it.       3  s'oenshain.       4  cr 
5  koevring.       c  iz.       7  wil. 


30  Riyding  Lesn'z — Powitri. 

Mai  faadhaz  pselas  shsel  biy  dhain, 
Yey  in  it  dhau  shselt  sit  and  sing ; 
Mai  litl'  boed,  if  dhau  It l  biy  main, 
Dlia  howl  yoer  2  raund  shael  biy  dhai  spring. 

Ai  1  tiych  dhiy  61  dha  nowts  set  kot ; 
(Enth'ot  ov  myuzik  dhau  shselt  pley  ; 
And  61  dhat  dhidhar  duw  riz'ot, 
Shsel  preyz  dhiy  for  it  evri  dey. 

Ai  1  kiyp  dhiy  seyf  from  kset  and  koer, 
Now  msenar  a  3  haam  shsel  kcem  tu  dhiy ; 
Yey,  ai  wil  biy  dhai  soekarar, 
Mai  buzam  shsel  dhai  ksebin  biy." 

Boat  low,  bihowld,  dha  boed  iz  gon  ;  4 
Dhiyz  chaamingz  wud  not  ineyk  hoer  yiyld  ; 
Dha  chaild  z  left  set  dha  Bush  alown, 
Dha  boed  flaiz  yondar  oar  5  dha  fiyld. 

— John  Bunyan. 


DHA  DlSTRCEKSHAX   OV    SENMiKARIB.  6 

Dhi  Asiryan  7  keym  daun  laik  a  wulf  on  dha  fowld, 
And  hiz  kowhots  woer  gliyming  in  poepl'  and  gowld  ; 
And  dha  shiyn  ov  dhear  spiaz  woz  laik  staaz  on  dha  siy, 
When  dha  bluw  \veyv  rowlz  naitli  on  diyp 


Laik  dha  liyvz  ov  dlia  forist  when  soemar  iz  griyn, 
Dheet  howst  widh  dhear  bsenaz  set  soenset  woer  siyn  : 
Laik  dha  liyvz  ov  dha  forist  when  Otam  hseth  blown, 
Dhaet  howst  on  dha  moro'  ley  widhad  and  strown  ! 

Fur  dhi  Eynjal  9  ov  Deth  spred  hiz  wingz  on  dha  blaast, 
And  briydhd  in  dha  feys  ov  dha  fow  0ez  hiy  paast  ; 
And  dhi  air/  ov  dha  sliypaz  wsekst  dedli  and  chil, 
And  dhear  haats  beet  weens  hiyvd,  and  for  evar  gruw  stil  ! 

Alternative  forms  :  —  'wilt.        -  yiar.        3  ov.         4  p;on.        5  owvar. 
'  ''  9  eynjl'. 


Dlia  Mccrlnaz  ov  Iiiggland.  37 

And  dhear  ley  dha  stiyd  widh  hiz  nostril  61  waid, 
Beet  thruw  it  dhear  rowld  not  dha  breth  ov  hiz  praid ; 
And  dha  fowm  ov  hiz  gaasping  ley  whait  on  dha  toef, 
And  kowld  sez  dha  sprey  ov  dha  rok-biyting  soef. 

And  dhear  ley  dha  raidar  dist'otid  and  peyl, 
Widh  dha  dyu  on  hiz  brau  and  dha  roast  on  hiz  meyl ; 
And  dha  tents  woer  61  sailant,  dha  bsenaz  alown, 
Dha  laansiz  oanliftid,  dha  troempit  osnblown. 

And  dha  wido'z  ov  ^Eshar  aar  laud  in  dhear  weyl, 
And  dhi  aiclalz  *  aar  browk2  in  dha  tempi'  ov  Beyl;  3 
And  dha  mait  ov  dha  Jentail,  censmowt  bai  dha  sod, 
Hseth  meltid  laik  snow  in  dha  glaans  ov  dha  Lod ! 

— Byron. 

DHA  M.ERIXAZ  ov  INGGLAXD. 

Yiy  Mserinaz  ov  Inggland 

Dhat  gaad  auar  neytiv  siyz  ! 

HUWJJ  flaeg  hsez  breyvd,  a  thauzand  yocz, 

Dha  bsetl'  and  dha  briyz  ! 

Y6r  gloryas4  stsendad  laanch  agen5 

Tu  msech  anoedhar  fow  ; 

And  swiyp  thruw  dha  dijrp, 

Whail  dha  stomi  waindz  6  daw  blow: 

"Whail  dha  bsetl'  reyjiz  laud  and  long 

And  dha  stomi  waindz  duw  blow. 

Dha  spirits  ov  y6r  faadhaz 
Shsel  staat  from  evri  weyv — 
For  dha  dek  it  woz  dhear  fiyld  ov  feym, 
And  Owshan  woz  dhear  greyv  : 
Whear  Bleyk  and  maiti  Nelsn'  fel 
Yor  msenli  haats  shsel  glow, 
JEz  yiy  swiyp  thruw  dha  diyp, 
Whail  dha  stomi  waindz  duw  blow  ; 

Alternative  forms : — l  aidl'z.      -  brcnvkn'.      3  B;>yal.       4  glori'as. 
5  agej-n.       6  windz. 


38  Ely  ding  Lesrfz — Powitri 

Whail  dha  bsetl'  reyjiz  laud  and  long 
And  dha  stomi  waindz  duw  blow. 

Brit'senya  niydz  now  bulwoeks, 

Now  tauaz  along  dha  stiyp ; 

Hoer  maach  iz  oar x  dha  mauntin  wey  vz, 

Hoer  howm  iz  on  dha  diyp. 

Widh  thoendaz  from  hoer  neytiv  owk 

Shiy  kwelz  dha  floedz  bilow — 

JEz  dhey  roar  on  dha  shoar, 

When  dha  stomi  waindz  duw  blow ; 

When  dha  bsetl'  reyjiz  laud  and  long, 

And  dha  stomi  waindz  duw  blow. 

Dha  miytyar  flseg  ov  Inggland 

Shael  yet  terifik  boen ; 

Til  deynjaz  troebl'd  nait  dipaat 

And  dha  staar  ov  piys  ritoen. 

Dhen,  dhen,  yiy  owshan-woryaz  !  2 

Auar  song  and  fiyst  shsel  flow 

Tu  dha  feym  ov  yor  neym, 

When,  dha  stom  hsez  siyst  tu  blow ; 

When  dha  faiari  fait  iz  hoed  now  moar, 

And  dha  stom  hsez  siyst  tu  blow. 

— T.  Campbell. 

AAXSAR  TU  A  CHAILDZ  KWESCHAN. 

Duw  yu  aask  whot  dha  boedz  sey  ?     Dha  spsero',  dha  closv, 

Dha  linit,  and  throesh,  sey  "  Ai  loev  and  ai  loev ! " 

In  dha  wintar  dhear  3  sailant,  dha  wind  iz  sow  strong ; 

Whot  it  sez  ai  downt4  now,  beet  it  singz  a  laud  song. 

Boet  griyn  liyvz  and  blosamz  and  soeni  worn  wedhar, 

And  singing  and  leaving,  61  koem  baek  tagedhar. 

Boat  dha  laak  iz  sow  brimful  ov  glsednis  and  loev, 

Dha  griyn  fiyldz  bilow  him,  dha  bluw  skai  abosv, 

Dhat  hiy  singz  and  hiy  singz,  and  for  evar  singz  hiy, 

"  Ai  loev  mai  loev,  and  mai  ICBV  loevz  miy." 

— Coleridge. 

Al!arnatireformfi: — '  owvar.     2  wori'az.     3  dhcy  aar.     4  duw  not. 


Dha  Ritdiad  Kcet.  39 

DHA  PAIN-.EPL'  AND  DHA  BIT. 

Dha  pain-sepl'z  in  tripl'  row 
Woer  baasking  hot,  and  61  in  blow  : 
A  biy  ov  mowst  dizoening  teyst 
Poesiyvd  l  dha  frey  grans  sez  hiy  paast  ; 
On  iygar  wing  dha  spoilar  keym, 
And  soecht  for  krseniz  in  dha  freym, 
Oejd  hiz  ateint  on  evri  3  said, 
Tu  evri  peyn  hiz  troengk  aplaid  : 
Boat  stil  in  veyn  —  dha  freym  woz  tait, 
And  ownli  poevyas  tu  dha  lait  : 
Dhoes  hseving  weystid  haaf  hiz  dey, 
Hiy  trimd  hiz  flait  anoedhar  wey. 

Auar  diar  dilaits  aar  ofn'  soech  : 
Ekspowzd  3  tu  vyu,  boet  not  tu  toech, 
Dha  sait  auar  fuwlish  haat  infleymz, 
Wiy  long  for  pain-£epl'z  in  freymz  : 
Widh  howplis  wish  woen  luks  and  linggaz, 
Woen  breyks  dha  glaas  and  kosts  hiz  finggaz, 
Boet  dhowz  huwm  truwth  and  wizdam  liyd, 
Keen  gaedhar  hoeni  from  a  wiyd. 

—  Cowpcr. 


DHA  RITAIAD  K^ET. 

A  powits  kset,  sideyt  and  greyv 
Mz  powit  wel  kud  wish  tu  hsev, 
Woz  moech  adiktid  tu  inkwaiar, 
For  nuks  tu  which  shiy  mait  ritaiar, 
And  whear,  sikyiiar  sez  maus  in  chingk, 
Shiy  mait  ripowz,  or  sit  and  thingk. 
Soemtaimz  *  sesending  5  debanear, 
An  sepl'  triy,  or  lofti  pear, 
Lojd  widh  kanviynyans  in  dha  fok, 
Shiy  wocht  dha  gaadnar  set  hiz  woek  : 

Alternative  forms  :  —  '  pasiyvd.      2  evari.      3  ikspowzd.     4  S'oemtaimz. 
5  asending. 


40  Riyding  Lesrfz — Powitri. 

Scemtaimz  hoer  iyz  and  solas  sot 
In  an  owld  emti  wotring  ]-pot ; 
Dhear,  wonting  ncething  seyv  a  fsen 
Tu  siym  soam  nimf  in  hoer  sid'sen, 
Apserald  in  igz'sektist  sot, 
And  redi  tu  biy  bon  tu  kot. 

Boat  Icev  ov  cheynj  it  siymz  hsez  pleys 
Not  ownli  in  auar  waizar  reys ; 
Ksets  olso'  fiyl,  sez  \vel  sez  wiy, 
Dhset  paeshanz  fos,  and  sow  did  shiy. 
Hoer  klaiming,  shiy  big'gen  tu  faind, 
Ekspowzd2  hoer  tuw  moach  tu  dha  waind,-'5 
And  dhi  owld  yutansil  4  ov  tin 
Woz  kowld  and  ka^mfatlis  widhin  : 
Shiy  dhearfor  wisht,  insted  ov  dhowz, 
Soem  pleys  ov  moar  sii'iyn  ripowz, 
Whear  niydhar  5  kowld  mait  koem,  nor  ear 
Tuw  ruwdli  wontan  widh  hoer  hear, 
And  sot  it  in  dha  laiklyist  6  mowd, 
Widhin  hoer  maastaz  snoeg  abowd. 

A  droar,  it  chaanst,  set  botam  laind 
Widh  linin  ov  dha  softist7  kaind, 
Widh  soech  sez  moechants  intro'dyus 
From  Indya,  for  dha  leydiz  yus — 
A  droar  impending  oar  8  dha  rest, 
Haaf  owpn',  in  dha  topmowst  chest, 
Ov  debth  9  anoef,10  and  noan  tu  spear, 
Invaitid  hoer  tu  sloembar  dhear. 
Pus,  widh  dilait  biyond  ikspreshan, 
Soeveyd  dha  siyn  and  tuk  po'zeshan. 
Bik'oambant  set  hoer  iyz,  ear  long, 
And  loeld  bai  hoer  own  hoein-droem  song, 
Shiy  left  dha  keaz  ov  laif  bihaind 
And  slept  jez  shiy  wud  sliyp  hoer  laast ; 

Alternative  forma: — l  -ivotaring.      -  ikspowzd.      3  wind.      4  yutensil, 
5  naidhar.     li  laikliist.     'softist.     8  owvar.     "depth.     10  iu-oef. 


Dha  Ritdiad  Kcet.  41 

When  in  keym,  hoezifli l  inklaind, 
Dha  cheymbameyd,  and  shoet  it  faast ; 
Bai  now  maligniti  impeld, 
Boet  61  oenkonshas  hnwm  it  held. 

Aweykn'd  bai  dha  shok,  kraid  Pus, 
"  Woz  evar  kset  atendid  dhoes  ! 
Dhi  owpn'  droar  woz  left,  ai  siy, 
Miali  tu  pruwv  a  nest  for  miy ; 
For  suwn  sez  ai  woz  wel  kampowzd, 
Dhen  keym  dha  meyd,  and  it  woz  klowzd. 
Hau  smuwdh  dhiyz  koechifs,  and  hau  swiyt ! 
Ow !  whot  a  delikit  ritriy  t. 
Ai  wil  rizain  miself  2  tu  rest, 
Til  Sol,  diklaining  in  dha  west, 
Shsel  kol  tu  soepar,  when,  now  daut, 
Suwzn'  wil  kosrn  and  let  niiy  aut." 

Dhi  iyvning  keym,  dha  soan  disendid, 
And  Pus  rimeynd  stil  oenatendid. 
Dha  nait  rowld  taadili  awey, 
(Widh  hoer,  indiyd,  t  woz  nevar  dey,) 
Dha  spraitli  mon  hoer  kos  rinyiid, 
Dhi  iyvning  grey  ageyn  3  insyiid  ; 
And  Pus  keym  intu  inaind  now  moar 
Dhsen  if  intuwmd  dha  dey  bifoar. 
Widh  hoenggar  pincht,  and  pincht  for  ruwm, 
Shiy  nau  priseyjd  aprowching  duwm, 
Nor  slept  a  singgl'  wingk,  or  poed, 
Konshas  ov  jepadi  inkoed. 

Dhset  nait,  bai  chaans,  dha  powit  woching 
Hoed  an  ineksplikabl'  skraeching ; 
Hiz  nowbl'  haat  went  pit-a-pset, 
And  tu  himself  hiy  sed,  "  Whot's  dhaet  ?  " 
Hiy  druw  dha  koetin  set  hiz  said, 
And  foth  hiy  piypt,  boat  noething  spaid ; 
Yet,  bai  hiz  iar  *  direktid,5  gest 

Alternative  forms : — l  hauswaifli.      2  mais61f .      3  agen.      4  yoer 
5  dairektid. 


42  Riyding  Lesn'z — Powitri. 

Soemthing  imprizn'd  in  dha  chest, 
And,  dautful  whot,  widh  pruwdn't  kear 
Riz61vd  it  shud  kantinyu  dhear. 
^Et  length  a  vois  which  wel  hiy  nyu, 
A  long  and  melankali1  myu, 
Salyuting  hiz  powetik  iaz,2 
Kansowld3  him  and  dispeld  hiz  fiaz. 
Hiy  left  hiz  bed,  hiy  trod  dha  floar, 
And  gsen  4  in  heyst  dha  droz  eksploar  ;  5 
Dha  lowist  foest,  and  widhaut  6  stop 
Dha  rest  in  odar,  tu  dha  top  ; 
For  t  iz  a  truwth  wel  nown  tu  mowst, 
Dhat  whotsowevar  thing  iz  lost, 
Wiy  siyk  it,  ear  it  koem  tu  lait, 
In  evri  krseni  boat  dha  rait. 
— Foth  skipt  dha  kset,  not  nau  ripliyt, 
JEz  oest,  widh  eri  self-kansiyt, 
Nor  in  hoer  own  fond  seprihenshan 
A  thiym  for  61  dha  woeldz  atenshan ; 
Boet  modist,  sowbar,  kyuad  ov  61 
Hoer  nowshanz  haipabolikl', 
And  wishing  for  a  pleys  ov  rest 
Enithing  raadhar  dhsen  a  chest. 
Dhen  stept  dha  powit  intu  bed 
Widh  dhis  riflekshan  in  hiz  hed  : — 

Moral. 

Biwear  ov  tuw  sablaim  a  sens 
Ov  yor  own  woeth  and  konsikwans ! 
Dha  man  huw  driymz  himself  sow  greyt, 
And  hiz  imp'otans  ov  seech  weyt, 
Dhat  61  araund,  in  61  dhat  s  clcen, 
Mcest  muwv  and  sekt  for  him  alown, 
Wil  loen  in  skuwl  ov  tribyuleyshan, 
Dha  foli  ov  hiz  ekspekteyshan. 

—  W.  Coicpcr. 

Alternative  forms  :— l  melangkali.    2  yoez.     3  konso\vld.     4  big-sen. 
5  iksploar.      °  widliaut 


Kontest  bitwiyn  dha  Nowz  and  dhi  Aiz.  43 

KONTEST  BITWlYN   DHA   NOWZ   AND  DHI   AlZ. 

Bitwiyn  Nowz  and  Aiz  a  streynj  kontest  arowz, 

Dha  spektakl'z  set  dhem  cenh'sepili  rong  ; 
Dha  point  in  dispyut  woz,  sez  61  dha  woeld  nowz, 

Tu  which  dha  sed  spektakl'z  6t  tu  bilong. 

Sow  dha  toeng  woz  dha  loyar,  and  aagyud  dha  koz 
Widh  a  greyt  diyl  ov  skil,  and  a  wig  ful  ov  loening ; 

Whail  Chiyf-bseran  lar  l  sset  tu  bselans  dha  loz, 
Sow  feymd  for  hiz  tselant  in  naisli  dizoening. 

"  In  bihaaf  (ov  dha  Nowz,  it  wil  kwikli  apiar, 

And  yor  lodship,"  hiy  sed,  '•  wil  oendautidli  faind 

Dhat  dha  Nowz  hsez  heed  spektakl'z  olwiz  in  wear, 
Which  amaunts  tu  pazeshan,  taim  aut  ov  maind." 

Dhen  howlding  dha  spektakl'z  oep  tu  dha  kot — 

"  Yor  lodship  abzoevz  dhey  aar  meyd  widh  a  strgedl', 

jEz  waid  0ez  dha  brij  ov  dha  nowz  iz ;  in  shot, 
Dizaind  tu  sit  klo\vs  tu  it,  jcest  laik  a  ssedl'. 

Agen,2  wud  yor  lodship  a  mowmant  sapowz 

(T  iz  a  keys  dhat  hsez  hsepn'd,  and  mey  biy  agen) 

Dhat  dha  vizij  or  kauntinans  hsed  not  a  nowz  ; 

Prey,  huw  wud,  or  huw  kud,  wear  spektakl'z  dhen  ? 

On  dha  howl  it  apiaz,  and  mai  aagyumant  showz, 
Widh  a  riyzning  3  dha  kot  wil  nevar  kandena, 

Dhat  dha  spektakl'z  pleynli  woer  meyd  for  dha  Nowz, 
And  dha  Nowz  woz  sez  pleynli  intendid  for  dhem." 

Dhen  shifting  hiz  said,  gez  a  loyar  nowz  hau, 

Hiy  pliydid  ageyn  on  bihaaf  ov  dhi  Aiz  ; 
Bost  whot  woer  hiz  aagyumants  fyu  piypl'  now, 

For  dha  kot  did  not  thingk  dhey  woer  iykwali  waiz. 

Sow  hiz  lodship  dikriyd,  in  a  greyv  solam  town, 

Disaisiv  and  kliar,  widhaut  woen  if  or  boet, 
Dhat — "  Whenevar  dha  Nowz  put  hiz  spektakl'z  on, 
Bai  deylait  or  ksendl'-lait— Aiz  shud  biy  shoet." 

—  W.  Coicpcr. 
Alternative  forms  :— 1  yoer.     -  ageyn.     3  riyzn'ing. 


44  Riyding  Lesn'z — Powitri. 

JON   GILPIN. 

Jon  Gilpin  woz  a  sitizn' 

Ov  kredit  and  rinaun, 
A  trejrn-bsend  kseptin  iyk  woz  hiy 

Ov  feymas  Loendan  Taun. 

Jon  Gilpinz  spauz  sed  tu  lioer  diar, 
"  Dhow  wedid  wiy  hsev  biyn 

Dhis  twais  ten  tiydyas  yoez,  l  yet  wiy 
Now  holidey  2  hsev  siyn. 

Ta-moro'  iz  auar  weding-dey, 

And  wiy  wil  dlien  ripear 
(Entu  dha  Bel  get  Edmantn', 

01  in  a  sheyz  and  pear. 

Mai  sistar  and  mai  sistaz  chaild, 
Maiself,  3  and  childran  thriy, 

Wil  fil  dha  slieyz  ;  sow  yu  moest  raid 
On  hosbjek  aaftar  wiy." 

Hiy  suwn  riplaid,  "  Ai  duw  admaiar 

Ov  wumankaind  boat  woen, 
And  yu  aar  sliiy,  mai  diarist  diar, 

Dheafor  it  shsel  biy  doen. 

Ai  gem  a  linindreypar  bowlcl, 

Mz  61  dba  woeld  doeth  now, 
And  mai  gud  frend  dha  kselindar, 

Wil  lend  hiz  hos  tu  gow." 

Kwowth  Mistris  Gilpin,  "  Dhset  s  wel  sed  ! 

And,  for  dhat  wain  iz  diar, 
Wiy  wil  biy  foenisht  widh  auar  own, 

Which  iz  bowth  brait  and  kliar." 

Jon  Gilpin  kist  hiz  loeving  waif, 

Ojoid  woz  hiy  tu  faind 
Dhat,  dhow  on  plezhar  shiy  woz  bent, 

Shiy  hsed  a  fruwgl'  maind. 

Alternative  forms  : —  l  yiaz.     2  holidi.     3  miself. 


Jon  Gilpin.  45 

Dha  moning  keym,  dha  sheyz  woz  brot, 

Boet  yet  woz  not  alaud 
Tu  draiv  03p  tu  dha  doar,  lest  61 

Shud  sey  dhat  shiy  woz  praud. 

Sow  thriy  doz  of  dha  sheyz  woz  steyd, 

Whear  dhey  did  61  get  in, 
Siks  preshas  sowlz,  and  61  agog 

Tu  dsesh  thruw  thik  and  thin. 

Srasek  went  dha  whip,  raund  went  dha  whiylz, 

Woer  nevar  fowks  sow  glsed ; 
Dha  stownz  did  rsetl'  cendaniyth, 

jEz  if  Chiypsaid  woer  meed. 

Jon  Gilpin,  aet  hiz  hosiz  said, 

Siyzd  faast  dha  flowing  meyn, 
And  oep  hiy  got,  in  heyst  tu  raid, 

Boat  suwn  keym  daun  ageyn ; 

For  ssedl'-triy  skeas  riycht  hged  hiy, 

His  joeni  tu  bigin, 
When,  toening  raund  hiz  hed,  hiy  so 

Thriy  koestamaz  koem  in. 

Sow  daun  hiy  keym  ;  for  16s  ov  taim, 

Oldhow  it  griyvd  him  soar, 
Yet  16s  ov  pens,  ful  wel  hiy  nyu, 

Wud  troebl'  him  mcech  moar. 

T  l  woz  long  bifoar  dha  koestamaz 

Woer  syutid  tu  dhear  maind, 
When  Beti,  skriyming,  keym  daunsteaz, 

"  Dha  wain  iz  left  bihaind  !  " 

':  Gud  leek  !  "  kwowth  hiy,  "  yet  bring  it  miy, 

Mai  ledhan  belt  laikwaiz  2 
In  which  ai  bear  mai  troasti  sod 

W'hen  ai  duw  eksasaiz." 

Alternative  forms : — l  it.        2  laikwaiz. 


46  Riyding  Lesn'z — Powitri. 

Nan  Mistris  Gilpin  (keaful  sowl ! ) 

Hsed  tuw  stown-botl'z  faund, 
Tu  howld  dha  likar  dhat  shiy  loevd, 

And  kiyp  it  seyf  and  saund. 

lych  botl'  hsed  a  koeling  iar,  l 
Thruw  which  dha  belt  hiy  druw, 

And  hoeng  a  botl'  on  iych  said, 
Tu  meyk  hiz  bselans  truw. 

Dhen  owvar  61,  dhat  hiy  mait  biy 

Ikwipt  from  top  tu  tow, 
Hiz  long  red  klowk,  wel-broesht  and  niyt, 

Hiy  msenfuli  did  throw. 

Nau  siy  him  mauntid  woens  ageyn 

Apon  hiz  nimbi'  stiyd, 
Ful  slowli  peysing  oar  2  dha  stownz, 

Widh  koshan  and  gud  hiyd. 

Boet  fainding  suwn  a  smuwdhar  rowd 

Biniyth  hiz  wel-shod  fiyt, 
Dha  snoting  biyst  big'sen  tu  trot, 

Which  gold  him  in  hiz  siyt. 

Sow  "  Fear  and  softli !  "  3  Jon  hiy  kraid, 

Boat  Jon  hiy  kraid  in  veyn  ; 
Dhset  trot  bikeym  a  gselap  suwn, 

In  spait  ov  koeb  and  reyn. 

Sow  stuwping  daun,  sez  niydz  hiy  nicest 

Huw  ksenot  sit  ceprait, 
Hiy  graaspt  dha  meyn  widh  bowth  hiz  hsendz, 

And  iyk  widh  61  hiz  mait. 

Hiz  hos,  huw  nevar  in  dheet  sot 

Hsed  hsendl'd  biyn  bifoar, 
Whot  thing  apon  hiz  baek  hsed  got 

Did  wcendar  moar  and  moar. 

Alternative  forms  : — !  yocr.        2  owvar.         3  softli. 


Jon  Gil  pin.  47 

Awey  went  Gilpin,  nek  or  not ; 

Awey  went  hset  and  wig ; 
Hiy  lit!'  dremt,  when  hiy  set  aut, 

Ov  rcening  seech  a  rig. 

And  nau,  sez  hiy  went  bauing  daun 

Hiz  riyking  hed  ful  low, 
Dha  botl'z  tweyn  bihaind  hiz  bsek 

Woer  shsetad  set  a  blow. 

Dann  rsen  dha  wain  intu  dha  rowd, 

Mowst  pityas  tu  biy  siyn, 
Which  meyd  hiz  hosiz  flangks  tu  smowk 

JEz  dhey  hsed  beystid  biyn. 

Boet  stil  hiy  siymd  tu  kseri  weyt, 

Widh  ledhan  goedl'  breyst ! 
For  61  mait  siy  dha  botl'-neks 

Stil  dsenggling  set  hiz  weyst. 

Dhces  61  thruw  meri  Izlingtn' 

Dhiyz  gsembl'z  hiy  did  pley, 
(Entil l  hiy  keym  oentu  dha  Wosh 

Ov  Edmantn'  sow  gey. 

And  dhear  hiy  thruw  dha  Wosh  abaut 

On  bowth  saidz  ov  dha  wey, 
Joest  laik  oentu  a  trcendling  mop, 

Or  a  waild  guws  set  pley. 

JEt  Edmantn'  hiz  loeving  waif 

From  dha  bselkowni  2  spaid 
Hoer  tendar  hoezband,  woendring  3  mosch 

Tu  siy  hau  hiy  did  raid. 

"  Stop,  stop,  Jon  Gilpin  ! — Hiar  z  dha  haus"- 

Dhey  61  set  woens  did  krai ; 
"  Dha  dinar  weyts,  and  wiy  aar  taiad  "; 

Sed  Gilpin—"  Sow  sem  ai !  " 

Alternative  form: — l  'oentil.        2  bselkani.        8  woendaring. 


48  Riyding  Lesn'z — Powitri. 

Boet  yet  hiz  hos  woz  not  a  whit 

Inklaind  tu  tseri  dhear  ; 
For  whai  ? — hiz  ownar  hsed  a  haus 

Ful  ten  mailz  of,  set  Wear. 

Sow  laik  an  sero'  swift  hiy  fluw, 

Shot  bai  an  aachar  strong ; 
Sow  did  hiy  fiai — which  bringz  miy  tu 

Dha  midl'  ov  mai  song. 

Awey  went  Gilpin  aut  ov  breth, 

And  soar  agenst  hiz  wil, 
Til  set  hiz  frendz  dha  kselindaz 

Hiz  hos  set  laast  stud  stil. 

Dha  kselindar,  ameyzd  tu  siy 

Hiz  neybar  in  soech  trim, 
Leyd  daun  hiz  paip,  fiuw  tu  dha  geyt, 

And  dhoes  akostid  him  : 

"  Whot  nyuz  ?  whot  nyuz  ?  yor  taidingz  tel ! 

Tel  miy  yu  nicest  and  shsel — 
Sey,  whai  bear-hedid  yu  aar  kcem, 

Or  whai  yu  kcem  set  61  ?  " 

Nau  Gilpin  hsed  a  plezn't  wit, 

And  loevd  a  taimli  jowk  ; 
And  dhoes  oentu  dha  kaalindar 

In  meri  gaiz  hiy  spowk  : 

"  Ai  keym  bikoz l  yor  hos  wud  koem  ; 

And,  if  ai  wel  fobowd,2 
Mai  host  and  wig  wil  suwn  biy  hiar, 

Dhey  aar  apon  dha  rowd." 

Dha  kaelindar,  rait  gla;d  tu  faind 

Hiz  frend  in  meri  pin, 
Ritoend  him  not  a  singgl'  wood 

Boot  tu  dha  haus  went  in  ; 

Alternative  forms : — J  biker,,     2  fabowd. 


Jon  Gilpin.  49 

Wliens  streyt  hiy  keym,  widh  haet  and  wig 

A  wig  dhat  flowd  bihaind  ; 
A  haet  not  moech  dha  woes  for  wear ; 

lych  koemli  in  its  kaind. 

Hiy  held  dhem.  oep,  and  in  hiz  toen 

Dhces  showd  hiz  redi  wit : 
"Mai  hed  iz  twais  asz  big  sez  yoz, 

Dhey  dheafor  niydz  moest  fit. 

Boet  let  miy  skreyp  dlia  doet  awey, 

Dhat  hsengz  apon  yor  feys  ; 
And  stop  and  iyt,  for  wel  yu  mey 

Biy  in  a  hoenggri  keys." 

Sed  Jon,  "  It  is  mai  weding-dey, 

And  01  dha  woeld  wud  stear, 
If  waif  shud  dain  set  Edmantan, 

And  ai  shud  dain  at  AVear." 

Sow,  toening  tu  hiz  hos,  hiy  sed, 

"  Ai  sem  in  heyst  tu  dain  ; 
T  woz  for  yor  plezhar  yu  keym  hiar, 

Yu  shaal  gow  bask  for  main." 

Aa  loeklis  spiych,  and  buwtlis  bowst ! 

For  which  hiy  peyd  ful  diar  ; 
For,  whail  hiy  speyk,  a  breying  aas 

Did  sing  mowst  laud  and  kliar  : 

Wherset  hiz  hos  did.  snot,  sez  hiy 

Hsed  hoed  a  laian  roar, 
And  gselapt  of  widh  61  hiz  mait, 

yEz  hiy  hsed  doen  bifoar. 

Awey  went  Gilpin,  and  awey 

Went  Gilpinz  haet  and  wig  ; 
Hiy  lost  dhem  suwnar  dhsen  set  foest, 

For  whai  ? — dhey  woer  tuw  big. 

Nan  Mistris  Gilpin3  when  shiy  so 
Hoer  hoezband  powsting  daun 

II  D 


50  Eiyding  Lesriz — Powitri. 

Intu  dha  koentri  far  awey, 
Shiy  puld  aut  haaf-a-kraun. 

And  dhces  oentu  dha  yuth  shiy  sed, 

Dhat  drowv  dhem  tu  dha  Bel,    . 
"  Dhis  shsel  biy  yoz,  when  yu  bring  bsek 

Mai  hoezband  seyf  and  wel." 

Dha  yuth  did  raid,  and  suwn  did  miyt 

Jon  koeming  bsek  ameyn  ; 
Huwm  in  a  trais  hiy  traid  tu  stop, 

Bai  kseching  set  hiz  reyn  ; 

Boat  not  poefoming l  whot  hiy  ment, 

And  glsedli  wud  hsev  doen, 
Dha  fraitn'd  stiyd  hiy  fraitn'd  moar, 

And  meyd  him  faastar  roan. 

Awey  went  Gilpin,  and  awey 

Went  powst-boi  set  hiz  hiylz, 
Dha  powst-boiz  hos  rait  glsed  tu  mis 

Dha  loembring  2  ov  dha  whiylz. 

Siks  jentl'man  3  apon  dha  rowd 

Dho3s  siying  Gilpin  flai, 
Widh  powst-boi  skaempring  4  in  dha  riar, 

Dhey  reyzd  dha  hyu  and  krai : — 

"  Stop  thiyf  !  stop  thiyf ! — a  haiweyman  !  " 

Not  ween  ov  dhem  woz  myut  ; 
And  61  and  iych  dhat  paast  dhset  wey 

Did  join  in  dha  poesyut.5 

And  nau  dha  toenpaik  geyts  ageyn 

Fluw  owpn'  in  shot  speys  : 
Dha  towl-man  thingking  sez  bifoar 

Dhat  Gilpin  rowd  a  reys. 

And  sow  hiy  did,  and  woen  it  tuw  ! 
For  hiy  got  foest  tu  taun  ; 

Alternative  forms  : — l  pat'oming.        2  Icembaring.        J  jeritl1u.en. 
4  skueiupariiig.         6  pasyut. 


Siy.  51 

Nor  stopt,  til  whear  hiy  hsed  got  oep 
Hiy  did  ageyn  get  daun. 

Nau  let  res  sing,  Long  liv  dha  king, 

And  Grilpin,  long  liv  hiy  ; 
And,  when  hiy  nekst  doeth  raid  abrod, 

Mey  ai  biy  dhear  tu  siy ! 

—  W.  Coicper. 

MT  SIY. 

A  wet  shiyt  and  a  flowing  siy, 

A  waind  dhat  folo'z  faast 
And  filz  dha  whait  and  roeshing  seyl 

And  bendz  dha  gselant  maast ; 
And  bendz  dha  gselant  maast,  mi  1  boiz, 

Whail  laik  dhi  iygl'  friy 
Awey  dha  gud  ship  flaiz,  and  liyvz 

Owld  Inggland  on  dha  liy. 

Ow  for  a  soft  2  and  jentl'  waind !  3 

Ai  hoed  a  fear  woen  krai ; 
Boet  giv  tu  miy  dha  snoring  briyz 

And  whait  weyvz  hiyving  hai ; 
And  whait  weyvz  hiyving  hai,  mi  Isedz, 

Dha  gud  ship  tait  and  friy : — 
Dha  woeld  ov  wotaz  iz  auar  howm, 

And  meri  men  aar  wiy. 

Dhear  z  tempist  in  yon  honid4  muwn, 

And  laitning  in  yon  klaud ; 
Boet  haak  dha  myuzik,  mseriuaz  ! 

Dha  waind  iz  paiping  land ; 
Dha  waind  iz  paiping  laud,  mi  boiz, 

Dha  laitning  flseshiz  friy — 
Whail  dha  holo'  owk  auar  pselas  iz, 

Auar  heritij  dha  siy. 

— A.  Cunningham 

Alternative  forms  : — l  mai.     2  soft.     3  wind.     4  hond. 


52  Eiydinj  Lesn'z — Powitri. 

WILYAM  TEL. 

Koem,  list  tu  miy,  and  yu  shsel  hiar, 

A  teyl  ov  wbot  bifel 
A  feymas  msen  ov  Switsaland, — 

Hiz  neym  woz  Wilyam  Tel. 

Niar  Roisiz  bsengk,  from  dey  tu  dey, 

Hiz  litl'  flok  hiy  led, 
Bai  pruwdant  thrift  and  haadi  toil 

Kantent  tu  oen  hiz  bred. 

Nor  woz  dha  hoentaz  kraaf t  oennown : 

In  Uariy  noen  woz  siyn 
Tu  trsek  dha  rok-frikwenting  hoed 

Widh  ai  sow  truw  and  kiyn. 

A  litl'  seen  woz  in  hiz  howm, 
A  laafing,  fear-head  boi ; 

Sow  strong  ov  lim,  sow  blaidh  ov  haat, 
Hiy  meyd  it  ring  widh  joi. 

Hiz  faadhaz  shi}?p  woer  61  hiz  frendz  ; 

Dha  Isemz  hiy  kold  bai  neym ; 
And  when  dhey  frolikt  in  dha  fiyldz, 

Dha  chaild  wud  shear  dha  geym. 

Sow  piysfuli  dhear  auaz  woer  spont 
Dhat  laif  hsed  skeas  a  soro' ; 

Dhey  tuk  dha  gud  ov  evri  dey, 
And  howpt  for  moar  ta-moro'. 

Boet  6ft 1  seem  shaining  Eypril  mon 

Iz  daakn'd  in  an  auar  ; 
And  blsekist  griyfs  oar  ~  joias  howmz, 

Alaas !  oensiyn  mey  lauar. 

Not  yet  on  Switsaland  hsed  doncl 

Hoer  dey  ov  libati ; 
Dha  streynjaz  yowk  woz  on  hoer  soenz, 

And  prest  rait  hevili. 

Alternative  forms  : — 1  oft.         2  owvar. 


Wilyam  Tel.  53 

Sow  woen  woz  sent  in  loeklis  auar, 

Tu  ruwl  in  Ostryaz *  neym  ; 
A  hoti  msen  ov  ssevij  niuwd, — 

In  pomp  and  pauar  hiy  keym, 

Wren  dey,  in  wontannis  ov  pauar, 

Hiy  set  hiz  ksep  on  hai ; — 
u  Bau  daun,  yiy  sleyvz,"  dhi  odar  Ken ; 

u  ]Juw  diso'beyz  shsel  dai !  " 

It  chaanst  dhat  Wilyam  Tel,  dhset  mon, 

Hsed  left  hiz  kotij  howm, 
And,  widh  hiz  litl'  seen  in  hsend, 

Tu  ^Eltof  taun  hsed  koem. 

For  6ft  dha  boi  hsed  aid  dha  spoil 

Hiz  faadhar  howmwad  boar, 
And  preyd  tu  join  dha  hoeating  kruw, 

When  dhey  shud  rowm  for  moar. 

And  ofn  on  seem  meri  nait, 

When  woendras  fiyts  woer  towld, 

Hiy  longd  hiz  f aadhaz  bow  tu  teyk, 
And  biy  a  hoentar  bowld. 

Sow  todz  2  dha  shamwoz  honts  dhey  went ; 

Woen  sseng  hiz  chaildish  songz, 
Dhi  oedhar  bruwdid  monfuli 

Oar3  Uariyz  griyfs  and  rongz. 

Tel  so  dha  kraud,  dha  lif  tid  kaep, 

Dha  taiarants  senggri  fraun, — 
Dha  heraldz  shautid  in  hiz  iar,4 

'"  Bau  daun,  yiy  sleyvz,  bau  daun  !  " 

Stoen  Gezlar  maakt  dha  pezants  iniyn, 

And  wocht  tu  siy  him  fol ; 
Boet  nevar  paam-triy  streytar  stud 

Dhaen  Tel  bifoar  dhem  61. 

Alternative  forms : — !  Ostri'az,  Ostri'az.     2  tuwodz.    3  owvar.     4  yoer. 


54  Riyding  Lesn'z — Powitri. 

"  Mai  niy  shsel  bend,"  hiy  kaamli  sed, 

"  Tu  God,  and  God  alown ; 
Mai  laif  iz  in  dhi  Ostryanz l  hsend, 

Mai  konshans  iz  mai  own." 

"  Siyz  him,  yiy  gaadz,"  dha  ruwlar  kraid, 
Whail  pseshan  chowkt  hiz  breth ; 

"  Hiy  moks  mai  pauar,  hiy  breyvz  mai  lod, 
Hiy  daiz  dha  trey taz  deth ; — 

Yet  weyt.     Dha  Swis  aar  maaksman  truw, 
Sow  61  dha  woeld  doeth  sey  : 

Dhset  fear-head  stripling  hidhar  bring ; 
Wiy  1 2  trai  dhear  skil  ta-dey." 

Haad  bai  a  spreding  laim-triy  stud, 
Tu  dhis  dha  yuwth  woz  baund ; 

Dhey  pleyst  an  sepl'  on  hiz  hed — 
Hiy  lukt  in  wcendar  raund. 

•'*  Dha  folt  iz  main,  if  folt  dhear  biy," 
Kraid  Tel  in  seksn'ts  waild  ; 

"  On  msenhud  let  yor  venjans  fol, 
Beet  spear,  ow  spear  mai  chaild  !  " 

"  Ai  wil  not  haam  dha  priti  boi," 

Sed  Gezlar  tontingli ; 
"  If  bleed  ov  hiz  shgel  steyn  dha  graund, 

Yoz  wil  dha  moedar  biy. 

Dro  tait  yor  bow,  mai  koaning  mgen, 

Yor  streytist  sero'  teyk  ; 
For,  now,  yon  aepl'  iz  yor  maak, 

Yor  libati  dha  steyk." 

A  minggl'd  noiz  ov  roth  and  griyf 
Woz  hoed  amosng  dha  kraud  ; 

Dha  men  dhey  moetad  koesiz  diyp, 
Dha  wimin  wept  alaud. 

Alternative  forms : — l  Ostri'anz,  Ostri'anz.     9  wil. 


Wilyam  Tel.  55 

Ful  fifti  peysiz  from  hiz  chaild, 

Hiz  kros-bow  in  hiz  hsend, 
Widh  lip  kamprest,  and  flseshing  ai, 

Tel  foemli  tuk  hiz  staend. 

Shuar,  ful  anoef !  ov  peyn  and  wow 

Dhis  kraudid  oeth  haez  biyn  ; 
Boat  nevar,  sins  dha  koes  big'sen, 

A  ssedar  sait  woz  siyn. 

Dhen  speyk  alaud  dha  gaelant  boi, 

Impeyshant  ov  diley, — 
"  Shuwt  streyt  and  kwik,  dhain  eym  iz  shuar; 

Dhau  kaenst  not  mis  ta-dey." 

"  Hevn'  bles  dhiy  nau,"  dha  perant  sei, 

"Dhai  koerij  sheymz  mai  fiar; 
Msen  trsempl'z  on  hiz  broedhar  msen, 

Boet  God  iz  evar  niar." 

Dha  bow  woz  bent ;  dhi  gero'  went, 

JEiz  bai  an  eynjl'  gaidid  ; 
In  piysiz  tuw,  biniyth  dha  triy, 

Dhi  sepl'  fel  divaidid. 

u  T  2  woz  breyvli  doan,"  dha  ruwlar  sed, 

"  Mai  plaitid  woed  ai  kiyp  ; 
T  woz  breyvli  doen  bai  saiar  and  soen, — 

Gow  howm,  and  fiyd  yor  shiyp." 

"  Now  thsengks  ai  giv  dhiy  for  dhai  buwn," 

Dha  pezn't  kowldli  sed  ; 
"  Tu  God  alown  mai  preyz  iz  dyn, 

And  dyuli  shsel  biy  peyd." 

"  Yet  now,  praud  msen,  dhai  feyt  woz  niar, 

Hsed  ai  boet  mist  mai  eym  ; 
Not  oenavenjd  mai  chaild  hsed  daid, — 

Dhai  paating  auar  dha  seym. 

Alternative  forms :— 1  in'cef.     2  it. 


56  Riyding  Lesii'z — Powitri. 

For  siy !  a  sekand  shaaf t  woz  hiar, 

If  haam  mai  boi  bifel ; 
Nau  gow  and  bles  dha  hevn'li  pauar, 

Mai/bcs£  hsez  sped  sow  wel." 

God  helpt  dha  rait,  God  spead  dha  sin  ; 

Hiy  bringz  dha  praud  tu  sheym ; 
Hiy  gaadz  dha  wiyk  agenst1  dha  strong, — 

Preyz  tu  Hiz  howli  Neym  ! 

— Rev.  J.  If.  Gurncy. 

MffiNGKIZ   M^ENAZ. 

Moengkiz,  when  dhey  sit  set  teybl', 
lyt  sez  faast  sez  dhey  aar  eybl'— 
Gobi'  for  dhear  veri  laivz — 
Skuwp  oap  greyvi  widh  dhear  naivz — 

Put  dhear  finggaz  in  dha  dish 
If  soem  nais  tit-bit  dhey  wish — 
Widh  dhear  naif,  or  fok,  or  spuwn, 
On  dha  teybl'  droem  a  tyun — 

Soemtaimz  2  from  iych  cedhaz  pley t — ow, 

Shoking  ! — pilfar  a  pateyto', 

Or  soem  veri  tern  ting  slais 

Which  dhey  thingk  iz  luking  nais. 

Riflckslian. 

Now  yoeng  riydaz,  shuar,  ov  main 
Evar  wnd  laik  moangkiz  dain  ! 

— Tom  Hood. 


DHA  SONG  ov  DHA  STKIYT  MCENGKI. 

Dhey  thingk  when  ni  m  straiking  dha  shril  gitaar 

Widh  a  slaitli  kealis  hsend, 
Dhat  ai  hfev  fagotn' 3  mai  loevd  wcenz,  faar 

Awey  in  a  distant  Isend. 

Alternative  forms : — l  ageynst.       -  scemtaimz.       3  fogotn'. 


Dha  Domaus.  57 

Dhear  dwel  Misiz  Em  and  mai  moengki lings  thriy, 

And  dhey  woendar  whear  ai  gem, 
^Ez  dhey  sit  in  dha  top  ov  dha  kowko'-noet  triy, 

And  fiyst  on  dha  loeshas  ysem. 

Mai  moengkilingz  dhey  aar  grown-oep  bai  dhis, 

And  dhear  teylz  kwait  long  moast  biy ; 
Dhear  moedhar  6ft1  givz  dhem,  ai  now,  a  kis, 

Bikoz 2  dhey  aar  sow  laik  miy. 

Long — long  mey  dhey  baund  mid  3  dha  lof  ti 4  triyz, 

In  dha  forist  shsedo'z  kuwl, 
Nor  evar  biy  fetad  widh  klowdhz 5  laik  dhiyz, 

And  daans  on  a  thriy-legd  stuwl. 

Dha  tip  ov  mai  teyl  iz  dinyudid  ov  skin, 

It  pruwvz  hau  moech  ai  fret : 
Boet  bikoz  ai  ind'oalj  in  a  paasing  grin 

Dhey  fsensi  dhat  ai  faget.6 

—Tom  Hood. 

DHA  DOMAUS. 

Dha  litl'  domans  iz  toni  red, 

Hiy  meyks  agenst  wintar  a  nais  snoeg  bed ; 

Hiy  meyks  hiz  bed  in  a  mosi  bsengk, 

Whear  dha  plaants  in  dha  soemar  grow  tol  and  rsengk. 

Awey  from  dha  deylait,  faar  oendagraund, 

Hiz  sliyp  thruw  dha  wintar  iz  kwaiat  and  saund ; 

And  when  61  aboev  him  it  friyziz  and  snowz, 

Whot  iz  it  tu  him  ?  for  hiy  not  ov  it  nowz. 

And  til  dha  kowld  taim  ov  dha  wintar  iz  gon,7 

Dha  litl'  domaus  kiyps  sliyping  on. 

Boat  set  laast,  in  dha  fresh  briyzi  deyz  ov  dha  spring, 

When  dha  griyn  liyvz  boed,  and  dha  meri  boedz  sing, 

And  dha  dred  ov  dha  wintar  iz  owvar  and  paast, 

Dhen  dha  litl'  domaus  piyps  aut  set  laast — 

Alternative  forms  :—1  oft.       2  bik*6z.       3  amid.       *  lofti. 
5  klowz.      6  foget'.       7  gon. 


58  Riyding  Lesn'z — Powitri. 

Aut  ov  hiz  snoeg  kwaiat  boero'  hiy  wendz, 

And  luks  61  abaut  for  hiz  neybaz  aud  frendz  ; 

Dhen  hiy  sez,  sez  hiy  sits  set  dha  fut  ov  a  laach, 

"  T l  iz  a  byutifl'  -  dey  for  dha  foest  dey  ov  Maach, 

Dha  vaialit  iz  bluwming,  dha  bluw  skai  iz  kliar ; 

Dha  laak  iz  oepspringing,  hiz  kserl'  ai  hiar ; 

And  in  dha  griyn  fiyldz  aar  dha  Isem  and  dha  fowl ; 

Ai  m  3  glsed  ai  m  3  not  sliyping,  nor  daun  in  mai  howl.' 

Dhen  awey  hiy  rosnz,  in  hiz  meri  muwd, 

Owvar  dha  fiyldz,  and  intu  dha  wud, 

Tu  faind  eni  greyn  dhear  mey  chaans  tu  biy, 

Or  eni  smol  beri  dhat  hsengz  on  dha  triy. 

Sow  from  oeli  moning  til  leyt  set  nait, 

Hsez  dha  puar  litl'  kriychar  its  own  dilait ; 

Luking  daun  tu  dhi  oeth,  and  cep  tu  dha  skai, 

Thingking,  "  Whot  a  hsepi  domaus  sem  ai !  " 

— Mary  Howitt. 


DHA  GRAAS-HOPAR  AND  DHA  KRIKIT. 

Dha  powitri  ov  oeth  iz  nevar  ded : 

When  61  dha  boedz  aar  feyut  widh  dha  hot  seen, 
And  haid  in  kuwling  triyz,  a  vois  wil  roen 

From  hej  tu  hej  abaut  dha  nyu-mown  miyd ; 

Dhset  iz  dha  graas-hopar — hiy  teyks  dha  liyd 
In  soemar  loekshari, — hiy  haez  nevar  doen 
Widh  hiz  dilaits,  for  when  taiad  aut  widh  foen, 

Hiy  rests  set  iyz  biniyth  soem  plezn't  wiyd. 

Dha  powitri  ov  oeth  iz  siysing  nevar : 

On  a  lown  wintar  iyvning,  when  dha  frost 

Hsez  rot  a  sailans,  from  dha  stowv  dhear  shrilz 

Dha  krikits  song,  in  womth  inkriysing  evar, 
And  siymz  tu  woan,  in  drauzinis  haaf  lost, 

Dha  graas-hopar  amoeng  soem  graasi  hilz. 

— Keats. 

Alternative  forms:  — '  it.       2  byutiful.      3  sem. 


Owd  tu  dha  Kuku.  59 

OWD   TU  DHA  KUKU. 

Heyl  bytityas  streynjar  ov  dlia  growv ! 

Dhau  mesinjar  ov  Spring ! 
Nau  hevn'  ripeaz  dhai  ruaral  siyt, 

And  wudz  dhai  welkam  sing. 

Whot  taim  dha  deyzi  deks  dha  griyn, 

Dhai  soetin  vois  wiy  hiar ; 
Hsest  dhau  a  staar  tu  gaid  dhai  paath, 

Or  maak  dha  rowling  yiar  ? 

Dilaitful *  vizitant !  widh  dhiy 

Ai  heyl  dha  taim  ov  flauaz, 
And  hiar  dha  saund  ov  myuzik  swiyt 

From  boedz  amoeng  dha  batiaz. 

Dha  skuwlboi,  wondring2  thruw  dha  wild 

Tu  pul  dha  primrowz  gey, 
Staats,  dha  nyu  vois  ov  Spring  tu  hiar, 

And  imiteyts  dhai  ley. 

Whot  taim  dha  piy  puts  on  dha  bluwm 

Dhau  flaist  dhai  vowkal  veyl 
An  senyual  gest  in  osdhar  Isendz 

Anoedhar  Spring  tu  heyl. 

Swiyt  boed  !  dhai  bauar  iz  evar  griyn, 

Dhai  skai  iz  evar  kliar ; 
Dhau  hsest  now  soro'  in  dhai  soiig, 

Now  Wintar  in  dhai  yiar ! 

Ow  kud  ai  flai,  ai  d  3  flai  widh  dhiy  ! 

Wiy  d  3  meyk,  widh  joiful 4  wing, 
Auar  senyual  vizit  oar  5  dha  glowb, 

Kampsenj-anz  ov  dha  Spring. 

— John  Logan. 

Alternative  forms: — '  dilaitfl'.       2  Avoendaring.       3  wud.       4  joifl'. 
5  owvar. 


60  Riyding  Lesn'z—Powitri. 

DHA  MILAR  ov  DIY. 

Dhear  dwelt  a  milar,  heyl  and  bowld, 

Bisaid  dha  rivar  Diy ; 
Hiy  woekt  and  sseng  from  mon  til  nait, 

Now  laak  moar  blaidh  dhsen  hiy ; 
And  dhis  dha  boedn'  ov  hiz  song 

For  evar  yust  tu  biy  : 
"  Ai  envi  nowbadi,  now,  not  ai, 

And  nowbadi  enviz  miy." 

"Dhau  at1  rong,  mai  frend,"  sed  gud  King  Hael— 

"  JEz  rong  sez  rong  keen  biy — 
For  kud  mai  haat  biy  lait  sez  dhain, 

Ai  d  2  glsedli  clieynj  widh  dhiy ; 
And  tel  miy  nau,  whot  meyks  dhiy  sing 

Widh  vois  sow  laud  and  friy, 
Whail  ai  sem  seed,  dhow  ai  m  3  dha  king, 

Bisaid  dha  rivar  Diy  ?  " 

Dha  mikt-r  smaild  and  dof  t  hiz  k?ep : 

"  Ai  oen  mai  bred,"  kwowth  hiy  ; 
"  Ai  loev  mi4  waif,  ai  loev  mi  frend, 

Ai  loev  mi  childran  thriy ; 
Ai  ow  now  peni  ai  ksenot  pey; 

Ai  thsengk  dha  rivar  Diy, 
Dhat  toenz  dha  mil  dhat  graindz  dha  kOn 

Dhat  fiydz  mai  beybz  and  miy." 

"  Gud  frend,"  sed  Hsel,  and  said  dha  whail, 

"  Feawel  and  hsepi  biy  ; 
Boet  sey  now  moar,  if  dhau  dst5  biy  trmv, 

Dhat  now  ween  enviz  dhiy : 
Dhai  miyli  keep  iz  woeth  mai  kraun, 

Dhai  mil,  mai  kingdamz  fiy  ; 
Soech  men  sez  dhau  aar  Ingglandz  bowst, 

Ow  milar  ov  dha  Diy  !  " 

— Mackay. 

Alternative  forms : — !  aat.     2  wud.     3  eem,  am.     4  mai.     5  \vuclst. 


Ween  bai  Ween.  61 

WCEN  BAI   WCEN. 

Ween  bai  woen  dha  ssendz  aar  flowing, 

Woen  bai  woen  dha  mowmants  fol ; 
Seem  aar  koeming,  soem  aar  go  wing  ; 

Duw  not  straiv  tu  graasp  dliem  61. 

Ween  bai  ween  dhai  dyutiz  weyt  dhiy, 

Let  dhai  howl  strength  gow  tu  iych, 
Let  now  fyuchar  driymz  ileyt  dhiy, 

Loen  dhati  foest  whot  dhiyz  keen  tiych. 

Woen  bai  woen  (brait  gifts  from  Hevn') 

Joiz  aar  sent  dhiy  hiar  bilow ; 
Teyk  dhem  redili  when  givn', 

Redi  biy  tu  let  dhem  gow. 

Woen  bai  woen  dhai  griyfs  shsel  miyt  dhiy, 

Duw  not  fiar  an  aamid  l  bsend ; 
Ween  wil  feyd  sez  oedhaz  griyt  dhiy, 

Shaedo'z  paasing  thruw  dha  Isend. 

Duw  not  luk  set  laifs  long  soro'  ; 

Siy  hau  smol  iych  mowmants  peyn  ; 
God  wil  help  dhiy  for  ta-moro', 

Sow  iych  dey  bigin  ageyn. 

Evri  auar  dhat  fliyts  sow  slowli, 

Hsez  its  taask  tu  duw  or  bear ; 
Lyuminas  dha  kraun,  and  howli, 

When  iych  jena  iz  set  widh  kear. 

Di;w  not  linggar  widh  rigreting, 

Or  for  paasing  auaz  dispond ; 
Nor,  dha  deyli  toil  fogeting,2 

Luk  tuw  iygali  biyond. 

Auaz  aar  gowldn'  lingks,  Godz  towkn', 

Riyching  Hevn' ;  beet  woen  bai  woen, 
Teyk  dhem,  lest  dha  cheyn  biy  browkn' 

Ear  dha  pilgrimij  biy  doen. 

— Adelaide  Proctor. 

Alternative  forms  : — 1  aamd.         2  fagetiiip;. 


6'2  Biyding  Lesri*z — Powitri. 

LOKINVAAR. 
Lcydi  Heranz  Song. 

Ow,  yoeng  Lokinvaar  iz  koein  aut  ov  dha  west, 
Thruw  61  dha  waid  Bodar  hiz  stiyd  woz  dha  best, 
And,  seyv  hiz  gud  brod-sod,  hiy  wepanz  hsed  noen ; 
Hiy  rowd  61  oenaamd,  and  hiy  rowd  61  alown. 
Sow  feythful  in  loev,  and  sow  dontlis  in  wor, 
Dhear  nevar  woz  nait  laik  dha  yoeng  Lokinvaar. 

Hiy  steyd  not  for  breyk,  and  hiy  stopt  not  for  stown, 

Hiy  swsem  dhi  Esk  rivar  whear  fod  dhear  woz  noen  ; 

Boet,  ear  hiy  alaitid  set  Nedhabi  geyt, 

Dha  braid  haed  kansentid,  dha  gselant  keym  leyt, 

For  a  Isegad  in  loev,  and  a  dsestad  in  wor, 

Woz  tu  wed  dha  fear  Elin  ov  breyv  Lokinvaar. 

Sow  bowldli  hiy  entad  dha  Nedhabi  hoi 
Amoeng  braidzman  and  kinzman,  and  broedhaz  and  61 : 
Dhen  spowk  dha  braidz  faadhar,  hiz  hsend  on  hiz  sod 
(For  dha  puar  kreyvn'  braidgruwm  sed  nevar  a  woed), 
"  Ow,  koem  yiy  in  piys  hiar,  or  koein  yiy  in  wor, 
Or  tu  daans  set  auar  braidl',  yoeng  Lod  Lokinvaar  ?  " 

"  Ai  long  wuwd  yor  dotar,  mai  syut  yu  dinaid ; — 
Loev  swelz  laik  dha  Solwey,  boet  ebz  laik  its  taid — 
And  nau  ai  sem  koein,  widh  dhis  lost  loev  ov  main, 
Tu  liyd  beet  woen  mezhar,  dringk  woen  keep  ov  wain. 
Dhear  aar  meydn'z  in  Skotland  moar  loevli  bai  faar, 
Dhat  wud  glsedli  biy  braid  tu  dha  yoeng  Lokinvaar." 

Dha  braid  kist  dha  goblit ;  dha  nait  tuk  it  oep, 

Hiy  kwaaft  of  dha  wain,  and  hiy  thruw  daun  dha  keep, 

Shiy  lukt  daun  tu  bloesh,  and  shiy  lukt  oep  tu  sai, 

Widh  a  smail  on  hoer  lips  and  a  tiar  in  hoer  ai. 

Hiy  tuk  hoer  soft l  hsend,  ear  hoer  mcedhar  kud  baar, — 

"  Nau  tred  wiy  a  mezhar !  "  sed  yoeng  Lokinvaar. 

Alternative  form  : — l  soft. 


Aaftar  Blenim.  63 

Sow  steytli  hiz  fora,  and  sow  loevli  hoer  feys, 

Dhat  nevar  a  hoi  soech  a  gselyad  did  greys  ; 

Whail  hoer  moedhar  did  fret,  and  hoer  faadhar  did  fyum, 

And  dha  braidgruwm  stud  dsenggling  hiz  bonit  and  pluwm  ; 

And  dha  braid-meydn'z  whispad,  "  T  woer  betar  bai  faar 

Tu  haev  msecht  aur  fear  koezn'  widh  yoeng  Lokinvaar." 

Woen  toech  tu  hoer  hsend,  and  woan  woed  in  hoer  iar,1 

When  dhey  riycht  dha  hol-doar,  and  dha  chaajar  stud  niar ; 

Sow  lait  tu  dha  kruwp  dha  fear  leydi  hiy  swo3ng, 

Sow  tait  tu  dha  ssedl'  bifoar  hoer  hiy  sprang ! 

•'  Shiy  iz  woen !  wiy  aar  gon,2  owvar  bsengk,  bush,  and  skoar  ; 

Dhey  1  3  hsev  fiiyt  stiydz  dhat  folo' ;  "  kwowth  yoeng  Lokinvaar. 

Dhear  woz  maunting  moeng  4  Griymz  ov  dha  Nedhabi  klsen  ; 

Fostaz,  Feniks  and  Mcezgreyvz,  dhey  rowd  and  dhey  rsen  : 

Dhear  woz  reysing,  and  cheysing  on  Kseno'bi  Liy, 

Boet  dha  lost  braid  ov  Nedhabi  near  5  did  dhey  siy. 

Sow  dering  in  loev,  and  sow  dontlis  in  wor, 

Hsev  yiy  ear  °  hoed  ov  gselant  laik  yoang  Lokinvaar  ? 

— Scott. 

AAFTAR  BLENIM. 

It  waz  7  a  soemar  iyvning ; 

Owld  Ksespaz  woek  waz  doen, 
And  hiy  bifoar  hiz  kotij  doar 

Waz  siting  in  dha  seen  ; 
And  bai  him  spotid  on  dha  griyn 
Hiz  litl'  grsendchaild  Wilamiyn. 

Shiy  so  hoer  broeclhar  Piytakin 
Rowl  soemthing  laaj  and  raund, 

Which  hiy  bisaid  dha  rivyulet 
In  pleying  dhear  hsed  faund  ; 

Hiy  keym  tu  aask  whot  hiy  hsed  faund 

Dhat  woz  sow  laaj  and  smuwdh  and  raund. 

Alternative  forms:— J  yoer.     2  gen.     3  wil.     4  amoeng.     5  nevar. 
0  evar.         '   woz. 


G4  Riyding  Lesrfz — Powitri. 

Owld  Ksespar  tuk  it  from  dha  boi, 

Huw  stud  ikspektant  bai ; 
And  dhen  dhi  owld  maen  shuk  hiz  lied, 

And  widh  a  nsechral 1  sai, 
"  T  iz  seem  puar  felo'z  skoel,"  sed  hiy, 
"  Huw  fel  in  dha  greyt  viktari." 2 

"  Ai  f  aind  dhem  in  dha  gaadn', 
For  dhear  z  men!  hiar  abaut ; 

And  ofn  when  ai  gow  tu  plan 
Dha  plaushear  toenz  dhem  aut. 

For  meni  thauzand  men,"  sed  hiy, 

"  Woer  sleyn  in  dhaet  greyt  viktari." 

"  Nau  tel  oes  whot  t  waz  61  abaut," 

Yoeng  Piytakin  hiy  kraiz  ; 
And  litl'  Wilamiyn  luks  oep 

Widh  woendar-weyting  aiz ; 
"  Nau  tel  oes  61  abaut  dha  wor, 
And  whot  dhey  fot  iych  oedhar  for  ?  " 

"  It  waz  dhi  Ingglish,"  Ksespar  kraid, 
"  Huw  put  dha  French  3  tu  raut ; 

Beet  whot  dhey  fot  iych  oedhar  for 
Ai  kud  not  wel  meyk  aut,  • 

Boet  evribodi  sed,"  kwowth  hiy, 

"  Dhat  t  woz  a  f  eymas  viktari. 

Mai  faadhar  livd  set  Blenim  dhen, 

Yon  litl'  striym  haad  bai ; 
Dhey  boent  hiz  dweling  tu  dha  graund, 

And  hiy  waz  f  6st  tu  flai : 
Sow  widh  hiz  waif  and  chaild  hiy  fled, 
Nor  hged  hiy  whear  tu  rest  hiz  hed. 

Widh  faiar  and  sod  dha  koentri  raund 
Waz  weystid  faar  and  waid, 

Alternative  forms  : — l  naecharal.        2  viktri.         3  Frensh. 


Seem  Moemar.  65 

And  men!  a  chailding  moedhar  dhen 

And  nyubon  beybi  daid  : 
Boet  thingz  laik  dhset,  yu  now,  moest  biy 
JEt  evri  feymas  viktari. 

Dhey  sey  it  woz  a  shoking  sait 

Aaftar  dha  ftyld  waz  WCBH  ; 
For  meni  thauzand  bodiz  hiar 

Ley  roting  in  dha  soen  : 
Boet  thingz  laik  dhset,  yu  now,  mosst  biy 
Aaftar  a  feymas  viktari. 

Greyt  preyz  dha  Dyuk  ov  Molbra 1  woen 

And  auar  gud  Prins  Yujiyn  ;  " 
— "  Whai  t  woz  a  veri  wikid  thing  !  " 

Sed  litl'  Wilamiyn  ; 

"Ney  .  .  .  ney  .  .  .  mai  litl'  goel."  kwowth  hiy, 
"  It  waz  a  feymas  viktari." 

And  evribodi  preyzd  dha  Dyuk 

Huw  dhis  greyt  fait  did  win." 
— "  Boet  whot  gud  keym  ov  it  set  laast  ?  ;' 

Kwowth  litl'  Piytakin  : — 
"  Whai  dhset  ai  ksenot  tel,"  sed  hiy, 
"  Boet  t  woz  a  feymas  viktari." 

—It.  Southey. 

SCEM  MOEMAR. 

Soem  nioemar,  when  dhear  skai  iz  kliar 

And  howlli  brait  tu  vyu, 
If  woen  smol  spek  ov  daak  apiar 

In  dhear  greyt  hevn'  ov  bluw. 
And  seem  widh  thsengkful  loev  aar  fild 

If  boet  ween  striyk  ov  lait, 
Woen  rey  ov  Godz  gud  moesi  gild 

Dha  daaknis  ov  dhear  nait. 

Alternative  form  :—1  Molbara. 
I.  P.    II.  E 


66  Ely  ding  Lesrfz—Fowitri. 

In  pselasiz  aar  haats  dhat  aask, 

In  diskantent  and  praid, 
Whai  laif  iz  seech  a  driari  taask, 

And  61  gud  thingz  dinaid. 
And  haats  in  puarist  hoets  admaiar 

Hau  Loev  hsez  in  dhear  eyd 
(Loev  dhat  not  evar  siymz  t\\  taiar) 

Soech  rich  pro'vizhan  meyd. 

— Arch  b  ish  op  Trcn  ch . 


EXERCISES. 

EXERCISE  I. 

Silent  letters  to  be  left  out,  and  i  to  be  written  instead  of  y 
or  ie  at  the  end  of  words. 


Instead 

of:— 

well 

begged 

deck 

sense 

Jessie 

ill 

filled 

kick 

twelve 

Minnie 

doll 

robbed 

rock 

give 

pussy 

pull 

pulled 

flock 

solve 

Johnnie 

mess 

very 

head 

wren 

merrily 

miss 

silly 

bread 

wrist 

steadily 

dross 

folly 

deaf 

knit 

possibly 

puss 

fully 

breast 

knob 

impossibility 

We  write  : — 


wel 

begd 

dek 

sens 

Jesi 

il 

fild 

kik 

twelv 

Mini 

dol 

robd 

rok 

giv 

pusi 

pul 

puld 

flok 

solv 

Joni 

mes 

veri 

heel 

ren 

merili 

mis 

sili 

bred 

rist 

stedili 

dros 

foli 

def 

nit 

posibli 

pus 

fuli 

brest 

nob 

imposibiliti 

Write  in  the  same  manner : — 

Bell,  egg,  inn,  stiff,  odd,  full,  digged,  lived,  lead,  dead,  pity, 
merry,  sorry,  Willy,  ready,  sense,  stick,  block,  horrid,  plenty, 
plentifully. 


68  Exercises. 

EXERCISE  II. 
On  icords  from  Reading  Lesson  I. 


atcnd 

|>a-l 

pet 

pit 

pot 

put 

a 

h?ed 

wel 

it 

foks 

intu 

an 

set 

get 

hiz 

woz 

gud 

and 

ktenot 

plenti 

iz 

ov 

wud 

apon 

iBZ 

1'rend 

in 

lukt 

agen 

hiev 

frendz 

nimbli 

eni 

if 

Learn  to  write  ae  all  in  one  stroke. 

Observe  the  different  sound  of  ae  in  pa>.t  and  a  in  attend, 
America,  villa. 

1.  What  symbols  do  we  generally  use  in  the  above  words  for 
a,  a',  e,  i,  o,  u  1 

2.  Write  phonetically,  that  is,  according  to  sound  : — 

John  had  a  good  dog.  Florrie  looked  at  it.  A  bag  full  of 
wool.  A  woolly  lamb.  His  foot  is  wet.  His  hand  is  full. 
Sam  left  his  book.  Jem  took  it.  Willy  is  not  steady.  Give 
him  ten  minutes 

EXERCISE  III. 
On  words  from  Reading  Lesson  7, 

t  n  v  a  k  ks 

lukt.  krenot  ov  jez  ksnot  foks 

compare  plenti  hiz  compare  compare 

kukt  eni  iz  keep  wajks 

dipt  nimbli  woz  kot  veks 

stopt  intu  frendz  kuk  miks 

1.  What  symbols  do  you  generally  use  in  the  above  words 
for  t,  n,  v,  z,  ks  ? 

2.  Write  according  to  sound  : — 

Ann   is  a  good   cook.     Henry  has  a  pretty  box.     Ten  pens. 
Twenty  pence.     Fifty  books.     Sixty  beds.     Main'  cocks   and 


Exercise. 


69 


hens.  A  box  of  bricks.  Wilty  knocked.  John  helped  Tom. 
Minnie  has  bread  and  eggs.  Ned  spells  well.  Kitty  has  many 
friends. 

EXERCISE  IV. 
On  icorcU  from  Reading  Lesson  II. 


a 

iig 

th 

till 

zh 

eh 

dha 

longgar 

thingk 

dhi 

trezhar 

which 

dhat 

thingk 

\voeth 

dha 

compare 

much 

compare 

compare 

compare 

dhis 

plezhar 

compare 

a 

singar 

thin 

dhat 

trezhar 

dich 

an 

finggar 

thik 

compare 

vizhan 

fech 

and 

hoenggri 

thisl' 

dhen 

dilyuzhan 

chin 

clhtet 

dongki 

pith 

widh 

ruwzh 

chest 

Observe  that  the  endings  of  longgar  and  trezhar  sound  the 
same  as  those  of  grammar,  kolar.  sdar,  dolar,  though  we  are 
accustomed  to  write  lony-cr,  treas-ure,  gramm-ar,  coll-ar, 
cell-ar,  doll-ar. 

Write  phonetically  : — 

The  bell  was  ringing.  Annie  was  thinking.  The  lamb  is 
drinking.  Measure  this  bit  of  wood.  A  mossy  bank.  A  hotch- 
potch Match  that  red  wool.  Put  in  a  stitch.  Drink  the  milk. 
Fanny  is  at  leisure.  Ned  has  a  treasure.  John  is  very  angry 
Tom  is  angling. 

EXERCISE  V. 
On  words  from  Reading  Lessons  III.  and  IV. 


ow 

show 
sow 
dhowz 
owuli 
owld 

Note  that  ce  should  be  written  without  lifting  the  pen. 
1.  Write  in  ordinary  spelling  two  fresh  examples  of  each  of 
the  sounds  ce,  ey,  iy,  ow,  uw. 


^y  *y 

wey  miy 

dhey  siy 

sti'eyt  piypl' 

teyking  priysept 


II  W 

OP 

ti 

luiw 

03p 

krukid 

duw 

soem 

tu  (to) 

fuwd 

boet 

compare 

juwil 

woen 

tuw  (too) 

tuw  (two) 

70  Exercises. 

2.  Write  phonetically  :  — 

Haste  makes  waste.  No  pains,  no  gains.  Ill  weeds  grow 
apace.  Extremes  meet.  Charity  begins  at  home.  Great  is 
the  truth  and  it  shall  prevail.  None  of  these  things  moved 
him.  The  tongue  is  not  steel,  but  it  cuts.  Treasures  (ending 
-az)  of  wickedness  profit  nothing. 

EXERCISE  VI. 
On  words  from  Reading  Lesson  V. 


aa 

oe 

o 

aas 
faar 
laafing 
faadhar 

woer 
goelz 
ritoening 
oenist 

toking 
w6kt 
yor 

nor 

compare 
aar 

compare 

hoer 

compare 
or 

staar 

soer 

for 

staav 

woed 

stom 

kaat 

boen 

hos 

Remember  to  write 

final    r  though 

it  is   sometimes  silent 

We  hear  it  in  "far  off',"  "father  is  at  home." 

Write  phonetically :  — 

Alms  are  the  salt  of  riches.  Truth  may  be  blamed  but  can't 
be  shamed.  He  that  sleepeth  in  harvest  is  a  son  that  causeth 
shame.  A  soft  answer  turneth  away  wrath.  All  her  paths  are 
peace.  Forewarned,  forearmed. 

EXERCISE  VII. 
On  words  from  Rcadiny  Lesson  VI. 

ai 

ai 

bai 

taim 

mai 

straiv 

vaaind 


au 

01 

y« 

alauing 

distroid 

nyu 

daun 

compare 

rifyuz 

gaun 

point 

compare 

compare 

joint 

}TU 

nau 

boi 

regyular 

bau 

joi 

vselyu 

Exercises.  71 

The  symbol  for  ou  in  house,  namely  au,  is  the  same  that  is 
used  for  this  sound  in  German,  so  we  spell  the  English  words 
house,  mouse,  exactly  like  German  Haus,  Maus. 

Observe  that — 

ai  is  like  aa,  iy  oi  is  like  6,  iy 

au      ,,      aa,  uw  yu      ,,     y,  uw. 

Write  phonetically : — 

A  stitch  in  time  saves  nine.  If  thou  do  ill,  the  joy  fades,  not 
the  pains ;  if  well,  the  pain  doth  fade,  the  joy  remains.  The 
pan  says  to  the  pot,  "  Keep  off,  or  you'll  smutch  me."  Murder 
will  out.  Who  knows  nothing,  doubts  nothing.  One  foe  is  too 
many,  and  a  hundred  friends  too  few.  No  cross,  no  crown. 

EXERCISE  VIII. 
On  words  from  Reading  Lesson  VIII. 

ar  a  a 

klremar  oeclhaz  pitishancl 

betar  libati  ko'mowshan 

odar  venchad  kandishan 

terar  compare  ameyzmant 

compare  odaz  pcenishmant 

selar  teraz  distans 

kolar  selaz  sekand 

vila  kolaz  prezantli 

Bela  vilaz 

Observe  how,  when  z  is  added,  r  disappears. 
Show  that  a,  c,  o  or  ou  may  stand  for  the  sound  a  in  ordinary 
spelling. 

Write  phonetically  : — 

Out  of  debt,  out  of  danger.  A  prophet  has  no  honour  in  his 
own  country.  Physician  heal  thyself.  The  receiver's  as  bad 
as  the  thief.  A  rolling  stone  gathers  no  moss.  Thou  shalt 
sooner  detect  an  ant  moving  in  the  dark  night  on  the  black 
earth,  than  all  the  morions  of  pride  in  thine  heart. 


72 


Exercises. 


EXERCISE  IX. 
On  words  from  Reading  Lesson  VIII. 


V 

m» 

n' 

0' 

0' 

mosl' 

compare 

koezn' 

pro'kyuar 

compare 

poepl' 

bseptizm' 

soedn' 

compare 

soro' 

compare 

sizm' 

owpn' 

pro'tekt 

folo' 

iitr 

ksezm' 

compare 

mo'lest 

folo'z 

bsebl'd 

boetn' 

bilo' 

folo'd 

boebl'z 

ridn' 

bilo'z 

folo'ing 

ritn' 

bilo\v 

folo'ar 

Write  phonetically : — 

Man  proposes,  God  disposes.  Coals  to  Newcastle.  Misfor- 
tunes never  come  single.  Heaven  and  earth  fight  in  vain 
against  a  dunce.  The  river  past  and  God  forgotten.  When 
the  tale  of  bricks  is  doubled,  Moses  comes.  Is  Saul  also  among 
the  prophets? 


EXERCISE  X. 


On  words  from  Reading  Lesson  VIII. 


ea 

ia 

oa 

dhear 

hiar 

doar 

whear 

fiar 

stoar 

fear  (fare) 
kear 
keafuli 

fiad 

compare 
apiar 

bifoar 
compare 
doz 

compare 
feaz 
feacl 

apiaz 
apiad 
ashuar 

Stoz 
stod 
roar 

keaz 

ashuaz 

roz 

kead 

ashuad 

rod 

ua 

puar 

compare 
buar 
duar 
muar 
muaz 
muad 
ashuar 
ashuaz 
ashuad 


The  following  words  give  the  key  to  these  sounds  : — 
bear  bier  boar  boor. 


Exercises.  73 

Observe  how  words  ending  in  r  lose  the  r  when  a  consonant 
is  added,  and  words  ending  in  oar  lose  a  also. 

1.  Show  in  ordinary  spelling  two  or  more  ways  of  representing 
each  of  the  sounds  ear,  iar,  oar,  uar. 

2.  Write  phonetically : — 

More  haste,  worse  speed.  A  scalded  dog  fears  cold  water. 
Ill  doers  are  ill  deemers.  There's  many  a  slip  twixt  the  cup 
and  the  lip.  The  fear  of  man  bringeth  a  snaro.  A  poor  man  is 
better  than  a  fool.  Before  honour  is  humility. 


EXERCISE  XI. 
On  words  from  Reading  Lessons  VIII.  and  IK. 

aia 

haiar 
haiad 

compare 
faiar 

faiaz 
faiad 
taiar 
taiaz 
taiad 

Ob.serve  that,  r  forms  triphthongs. 

Also  that  doubled  letters  must  be  used  in  those  few  cases 
where  the  sounds  are  doubled. 

AVrite  phonetically:  — 

The  grapes  are  sour.  Knowledge  is  power.  A  burnt  child 
fears  the  fire.  It  is  naught,  it  is  naught,  saith  the  buyer,  but 
when  he  is  gone  his  way,  then  he  boasteth.  They  were  marry- 
ing and  giving  in  marriage.  To  the  pure  all  things  are  pure. 
We  count  them  blessed  which  endure. 


HUH 

yua            Doubled  letters. 

owvapauad 

indyuar 

deyntiist 

compare 

pro'kyuar 

middey 

auar 

sikyuariti 

compare 

sauar 

compa  re 

pritiist 

pauar 

pyuar 

kseriing 

pauaz 

indyuaz 

hoeriing 

flauar 

indyuad 

stoediing 

flauaz 

pro'kyuar 

heddres 

flauad 

pro'kyuad 

bukkeys 

74  Exercises. 

EXERCISE  XII. 

K  and  6  are  not  always  turned  into  diphthongs  by  r  follow- 
ing. Examples : — 

kear  kering  keaz 

bear  bering  beaz 

stoar  storing  stod 

roar  roring  rod 

Note  that  e  occurs  only  before  r  and  a  vowel.  But  d  occurs 
also  when  r  disappears  before  a  consonant. 

Examples  of  e  :— 

eri  feri  veri  Sera  verid 

heri  deri  Heri  perant         veriing 

Notice  the  appearance  of  words  with  ai  or  oi  followed  by  i. 
Examples  : — 

traiing  baiing  dikoiing  distroiing 

Write  phonetically : — 

A  hoary  old  man.  A  daring  robbery.  The  door  was  ajar. 
Wood  is  porous.  Clara  will  not  return.  Mary  is  enjoying  her 
ride.  Mr.  Jones  is  employing  a  gardener.  Her  motives  are 
not  apparent.  Morocco  wears  well.  Sarah  is  lying  down. 
Louisa  is  untying  a  knot.  They  are  restoring  the  church. 


EXERCISE  XIII. 
On  Accent. 

In  English  most  words  are  accented  on  the  first  syllable. 
But  words  ending  in  shan,  zliait,  slial  or  iti  are  always 

accented  on  the  syllable  preceding  these  terminations. 

And  the  vowels  a  ajid  o'  are  never  accented ;  so  if  the  vowel 
of  the  first  syllable  is  a  or  o%  and  the  word  does  not  end  in 
whan,  zhaii,  shal  or  iti,  we  accent  the  second  syllables 


Exercises. 


75 


Examples : — 

-shan,    Allan  -shal,  -Hi 

extension  judicial 
civilization          initial 
mathematician   inability 
intrusion  majority 

indecision  humanity 


a- 

sagacious 

away 

account 

lament 

arrival 


protect 

propose 

oblige 

produce 

domain 


Write  out  the  following  words  phonetically,  marking  the 
accent,  and  arranging  them  in  three  classes,  (1)  those  whose 
accent  is  determined  by  the  ending,  (2)  those  whose  accent  is 
determined  by  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable,  and  (3)  those 
which  are  irregular,  not  coming  under  the  above  rules : — 


protect 


continue 


delusion. 


advise 

obedient 

exhibit 

abominable 

condescend 
division 
return 
severity 

molest 
observation 
determine 
expansion 

exhibition 
prejudicial 
intelligent 
insensibility 

impossibility 
intimidate 
dislike 
conceal 

APPENDICES. 

I. 
SPECIMENS  OF  FRENCH. 

L    yl\TROPOFA:J. 

Deu  pti  garso?i  d  la  vil,  Richa:r  e  Gusta:v,  s  egare:r  eun 
jou:r  dnmz  un  epe:s  fore.  Anfdn  i  trouve:r  un  petit  oberj,  6 
milyeu  d  la  fore,  e  iz  i  antre:r  pour  i  pase  la  ma. 

A  mima,  iz  antandi:r  parle  dan  la  chanb  vwazin.  Gusta:v, 
ki  n  dorme  pa  e  ky  ete  tre  kuryeu,  reveya  son  frerr.  Iz  ale:r, 
so  met  pre  d  la  port,  prete:r  1  ore:y,  e  anta?zdi:r  1  oberjist  ki 
clize  a  sa  fam :  "  Ma  che:r,  dem<57z  mate?!  tu  metra  la  gr«?id 
cliodyerr  su  1  feu,  j  ve  tu&  no  ded  pti  dro:l  de  la  vil." 

A  se  mo,  le  povz  anian  parese:r  mouri:r  de'  freyeu:r. 
Richa:r,  ky  ete  tre  poltrcw,  di,  "Nou  som  perdu!  St  om  la  et 
cunn  antropofa:j  !  I  y  a  dez  a?ztropofa:j,  j  1  e  lu  dan  mon 
Robenson." 

Le  pti  Gusta:v,  ky  ete  pa  tutafe  6si  peureu,  di :  "I  fo  nou 
sove  par  la  fne:tr.  Vyen."  I  se  Iva  ton  dousmaw,  ouvri  la 
fne:tr  e  sota  an  ba ;  s  ete  pa  tre  da??jreu,  kar  la  chan:br  etet 
6  retchose  :  E,icha:r  sota  apre. 

Me  la  port  de  la  kou:r  ete  ferme.  Ne  pouvan  pa  sorti:r,  i 
cliercheir  partou  eun  rfu:j,  anien  i  trouve:r  un  etabl.  Gusta:v 
ouvri  la  port ;  deii  gro:s  be:t  n\va:r  sorti:r  an  gron«?i,  e 
s  elanse:r  dan  la  kou:r ;  le  deu  pti  garson,  tronblan  kom 
de  feu:y,  y  antre:r  a  leur  plas  e  i  pase:r  le  restan  d  la  ma. 

Le  mate?i,  1  oberjist  sorti  dan  la  kou:r,  eun  gran  kouto  a  la 
men.  II  ala  drwa  a  1  etabl  e  ouvri  la  port  an  dizan :  "  Alon,  me 
pti  dro:l,  sorte  :  vot  dernyer  eu:r  e  vnu." 

Le  deuz  anian  pouse:r  de  kri  lamantabl  e  1  prie:r  a  jnou 
de  n  pa  le  tue. 

L  oberjist,  tout  etone,  leur  di :  "  Keske  vou  fet  don  isi  ?  keska 


Specimens  of  French.  77 

vou  m  konte  ?  Mwa,  vou  toe  ?  eske  vou  ra  prene  pour  c/?«> 
maujeu:r  d  om?" 

"Me  wi,  msjeu,"  di  Richa:r,  "  vouz  ave  di  a  vot  fam,  set  ma  : 
"  '  demc'71  j  ture  le  deu  pti  dro:l  de  la  vil.'  " 

L  oberjist  parti  d  cun  grant  ekla  d  ri:r  e  di :  "  Ch  parle  d  me 
deu  kochon :  j  lez  apel  me  pti  dro:l  de  la  vil,  paske  j  lez  e 
achte  a  la  vil. — Alcm,  vne  vit  dejeune  e  vou  debarbouye : 
ansidii  j  vou  montrere  1  chemen  pour  rantre  che  vo  para?i.  Un 
6t  fwa  vou  n  ekoutre  plu  6  port." 

LE  DEU  PALMYE. 

Eim  jou:r  cun  Kalif  pase  1  Ion  d  un  ko:t  arid  ki  s  apel 
Cholwan  :  i  s  i  trouva  deu  palmye,  seulz  orneman  de  s  deze:r. 
II  ave  swaf,  e  ordona  k  1  on  koupa  1  cun  de  palmye  don  la  se:v 
dvet  e:tr  eun  breuva:j  delisyeu.  Lorske  1  arbre  fut  abatu,  1  onn 
apersu  1  ^nskripsyon  su{\*an:t :  "  Swaye  beni,  6  vou  le  deu 
palmye  d  Cholwan,  ki  ave  done  vo  hui  e  pre:te  vot'r  om:\)r 
0  po:vre  pasau  fatige  .  .  .  e  maleurr  a  selzd  ki  vouz  ora 
separe  !  "  Le  kalif  eyan  lu  se  mo  s  santi  malad  e  n  put  ale  plu 
l\ve». — Eusl  peri  1  puisan  ki  detriti  tou  pour  satisfe:r  un  anvi. 
Jcra:r  de  Nerved  (Gerard  dc  Nerved). 

LA  MEZOX  KI  MARCH. 

Charnase  avet  un  tre  \on:g  avnu  dvan  sa  mezow  aim  ^4wjou ; 
da?i  set  avnu  bel  e  parfet  ete  pla?ite  un  mezon  d  peizaw  e  son 
pti  jarden  ki  s  i  ete  trouve  lorsk  el  fu  bati.  Jame  Charnase 
ni  son  pe:r  n  ave  pu  redwi:r  se  peiz«7i  a  la  leur  va?i:d'r,  kelk 
avanta:j  k  il  hd  ami  us  ofe:r;  e  s  et  un  opinya:trete  don 
kantite  d  propriete:r  se  pik,  pour  fe:r  a?iraje  de  jan  a  la 
konvncm:s  e  kelke  fwa  a  la  nesesite  dekel  i  son.  Charnase, 
ne  sachan  plu  k  i  ie:r,  ave  le:se  sla  dp?d  Ionian,  sanz  an  plu 
parle.  Ani.cn,  fatige  t  set  chomyerr  ki  \ui  bouche  la  vu  e  Iwi 
ote  tou  1  agreman  t  somi  avnu,  il  imajina  cun  tou:r  de  pas 
pa:s. 

Le  peizau  ki  i  dmeu:re,  e  a  ki  el  apartene,  ete  tayeu:r  de 
son  metye,  ka?it  i  trouve  a  1  egzerse ;  e  il  ete  che  lui  tou  seul, 
sau  fain  ni  anfan.  Charnase  1  anvwa  cherche,  lid  di  k  il  e 
clmande  a  la  kou:r  pour  cuim  anphva  d  konsekan:s,  k  il  e 


78  Appendices. 

prese  d  s  i  ran:d'r,  me  k  i  lui  fo  un  livre.  I  ion  march  e  6 
kontan  ;  me  Charnase  stipul  kin  veu  pwen  s  fye  a  se  dele, 
e  ke,  mwayenan  kekcho:z  de  plus,  i  n  veu  pwdn  k  i  sort  de 
che  lui  k  sa  livre  n  swa  fet;  e  k  il  le  kouchra,  le  nourira  e  1 
peyra  avan  de  1  ranvwaye.  Le  tayeu:r  s  i  akord  e  s  me  a 
travaye. 

fandan  k  il  et  okupe,  Charnase  fe  pran:d'r  avek  la  der- 
nye:r  egzaktitud  le  p\an  e  la  dimansyon  t  sa  mezon  e  t  son 
jard£?i,  de  pyes  de  1  enteryeu:r,  jusk  a  la  pozisycm  dez 
ustansil  e  de  pti  meub'l,  fe  deinon:te  la  mezon,  e  anporte 
tou  s  ki  y  ete,  rmon:t  la  mezon  tel  k  el  ete,  o  just, 
dedom  e  deho:r,  a  kat  porte  d  mouske,  a  kote  t  sonn  avnu ; 
replas  tou  le  meubl  e  ustansil  dan  la  me:m  pozisyo?i  dan 
lakel  on  lez  ave  trouve,  e  retabli  1  peti  jarden  d  me:m ;  an 
mem  tan,  fet  aplani:r  e  netwaye  1  ajidrwa  d  1  avnu  ou  el 
ete,  an  sort  k  i  n  i  paru  pa.  Tou  sla  fiit  egzekute  a?zkor  plu 
to  k  la  livre  fet,  e  spandan  1  tuyeu:r  dousman  garde  a  vu,  d 
peu:r  de  kelk  ('?idiskresyon.— Anfcn  la  bzon  achve  d  part  e  d 
6:tr,  Charnase  amu:z  so?in  om  jusk  a  la  mil  by£n  nwa:r,  le 
pe:y  e  1  romvwa  kontan.  Le  via  ki  anfil  1  avnu.  By^/ito  i 
la  trouv  lo?i:g ;  apre,  i  va  6z  arbr,  e  n  an  trouv  plu ;  i  s 
aperswa  k  il  a  parse  1  bou,  e  rvycn  a  lenstan  cherche  lez 
arb'r ;  i  le  sui  a  1  e.stim,  pin  kr\va:z  e  n  trouv  pa  sa  mezon ; 
i  n  konpran  pwen  st  ava?itu:r.  La  TM(  s  pa:s  dan  st  egzersis ; 
le  jou:r  arirv,  e  dvy^n  by^/ito  ase  kle:r  pour  avize  sa  mezon. 
I  n  vwa  ry&n  ;  i  s  fix>t  lez  yeu ;  i  cherch  d  6:tz  obje  pour 
dekouvrirr  si  s  e  la  fo:t  de  sa  vu.  Anfen,  i  krwa  ke  1  dya:ble 
s  an  me:l  e  k  il  a  a?iporte  sa  mezo7i. 

A  fors  d  ale,  de  vni:r,  e  d  porte  sa  vu  d  tou  kote,  il  aperswa, 
n  un  ase  gran:d  distan:s  de  1  avnu,  un  mezo?i  ki  rsan:bl  a  la 
syen  kom  deu  gout  do.  In  peu  krwa:r  ke  sla  swa  ;  me  la 
kuryozite  1  fet  ale  ou  el  e,  e  ou  i  n  a  jame  vu  d  mezon.  Pluz 
il  aproch,  pluz  i  rkone  k  s  e  la  syen.  Pour  s  asu:re  myeu  de 
s  ki  lui  tourn  la  te:t,  i  preza»:t  sa  kle  ;  el  ou:vr,  il  nn:t'r, 
i  rtrou:v  tou  s  k  il  y  ave  le:se,  e  presizemcfyi  dan  la  mem 
plas.  II  e  pre  a  an  pa:me7  e  dineurr  konv^ftku  k  s  et  cun 
tou:r  de  sorsye.  La  journe  n  fu  pa  byrnn  avanse,  k  la  ri:ze 
du  cha:to  e  du  vila:j  1  £nstnti:zi  d  la  veritc  du  sortilerj,  e  1  mit 


Specimens  of  German.  79 

an  fu:ri.  I  veu  plede,  i  veu  dman:de  justis  a  1  entandan, 
e  partou  on  s  an  mok.  Le  rwa  1  su,  ki  an  rit  osi,  e  Charnase 
u  sewn  avnu  libr.  Si  i  n  ave  jame  fe  pi,  il  ore  kowserve  sa 
reputasyon  e  sa  liberte.  — S£n  Simon  (Saint  Simon}.* 

*  Msieu  d  CharnasS  fut  ar5t6  £  mi  an  pri.zow,  akn:ze,  di  Sen  Simon,  de 
bokou  d  mechemt  ch6:z,  surtou  d  fo:s  mone. 

II. 

SPECIMENS  OF  GERMAN. 

DurQ  dihze  hohle  Grase  mus  'ar  komen  ; 
'As  f'iihrt  kain  'andrer  Veli9:  nach  Kiisnacht — hihr 
Fol'and  i9S — dih  Gelehjenliait  2  '1st  giinsti^. 
Dort  dar  Holiindershtrauch  farbir9t  3  11119  'ihm  ; 
Fon  dort  liarap  kan  'ihn  main  Pfail  'arlangen ; 
Diis  Vehjes4  'Ange  veliret  dan  Fiirfoljern. 5 
Mach  daine  Hamming  mit  dam  Himel,  Fohcbt  !n 
Fort  must  dub,— daine  'Uhr  'ist  'apgelaufen. 

'19  lebpte  shtil  'unt  harmlobs — das  Geshos 
Yabr  'auf  das  Valdes  Tibre  nuhr  geri9tet, 
Maine  Gedangkeu  vabren  rain  fon  Mort — 
Dub  hast  'axis  mainem  Fribden  mi9  haraus 
Geshrakt ;  'in  gahrent  Drachengif t  hast  dub 
Dib  Mil9  dar  fromen  Dangk'ahrt  mibr  farvandelt ; 
Tsum  'Ungeboiren  bast  dub  mi9  gevohnt — 
Vehr  zi9  das  Kindes  Haupt  tsum  Tsihle  zatste, 
Dehr  kan  'auch  trafen  'in  das  Harts  das  Faints. 

***** 

Auf  dibzer  Bangk  fon  Sbtain  vil  'i<j  mic  zatsen, 
Dam  Vanderer  tsur  kurtsen  Rub  beraitet — 
Dan  hihr  'ist  kaine  Haimaht— jehder  traipt 
Zi9  'an  dam  'andern  rash  'unt  framt  fobrlihber, 
'Unt  frahqet7  ni9t  nacb  zainem  Shmarts — hihr  gebt 
Dar  zorjenfole  8  Kaufman,  'unt  dar  Iai9t 
Geshiirtste  Piljer 9 — dar  'anda9tje  Monc, 
Diir  dtihstre  Roiber,  'unt  dar  haitre  Shpiblman, 
Diir  Zoimer,  mit  dam  shvebr  belahdnen  Ros, 

Allowable  forms: — l  Vehk.     -  Gelehgenhait.      3  fiirbirkt.      4  Vchgos. 
6  Farfolgern.     c  Fohkt.     "  frahget.     8  zorgenfole.    9  Pilger. 


80  Appendices. 

• 

Das  fame  hehrkomt  fon  dar  Manshen  Landern  — 
Dan  jehde  Shtrahse  fuhrt  'ans  Ant  dar  Valt  — 
Zih  'ale  tsihen  'Hires  Vehjes  1  fort, 
An  'ihr  Geshaft  —  'unt  maines  '1st  dar  Mort  ! 

—Schiller,  "  Wilhclm  Tett.\- 

As  tsohqen  2  drai  Burshe  vohl  'iihbgr  den  Bain, 
Bai  ainer  Frau  Virtin  dah  kehrten  zih  'ain,: 
"  Frau  Yirtin!  hat  zih  guht  Bihr  'unt  Vain? 
Voh  hat  zih  ;iar  shohnes  To^terlain?" 
"  Main  Bihr  'unt  Vain  '1st  frish  'unt  klahr. 
Main  To^terlain  Iih9t  3  'auf  der  Tohtenbahr." 

'Unt  'als  zih  t  rah  ten  tsur  Kamer  hinain, 
Dah  lahch  4  zih  'in  ainem  shvartsen  Shrain. 

Der  'ehrste,  dehr  shluhch  5  den  Shlaier  tsuhriik, 
'Unt  shaute  zih  'an  rnit  traurijem  Blik  : 

"  'Ach,  lehptest  duh  noch,  duh  shohne  Mait  ! 
'1^  viirde  di9  lihben  fon  dihzer  Tsait." 

Der  tsvaite  dakte  den  Shlaier  tsuh, 
'Unt  kehrte  zi^  'ap,  'unt  vainte  dahtsuh  : 

"Ach,  das  duh  lil^st6  'auf  der  Tohtenbahr! 
'19  hahp  di9  gelihbet  zoh  man9es  Jahr." 

Der  drite  huhp  'ihn  vihder  zohglai9, 
'Unt  kiiste  zih  'an  den  Munt  zoh  blai9  : 

"  Die  lihpt  'i9  'imer,  di9  lihb  i9  noch  hoit, 
'Unt  vehrde  di?  lihben  'in  'Ehvi9kait." 

—Uhland. 


'As  'ist  doch  gevis,  das  'in  der  Valt  den  Manshen 
nohtvandi9  macht  'als  dih  Lihbe.  '19  fuhls  'an  Loten,  das  zih 
mi9  'ungarn  varl'ohre,  'unt  dih  Kinder  hahben  kaine  'andre 
'Ihd-eh,  'als  das  '$9  'imer  morjen  vihderkomen  viirde.  Hoit 
vahr  i9  hinausgegangen  Lotens  Klavihr  tsuh  shtimen;  'i9konte 
ahber  ni9t  dahtsuh  komen,  dan  dih  Klainen  farfo^ten  mi9  'um 

Allowable  forms  :  —  l  Vehges.     2  tsohgen.     z  lihkt.     4  lahk.     5  shluhk. 
«  lihkst. 


Specimens  of  German.  81 

'ain  Mahi^en,  'unt  Lote  zahchte  zalpst,  '19  zolte  'ihnen  den 
Vilen  tuhn.  'Lj  slinit  'ihnen  das  'Ahbentbroht,  das  zih  nuhn 
fast  zoh  game  fon  mihr,  als  fon  Loten  'annehmen,  'unt 
'artsahlte  'ihnen  das  Hataptshtuk^en  fon  dar  Prints'asin,  dih 
fon  Handen  bedihnt  virt.  '!Q  larne  fihl  dahbai,  das  farzipr  'i9 
di9,  'unt  19  bin  'arshtaunt,  vas  as  'auf  zih  fiihr  'Aindriike 
macht.  Vail  '19  man^mahl  'ainen  'Intsihda'ntspungkt  'arfinden 
mus,  dehn  'ic  bairn  tsvaiten  Mahle  fargii'se,  zahqen  zih  glai^, 
das  fohrije  Mahl  vahrs  'anders  gevehst,  zoh  das  'ip  mi^  jatst 
'iihbe,  zih  'unfar'a'nderliQ,  'in  ainem  zingenden  Zilbenfal  'an 
'ainem  Shniihi^en  va^  tsuh  rehtsiht'ihren.  '19  hahbe  dahraus 
gelarnt,  vih  'ain  'Autor  dur9  aine  tsvaite  far'-anderte  'Auflahqe 
zainer  Geshi9te,  'unt  van  zih  noch  zoh  poh'ehtish  baser  gevorden 
vahre,  nohtvandi9  zainem  Buhche  shahden  mus.  Der  'ehrste 
'Aindruk  findet  'uns  vili9,  'unt  der  Mansh  'ist  zoh  gemacht,  das 
man  'ihm  das  'Ahbentoierli9ste  'lihberrehden  kan ;  das  haftet 
'ahber  'auch  glai9  zoh  fast,  'unt  vehe  dehm,  dehr  as  vihder 
'auskratsen  'unt  'austiljen  vil ! 

—  Gothe,  "  Die  Leiden  dcs  jungcn  Werthers." 


I.  P.  II. 


82  Appendices. 

III. 

SPECIMEN  OF  ENGLISH, 

Showing  Variable  Words  in  my  oicn  Pronunciation. 
Dm  AISBOEG. 

At  twelv  aklok  wiy  went  bilow  an  ad  joest  got  thruw  dina, 
wen  dha  kuk  put  iz  hed  daun  dha  skcetl',  an  towld  as  ta  koem 
on  dek  an  siy  dha  fainist  salt  dhat  wiy  ad  eva  siyn. 

"  Wher  awey,  kuk?"  aast  dha  foest  msen  ,huw  went  cep. 
"On  dha  laabad  bau."  An  dhea  ley,  fiowting  in  dhi  owshn', 
sevral  mailz  of,  an  imens  iregyula  mses,  its  top  and  points 
kosvad  widh  snow,  and  its  sentar  av  a  diyp  indigo'  koala.  Dhis 
waz  an  aisboeg,  woen  av  dha  laajist  saiz,  az  woan  av  aua  men 
sed  hu  ad  biyn  in  dha  nodhan  owshan. 

Az  faar  az  ai  kud  riych.  dha  siy  in  evri  direkshn'  waz  av  a 
diyp  bluw  koela,  dha  weyvz  roening  hai  an  fresh,  an  spaakling 
in  dha  lait ;  and  in  dha  midst  ley  dhis  imens  mauntin  ailand, 
its  ksevitiz  an  vaeliz  thrown  inta  diyp  sheyd,  and  its  points  an 
pinakl'z  glitring  in  dhi  ea. 

01  hsendz  wa  suwn  on  dek  luking  set  it  and  admairing  in 
veri'as  weyz  its  byuti  an  grsenja ;  boet  now  diskripslm'  kan 
giv  eni  aidia  av  dha  stre}Tnjnis,  splendar,  and  rial  sablimiti  av 
dha  sait. 

Its  greyt  saiz,  far  it  incest  av  biyn  fram  tuw  ta  thriy  mailz 
in  sakoamfarans  an  sevral  hoendrad  fiyt  in  hait ;  its  slow 
mowshn' ;  aaz  its  beys  rowz  an  saangk  in  dha  wotaz,  and  its 
hai  points  nodid  agenst  dha  klaudz  ;  dha  dashing  av  dha  weyvz 
apon  it,  wich,  breyking  hai  widh  fowm,  koavad  its  beys  widh  a 
wait  kroast ;  dha  thcendring  saund  av  dha  krseking  av  dha  mses, 
an  dha  breyking  an  toambling  daun  av  hyuj  piysiz,  tagedha 
widh  its  nianis  and  aprowch,  wich  sedid  a  slait  elimant  av  fia — 
01  kambaind  ta  giv  it  dha  kteriktar  av  truw  sablimiti. 

Dha  meyn  bodi  av  dha  mses  woz,  az  ai  av  sed,  av  an  indigo' 
koala,  its  beys  waz  kroastid  widh  frowzn'  fowm,  and  aez  it  gruw 
thin  an  traansp'erant  tawodz  dhi  ejiz  an  top,  its  koala  shej'did 
Of  fram  a  diyp  bluw  ta  dha  waitnis  av  snow.  It  siymd  ta  bi 
drifting  slowli  tawodz  dha  nGth,  sow  dhat  wiy  kept  awejr  and 
avoidid  it. 

It  waz  in   sait  01  dhi  aaftanuwn,  and  sez  wiy  got  ta  lyuwad 


English  Variable  Words.  83 

THE.  SAME   SPECIMEN    OF   ENGLISH, 
With  a  fixed  spelling  for  Variable  Words. 

Dm  AISBOEG. 

jEt  twelv  aklokwiy  went  bilow,  and  hsed  joest  got  thruw  dinar, 
when  ciha  kuk  put  hiz  hed  daun  dha  skoetl',  and  towld  oes  tu 
koem  on  dek  and  siy  dha  fainist  sait  that  wiy  hsed  evar  siyn. 

"  Whear  awey,  kuk  ?  "  aast  dha  foest  msen  huw  went  oap. 
"  On  dha  laabad  ban."  And  dhear  ley,  flowting  in  dhi  owshan, 
sevral  mailz  of,  an  imens  iregyular  mass,  its  top  and  points 
koevad  widh  snow,  and  its  sentar  ov  a  diyp  indigo'  koelar.  Dhis 
woz  an  aisboeg,  woen  ov  dha  laajist  saiz,  gez  woen  ov  auar  men 
sed  huw  hsed  biyn  in  dha  nodhan  owshan. 

JEz  faar  sez  ai  kud  riych,  dha  siy  in  evri  direkshau  woz  ov  a 
diyp  bluw  koelar,  dha  weyvz  roening  hai  and  fresh,  and  spaak- 
ling  in  dha  lait;  and  in  dha  midst  ley  dhis  imens  mauntin 
ailand,  its  ksevitiz  and  vseliz  thrown  intu  diyp  sheyd,  and  its 
points  and  pinakl'z  glitring  in  dhi  ear. 

01  hsendz  woer  suwn  on  dek  luking  set  it  and  admairing  in 
veri'as  weyz  its  byuti  and  grsenjar ;  boet  now  diskripshan  ksen 
giv  eni  aiclia  ov  dha  streynjnis,  splendar,  and  rial  sablimiti  ov 
dha  sait. 

Its  greyt  saiz,  for  it  nicest  hsev  biyn  from  tuw  t\\  thriy  mailz 
in  sakcemfarans  and  sevral  hcendracl  fiyi  in  hait ;  its  slow 
mowshan,  sez  its  beys  rowz  and  ssengk  in  dha  wotaz,  and  its 
hai  points  nodid  agenst  dha  klaudz  ;  dha  dgeshing  ov  dha  weyvz 
apon  it,  which,  breyking  hai  widh  fowm,  kcevad  its  beys  widh  a 
whait  kroest ;  dha  thcendaring  saund  ov  dha  krseking  ov  dha  mass, 
and  dha  breyking  and  toembling  daun  ov  hyuj  piysiz,  tagedhar 
widh  its  nianis  and  aprowch,  which  sedid  a  slait  elimant  ov 
fiar — 61  kambaind  tu  giv  it  dha  kseriktar  ov  truw  sablimiti. 

Dha  meyn  bodi  ov  dha  mses  woz,  sez  ai  hsev  sed,  ov  an  indigo' 
koelar,  its  beys  woz  krcestid  widh  frowzn'  fowm,  and  sez  it  gruw 
thin  and  traansp'erant  tuwodz  dhi  ejiz  and  top,  its  koelar 
sheydid  of  from  a  diyp  bluw  tu  dha  whaitnis  ov  snow.  It 
siymd  tu  biy  drifting  slowli  tuwodz  dha  noth,  so  dhat  wiy 
kept  awey  and  avoidid  it. 

It  woz  in  sait  61  dhi  aaftanuwn,  and  sez  wiy  got  tu  lyuwad 


84  Appendices. 

av  it,  dha  wind  daid  awey,  sow  dhat  wiy  ley  tuw,  kwait  niar  it, 
fa  dha  greyta  paat  av  dha  nait.  (Enf'ochanitli  dha  waz  now 
muwn,  bat  it  waz  a  klia  nait,  and  wiy  kad  pleynli  maak  dha 
long  regyula  hiyving  av  dha  styupendas  mses  sez  its  ejiz  muwvd 
slowli  agenst  dha  staaz. 

Sevral  taimz  in  aua  woch  laud  krseks  wa  hoed,  wich  saundid 
az  dhow  dhey  mast  av  roen  thruw  dha  howl  length  av  dhi  ais- 
boeg,  an  sevral  piysiz  fel  daun  widh  a  thoendaring  krsesh,  ploan- 
jing  hevili  inta  dha  siy.  Tuwodz  moning  a  strong  briyz  sprseng 
oep,  sow  wiy  fild  awey,  an  left  it  astoen,  an  at  deylait  it  waz  aut 
av  sait. 


English  Variable  Words.  85 

ov  it,  dha  wind  daid  awey,  sow  dhat  \viy  ley  tuw,  kwait  mar  it, 
for  dha  grey  tar  paat  ov  dha  nait.  (Enf'ochanitli  dhear  woz 
now  muwn,  boat  it  woz  a  kliar  nait,  and  wiy  kud  pleynli  maak 
dha  long  regyular  hiyving  ov  dha  §tynpendas  mses  sez  its  ejiz 
muwvd  slowli  agenst  dha  staaz. 

Sevral  taimz  in  auar  woch  laud  krseks  woer  hoed,  which 
saundid  sez  dhow  dhey  nicest  hsev  roen  thruw  dha  howl  length  ov 
dhi  aisboeg,  and  sevral  piysiz  fel  daun  widh  a  thoendaring 
krsesh,  pkenjing  hevili  intu  dha  siy.  Tuwodz  moning  a  strong 
briyz  sprseng  oap,  sow  wiy  fild  awey,  and  left  it  astoen,  and  set 
deylait  it  woz  ant  ov  sait. 


INTRODUCTORY    SCIENCE.  TEXTBOOKS. 

3ntrofcuction0  to  tbc  Stufc^  of 

1.  PETROLOGY  (Igneous  Rocks).    By  FRED- 
ERICK   H.    HATCH,    Ph.D.,    F.G.S.,    of    the    Geological 
Survey  of  the  United  Kingdom.      With  4S  Illustrations. 
3s.  6cl 

2.  BOTANY.     By  EDWARD  AVELING,  D.Sc.,  Fel- 

low of   University  College,  London.      With  271  Illustra- 
tions.    4s.  6d. 

3.  PHONETICS.     By  LAURA  SOAMES.     With  a 

Preface  by  DOROTHEA  BEALE.     6s. 

||§r  Part  II.,  containing  the  Phonetic  Reader,  is  pub- 
lished separately.     2s.  6d. 

4.  POLITICAL  ECONOMY.     By  RICHARD  T. 

ELY,    Ph.D.,   Assistant   Professor   of    Political   Economy, 
Johns  Hopkins  University.  [In  the  Press. 

5.  ETHICS.      Adapted  from  the  German  of  G. 
VON  GIZYCKI,  Professor  of  Philosophy  in   the  University 
of  Berlin,  by  ST ANTON  CORT,  Ph.D.     4s.  Gd. 


LONDON:   SWAN  SONNENSCHEIN  &  CO. 

87 


STANDARD    WORKS     ON    PHILOLOGY. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  HISTORY 

OF  LANGUAGE.  By  Professor  H.  PAFL.  Translated 
from  the  German,  and  edited  for  the  use  of  English 
readers  by  Prof.  H.  A.  STRONG,  M.A.,  of  University 
College;  Liverpool.  Second  Edition.  Demy  8vo,  cloth, 
pp.  xlviii:,  512,  10s.  Qd. 

"Prof.  Paul's  famous  work  ought  to  be  familiar  to  every  student  of 
Philology." — Academy. 

COMPARATIVE  GRAMMAR  of  GREEK 

AND  LATIN.  Edited  from  the  French  of  Prof.  VICTOR 
HENRY  by  R.  T.  ELLIOTT,  M.A.,  late  Scholar  of  Worcester 
College,  Oxford.  Crown  8vo,  cloth,  7s.  6d. 

"A  much-needed  work." — Professor  Sayce. 

"No  better  book  has  appeared." — Classical. Review. 


A  NEW  CLASSICAL  DICTIONARY  FOR  USE  IN  SCHOOLS 
AND  COLLEGES. 

DICTIONARY  of  CLASSICAL  MYTHO- 
LOGY, RELIGION,  LITERATURE,  ART,  and  ANTI- 
QUITIES. Revised  and  edited  from  the  German  of  Dr. 
OSKAR  SEYFFERT  by  HENRY  NETTLESHIP,  M.A.,  Corpus 
Professor  of  Latin  in  the  University  of  Oxford,  and  J.  E. 
SANDYS.  Litt.D.,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  St.  John's  College, 
and  Public  Orator  in  the  University  of  Cambridge.  With 
about  500  Illustrations.  Crown  4to.  Double  columns. 


LONDON:   SWAN  SONNENSCHEIN  &  CO. 

88 


001  417902 


